BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 6,7,8,9 TẬP 1 (MAI LAN HƯƠNG - HÀ THANH UYÊN) THEO CHƯƠNG TRÌNH MỚI CỦA BỘ by Dạy Kèm Quy Nhơn Official

BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH CHƯƠNG TRÌNH MỚI

vectorstock.com/7952556

Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú eBook Collection

DẠY KÈM QUY NHƠN EBOOK PHÁT TRIỂN NỘI DUNG

BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 6,7,8,9 TẬP 1 (MAI LAN HƯƠNG - HÀ THANH UYÊN) THEO CHƯƠNG TRÌNH MỚI CỦA BỘ GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO CÓ ĐÁP ÁN WORD VERSION | 2020 EDITION ORDER NOW / CHUYỂN GIAO QUA EMAIL TAILIEUCHUANTHAMKHAO@GMAIL.COM Tài liệu chuẩn tham khảo Phát triển kênh bởi Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú Đơn vị tài trợ / phát hành / chia sẻ học thuật : Nguyen Thanh Tu Group Hỗ trợ trực tuyến Fb www.facebook.com/DayKemQuyNhon Mobi/Zalo 0905779594

UNIT 1 A. PHONETICS

MY NEW SCHOOL giaoa

6. c_m_a_s

_____

7. r_l_r

_____

8. t_ _tb_ _k

_____

9. p_n_i_s_a_p_n_r

_____

10. n_ t _ b_o_

_____

11. p_ _c_l c_ _e

_____

12. di_t_o_ ar_

_____

I. Put the words into the correct column depending on the sound of the letter(s) in bold. mother, wonderful, judo, money, go, come, notebook, hungry, borrow, rubber, homework, video, brother, month, some, rode, club, hope, post, compass, home, lunch, Sunday, love, study, subject, overseas, lower, open, country giaoandethitienganh.info /әʊ/

/ʌ/

___________________________________

II. Write school subiects. geography

science

maths

literature

history

physics

art

biology

English

PE (physical education)

II. Circle the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently. 1. money

sorry

morning

story

2. now

grow

down

town

3. study

student

studio

stupid

4. house

about

hour

country

5. lunch

fun

judo

sun

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR

1.English

2. ___________

3. ___________

4. ___________

5.__________

6. ___________

7. ___________

8. ___________

9. ___________

10. _________

giaoandethitienganh.info

I. Complete the words and match. giaoandethitienganh.info

III. Look at the pictures and name the activities. 1. pen

2. b_c_c_e

_____

3. _u_b_r

_____

c. 1. reading

4. c_l_u_at_r

_____

5. s_ _o_ _b_g

_____

2. ______________

3. ______________

4. ______________

5. reading

6. ______________

7. ______________

8. ______________

IV. Put the words into the right column. giaoandethitienganh.info

VII. Put the verbs into the correct form. Use Present Simple. giaoandethitienganh.info 1. They ______________ (play) football and basketball at school. 2. My father ______________ (read) the newspaper every morning.

music

lessons

English breakfast

judo

football

aerobics sports

paintings

vocabulary

science

dinner

housework

drawings

homework

exercise badminton

the violin

history

the piano subjects

basketball

lunch geography

English lesson

karate

maths

3. We ______________ (have) English, Maths and Science on Monday. 4. She never ______________(do) her homework. 5. I ______________ (go) swimming twice a week. 6. Cars ______________ (be) more expensive than motorbikes. 7. Jane always ______________ (have) breakfast at 6 o’clock.

play

have

study

He usually ______________ (watch) TV after dinner.

9. London ______________ (be) a very big country. 10. I ______________ (be) a student and my parents ______________ (be) teachers. VIII.Write negative sentences. Use short forms. giaoandethitienganh.info →

1. I’m the best in the class.

V. Complete the sentences with the words from the box. giaoandethitienganh.info

_______________________ .

2. Mark does homework in the evening.

→

_______________________ .

3. We play football after school.

→

_______________________ .

4. You run fast.

→

_______________________ .

5. Tim and Lucas work at weekends.

→

_______________________ .

6. I like classical music.

→

_______________________ .

uniforms

boarding

library

classmates

7. These exercises are difficult.

→

_______________________ .

equipment

excited

international

creative

8. She has science on Fridays.

→

_______________________ .

1. Vy and Phong are_______________ about their first day at secondary school. 2. Phong and Duy are in the same class at school. They are _______________. 3. Most schools require children to wear school _______________. 4. My sister is very _______________. She is very good at painting pictures _______________. 5. A _______________ school is a school where students study and live during the school year. 6. AIS is an _______________ school in Vietnam. It provides American education. 7. The school gym has lots of new, modern _______________. 8. In the _______________, you can read books and papers or borrow them to read at home. VI. Fill the gaps with the correct prepositions. 1. The children are excited________ the school trip. 2. Dorothy put ________ her coat and went out. 3. We have English, maths and science ________ Tuesday. 4. What do you usually do ________ break time? 5. ________ the afternoon I play footballthe playground. 6. I go home ________ 4 o’clock every day. 7. Vy is doing her homework ________ the library. 8. Many boarders go home ________ weekends.

IX. Make questions in giaoandethitienganh.info

the

present

simple.

Then

write

short

answers.

1. you/ have/ an art lesson on Monday (no) __________________________________________ ? _______________________ 2. they/ ride/ their bikes to school (yes) __________________________________________ ? _______________________ 3. Jane/ play/ tennis at school (no) __________________________________________ ? _______________________ 4. your parents/ at home now (yes) __________________________________________ ? _______________________ 5. he/ have/ breakfast at 6 o’clock every day (yes) __________________________________________ ? _______________________ 6. you/ a good student (no) __________________________________________ ? _______________________ 7. I/ look/ well (no) __________________________________________ ? _______________________ 8. Ms. Van/ a good teacher (yes) __________________________________________ ? _______________________ X. Use the prompts to write full sentences. Use Present Continuous.

1. I/ do my homework

_______________________________

7. ___________ is your first day at school? - Oh, it’s great.

2. Bella/ talk on the phone

_______________________________

8. ___________ does Phong do judo? - Three times a week.

3. We/ listen to CDs now

_______________________________

9. ___________ students are there in your class? - Forty.

4. The children/ ride to the park

_______________________________

10. ___________ pocket money do you get? - Ten thousand dong.

5. It/ rain very hard now

_______________________________

C. SPEAKING

6. She/ bake a chocolate cake

_______________________________

I. Write questions for the underlined words. giaoandethitienganh.info

7. You/ dance very beautifully

_______________________________

1. Duy:

8. Mark and his friends/ have lunch

_______________________________

Mai:

XI. Complete the sentence with the negative form of the present continuous. Use short forms.

2. Nga:

1. They ________________ (help) the teacher right now.

3. Peter:

2. She ________________ (stay) in a hotel.

Jane:

3. I ________________ (travel) a lot these days.

4. Susan:

4. We ________________ (study) science at present.

Tom:

5. The children ________________ (play) football in the playground.

5. Nam:

6. Bob ________________ (watch) the news on TV.

Hai:

7. My parents ________________ (talk) to the teacher at the moment.

6. Mai:

8. The sun ________________ (shine) today.

Tony:

XII. Complete the sentence with the present simple or present progressive form of the verb in brackets. giaoandethitienganh.info 1. I ________________ (look) for Jack. Do you know where he is?

Sam is having lunch with his new friends. __________________________________________________________ I usually play sports after school. __________________________________________________________ My brother goes to the judo club twice a week. __________________________________________________________ We have Physics on Monday. __________________________________________________________ They are going to the library.

________________________________ ? _______________________________

8. Mark ________________ (not do) homework on Saturdays.

3. Mai/ live (on Tran Hung Dao Street)

9. Wake up! The teacher ________________ (ask) you a question.

________________________________ ? _______________________________

10. We ________________ (not work) at the moment. We’re on a break.

4. Sandra/ talk to on the phone (her mother)

XIII. Complete the sentences with the question words.

________________________________ ? _______________________________ how many

how much

1. ___________ does the first lesson begin? - At seven o’clock. 2. ___________ are you going? - To the library. 3. ___________ do you usually bring to school? - Textbooks, notebooks and pens. 4. ___________ do you go to school? - By bike. 5. ___________ is Mary talking to? - Mrs. Berry, her English teacher. 6. ___________ is your favorite subject? - Maths.

__________________________________________________________

2. you/ do/ at the moment (read a book)

7. Be quiet! The children ________________ (study) in the room.

how often

__________________________________________________________ My new school has four floors.

________________________________ ? _______________________________

6. Bob ________________ (watch) the news on TV every morning.

who

__________________________________________________________ Phong and Nam are playing football at the moment.

1. you/ usually/ do/ in the evening (do my homework)

5. Just a minute, I can’t hear you. I ________________ (listen) to the radio.

how

On Friday I have English, maths, geography and history.

II. Ask and answer questions, using the given words.

4. Mark often ________________ (play) tennis at the weekend.

where

Janet: Tuan:

3. They ________________ (do) maths homework now.

when

7. Mary: 8. Quang:

2. You ________________ (know) a lot about computers.

what

Huan:

__________________________________________________________

5. you/ like (maths and physics) ________________________________ ? _______________________________ 6. the children/ play football/ now (in the park) ________________________________ ? _______________________________ 7. Vy/ often/ do her homework (at 8p.m) ________________________________ ? _______________________________ III. Put the conversation in the correct order (1 -10).

_____

My form teacher is MrsHien. She teaches me Physics.

4. A good classmate plays with you at break time.

_____

No. She’s great.

5. A good classmate bullies you sometimes.

_____

Very well, thank you. How was your first day at school, Mai?

E. WRITING

_____

Oh, good. Well, it’s time for me to leave. Bye.

I. Put the words in order to make a sentence.

_____

Hello, Huan. Fine, thanks! And you?

1. secondary/ first/ your/ at/ school/ is/ how/ week?

_____

I am sure that you’ll make friends soon. Tell me about your form teacher.

__1__

Hi, Mai. How are you?

_____

Bye, Huan. See you soon.

_____

Is she strict?

_____

Oh, wonderful! I met many new people. Hope I could make them friends soon.

_______________________________________________________ 3. art/ creative/ are/ drawings/ students/ the/ some/ doing/ in/ club

_______________________________________________________

I. Fill in each gap with a word from the box. grades

_______________________________________________________ 4. school/ at/ English/ we/ have/ classes/ don’t/ today

D. READING

big

_______________________________________________________ 2. lessons/ many/ have/ on/ how/ you/ do/ Friday?

elementary

scared

school

teachers

Second

still

Middle school often includes sixth, seventh, eighth and ninth (1) ____________. It’s calledmiddle school because it’s in the middle of your (2) ____________ years. Elementary school is behind you. High school (3) ____________ awaits you. For a kid, going to middle school is often a (4) ____________ change: First, it usually means moving to a new building, which takes some time to adjust to. (5) ____________, it may mean taking a different bus, with different students. Third, the friends you made in (6) ____________ school may end up going to different middle schools. And other things that probably will be different are the (7) ____________ and the work. All of that can make you feel a bit (8) ____________ on the first day of school. II. Read the chart about the qualities of a good classmate and decide whether thestatements are true (T) or false (F).

5. homework/ you/ doing/ maths/ are/ your? _______________________________________________________ 6. children/ first/ on/ most/ school/ excited/ are/ day/ of/ the _______________________________________________________ II. Complete the second sentence so that it has the same meaning as the first. 1. What is your favorite subject? → What subject_____________________________________________ 2. There are 35 students in my class. → My class ________________________________________________ 3. Mai live near her school. → Mai’s house isn’t _________________________________________ 4. Mary plays the piano very well. → Mary is good ____________________________________________ 5. Do you like physics? → Are you interested ________________________________________ 6. The school has a computer room and a library. → There __________________________________________________

TEST FOR UNIT1 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. uniform

1. A good classmate always tries his/ her best to help and support you. 2. A good classmate will never says “thank you” if you help him/ her. 3. A good classmate will ask you about your health if he/ she sees you after a long time.

b. computer

c. student

d. judo

2. a. subject

b. sure

c. surround

d. see

3. a. excited

b. nice

c. library

d. living

4. a. school

b. teacher

c. cheap

d. watching

5. a. teach

b. speak

c. break

d. read

II. Look at the picture and fill in the gap with a suitable word.

1. Children often___________________ (use) a computer for school work. 1. You can use a _______________ to look up a new

word.

2. ___________________ (Jane/ watch) TV now? 3. Mark___________________ (not go) to school on Friday afternoon.

2. You can use a _______________ to do calculations.

4. Look! The cat___________________ (eat) your breakfast. 5. ___________________(you/ study) IT at school?

3. You can use a _______________ to write notes.

6. I___________________ (not listen) to music, I ___________________ (play) a computer gameat the moment.

4. You can use a _______________ to carry books, pens, etc. to school.

7. Put on a raincoat. It_____________ (rain). It_______________ (rain) a lot in summer. 8. Where are the children? ~ They ___________________ (read) books in the library.

5. You can use a _______________ to remove pencil marks from paper.

V. Find and correct the mistakes.

6. You can use a _______________ to carry pencils, pens, rulers, rubbers, etc.

2. I am often playing football on Saturdays.

_________________

3. She iswanting to buy a new computer.

_________________

4. My children doesn’t like reading.

_________________

1. My father works at the moment.

7. You can use a _______________ to draw

circles.

isreading

5. We have breakfast now.

_________________

6. The girls are skip in the playground.

_________________

8. You can use a _______________ to draw straight lines.

7. Ann gets up at 6 o’clock and is having breakfast every day.

_________________

III. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

8. I’m sorry I don’t have time. I cook dinner.

_________________

1. How is your first week _________ school?

VI. Match the questions with the answers.

a. on

b. at

c. for

d. to

2. My brother often helps me_________ my homework. a. at

b. about

c. for

d. with

3. Megan is_________ badminton with her friends in the schoolyard. a. having

b. studying

c. playing

d. doing

c. covered

d. grounded

4. The villa is_________by pine trees. a. surrounded

b. built

5. We do_________ in the gym every afternoon. a. table tennis

b. football

c. judo

d. homework

6. _________ does Jane have science?~ On Monday and Friday. a. Where

b. What

c. When

d. What time

7. Nowadays, students often use_________ in mathematics lessons. a. rubbers

b. calculators c. pencils

d. dictionaries

8. My cousin goes to a_________ school, so she only comes home at weekends. a. boarding

b. private

c. public

d. international

9. You look really_________ in your new uniform! a. excited

b. smart

c. healthy

d. interesting

10. _________ your parents give you pocket money? a. Is

b. Are

c. Do

IV. Complete the sentence with the correct form of the verb.

d. Does

_____ 1. Who are you waiting for?

a.No, they are sleeping.

_____ 2. What do you do at break time?

b.By bicycle.

_____ 3. Where are you going?

c.To buy some bread.

_____ 4. Do you play sports after school?

d.My friends.

_____ 5. Are they watching television?

e.Five days a week.

_____ 6. Why is he going out?

f. Home.

_____ 7. How often do you go to school?

g.Yes, I do.

_____ 8. How do you go to school?

h.I go out and play in the playground.

VII. Choose the word which best fits each gap. My dream school is a quiet school (1) ___________ wehave just two or three hours a day, in the morning. Then, inthe afternoon, we can do many (2) ___________ like singing,dancing, playing soccer, basketball, rugby. We won’t havetests and mark either. The teachers will not (3) ___________ homework, so we can do whatever we want after school. In my dream school, we can also choose the (4) ___________ we want: for example, you’re not going to learn mathematics or physics if you hate (5)___________. So it’s a free school where you can learn with calm and serenity and you can make (6) ___________ friends during afternoon activities! 1.

a. what

b. where

c. when

d. how

a. subjects

b. actions

c. activities

d. acts

a. give

b. take

d. do

d. get

a. class

b. classrooms

c. classmates

d. classes

a. it

b. them

c. her

d. him

a. much

b. few

c. any

d. lots of

VIII. Read and answer questions.

UNIT 2

MY HOME

Hi, I’m Linda. I’m in the sixth grade. Today is my first day at secondary school. In the morning I put on my new uniform and get my new bag. My best friend and I walk to school together. We are both very nervous and excited. When we get school, we are shown into our classroom with our new teacher. It is quite scary because I don’t know most of the children. Then we go to our first lesson. We have lots of different subjects and the lessons are really fun. My favourite subjects are art and English.

A. PHONETICS I. Put the words into the correct column depending on how the ending is pronounced.

I really like my new school, all my teacher are lovely, the lessons are reallyinteresting and I enjoy my first day. I can’t wait to go back tomorrow! 1. What grade is Linda in? ______________________________________________________________________

rooms

houses

dogs

lamps

toilets

beds

tables

apartments

books

chairs

televisions

boxes

pictures

baths

dishes

fridges

cookers

chopsticks

lights

vases

windows

photos

parents

clothes

wishes

sandwiches

attics

villas

plants

walls

tablecloths shelves

classes

tourists

2. Who does she go to school with?

/z/

______________________________________________________________________

/s/

/iz/

_______________________ _______________________ _______________________

3. How does they go to school?

_______________________ _______________________ _______________________

______________________________________________________________________

_______________________ _______________________ _______________________

4. Why does Linda feel scary?

_______________________ _______________________ _______________________

______________________________________________________________________

_______________________ _______________________ _______________________

5. What are her favourite subjects? ______________________________________________________________________ 6. Does she enjoy her first day at school? ______________________________________________________________________ IX. Make sentences, using the words and phrases given. 1. This/the first week/my new school ______________________________________________________________________ 2. My new school/ big/ and it/ a large library ______________________________________________________________________ 3. I/ usually/ my homework/ the school library

II. Circle the word that has the ending pronounced differently. 1. boys

lessons

cats

pictures

2. places

messages

houses

clothes

3. sinks

bags

laptops

students

4. fridges

kisses

watches

wardrobes

5. plates

posters

trees

songs

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Write the types of house in the spaces.

______________________________________________________________________ 4. I/ lots of friends/ and they/ all nice/ me ______________________________________________________________________

a large house in the countryside

_________________

a set of rooms for living in, usually on one floor of a building

_________________

a large and luxurious house with a

_________________

5. We/ many subjects/ and my favorite subject/ science ______________________________________________________________________ 6. In the afternoon/ I/ sports/ the playground ______________________________________________________________________ 7. My friends and I/ basketball/ at the moment ______________________________________________________________________

large yard and garden IV. Complete the sentence with the correct preposition in, on or at. 1. I’ve got a computer _________ my bedroom. a terraced house in a city or town

_________________

2. Do you live _________ a house or an apartment? 3. He is sitting _________ a sofa _________ the corner of the sitting room. 4. There is such a mess _________ the kitchen!

a house built on piles above the ground or water

_________________

5. The dog is sleeping _________ the carpet. 6. We live _________ the 3rd floor _________ 53 Pine Street _________ London.

II. Parts of the house. Unscramble the letters, then complete the passage.

7. Jane is waiting for a bus _________ the bus stop.

1. ergnad

___________

5.nviligomor

___________

8. Are there any pictures _________ the walls _________ the living room?

2. amrhoobt

___________

6.gnidinrmoo

___________

9. We are staying _________ the Roosevelt Hotel _________ New York City.

3. moordeb

___________

7. citta

___________

10. My camera is _________ a box _________ a shelf _________ the bedroom closet.

4. hcnekit

___________

8.ragega

___________

V. Look at the picture. Complete the sentences with the correct prepositions from the box.

I like my big house. It has got two ______________ upstairs, my parents’ one and mine. Upstairs also there is a ______________ where I wash and brush my teeth. Downstairs there is a ______________ big where my mother cooks and prepares meals, a ______________ to eat altogether and a ______________ where we watch TV or sit and relax. Outdoors my parents park their cars in the ______________, and we have a beautiful ______________ with a lot of flowers and trees. My house also has an ______________ where we store lots of old things.

chest of drawers

above

under

in (3)

on (3)

next to (2)

between

behind

1. The trees are ____________ the house. 2. The dining room is ____________ the living room and the kitchen. 3. The kitchen sink is ____________ the window.

III. Write the name of each item under the correct picture. bath

near

dishwasher

wardrobe

sofa

cooker

microwave

air conditioner

sink

fridge

4. The bath bathroom.

____________

the

5. The flower vase is ____________ the chest of drawers. 6. The fridge is ____________ the cooker. 7. The mirror is ____________ the bathroom sink. 8. The television is ____________ the cupboard ____________ the sofa. 1. _____________

2. ______________

3. ______________

4. ______________

9. The microwave is ____________ the counter ____________ the kitchen. 10. The washing machine is ____________ the dryer ____________ the basement. VI. Underline the correct preposition. 1. Don’t sit in/ on/ under this stool. It’s broken. 2. My grandma is sitting in/ on/at the armchair on/ next/ beside the fireplace.

5. _____________

6. ______________

7. ______________

8. _____________

3. Simon likes to stayin/ on/ at bed all Sunday morning. 4. We live on/ in/ at an apartment on/at/ into a very busy road. 5. I put my book in/ on/ over the table in/ at/ on the dining room. 6. There is a clock under/ next to/ above the teacher’s desk. 7. He always hides the key on/at/under the doormat. 8. Mary is sitting under/ between/ behind her parents. They are watching TV.

9. _____________

10. _____________

9. On a bus, passengers sit in front of/ behind/ between the driver. UNIT 2: MY HOME 17

1. a bed/ the bedroom

10. You can see children’s books in/ on/ at the bookshelf to/ at/ in the comer.

________________________________________

2. two pillows/ the bed

________________________________________

VII. Complete the sentences with There is or There are.

3. a window/ the picture and the shelf

________________________________________

1. ______________ 25 students in the class.

4. books/ the shelf

________________________________________

2. ______________ a big wardrobe in my sister’s room.

5. clothes/ the wardrobe

________________________________________

______________ a computer and a TV in my room.

6. a clock/ the wall

________________________________________

______________ good programs on television.

7. a toy box/ the bed

________________________________________

5. ______________ some furniture in my bedroom.

8. toys/ the floor

________________________________________

9. a bedside table/ the bed

________________________________________

7_ ______________ a lot of water in the bottle.

10. a vase of flowers/the bedside table

________________________________________

8. ______________ no paper in the printer.

XI. Put the verbs into the correct tenses.

______________ four eggs in the fridge.

VIII. Complete the questions with Isthere or Are there. Then write short answers.

1. It _________________ (snow) quite hard – perhaps we shouldn’t go out tonight.

1. ______________ many shops in your town? Yes, ______________.

2. My mother _________________ (not like) buying food in supermarkets.

2. ______________ a post office near here? No, ______________.

3. Sorry, I’m busy at the moment. I _________________ (do) my homework.

3. ______________ a table and chairs in the kitchen? Yes, ______________.

4. Sue _________________ (not listen) to music in her room now. She’s outside.

4. ______________ any trees in your garden? No, ______________.

5. They _________________ (not eat) meat on Fridays.

5. ______________ a book under the table? Yes, ______________.

6. The teacher _________________ (often/ give) us a lot of homework.

6. ______________ any girls in the class? Yes, ______________.

7. How often _________________ (you/ go) to the gym to work out?

7. ______________ any coffee in the cup? No, ______________.

8. Listen! What language _________________ (they/ speak)?

8. ______________ a lot of children in the yard? No, ______________. .

9. We usually _________________ _________________ (go) by car.

(take) a bus to school, but this week

IX. Use the words to write positive (+) and negative (-) sentences and questions (?) with there is / there are.

10. Helen and Toro _________________(not wait) for the bus at the moment.

1. a bath in the bathroom (?)

Is there a bath in the bathroom?

C. SPEAKING

2. some shops near our new house (+)

_____________________________

I. Write the questions to complete the conversation.

3. a school in the neighbourhood (?)

_____________________________

Hanh: (1) ___________________________________ , Paul?

4. a television in my bedroom (-)

_____________________________

Paul: I live in Brookline, Massachusetts.

5. any cupboards in the dining room (?)

_____________________________

Hanh: (2) ___________________________________ ?

6. a swimming pool behind the house (+)

_____________________________

Paul: No, I don’t live in a house. I live in an apartment.

7. any flowers in the garden (-)

_____________________________

Hanh: (3) ___________________________________ ?

8. a lot of posters on the wall (+)

_____________________________

Paul: No, it isn’t. My apartment is small but very comfortable.

X. Look of the picture and write positive or negative sentences. Use There is/ There isn’t/ There are/ There aren’t and the appropriate prepositions.

Hanh: (4) ___________________________________ ? Paul: There are two bedrooms. Hanh: (5) ___________________________________ ? Paul: Yes, there are two bathrooms. Hanh: (6) ___________________________________ ? Paul: No, there isn’t a dining room. The kitchen is quite large so we eat meals in the kitchen. Hanh: (7) ___________________________________ ? Paul: My favourite room is my bedroom.

UNIT 2: MY HOME 19

Hanh: (8) ___________________________________ ?

II. Read the passage and then decide if the statements are true (T) or false (F).

Paul: There is a bed, a wardrobe, a table, a chair and a bookcase in my room.

I live in a house near the sea. It’s an old house, about 100 years old, and it’s very small. There are two bedrooms upstairs but no bathroom. The bathroom is downstairs next to the kitchen and there’s a living room where there’s a lovely old fireplace. There’s a garden in front of the house. The garden goes down to the beach and in spring and summer there are flowers everywhere. I live with my parents, and we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with me. I love my house for many reasons: the garden, the flowers in summer, the fire in winter, but the best thing is the view from my bedroom window.

II. Put the conversation in the correct order (1 -10). _______

Do you spend any time there?

_______

It’s a bit small and it isn’t very sunny.

_______

What’s the study like? Is it quiet?

_______

It’s quite nice. It’s got very big windows and some really comfortable armchairs.

_______

No, I don’t. I prefer working in the study.

_______

What’s your balcony like?

Do you like studying in your bedroom, Emma?

_______

No, I don’t. I prefer sitting in the living room.

_______

What’s that like?

_______

Yes, it is. It’s very quiet and it’s got a balcony.

1. The author lives in the seaside. 2. There is no bathroom in her house. 3. The house has got two floors and four rooms. 4. There are flowers in the garden in front of the house. 5. Her family rarely has visitors. 6. The author likes her bedroom’s window view best.

III. Tell about your house or apartment.

E. WRITING

Teacher: Do you live in a house or an apartment? You:

I. Complete the second sentence so that it means the same as the first.

(1) ____________________________________________

1. My house has got five rooms.

Teacher: Where is your house/ apartment? You:

→ There ____________________________________________________________________

(2) ____________________________________________

2. The bus station isn’t far from the new shopping center.

Teacher: Is it big or small? You:

→ The bus station is ___________________________________________________________

(3) ____________________________________________

3. There isn’t a telephone in the living room.

Teacher: How many rooms are there in your house/ apartment? You:

→ We ______________________________________________________________________

(4) ____________________________________________

4. The house is behind the trees.

Teacher: What colour is your bedroom? You:

→ There are trees _____________________________________________________________

(5) ____________________________________________

5. There are only a few biscuits in the packet.

Teacher: What is there in your bedroom? You:

→ There aren’t _______________________________________________________________

(6) ____________________________________________

6. There are two bathrooms in that house.

D. READING

→ That house ________________________________________________________________

I. Fill in each gap with a word from the box.

7. I like the kitchen most.

stand

music

curtain

bookshelf

rug

favourite

there

My (1) ______________ room is our living room. It is rather big and warm. There is a big window with lots of pot plants and green and yellow (2) ______________. In our living room, (3)______________ is a green sofa and two green armchairs. There is a big yellow (4) ______________ on the floor. A modern floor light (5) ______________ in the right corner of the room. (6 ) ______________ to the sofa there is a small coffee table with a vase of flowers. By the wall there is a big table with six brown chairs. We have a television and a (7) ______________ with a lot of books and pictures. We also have a CD player on the shelf. I often watch TV, listen to (8) ______________ or read books there. I really like my living room. UNIT 2: MY HOME 21

→ My favourite_______________________________________________________________ 8. Is there a garden in front of the house? → Does the house ____________________________________________________________ II. Describe your house or apartment. Answer these questions, then write a text. 1. Do you live in a house or an apartment? 2. Where is it? (a city, a town, a country or a village) 3. Who do you live with? 4. How many rooms are there in your house/ apartment? 5. What are they?

6. Is there a garden? 7. Are the neighbours nice/ friendly/ noisy...? 8. Do you like your house/ apartment? I live in a/ an __________________________________________________________________

Types of building

Rooms

Furniture

Equipment

________________

____________________________________________________________________

________________

____________________________________________________________________

________________

IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

____________________________________________________________________

1. Don’t stand ________ the TV I’m trying to watch this programme. a.behind

b. next to

c. under

d. in front of

2. You should never stand ________ a tree when it is raining, a.at

TEST FOR UNIT 2 1 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. light

b. fridge

c. sink

d. kitchen

2. a. lamps

b. windows

c. desks

d. plants

3. a. look

b. cook

c. book

d. room

4. a. poster

b. chopstick

c. sofa

d. wardrobe

5. a. honey

b. house

c. hour

d. hotel

II. Which is the odd one out? 1. a. armchair

b. coach

c. sofa

d. cupboard

2. a. bedroom

b. garden

c. kitchen

d. living room

3. a. wardrobe

b. cooker

c. dishwasher

d. fridge

4. a. apartment

b. house

c. attic

d. villa

5. a. bath

b. shower

c. mirror

d. bed

dishwasher apartment

lamp town

house

d. on

а. bathroom

b. dinning room

c. kitchen

d. bedroom

4. Please turn the ________ on. It’s so hot in here. a.fan

b. light

c. television

d. faucet

5. The Tay and Nung people mostly live in ________ made of wood and bamboo. a. apartments

b. stilt houses

c. town houses

d. villas

6. In our dining room, ________ four chairs and a table. We have breakfast there every morning. a. there is

b. there are

c. there isn’t

d. there aren’t

7. ________ any children in the playground right now. a. There is

b. There are

c. There aren’t

d. There isn’t

a. beautiful

b. comfortable

c. wonderful

d. favourite

9. My room is so ________! Dirty clothes, toys, books are all over the floor! sofa

dining room stilt house bed bedroom

c. between

8. I like my bedroom best. It’s my ________ room.

III. Put the words into the correct groups. bathroom

b. under

3. My mother is in the ________ baking a cake for my birthday.

air-conditioner

wardrobe

shelf

villa kitchen

microwave

chest of drawers

country house

living room fridge

a. messy

b. crazy

c. tidy

d. cozy

10. ‘Where do you live?’‘________’ a. On the floor.

b. In the kitchen.

c. In a town house.

d. Next to the bookshelf.

V. Put the verbs into the correct tense form. 1. I don’t like the garden in winter time. There __________________ (be) any flowers. 2. There __________________ (be) some new furniture in the living room. 3. __________________ (you/ get) up early in the morning? 4. The students __________________ (not prepare) for the science exam at the moment. 5. __________________ (there/ be) a student called Andrea in this class? б. Listen! Someone _________________ (play) the guitar. It _________________ (sound) UNIT 2: MY HOME 23

great.

4. a. between

b. next to

c. beside

d. in front of

7. You __________________ (look) sad. What’s the matter?

5. a. there is

b. there isn’t

c. there aren’t

d. there are

8. What __________________ (you/ look) for? – My pen.

6. a. mirror

b. towel

c. chair

d. picture

9. Jack __________________ (not spend) much time on reading.

7. a. there

b. it

c. they

d. that

10. Susan often _____________ (drive) to the beach when the weather ______________ (be) nice.

8. a. there are

b. there aren’t

c. there is

d. there isn’t

IX. Read the text carefully, then answer the questions.

VI. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets.

THIS IS MY HOUSE!

1. There are only 20 _______________ in my class. (study)

Hello! My name is Peter and this is my house.

2. Some _______________students do drawings and paintings in the art club. (create) 3. The class is _______________; students do not stop talking to each other. (noise) 4. Your room is a _______________; please pick up your toys. (messy) 5. Every day, students learn English with English _______________teacher. (speak) 6. In the afternoon, they can join many _______________clubs. (interest) 7. My house is warm and _______________. (comfort)

My house is quite big. It has got two floors – a ground floor and a first floor. It has also got an attic and a basement. On the ground floor, there is a kitchen, a living room, a big dining room and a bathroom. On the first floor, there are three bedrooms, one bathroom and a big corridor. My bedroom is between my parents’ bedroom and the bathroom. My sister’s bedroom is in front of mine. I love my bedroom, but I also like the attic. In the attic I keep some of my books and my old toys. I like to spend my time there because it is very spacious and there is a big sofa there where I sometimes take a nap.

8. Kids are not allowed to use _______________in math class. (calculate) 9. What is your _______________room, Tony? (favour)

At the back of the house, there is a garage where my parents park the family car, and a lovely garden with many green spaces, flowers, two swings and a small swimming pool.

10. I’m so _______________about my first day at school. (excite) VII. Match the sentences.

I love my house! It’s very comfortable and cozy.

____ 1.Where do you live?

a.Five.

____ 2. Who do you live with?

b.Between the study and the stairs.

____ 3. How many rooms are there?

c.In a town.

____ 4.What’s in the living room?

d.Yes. There’s one next to the window.

____ 5. Where is your room?

e.My bedroom.

____ 6. Is there a television in your room?

f.A sofa set, a television and a lamp.

____ 7. What is your favourite room?

g.My parents and sister.

____ 8.Are there any pictures in the kitchen?

h.Yes. There’s a big one on the wall opposite my bed.

VIII. Look at a famous painting by Van Gogh of his bedroom at Arles. Then choose the word which best fits each gap. It is a small room. There is some (1)_________ in the room. There is a bed on the right of the picture. It is a bed for one person. (2) _________ the bed there are some pictures on the wall. Next to the door, on the left, there is a (3) _________. There is another chair(4) _________ the table and the bed. The table and chair are below the window. On the table (5) _________ some objects - a jug, a glass and a bowl. Next to the door on the right there is a (6) _________ on a peg. Behind the bed there are some more things on the wall but (7) _________ aren’t easy to see. Of course, (8) _________ any modern things in the room and it isn’t very comfortable. 1. a. furniture

b. picture

c. people

d. tool

2. a. On

b. Under

c. Above

d. Behind

3. a. bed

b. chair

c. window

d. table UNIT 2: MY HOME 25

- spacious (adj): rộngrãi

- cozy (adj): ấmcúng

1. Is Peter’s house big or small? _________________________________________________________________________ 2. How many rooms are there on the ground floor? What are they? _________________________________________________________________________ 3. Where is Peter’s bedroom? _________________________________________________________________________ 4. Why does Peter like to be in the attic? _________________________________________________________________________ 5. Where is the garage? _________________________________________________________________________ 6. Is the swimming pool in the garden? _________________________________________________________________________ 7. Does Peter like his room? _________________________________________________________________________ X. Write an email to your friend and tell him/ her about your house and your favourite room.

UNIT 3

MY FRIENDS

A. PHONETICS I. Write porb to complete the word. Then read the word aloud.

1. __iscuit

2. __icture

3. __lackboard

4. __ony

5. __anana

6. __iano

7. __ath

8. __icnic

9. __ook

10. __arty

11. __ike

12. __ark

II. Write the words in part I in the correct column. /b/ _________________________________________________________________________ /p/ _________________________________________________________________________

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Fill in each blank to find names of parts of the body.

UNIT 2: MY HOME 27

→ _____________________

4. They have dark skin.

n_s_

_y_

e_r

m_ _th

h_ _r

5. Her dog has a short tall.

→ _____________________

6. My sister has long legs.

→ _____________________

V. Use am, is, are, have or has to complete the sentences. 1. I _______ tail and thin. I _______ brown eyes and dark hair. I _______ serious and friendly.

t_ _t_

_ac_

h_ _d

_r_

_h_e_s

2. My father_______ a very hard-working person. He _______ tail and rather fat. He_______ a round face and a cheerful smile. He _______ a moustache. His hair _______ short and curly. 3. My sister _______ beautiful She _______ slim and tall. She _______ rosy cheeks and blue _______ eyes. She _______ blonde wavy hair. Her nose _______ straight and her teeth white and even. She _______ very funny and intelligent.

_a_d

f_n_e

_lb_w

_e_

f_ _ t

4. My twin brothers _______ quite short. They _______ short brown hair. Their eyes _______ dark and they _______ glasses. My brothers _______ very active and cheerful. VI. Match the adjectives on the left with their opposites on the right. ____ 1.generous

a.rude

____ 2.hard-working

b.interesting

II. Complete the sentences with the words in part I.

____ 3.outgoing

c.dishonest

1. You use your _____________ to see.

____ 4.intelligent

d.unfriendly

2. You use your _____________ to hear.

____ 5.serious

e.mean

3. You use your _____________ totalk, smile and eat.

____ 6.polite

f. lazy

4. You have one _____________ inthe middleof your face. You use it to smell.

____ 7.friendly

g.impatient

5. Your hair, eyes, nose, mouth and ears are on your _____________.

____ 8.kind

h.stupid

6. You have two _____________. You use them to walk.

____ 9.careful

i.cruel

7. You have two _____________. They have your hands at the end.

____ 10.honest

j. careless

8. You have five _____________ on each hand and five _____________ on each foot.

____ 11.patient

k.shy

9. If your _____________ hurt, you should go to dentist.

____ 12.boring

l.funny

10. Put a scarf around your _____________ when it’s cold.

VII. Complete the sentences with the correct adjectives from the box.

_o_s

_n_e

b_c_

n_ _k

s_o_l_ _rs

III. Rewrite the sentences, use with verb have or has. Ex: My hair is short and curly.

→I have short curly hair .

sporty

confident

curious

cheerful

generous

shy

reliable

talkative

sensitive

outgoing

1. His face is round.

→ _____________________

2. My teeth are small and even.

→ _____________________

1. Don’t say unkind things to her – she’s very _____________.

3. Her nose is straight.

→ _____________________

2. Tom is very _____________.He gives money to charity every month.

4. Their eyes are dark brown.

→ _____________________

3. William never stops talking in class. He’s very _____________.

5. Our hair is curly and black.

→ _____________________

4. The new girl in my class is so _____________. She’s afraid to talk in front of us.

6. Julia’s mouth is very wide.

→ _____________________

5. You can trust Miller with a secret. He’s a _____________.man.

IV. Rewrite the sentences, use with verb be (am, is are).

6. Harry loves partying, meeting people and talking to them. He’s so _____________.

→Her eves are blue.

7. Ann is such a _____________ girl. She is always laughing and smiling.

1. Isabel has rosy cheeks.

→ _____________________

8. Jim is always sure of his own abilities. He’s so _____________.

2. I have long blonde hair.

→ _____________________

3. He has a thin face.

→ _____________________

9. My best friend Matt is really _____________. He plays badminton, basketball and football very well.

Ex: She has blue eyes.

UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS 29

10. My sister is very _____________. She wants to know everything!

10. Which hotel _________________(your family/ stay) at now?

VIII. Read and circle the right adjectives.

XI. Circle the correct form of the verb to complete each sentence.

1. Donata is very friendly/ rude. She has a lot of friends.

1. The train arrives/ is arriving at 4 o’clock in the afternoon.

2. Mona is very reliable/ creative. She always has new ideas.

2. My mother comes/ is coming to spend the weekend with us.

3. Ann is a bit interesting/ boring. She never has anything interesting to say.

3. When do you take/ are you taking your holiday this summer?

4. Jully is very funny/ shy. She likes telling jokes.

4. What time does the film start/ is the film starting?

5. Anna is very serious/sensitive. She cries quickly whenever she watches a romance movie.

5. Most shops in Spain don’t open/ aren’t opening until 10.

6. Lucy is very outgoing/ generous. She likes meeting and talking to people.

6. I finish/ am finishing work early today as I have an appointment at the dentist

7. Joana is very hard-working/ lazy. She never helps with the housework.

7. The school finishes/ is finishing at three thirty in the afternoon.

8. Jane is very nervous/ impatient. She becomes annoyed if she has to wait for something or someone.

8. I can’t see you tonight, Jane. I go/ am going to the theater with Mike.

9. Mathew is very active/ helpful. He likes to play sport or do physical things.

10. We fly/ are flying to Spain on a school trip next month.

10. Helen is a quiet/ curious person. She isn’t very talkative.

XII. Fill in each blank with a correct preposition.

9. Quickly children! Class starts/ is starting in five minutes.

1. ________ Saturday, I help my parents ________ the field. 2. They are working ________ a milk farm tomorrow. IX. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in the box. Use the Present continuous tense. leave

not visit

drive

meet

come

give

not use

have

take

3. The camp is for kids aged ________ ten and fifteen. 4. Would you like to go to the movies with me ________ Sunday evening? 5. The children are spending a week ________ a summer camp. 6. Nikita likes to read books ________ English.

1. I _________________ to New York tomorrow morning.

7. He never takes part ________ team sports.

2. _________ you _________ your homework after dinner?

8. Joana is ________ the phone, chatting ________ her friend.

3. All my friends _________________ to my party next week.

C. SPEAKING

4. I _________________ the car tonight. You can borrow it.

I. Choose the best answers to complete the sentences.

5. The company _________________ everyone a present for New Year.

1. ________ hold my books for me? ~ No problem.

6. Sally _________________ John at seven o’clock this evening.

a. Do you

7. The train _________________ in ten minutes.

b. Should you

c. Can you

d. May you

2. ________ to come to the cinema tonight? ~ Oh, I’d love to.

8. _________ Dave’s father _________ him to the zoo at the weekend?

a. Can you

9. We_________________ our grandparents next Sunday.

b.Could you please

c. Do you like

d. Would you like

3. ________ help me with my homework, please? ~ Certainly.

10. They _________________ a dinner party on Friday and you’re invited.

a. Do you

X. Put the verbs in brackets into the present continuous. 1. My mother _________________(bake) a cake in the kitchen at the moment. 2. Where _________________(you/ meet) Tim next week? 3. We _________________ (not cook) dinner this evening because we’re eating out. 4. _________________(Tom/ drive) to work right now?

b.Could you

c.Are you

d. May you

4. Lorry, ________ please pass me the newspaper? ~ Sure. Here you are. a. can you

b.are you

c.do you

d. should you

5. ________ to go out for dinner? - I’d like to, but I can’t. a. Would you

b. Can you

c. Would you like d. Do you like

6. Marco, ________ erase the blackboard for me? - Yes, of course, teacher.

5. I’m sorry. I don’t have time. I _________________ (mow) the lawn. 6. David _________________(not fly) to Chicago tomorrow. 7. _________________ (they/ give) a party next Sunday? 8. The students _________________(not study) at the moment. It’s break time. 9. The band _________________ (visit) Denmark next May. UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS 31

a. would you please

b. would please you

c. would you mind

d would you like

7. ________ closing that window? - Not at all. a. Would you like

b. Could you please

c. Would you mind

A. Tick ( ) True or False.

d. Do you want

True

8. ________ lend me your book please? ~ No. I’m sorry I need it. a. May I

b. Can I

c. Will you

d. May you

II. Complete the conversation, using the sentences in the box.

False

1. Quan and Phong are studying in the same class.

2. Phong is tall and not fat.

3. Phong’s hair is straight and black.

4. Phong likes playing sport.

Why do you like her?

What does she took like?

What’s her name?

Can you introduce me to her?

5. Quan likes to play the guitar.

Do you have a best friend?

Is she beautiful?

6. Phong likes Science most.

When and where did you meet her?

B. Choose the correct answers.

Tom: (1)____________________________________________________________________ Ann: Of course! Tom: (2)____________________________________________________________________ Ann: Kate, Kate Johnson. Tom: (3)____________________________________________________________________

1. How old is Phong? a. 9

b. 10

c. 11

d. 12

2. What does Phong look like? a. He is tall and thin.

b.He is tall and fat.

c. He is funny and outgoing.

d.He likes to play the guitar.

Ann: She’s tall and slim. She has long blond hair and blue eyes. Tom: (4)____________________________________________________________________ Ann: Yes, she is. Tom: (5)____________________________________________________________________ Ann: I met her on my first day at primary school. We were in the same class. Tom: (6)____________________________________________________________________ Ann: Because she’s nice and very friendly...and she has a great sense of humour. She always makes me laugh. Tom: (7)____________________________________________________________________ Ann: Of course!

D. READING

music

good

subject

a. long black hair and brown eyes

b.curly black hair and brown eyes

c. black eyes and short hair

d. brown eyes and straight black hair

4. What is he like? a. He is tall and thin

b.He likes sports.

c. He is funny and outgoing.

d. His hair is short and curly.

5. What instrument does Phong play? a. football and basketball

b.the guitar

c. computer games

d. Maths and Science

6. What subject is Phong very good at?

I. Fill in each gap with a word from the box. curly

3. Phong has ________.

outgoing

well

laugh

together

My name’s Quan. One of my best friends is Phong. He is my classmate and we always go to school (1) ____________. Phong is twelve. He’s tall and rather thin. He has short (2) ____________ black hair and brown eyes. Phong is funny and (3) ____________. I like being with him because he always makes me (4)___________. He is also very sporty and plays football and basketball very (5) ____________. We often play basketball and football at the weekend. He loves music and he plays the guitar. I don’t play any instruments but I love (6) ____________ too. Phong doesn’t like computer games. He likes playing with his friends in the street. Phong is a very good student. His favourite (7) _________ is Maths. He’s not (8) __________ at Science but he studies hard to pass it.

a. Maths

b. Science

c. Maths and Science

d. Computer

E. WRITING I. Order the words to make sentences. 1. going/ on/ we/ to/ the shopping mall/ Saturday/ are. _________________________________________________________________________ 2. me/ please/ can/ dictionary/ lend/ you/ a? _________________________________________________________________________ 3. like/ join/ for/ would/ us/ dinner/ you/ tonight/ to? _________________________________________________________________________ 4. at/ I/ spending/ week/ a/ camp/ am/ a/ summer. _________________________________________________________________________

II. Read the passage again and do the following tasks. UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS 33

3. My best friend ______ a round face and big eyes.

5. mother/ black/ hair/ straight/ has/ my/ long. _________________________________________________________________________

a. have

b. has

c.is

d. gets

4. My brother is really ______. He always does his homework.

6. friendly/ because/ don’t/ I/ Joana/ she/ like/ isn’t. _________________________________________________________________________

a. hard-working

b. serious

c.confident

d. patient

5. When eating, most Vietnamese people hold chopsticks in their right ______.

II. Complete the passage with the correct verbs. This _________ my best friend. Her name _________ Laura. She _________ twelve years old and she _________ in Bristol, England. Laura _________ very pretty. She _________ straight brown hair and dark brown eyes. Her nose _________ straight and her lips _________ rather thin. Laura _________ medium height, slim and very fit because she learns to dance and she _________ very well. Laura _________ very friendly and confident and she _________ a great sense of humour. I like being with her because she makes me feel happy and comfortable!

a. arm

b. leg

c. finger

d. hand

6. Which do you prefer, straight hair or ______ hair? a. long

b. blonde

c. curly

d. thick

7. The kids are ______ their tricycles around the playground. a. playing

b. riding

c. taking

d. driving

8. Norman is very shy, but his brother is ______. a. easygoing

b. calm

c.patient

d. outgoing

9. ______ explain this grammar for me, please? ~ Sure. a. Can you

b. Could you please

c. Would you like

d. Would you mind

10. Would you like to come for dinner tonight? - ______ a. Yes, certainly.

b. I’d love to. Thanks. c. Not at all.

d. No, thanks.

IV Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form.

TEST FOR UNIT 3 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

1. We ________________ (have) a staff meeting next Monday.

1. a. please

b. read

c. head

d. teacher

2. Lisa ________________ (wear) her uniform every school day.

2. a. ears

b. eyes

c. hands

d. cheeks

3. What time ________________ (you/ meet) Mathew tomorrow?

3. a. funny

b. curious

c. chubby

d. lunch

4. Tom and Mary ________________ (run) because they’re late for school.

4. a. confident

b. kind

c. nice

d. reliable

5. My father ________________ (not drink) coffee very often.

5. a. shy

b. pretty

c. curly

d. pony

6. I enjoy ________________ (read) books and ________________ (play) sports. 7. Would you like ________________ (go) to the movies with me?

II. Tick ( ) the opposites. 1. mean

□ generous

□ serious

5. lazy

□ bright 2. talkative

□ helpful

□ hard-working □ silly

6. clever

□ quiet 3. rude

□ moody

□ curious □ sad

7. depressed

□ polite 4. outgoing

□ shy

□ cheerful 8. funny

□ reliable

c.to - with

b. off

c.down

B: He ________________ (do) the gardening with his Dad. V. Underline the correct form. 1. We stay/ are staying in a lovely hotel near a beach. 2. My Dad reads/ is reading two books every week. 3. Do you know/ Are you knowing my friend Cindy? 4. I see/ am seeing the head teacher after class. 5. What do you do/ are you doing tomorrow afternoon? 6. Our flight lands/ is landing in New York at a quarter to nine.

d. in - about

2. Could you turn the television ______? I want to watch the news. a. on

10. A: What ________________ (Tony/ do) this Sunday?

□ humorous

1. My kids spend hours chatting ______ the phone ______ their friends. b. on - to

9. We ________________ (not want) to go to the movies tonight.

□ serious

III. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. a. at - with

8. I ________________ (not work) today. I’m on holiday.

7. Wait a minute, she speaks/ is speaking to someone on her mobile. 8. A lot of people speak/ are speaking Spanish in the USA. 9. He takes/ is taking Sally out for dinner tonight.

d. up UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS 35

10. Jaime usually eats/ is eating cold cereal for breakfast, but today he eats/ is eating oatmeal instead. 11. We go/ are going to Spain for our next holiday.

best friend. 1. Who is the girl on the right of the picture? _________________________________________________________________________

12. The restaurant opens/ is opening at 19.30 tonight.

2. Are Mai and Vy in different classes now?

VI. Match the sentences.

_________________________________________________________________________

____ 1. What are you doing this weekend?

a. They are dark brown.

____ 2. What does your English teacher look like?

b. It’s Sandra. She is my new friend.

____ 3. What is Mary like?

c. I’m visiting my grandparents.

____ 4. Where are the kids?

d.She’s slim and has long blond hairand blue eyes.

____ 5. Can you help me with my homework, please?

e. Sound great! I’d be happy to.

____ 6. Would you like to Join usata party on Sunday? f. She’s kind, active and sensitive. ____ 7. What colour are his eyes?

g. They are playing in the playground.

____ 8. Who is that girl?

h. Sorry, I can’t. I’m busy.

3. Where did they first meet? _________________________________________________________________________ 4. What is Vy like? _________________________________________________________________________ 5. What does Vy like? _________________________________________________________________________ 6. What do Vy and Mai usually do in the evenings? _________________________________________________________________________ 7. Where are they now? _________________________________________________________________________ 8. What are they doing this Sunday morning? _________________________________________________________________________

VII. Choose the word which best fits each gap. Wickedly Wonderful is a small summer (1) ______ in the UK for children aged 6 to 13 years old. The children (2) ______ a week outdoors at the camp, making new friends andlearning new activities (3) ______ having a lot of fun. (4) ______ the summer camp, they sail, horse ride, kayak, enjoy games on the beach and the beach (5)______, swim, surf, go crabbing and ride bikes. Children will enjoy holidays with Wickedly Wonderful, and (6) ______ are holidays that they will remember forever! 1. a. term

b.course

c.camp

d. holiday

2. a. take

b.spend

c.use

d. pass

3. a. which

b.what

c.where

d. while

4. a. At

b. In

c.On

d. During

5. a. firingcamp

b. campfire

c.firecamp

d.firingcamp

6. a. this

b.that

c.these

d. those

VIII. Read the passage and answer the questions. Hi, my name’s Mai. And this is a picture of me and my friend Vy. Vy is the girl who has a bow in her hair. She is a pretty girl with dimpled cheeks. She and I first met at primary school and we became great friends. She is kind, jolly and helpful. We are classmates again this year and we go to school together each morning. Vy likes to joke and play games. She lives near my house. In the evenings, we usually meet at my house. We sit in the garden and read story books. Vy is good at Mathematics. So, she often helps me with my Mathematics homework. At the moment, Vy and I are doing our English project in my room. We both like English. This Sunday morning we are going to our school English club. I hope Vy and I will be in the same class again next year. I like her very much and she is my UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS 37

IX. Write on e-mail to a pen friend to tell about your friend(s) and things to do with him/ her/them.

a. in a. secondary I. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest. b. desks

c. lights

c. at

d. since

3. Students live and study in a ________ school. They only go home at weekends.

TEST YOURSELF 1

1. a. lamps

b. on

d. legs

2. a. brother

b. nose

c. sofa

d. poster

3. a. careful

b. class

c. city

d.cupboard

4. a. kitchen

b. children

c. chat

d. choir

5. a. subject

b. music

c. study

d. lunch

b. international

c. boarding

d. private

4. My best friend is very ________. He plays football and basketball very well. a. friendly

b. sporty

c. lovely

d. funny

5. Jane is healthy because she does ________ every day. a. football

b. yoga

c. basketball

d. badminton

6. There are so many new words in the passage. Can I use a ________ to help me? a. calculator

b. ruler

c. dictionary

d. notebook

7. ________ are your friends coming for the party tonight? ~ About 7 o’clock.

II. Circle the odd one out. 1. a. calculator

b. cooker

c. rubber

d. ruler

2. a. ear

b. nose

c. mouth

d. leg

3. a. bedroom

b. kitchen

c. villa

d. bathroom

4. a. curly

b. creative

c. friendly

d. confident

5. a. cupboard

b. television

c. sofa

d. desk

III. Look at the pictures and write.

a. What

b.Where

c. What time

d. Howoften

c.doing

d. playing

8. ‘What are you doing this Saturday?’ ‘I’m ________ camping with some friends. a. having

b.going

9. ‘How is your first day at school?’ a. By bicycle.

b. Five days a week. c. That sounds great. d. Really exciting.

10. ‘Would you like to go for a drink?’ a. Oh sorry, I can’t.

‘________’

b. No, I wouldn’t.

c. Not at all.

d. My pleasure.

V. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense form.

1. I live in a/ an ______________ in Ho Chi Minh City.

1. Mark and Sam _________________ (train) for the football game next week. 2. Where is Mai? ~ She _________________ (skip) with her friends in the schoolyard. 3. _________________ (you/ play) football after school?

2. We have ______________ on Tuesday and Friday.

4. There _________________ (be) a bed, a bookcase, a table and two chairs in my room. 5. She ____________ (not have) a pretty face, but she ____________ (have) beautiful blue eyes.

3. Pete and Tim are going ______________ this weekend.

6. _________________ (Tom/ ride) his bike to school tomorrow morning? VI. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. Ella is very __________ and gets along well with everyone. (friend)

4. You can reheat the soup in the ______________.

2. Please be__________ with those vases. Don’t break them. (care) 3. Alisa is so__________. She talks too much in class, (talk) 4. We had a lot of __________ at Sandra’s party. (funny)

5. Do you play ______________ after school?

5. Keep yourself __________ by eating well and exercising regularly. , (health) 6. We are going to Han River to watch fireworks __________. (compete) VII. There is one mistake in each sentence. Find and correct it.

6. Are there any coats in the ______________?

1. I live in a apartment on Nguyen Trai Street.

IV. Choose the correct answers a, b, c, or d. 1. The boy is sitting ________ the computer. He is playing computer games. a. under

b. next to

c. behind

d. in front of

2. The school year in Viet Nam starts ________ September 5th. UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS 39

______________

2. Listen! Someone knocks at the door.

______________

3. What do you doing tomorrow?

______________

4. There is some new furnitures in the living room.

______________

5. My mother have short curly hair and big blue eyes.

______________

6. Would you like going to the movies tonight?

______________ X. Read the text and write True (T) or False (F).

VIII. Match sentences. ____ 1. Where does your brother live?

a. Oh I’d love to!

____ 2. What does he look like?

b. He’s a bit boring. He reallydoesn’t like anything.

____ 3. What’s he like?

c. No, thanks. I’m full.

____ 4.What does he like?

d. Orange Juice, please.

FIRST YEAR CAMP July 2nd - July 8th for 5th - 6th Graders We have designed a camp for rising 5th and 6th Graders. It’s not only great fun, but a great way to meet new friends! The week is very busy with arts, crafts, music, swimming, hiking, games, adventure, worship and LOTS of fun!

____ 5.Would you like something to eat? e.He’s shortish with dark brown hair. ____ 6.Would you like to have dinner with me on Friday?

f. Yes, sure.

____ 7.Can you pass me that book, please?g. In Da Nang. ____ 8.What would you like to drink?

ROCK CLIMBING CAMP July 9th - July 16th Minimum age 13

h. He’s friendly and easy-going.

This week will focus primarily on learning how to safely rock climb and rappel. This week will include hiking, camping, outdoor cooking, climbing, and rappelling. ALL climbing and safety equipment is provided. If you have climbing shoes, you are welcome to bring them, but please do not bring any other equipment. Join us for a great week of FUN in the outdoors!

IX. Choose the word which best fits each gap. From:

huy@gmail.com

To:

harrysmith@gmail.com

Subject:

Hi friend! ART CAMP July 16th - July 22nd for 7th - 12th Graders

Hi Harry, Nice to meet you! My name is Huy and I am fifteen years old. I live in Ho Chi Minh City with my parents, my little sister Hanh and a bull dog Rocky. We live in a house on Hung Vuong Street. My house (1) ______________ three bedrooms and a small garden. I live (2) ______________ my school so I walk to school every day. I like my school and my favorite subjects are Math and Science. I also like to work with computers. What about you? What subject do you like (3) ______________ school?

The week will be filed with workshops in photography, drawing, pottery, drama, calligraphy, music, painting, and much more... All of this is in addition to games, swimming, worship, free time, movies, hikes in the woods and spending time with a great staff! Eat, play, create! 1. The First Year Camp is for kids aged between 10 and 12. 2. Children will rock climb at the First Year Camp. 3. Children must bring climbing shoes when they join the Rock Climbing Camp.

My best friends are Nam and Quan and we are in the (4) ______________ class. After school I often go to the school canteen with my friends. The canteen has got wi-fi so we can chat (5) ______________ while eating or drinking and then usually we go home and do our homework. At the weekend, I play sports with my friends. We play football and basketball and sometimes we go (6) ______________.

4. Children under 13 can’t join the Rock Climbing Camp.

Write soon and tell me about yourself, your friends and your family.

1. Her eyes are brown and big.

5. At Art Camp, children learn to write, draw, paint, make pottery and so on. 6. Children at Art Camp learn in workshops all the time. XI. Complete the second sentence so that it means the same as the first. She _____________________________________________________________________

Best wishes,

2. My house has a living room, a kitchen, a bathroom and two bedrooms.

Huy

There ____________________________________________________________________ 3. Phong likes Maths most.

1. a. have

b. has

c. is

d. are

2. a. next

b. in front

c. near

d. far from

3. a. at

b. on

c. in

d. for

4. a. any

b.very

c. some

d. same

5. a. offline

b. online

c. inline

d. outline

6. a. swim

b. to swim

c. swimming

d. to swimming TEST YOURSELF 1 41

Phong’s __________________________________________________________________ 4. James is hard-working and smart. Jame isn’t ________________________________________________________________ 5. What is your address? Where ___________________________________________________________________ 6. Do you want to go for a drink?

Would ___________________________________________________________________

6. Her paintings are shown at Thang Long _______________. 7. Van Mieu is a _______________ of Confucius in Hanoi, northern Vietnam.

UNIT 4

MY NEIGHBOURHOOD

8. If you are interested in the history of Vietnam War, pay a visit to the War Remnants _______________. III. Complete the sentences with the words from the box.

A. PHONETICS convenient

I. Write the vowel sound /i:/ or /ɪɪ/ of the underlined letter(s). 1. historic / /

6. convenient / /

11. village / /

historic

boring

16. beach / /

peaceful noisy

fantastic narrow

modern polluted

2. keep / /

7. building / /

12. cheap / /

17. evening / /

3. peaceful / /

8. street / /

13. delicious / /

18. seafood / /

1. I don’t like living in a big city. It’s ____________ day and night and the air is so ___________.

4. think / /

9. busy / /

14. slim / /

19. city / /

2. The streets in Hoi An ancient town are ____________ and no cars are allowed.

5. cinema / /

10. exciting / /

15. different / /

20. sheep / /

3. For young people, it’s really ____________ in the country. It’d be more fun living in town.

II. Circle the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently.

4. We really enjoy staying here. The beach is ____________ and the weather is very nice.

1. live

wide

bicycle

exciting

2. feet

seat

near

team

5. There is a supermarket in my neighborhood, so it’s very ___________ to go shopping for food.

3. busy

city

think

terrible

6. Without noise and daily stress, life in the countryside is more ____________ and healthier.

4. great

heat

cheek

peaceful

7. There are many ____________ buildings and offices in Ho Chi Minh City.

5. historic

expensive

office

finally

8. Vietnam’s most ____________ city is Hue. It was the home of the Nguyen Kings and it has many palaces and monuments.

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR

IV. Choose the correct adjectives to complete the sentences.

I. Look at the pictures and write the names of the places.

1. The road is not _____________ (wide/ narrow) enough for two cars to pass comfortably.

memorial

museum

cathedral

temple

palace

square

art gallery

railway station

2. Inside the cathedral, it’s _____________ (noisy/ peaceful) and quiet. 3. Those shoes are really _____________ (cheap/ expensive) - they only cost £25. 4. My house is rather far from my school, so it’s a bit ____________ (convenient/ inconvenient). 5. Kids always find Christmas _____________ (exciting/ boring). They are always looking forward to Christmas. 6. The air in the countryside is fresh and _____________ (polluted/ unpolluted).

1. _____________

2. ______________

3. ______________

4. ______________

7. Hoi An is a(n) _____________ (old/ modern) town near Da Nang. 8. There are a lot of shops nearby, so the streets are always busy and _____________ (noisy/ quiet) during the day. V. Write comparative sentences about the pictures using than and the words in brackets. Use the Present Simple.

5. _____________

6. ______________

7. ______________

8. ______________

II. Complete the sentences with the words in part l. 1. If you visit England, you can go see Buckingham _______________. 2. Duc Ba Church is regarded the biggest _______________ in Ho Chi Minh City.

2. Tim Sam

3. Ba Dinh _______________ is in front of Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum. 4. The train arrives at Saigon ______________ at 4 am. 5. The _______________ was built in memory of soldiers who died in the war. TEST YOURSELF 1 43

3. Sapa

NhaTrang

Snow White the witch

4. NewYork SanFrancisco

2. Her job is a lot ___________________ mine. (stressful) 3. He thinks Charlie Chaplin is ___________________ Mr Bean. (funny) 5.

6. Steve John

7. the red car

4. I can’t study in this room. It’s too noisy. I’m going to find a _________________ place. (quiet)

the yellow car

my brother

Jane

Max

5. Smart phones make our lives______________ and ______________. (easy - convenient) 6. Life in a city is a lot ___________________ life in the countryside. (good) 7. My Math class is ___________________ my English class. (boring) 8. I like this school because it is ___________________ the other one. (big) 9. A car is much ___________________ a bike. (expensive)

10. We need ___________________ actors for this film. (young)

10.

1. (be/ young)

___

Sam is younger than Tim.

2. (be/ hot)

____________________________

3. (be/beautiful)

____________________________

4. (be/small)

____________________________

5. (be/ happy)

____________________________

6. (be/modern)

____________________________

7. (be/tall)

____________________________

8. (be/good)

____________________________

9. (be/big)

____________________________

10. (be/expensive)

VIII. Complete the second sentence so that it means the same as the first sentence, using the adjective in capitals. 1. The first question was easier than the second one. (DIFFICULT) The second question ________________________________________________________ 2. The black coat is smaller than the brown one. (BIG) The brown coat ____________________________________________________________ 3. The chair isn’t as comfortable as the sofa. (COMFORTABLE) The sofa __________________________________________________________________ 4. Jim’s suitcase was lighter than Jack’s suitcase. (HEAVY) Jack’s suitcase _____________________________________________________________ 5. His homework was better than mine. (BAD)

____________________________

VI. Complete the sentences with the correct comparative form of the words in the box.

My homework _____________________________________________________________ 6. The big television is more expensive than the small one. (CHEAP)

friendly

useful

important

cold

crowded

bad

high

exciting

thin

narrow

The small television ________________________________________________________ 7. The Royal Hotel is more old-fashioned than the Holton Hotel. (MODERN) The Holton Hotel __________________________________________________________

1. In Canada, January is ___________________ than March. 2. I think that good health is ___________________ than money. 3. You look ___________________. Have you lost weight? 4. I couldn’t get a seat in the restaurant. It was ___________________ than usual. 5. Mountains are ___________________ than hills. 6. I think that people who live in villages are ___________________ than people in big cities. 7. My exam results were ___________________ than I expected. 8. I think New York is ___________________ than Houston. 9. These trousers are too wide. Do you have any that are ___________________? 10. I like my new dictionary. It is ___________________ than the last one. VII. Complete the sentences with the comparative form of the adjectives in brackets. Add than where necessary. 1. I think she is still ill. She looks even ___________________ last week. (bad) UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD 45

8. The weather yesterday was worse than it is today. (GOOD) The weather today __________________________________________________________ 9. People in the city aren’t as friendly as those in the country. (FRIENDLY) People in the country ________________________________________________________ 10. Life in the city is more interesting than life in the country. (BORING) Life in the country __________________________________________________________ IX. Complete the sentences, using the prepositions in the box. next to

opposite

between

behind

near

to the post office. ___ It’s just a fifteen-minute walk. ___ Thanks a lot. Is there a bank near the supermarket?

D. READING I. Fill in each gap with a word from the box. attractions

lies

many

tourist

famous

visit

The ancient town of Hoi An (1) ____________ on the Thu Bon River, 30km south of Da Nang. It was formerly a major trading center in Southeast Asia between the 16th and 17th centuries. Hoi An is (2) ____________ for its old temples, pagodas, small tile-roofed houses and narrow streets.

1. The bank is ____________ the school and the gym.

One of the main (3) ____________ of Hoi An is the Japanese Covered Bridge, which was built in the 16th century and is still well-preserved. All visitors to Hoi An are recommended a (4) ____________ to the Cantonese Assembly Hall, which was built in 1855and still keeps (5)____________ precious objects. Another attractive address to tourists is Tan Ky (6) ___________, which was constructed nearly two centuries ago as a house of a Vietnamese merchant.

2. The cinema is ____________the park. 3. There is a hotel ____________ the Pine Street. 4. The theatre is ____________ the supermarket. 5. The police station is ____________ the post office. 6. The swimming pool is ____________ the gym.

In recent years, Hoi An has become a popular (7) ____________ destination in Vietnam. In 1999, it was certified by UNESCO (8) ____________ a World Cultural Heritage Site.

7. There is a car park ____________ the hotel. 8. The hospital is ____________ the corner.

II. Read the passage and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).

C. SPEAKING I. Look and complete the conversation. Tourist: restaurant near here?

Excuse me! (1) _______________ a

Quan: here.

Yes. There is one, but it’s not very near

Tourist:

house

(2) _______________ tell me how to get there?

I live in a wonderful neighbourhood. It is quiet but very convenient. There is a grocery store; I go there when I want to buy something quick to prepare. Also, there are other shops such as a bakery, two restaurants, and a bookstore. I am very satisfied of having a bookstore in my neighbourhood because I love reading books. Near my house, there is a small park. It’s a place where people meet and socialise. My father and I go jogging around the park every morning. My neighbourhood is great but there are no schools nearby. The hospital is also far away, but in general it is a nice place to live. 1. The neighbourhood is very noisy. 2. There are no restaurants in the neighbourhood.

Quan:

Um...let me see. Go straight on. Turn (3) _______________ at the conner. Then (4) _______________ the second turningon the right. Keep going to the end of the road. (5) _______________ left there. The restaurant is on your left, (6) _______________ the stadium.

Tourist:

(7) _______________ very much.

Quan:

You’re (8) _______________.

4. The writer doesn’t want a bookstore in his neighbourhood. 5. You can buy food in the grocery store. 6. There is a large park in the neighbourhood. 7. The writer likes to live in his neighbourhood.

E. WRITING

II. Put the conversation in the correct order.

I. Rearrange the words or phrases to make meaningful sentences.

___ How long does it take to get there?

1. we/ first/ where/ go/ this morning/ shall?

___ Thank you so much. 1

3. The school is far away from the neighbourhood.

Excuse me! Could you tell me the way to the nearest supermarket, please?

___ Yes. There is a bank opposite the post office.

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. the cafeteria/ and/ a cold drink/ let’s/ get/ to/ go. _________________________________________________________________________

___ Not at all. ___ Go straight on and turn left at the bookstore. The supermarket will be across the street, next UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD 47

3. like/ you/ the countryside/ do/ living/ in?

_________________________________________________________________________ 4. neighbourhood/ post office/ in/ there/ your/ a/ is? _________________________________________________________________________ 5. me/ you/ the way/ could/ the Japanese Bridge/ to/ tell/ please? _________________________________________________________________________ 6. houses/ are/ there/ historic/ Hoi An/ many/ ancient town/ in. _________________________________________________________________________ 7. polluted/ smoke/ the air/ is/ with/ factories/ from. _________________________________________________________________________ 8. much/ than/ living in a big city/ expensive/ is/ living in the countryside/ more _________________________________________________________________________

4. a. shops

b. theatres

c. streets

d. parks

5. a. narrow

b. crowd

c. now

d. about

II. What are these places? Write the names of the places. restaurant

bakery

cinema

grocery

post office

bookstore

bank

art gallery

1. It is a place where we send letters and buy stamps.

_________________

2. It is a place where we can buy books.

_________________

3. It is a place where we pay money to watch a movie.

_________________

4. It is a place where we can buy and eat a meal.

_________________

5. It is a place where we can save money.

_________________

6. It is a place where we can buy food and other goods.

_________________

II. Complete the second sentence so that It means the same as the first sentence.

7. It is a place where we can see paintings and other works of art.

_________________

1. Shall we go to the Japanese Covered Bridge first?

8. It is a place where we can buy bread and cakes.

_________________

Let’s ____________________________________________________________________ 2. Helen’s brother is shorter than her.

III. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

Helen ____________________________________________________________________ 3. Travelling abroad for a holiday is much more expensive than travelling in your country. Travelling in your country ____________________________________________________ 4. Country life isn’t as interesting as city life.

1. What is there ________ our neighborhood? a. in

5. Would you mind telling me the way to the National Museum? 6. The bus stop is in front of the hotel. 7. Turn left at the first traffic lights. 8. The weather yesterday was worse than it is today. The weather today is ________________________________________________________

10. The shopping mall is near the Italian restaurant.

c.Turn

b. gooder

c.better

b. crowded

c.wasted

b. chemist’s

c.restaurant

b. exciting

c.comfortable

b. Why don’t

c. Shall we

b.much

c. many

10. - Is there a supermarket in your neighborhood?

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

- ________.

1. a. peaceful

b. pleasure

c. sleepy

d. cheap

a. No, it isn’t. The supermarket is near my house.

2. a. exciting

b. quiet

c. wide

d.terrible

b. Yes. There it one not far from my house.

3. a. crowded

b. interested

c. bored

d. polluted

c. There is a supermarket in my neighborhood.

UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD 49

d.morebetter d. contained d. grocery d. inconvenient d. Could you

9. Living in a city is ________ convenient than living in the countryside. a. a lot

TEST FOR UNIT 4

d.Take

8. ________ go to the museum this weekend? - Good idea! a. Let’s

The Italian restaurant isn’t ____________________________________________________

b. Get

7. My neighborhood is very ________ becauseeverything is near my house. a. convenient

My town __________________________________________________________________

d. on - in

6. I’m just going to the ________ to buy some medicines and bandage. a cinema

9. There are three supermarkets in my town.

c.at - on

5. The air in many cities is heavily ________ with vehicle exhaust fumes. a. polluted

Take _____________________________________________________________________

b. at - in

4. He is much ________ now, but he’s still taking medication. a. good

The hotel _________________________________________________________________

d. from

3. ________ the second turning on the right and then go straight. a. Cross

Can ______________________________________________________________________

c. at

2. Turn left ________ the traffic lights and the restaurant is ________ your right a. in - on

City life is_________________________________________________________________

b. on

d.more

8. Why is the road too crowed on weekends?

d. The supermarket is opposite the park.

h. That’s a good idea.

IV. Put the verbs into the correct tense form. 1 . I ________________ (have) a great rime in Hoi An at present

VII. Complete the conversation.

2. There ________________ (be) always a lot of traffic, day and night.

Nick: Hello Alex. Please tell me (1) __________ do I get to your house?

3. My friend, Michelle, and I ________________ (spend) five days in Hoi An last year.

Alex: Will you be coming by car or by bus?

4. Outside the sun ________________ (shine) so I’m off to get some fresh air.

Nick: I will be coming by car. Please tell me the easiest (2) __________ of getting to your house.

5. We usually _____________ (stay) at home for a holiday, but this holiday we ______________ (travel) abroad. 6. ________________ (be) there any bookstores in your neighborhood? 7. My grandma ________________ (not like) living in the city. 8. How ________________ (I/ get) to the railway station? - Go straight ahead then turn left. 9. Where ________________ (you/ go) now? - We ________________ (go) to Tan Ky House. 10. ________________ (be) there a post office nearby? - No. There ________________ (be) no post offices near here.

Alex: Take the Jennens Road. (3) __________ to Howe Street. Then turn right (4) __________ the roundabout and take the second right. My house is on the left (5) __________ to the pet store. Nick: Thank you so much. Alex: My (6) __________. VIII. Choose the word which best fits each gap. Newquay is small town (1) __________ the Atlantic coast in the south of England. It has got great beaches and is the (2) __________ place to surf in the UK.

V. Supply the comparative form of the adjectives in brackets. 1. I find war films ________________ than romantic films. (boring) 2. He is ________________ than I thought him to be. (clever) 3. My exam results were ________________ than I expected. (bad)

In Newquay, there are lots of other things to do as (3) __________ as surfing. If you likewater sports, you can go kayaking, water-skiing or coasteering. Coasteering is different because it is rock climbing, jumping into the sea and swimming in the same activity, but you (4) __________ always go with a special instructor.

5. Jim Carrey’s latest film is ________________ than the previous one. (funny)

If you like animals you can also visit the Blue Reef Aquarium and (5) __________ a lot of different fish and even sharks. You can also go (6) __________ on the beach or visit NewquayZoo. Come and see for yourself.

6. Ho Chí Minh City is ________________ than Da Nang. (polluted)

1. a. in

b. on

c.at

d. to

7. I think living in the city is ________________ than living in the country. (good)

2. a. good

b. better

c. best

d. goodest

8. The house is much ________________ than the flat we had in London. (spacious)

3. a. well

b. much

c. soon

d. far

9. Today’s weather will be 5 degrees ________________than yesterday’s. (hot)

4. a. shall

b. may

c. could

d. should

10. The seafood here is ________________ than the seafood in Ha Not. (delicious)

5. a. see

b. like

c. get

d. look

VI. Match the sentences.

6. a. horse ride

b. horse riding

c. riding horse

d. ride horse

4. Which one of these cities is ________________ from us - Tokyo or Berlin? (far)

a. Turn at the next corner. Go straight on to the traffic lights. Turn left. It’s on your right.

IX. Read the passage. Then answer the questions.

2. Shall we go by bus?

b. Let’s visit some historic houses in the town.

3. Where is the restaurant?

c. Da Nang is much smaller than Saigon.

4. What shall we do this morning?

d. Yes, there is one on the corner, just a ten minute walk.

There are many shops in the town and there are three supermarkets. You can buy everything you need in the town. There are two banks, a post office, a police station and a library, too. You can find a big market where you can buy fresh fruit, vegetables, meat and dairy products. I like going to the market with my mum. There is a park in the town centre. In the park children can play because there is a playground. In our town you can find some restaurants and cafés. My favorite café is Icecave. It’s in Park Street and the ice cream is fantastic here!

5. How can I get to the railway station?

e. I think it’s more convenient to go by taxi.

6. Let’s go to Tan Ky House first.

f. Because there are many shopping malls around the neighborhood.

7. Which city is bigger - Danang or Saigon?

g. It’s opposite the amusement park

1. Excuse me! Is there a grocery store near here?

UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD 51

Hi Friends!. My name’s Sandra and I live in Hilltown. It is a small town in the south of England. About 9,000 people live here.

There are three elementary schools and two high schools in Hilltown. My school is in MillStreet. Next to our school there is a sports centre. Every Wednesday afternoon, we playbadminton. I like living in Hilltown because it is a calm, neat place and people are friendly. 1. Where is Hilltown?

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. How many people are there in the town? _________________________________________________________________________

UNIT 5

3. Are there any parks in the town?

NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD

_________________________________________________________________________ 4. What can you buy in the market _________________________________________________________________________

A. PHONETICS I. Read the following pairs of words, pay attention to the letters in bold.

5. What café does she like best? _________________________________________________________________________ 6. How many schools are there in Hilltown? _________________________________________________________________________

1.bet/ best

2. coat/ coast

3. net/nest

4. boat/ boast

5. lot/lost

6. boot/boost

7. cat/cast

8. hot/host

9. wet/ west

10. eat/ east

II. Choose the correct words to complete the sentences. Then read the sentences aloud.

7. How often does she play badminton? _________________________________________________________________________

1. We had a nice day on the ______________ (coat/ coast). 2. A fishing ______________ (net/ nest) is used on fishing boats for catching fish.

8. Does Sandra like her town? Why? _________________________________________________________________________

3. The sun rises in the ______________(eat/ east) and sets in the ______________ (wet/ west).

X. Rewrite the sentence so that it contains the word in capitals.

4. This weekend’s weather will be ______________ (wet/ west) and windy.

1. How about playing volleyball for a change? (SHALL)

5. A young ______________ (cat/cast) is called a kitten.

_________________________________________________________________________

6. She is the ______________ (bet/ best) student in her class. 7. We took a wrong turn and got______________ (lot/ lost).

2. Do you want to go for lunch now? (WOULD) _________________________________________________________________________

8. I really need a new pair of walking ______________ (boots/ boosts). 9. How are you going to France? - We are going by ______________ (boat/ boast).

3. Can you tell me the way to the nearest post office? (HOW) _________________________________________________________________________ 4. The first question in the test was easier than the second one. (DIFFICULT) _________________________________________________________________________

10. We thanked our ______________ (hot/ host) for a very enjoyable evening.

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Look at the pictures. Choose and write the correct answers.

5. I expected my exam results to be better. (THAN) _________________________________________________________________________ 6. The bookstore is at the side of the grocery store. (NEXT) _________________________________________________________________________ island

7. Dave doesn’t earn as much money as his wife. (MORE) _________________________________________________________________________

1. _________________

8. Could you close that window, please? (MIND)

mountain

beach 2. _________________

river

desert

lake

forest

beach

_________________________________________________________________________

3. _________________

cave mountain

UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD 53

4. _________________

waterfall river

3. Have you got any ___________________? I’ve cut my finger. 4. Don’t shine your ___________________ straight into my eyes! 5. She took some strong ___________________ for her headaches. island 5. _________________

waterfall

lake

6. _________________

desert

forest

6. You should put ___________________ on your skin to protect it from the harmful effects of the sun. 7. We are going hiking this weekend, so 1 need a new pair of ___________________. 8. A ___________________ shows you which direction is north.

valley

9. ___________________ will keep you safe and dry, whether you’re spending a day out in the rain. 10. Could you pass me those ___________________, please. These don’t cut very well. IV. Fill the crossword puzzle. 1

forest 7. _________________

cave

mountain

8. _________________

island

river

beach 4 5 6 7

valley 9. _________________

island

forest

10. _________________

mountain

desert

cave 9

II. Write the names of natural wonders. waterfall

lake

forest

cave

desert

island

valley

river

1. A large area of land where there is almost no water, rains, trees, or plants

________

2. A large area of water that flows towards the sea

________

3. A large area of water that is surrounded by land

________

4. A piece of land that is completely surrounded by water

________

5. A place where a stream or river falls down from a high place

________

6. A large area of land that is covered with a lot of trees

________

7. A low area of land between mountains or hills

________

8. A large hole in the side of a hill or under the ground

________

III. Complete the sentences with the words from the box. plasters

painkillers

scissors

suncream

compass

tent

sleeping bag torch

Across 2. an area of coast where the land curves inwards; e.g. Ha Long ____________. 4. a mountain; e.g.____________Everest. 5. the land beside the sea or ocean 7. What is the Sahara? 8. water which comes running down from a high place 9. a cream that you put on your skin to prevent it burning in hot sun Down

walking boots waterproof coats

1. a medicine that reduces pain 3. a piece of material stuck on to the skin to cover a cut 5. an instrument for finding direction

1. A ___________________ is a warm bag that you sleep in, especially when camping.

6. a piece of land surrounded by water

2. A ___________________ is a temporary shelter you use when you go camping.

10. a large piece of stone that rises up from the ground

Unit 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD 55

V. Fill the blanks with the comparative and superlative degrees of the following words. POSITIVE

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

9. Phu Quoc is _______________ (large) island in Vietnam. 10. I think it is one of _______________ (boring) war films I’ve ever seen. VIII. Underline the correct answer.

1. high

_________________________

2. narrow

_________________________

3.good

_________________________

4.bad

_________________________

5.exciting

_________________________

6.far

_________________________

7.big

_________________________

9.large

_________________________

10. lazy

_________________________

11. many/ much

_________________________

12.little

_________________________

VI. Complete the sentences with the superlative form of the words listed below.

1. Mirror, mirror on the wall, who is (pretty, prettier, the prettiest) of them all? 2. I find French (difficult, more difficult, most difficult) to speak than Italian. 3. Which is (fast, faster, the fastest), a snail or a worm? 4. What is (high, higher, the highest) mountain in your country? 5. This car is too small. We need to get a (big, bigger, biggest) one. 6. This summer is not as (hot, hotter, hottest) as last summer. 7. The ostrich, the (large, larger, largest) bird in the world, does not fly. 8. My exam results are as (good, better, best) as the rest of my classmates. 9. This is (exciting, more exciting, the most exciting) movie I have ever seen. 10. Move your chair a little (close, closer, closest) to the table. IX. Put the adjectives in the correct form (comparative or superlative). 1. Lake Baikal in Russia is ___________________ lake in the world. (deep) 2. Which is ___________________, the Sahara Desert or the Gobi Desert? (hot)

high

delicious

boring

good

dirty

rich

valuable

bad

large dry

1. That was _______________ movie I’ve ever seen. I almost walked out in the middle. 2. Pizza is _______________ food in the world! 3. Harry is _______________ student in our class. He gets the top grades in every course. 4. The Pacific Ocean is _______________ ocean in the world. It covers about 170million square kilometers.

3. With a high of 979 meters (3,212 ft), Angel Falls is the world’s___________________ waterfall. (high) 4. Mount Kilimanjaro in Africa is ___________________ than Mount Everest in Asia. (low) 5. The Yangtze is ___________________ river in Asia. It is 6,385 kilometers long. (long) 6. Greenland is ___________________ island in the world. It is about 2,2 million km2. (large) 7. The River Thames is much ___________________ than the Nile. (short)

5. The Atacama desert is _______________ desert in the world. It receives just 1 mmof rain per year.

8. The Atacama Desert in Chile is the world’s ___________________ desert. (dry)

6. He is _______________ speaker I have ever heard. Half the audience fell asleepduring his speech.

10. Waikiki Beach is one of ___________________ beaches in Hawaii. (popular)

7. Mount Everest is _______________ mountain in the world.

1. One World Trade Center is _______________ (tall) building in the United States.

London is one of (1) __________ (large) cities in the world. Its population is(2) __________(low) than Tokyo and Shanghai, but it is one of (3) __________(popular) tourist destinations of all. London is probably (4) __________ (famous) forits museums, galleries, palaces and other sights, but it also includes a (5) __________(wide) range of peoples, cultures and religions than many other places. People used to saythat it was (6) __________(dirty) city too, but it is now much (7) __________(clean) than it was. It now has some of (8) __________ (good) restaurants in Europe too.

2. My mother is _______________ (good) cook in the world.

XI. Complete the sentences with must ormustn’t.

8. That is _______________ painting in the art gallery. It’s worth a million dollars. 9. Switzerland is one of _______________ countries in the world. 10. Arthur hates to clean. He has _______________ apartment I’ve ever seen. VII. Write the superlative form of the words given.

9. The Amazon Rainforest covers an area 25 times ___________________ than Britain. (big) X. Complete the text with the most suitable form of the adjectives in brackets.

3. Terrence Tao is _______________ (intelligent) person in the world. 4. Where are _______________ (nice) beaches in your country? 5. Hawaii is _______________(interesting) place I’ve ever been to. 6. Dave is _______________ (untidy) person in class. 7. July is generally _______________ (hot) month of the year. 8. The blue whale is PhuQuoc is _______________ (heavy) animal on earth. Unit 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD 57

1. You _________ see a doctor.

2. You _________ eat in class.

3. _______________________________________________________ ? The Atacama desert receives 1 mm of rain per year.

4. _______________________________________________________ ? The Nile River is 6,650 kilometers long. 5. _______________________________________________________ ? 3. You _________ be late for school.

4.You _________ eat fruit and vegetables.

Mt. Everest is over 60 million years old. 6. _______________________________________________________ ? Victoria Falls. Victoria Falls are twice as tall as Niagara Falls. 7. _______________________________________________________ ? Thien Duong Cave was discovered in 2005.

5. You _________ eat fast food too often.

6. You _________ do your homework.

_______________________________________________________ ? Visitors can get to Angel Fails by boat.

II. Match the questions with the answers.

7. You _________ watch TV a lot.

9. We _________ teachers.

8. You _________ put litter in the bin.

be polite to our 10. We ________ talk loudly in the library.

1. Where do you want to go on your next holiday?

a.It is about 500km.

2. Really? Where is it?

b.I can get there by car.

3. What is it like?

c.I can spend my time enjoying cool weather with the magnificent stalactites.

4. What is special about it?

d.I want to go to Thien Duong Cave.

5. How far is it from Hanoi?

e.Stalactites in Paradise cave are in many multi-shapes.

6. How can you get there?

f.It is the most beautiful cave in PhongNhaKe Bang area.

7. What can you do there?

g. It’s in Quang Binh Province.

III. Put the conversation in the correct order.

XII. Write sentences with must ormustn’t, using the words given in brackets.

____

1. It is raining heavily. (you/ wear your raincoat)

____

You must wear your raincoat. _

No. It’s Antarctica. It covers about 14 million square kilometers. It is over 7,000 kilometers long. What is the largest desert on earth, Cathy?

2. Jane is not feeling well. (she/ go to the doctor)

__________________________

3. The baby is sleeping. (you/ shout)

__________________________

____

The Andes is the longest mountain range in the world.

4. This is a secret. (you/ tell the others)

__________________________

____

How long is it?

5. The sign says ‘NO PARKING’ (we/ park here)

__________________________

____

Uh... Is it the Sahara Desert?

__________________________

____

Wow. That’s amazing!

7. This is a non-smoking area. (he/ smoke in this area)

__________________________

____

I have no idea. What is it?

8. There is a ‘STOP’ sign ahead. (we/ stop)

__________________________

____

Do you know what the longest mountain range in the world is?

____

Oh well, it is much larger than the Sahara.

6. This vase is very dirty. (I/ clean it soon)

C. SPEAKING I. Write the questions for the underlined words.

D. READING

1. _______________________________________________________ ?

I. Complete the passages with the words from the box.

Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world.

means

limestone

width

found

largest

much

2. _______________________________________________________ ? Son Doong cave is world’s (1) ____________ cave, located in QuangBinh province,Vietnam. It was (2) ____________ by a local man named Ho Khanh in 1991 and

The Grand Canyon is in Arizona, USA. Unit 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD 59

wasrecently discovered in 2009 by British cavers, led by Howard Limbert. The name “SonDoong" cave (3) ____________ “mountain river cave”. The cave was created 2-5 millionyears ago by river water eroding away the (4) ____________ underneath the mountain.

b.The Blue Mountains are situated not far from Sydney. c.You can see platypuses in the wild in Australia. d.Australian crocodiles live in the outback.

At about 9 kilometers in length, 200 meters in (5) ____________ and 150 meters inheight, Son Doong Cave is (6) ____________ larger than Deer Cave in Malaysia and hasreplaced Deer Cave to take pole position (7) ____________ the world’s largest cave.

E. WRITING

II. Read the text carefully, then choose the correct answers.

1. Which/ dry/ Sahara Desert/ or/ Atacama Desert? _________________________________________________________________________

Where are you going for your next holiday? How about Australia? Australia has got 37,000km of coastline and the best beaches in the world! The GreatBarrier Reef is off the north-east coast of Australia. It’s the largest coral reef in the sea! You can take a boat to it and dive there. It’s a fantastic undersea world. Inland Australia is called ‘the outback’. There are lot of wild camels, and there are some you can ride, too! There are fantastic national parks, where you can camp under the stars. In the Uluru National Park, there’s a very big sandstone rock, called Ayers Rock. It looks amazing in the evening sun. Do you like adventure? Then you can take a canoe trip along the Murray River. It’s Australia’s longest river. Another good trip for adventurous people is to the Blue Mountains. These are west Sydney in New South Wales. The mountains look blue and they contain lots of unusual animals and plants. Australia has got its own rainforest. It’s along the coast of North Queensland. It’s only 900,000 hectares today, but it once covered all of Australia. You can see lots of interesting animals in the rainforest, but be careful of the crocodiles! Do you like wildlife? Australia has got a unique type of animal - marsupials. These include kangaroos, koalas and platypuses. You can see them in the Yanchep National Park, near Perth in Western Australia. Remember the koalas aren’t teddy bears. They can be dangerous! -coral reef (n): rạn san hô

I. Write sentences, using the words given with the correct form of the adjectives.

- marsupial (n): thú có túi

-platypus (n): thú mó vịt

2. Cat Ba Island/ large/ island/ Ha Long Bay _________________________________________________________________________ 3. The Mekong River/ long/ river/ Vietnam _________________________________________________________________________ 4. Angel Falls/ Venezuela/ high/ waterfall/ the world. _________________________________________________________________________ 5. The Amazon River/ wide/ the Nile River _________________________________________________________________________ 6. Ayers Rock/ famous/ landmark/ Australia _________________________________________________________________________ 7. West Lake/ big/ freshwater lake/ Hanoi _________________________________________________________________________ 8. Ha Long Bay/ popular/ PhongNha Cave? _________________________________________________________________________ II. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence, using the word given. 1. The film is not as interesting as the novel was. (much)

1. ___________ is off the coast of Australia.

The novel ________________________________________________________________

a. Ayers Rock

b. The Yanchep National Park

c. The rainforest

d. The Great Barrier Reef

2. Ayer Rock is___________.

2. I’ve never read a worse book than this. (ever) This is the _________________________________________________________________ 3. Travelling by bus is cheaper than travelling by train. (more)

a. in the Yanchep National Park

b. a huge sandstone rock

c. a coral reef in the sea

d. also called Uluru National Park

3. ___________ is a marsupial.

Travelling by train __________________________________________________________ 4. The other people in my office are much younger than me. (far) I am _____________________________________________________________________ 5. No students in the class is more intelligent than John. (most) John _____________________________________________________________________

4. Australia is famous for___________.

6. The table and the desk are the same size. (big) The table _________________________________________________________________

a. its largest rainforest

b. the longest river in the world

c.its unique animals

d. beautiful national parks

5. Which sentence is not true?

7. I thought the station was nearer. (than) The station ________________________________________________________________ 8. I’ve never had a better friend than you. (the)

a.Australia was once mostly covered in rainforest

You are __________________________________________________________________ Unit 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD 61

3. Which is _________________(high), Mount Everest or K2? - Mount Everest.

TEST FOR UNIT 5 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

4. Antarctica is one of _________________(cold) places on earth.

1. a. forest

b. wonder

c. rock

d. lost

5. Buying things from plastic is _______________(bad) than buying things fromrecycled paper.

2. a. cave

b. bay

c. valley

d. lake

6. At present, Son Doong Cave is _________________(famous) cave in QuangBinh province.

3. a. boots

b. scissors

c. caves

d. mountains

7. This flat is nicer, but it’s _________________(far) from the city center than the other one.

4. a. diverse

b. island

c. scissors

d. right

8. The boat trip was _________________ (good) experience of my life.

5. a. beach

b. cheese

c. change

d. chemistry

V. Find and correct one mistake.

II. Choose the odd one out.

1. In the centre is the bigest island in the bay.

____________________

1. a. desert

b. forest

c. plaster

d. island

2. Big cities are much more better than the countryside.

____________________

2. a. worse

b. best

c. oldest

d. happiest

3. I must to go to the bank and get some money.

____________________

3. a. scissors

b. painkillers

c. boots

d. compass

4. Fansipan is Vietnam’s the highest mountain.

____________________ ____________________

4. a. natural

b. wonder

c. exciting

d. famous

5. That is the worse Joke I’ve ever heard in all my life.

5. a. clever

b. quieter

c. louder

d. easier

6. Look! There is a ‘NO PARKING’ sign. You must park here.

____________________

III. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

7. This is the most quickest way to the hotel.

____________________

1. Ha Long Bay is famous __________ its scenic rock formations.

8. We mustn’t hurry or we’ll late for class.

____________________

a. to

b. with

c. for

d. by

2. Titov island in Ha Long Bay was named __________ a Russian cosmonaut, GhermannTitov. a. for

b. with

c. after

VI. Match the questions with the answers. 1. What is Tuan Chau?

a. Visit Dragon Bridge, Ba Na Hill, Marble

d. by

3. You __________ look at other students’ work. It’s against the rules. . must

b. should

c. shouldn’t

d. mustn’t

4. The Sahara is the third largest __________ in the world. a. island

b. desert

c. valley

d. mountain

5. When hiking overnight, don’t forget to bring the __________. It will keep you warm at night. a. sleeping bag

b. hiking boots

c. sun cream

d. painkillers

6. The Amazon River is __________ river in the world. a. the wider

b. wider than

c. the widest

d. widest

7. __________ is the coldest place in Vietnam? a. Who

b. What

c. Which

d. When

8. Peter must __________ this essay today. He’s going out tomorrow. a. finish

b. finishes

c. finishing

d. to finish

9. Which is __________, the West Lake or the Sword Lake? a. large

b. larger

c. largest

d. the largest

10. The Grand Canyon is one of the natural __________ of the world. a. materials

b. sights

c. scenery

d. wonders

IV. Write the comparative and superlative form of the adjectives in brackets. 1. That apartment block is _________________(ugly) one I’ve ever seen. 2. It is _________________(enjoyable) to read the story than to see the film. Unit 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD 63

Mountain,

and

relax

onbeautiful beaches. 2. Where is Mount Everest?

b. They can get there by boat.

3. What is the highest mountain in Vietnam?

c. It’s an island in Ha Long City.

4. How can visitors get to the Falls?

d. It’s Uluru.

5. What is the other name for Ayres Rock?

e. It’s Fansipan.

6. What can we do in Da Nang?

f. It’s on the border between Nepal and China.

7. How far is Ha Long Bay from Hanoi?

g. Tent, sleeping bag, torch, sun creamand First Aid Kit.

8. What

must

you

bring

when

going h. It’s about 170km.

camping? VII. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. The Ha Long Bay is (1) ________ in QuangNinh Province in Vietnam. The name ofthe bay is roughly translated to descending dragon in Vietnamese. The bay is a UNESCO World Heritage (2) ________ and is lined by over a 1600 limestone islands and islets. Legend has it that, when the Vietnamese were protecting their territory (3) ________ invaders, they offered prayers to their gods who then sent dragons as the protectors ofthe place. (4) ________ the invaders were approaching via sea, the dragons spat out Jewelscreating islands that lined the bay and obstructed the ships and boats of the invaders. Ha Long Bay is one of the (5) ________ popular tourist destinations and is visited byhundreds of thousands of tourists each year. You can opt for a (6) ________ cruise, that willtake you as close to a lot of these islets.

Other email services are generally not ___________________________________________ 1. a. visited

b. located

c. followed

d. discovered

2. a. Nature

b. Sight

c. Wonder

d. Site

3. a. from

b. with

c. to

d. by

4. a. What

b. Where

c. When

d. Which

5. a. much

b. many

c. more

d. most

6. a. train

b. boat

c. plane

d. bus

VIII. Read the passage carefully, then answer the questions. Victoria Fails is one of the Seven Natural Wonders of the world. It is the largest waterfall in the world. It is 1.7 kilometers wide and 108 meters high. Victoria Falls is located on the border between Zambia and Zimbabwe, and travelers can access the falls through either Livingstone, Zambia or Victoria Falls, Zimbabwe. The Zambezi River, which originates in northern Zambia, serves as the fall’s water source. Vitoria Falls was discovered by the Scottish explorer Dr. David Livingstone in 1855. He named the falls after Queen Victoria. The locals called the falls Mosi-oa-Tunya meaning “the smoke that thunders”. Long before you even see the waterfalls you can hear the roaring of the water! The months of June and July are probably the best time to view the falls. The water levels are still high enough to showcase the splendor of the falls, but the amount of wateris less creating less spray and more visibility of the falls. 1. Where is Victoria Falls? _________________________________________________________________________ 2. How high is the falls? _________________________________________________________________________ 3. Is Vitoria Falls the world’s highest waterfall? _________________________________________________________________________ 4. What is the other name for Victoria Falls? _________________________________________________________________________ 5. Who discovered the falls? _________________________________________________________________________ 6. When is the best time to visit the falls? _________________________________________________________________________ IX. Write the second sentences so that it has the same meaning to the first one. 1. It’s very important for you to be here at 6.00. You _____________________________________________________________________ 2. Phuc wants to visit Ayres Rock. Phuc would _______________________________________________________________ 3. The Sahara Desert is hotter than any other deserts in the world. The Sahara is ______________________________________________________________ 4. Gmail is generally better than other email services. Unit 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD 65

5. The Nile River is the longest river in the world. No other river in the world is __________________________________________________ 6. I’ve never seen such a wonderful waterfall before. This is the ________________________________________________________________ 7. It’s against the rules to make noise in the library. You _____________________________________________________________________ 8. How high is Mount Everest? What is __________________________________________________________________ 9. No one in the office is cleverer than Mr. Edward. Mr. Edward _______________________________________________________________ 10. Shall we go to Ha Long Bay this weekend? How about ________________________________________________________________

7. Tet is a time for _________________. 8. A_______________is a set of pages showing the days, weeks and months of aparticular year.

UNIT 6

OUR TET HOLIDAY

III. Look at the flags and complete the sentences with the names of the country and the nationality.

A. PHONETICS I. Write the sound /s/ and /∫/ of the underlined letter(s). 1. celebrate / /

6. wish / /

11. nice / /

16. English / /

2.should / /

7.special //

12.summer / /

17. wash / /

3.exciting / /

8.shopping / /

13.sure / /

18. sugar / /

4.blossom / /

9.spring / /

14.class / /

19. decide / /

5. show / /

10.shine / /

15.second / /

20. shirt / /

1. Vy is from _____________.She is _____________.

2.Sam is from _____________. He is _____________.

II. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently for the rest. 1. a. decorate

b. calendar

c. celebrate

d. clean

2. a. shopping

b. sugar

c. sure

d.summer

3. a. centre

b. special

c. decide

d. rice

4. a. present

b. sound

c. sweet

d. season

5. a. blossom

b. chess

c. messy

d. passion

3. Kyoko is from _____________. She is _____________.

4. James is from _____________. He is _____________.

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Label the pictures. 5. Anna is from _____________.She is _____________. fireworks

lucky money

apricot blossoms

peach blossoms

pagoda

calendar

family gathering

furniture 6.Minho is from _____________.He is _____________.

1. _____________

2. ______________

3. ______________

4. ______________

5. _____________

6. ______________

7. ______________

8. ______________

7. Baronis from _____________.He is _____________.

8. Flora is from _____________. She is _____________.

II. Complete the sentences with the words in part I.

IV. Complete the sentences with appropriate prepositions.

1. Vietnamese children get _________________ in Lunar New Year.

1. The Vietnamese celebrate Tet ____________ different times each year.

2. On New Year’s Eve, thousands of people gather on Nguyen Hue Street to watch ___________.

2. Tet is the busiest time ____________ the year.

3. In the north, people decorate their house with pink _________________.

4. Vietnamese people always make their houses look beautiful ____________Tet.

4. Yellow _________________are the symbol of Tet for Southern Vietnamese.

5. Tet is a time ____________ family gatherings.

5. Half a month before Tet, people begin to clean their houses and _________________.

6. This year, Vietnamese people celebrate Tet ____________ February.

6. On the first day of Tet, people often go to _________________to pray for a good new year.

7. Tet often falls ____________ late January and early February.

Unit 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD 67

3. ____________ New Year’s Eve, people gather to watch the New Year fireworks.

8. One tradition in Thai New Year celebration is to throw water ____________ people.

7. One______________ buy and wear new clothes.

V. Mai is talking about her family’s plans for Tet. Complete the sentences with the simple future (will + infinitive) and the suitable verbs from the box.

8. One ______________ wear black or white clothes.

buy

make

clean

visit

celebrate

cook

decorate

give

hang

9. One ______________ eat squids, duck meat or shrimps. 10. One ______________ offer visitors something sweet such as biscuits, candies or mut. VIII. Underline the correct answers.

1. This year the Vietnamese ________________ Tet in the middle of February.

1. Children (should/ shouldn’t) listen to their parents.

2. My father ________________ our house with flowers and plants.

2. You look tired. You (should/ shouldn’t) work so hard.

3. My grandma and my aunts ________________ Chung cakes.

3. We (should/ shouldn’t) be rude to our elders.

4. My mother ________________ a lot of special food.

4. Students (should/ shouldn’t) pay attention in class.

5. We ________________ apricot blossoms and kumquat trees.

5. The students (should/ shouldn’t) use their mobile phone in the exam.

6. My brother ________________ new calendars, lanterns and scrolls.

6. Tom (should/ shouldn’t) eat so many sweets. It’s bad for his teeth.

7. My sister and I ________________ the house and furniture.

7. The kids (should/ shouldn’t) spend so much time in front of the TV.

8. On the first days of Tet, my family ________________ our relatives.

8. You are overweight. You (should/ shouldn’t) go on a diet.

9. My parents ________________ us lucky money in the morning of the first day.

IX. Write the second sentence, using should or shouldn’t and the words given.

10. On the first day of Tet, we ________________ to the pagoda to pray for a good year.

1. It’s past the children bedtime. (they/ be/ in bed)

VI. Write sentences about what these children will do or won’t do this New Year. 1. Hoa/ clean the furniture.

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. Can’t they see the ‘No Smoking’ sign? (they/ smoke/ in here)

Hoa will clean the furniture.

_________________________________________________________________________

2. Nga/ help her mother cook special food

3. These windows are so dirty. (you/ clean them/ more often)

_________________________________________________________________________ 3. Phong/ not buy fireworks

_________________________________________________________________________ 4. We are in the library. (we/ talk/ too loudly)

_________________________________________________________________________ 4. Vy and My/ wear their new dresses

_________________________________________________________________________ 6. I think It’s going to rain, (we/ take/ our umbrellas)

_________________________________________________________________________ 5. Huy and Nam/ not go out to watch fireworks

_________________________________________________________________________ 7. Suzy has to wake up early for school. (she/ go to sleep/ so late)

_________________________________________________________________________ 6. Nguyen/ visit his grandparents

_________________________________________________________________________ 8. You are always late for school. (you/ be/ punctual)

_________________________________________________________________________ 7. Nhu/ keep her lucky money in her piggy bank.

_________________________________________________________________________ X. Choose the correct modal to complete each sentence.

_________________________________________________________________________ 8. Minh/ not play card games

1. ‘______________ (Shall, Will, Must) we go to the beach?’‘Good idea.’ 2. All students ______________ (shall, can, must) study hard in order to get good results.

_________________________________________________________________________

3. ______________ (Could, Should, Would) you like some tea?

VII. Write should or shouldn’t to say what one should do or should not do during Tet holiday.

4. ______________ (Can, Should, Must) you help me lift this box?

1. One ______________ visit relatives and friends.

5. You ______________ (should, must, will) wear a helmet on motorcycles - it’s the law.

2. One ______________ sweep house on the first day of the new year.

6. You ______________ (can’t, won’t, shouldn’t) eat so many sweets - they aren’t goodfor you.

3. One ______________ give good luck wishes to others. 4. One ______________ give children and the elderly lucky money. 5. One ______________ say bad words or do bad things.

7. ‘My tooth really hurt!’‘I think you ______________ (mustn’t, will, should) go tothe dentist’s.’

6. One ______________ break glassware.

8. You ______________ (can’t, should, mustn’t) stand on the desk. You’ll break it. UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY 69

9. You ______________ (should, mustn’t, shouldn’t) never speak to your mother like this.

Mai:

10. You ______________ (will, must, shouldn’t) do your homework more carefully.

Peter:

(4) _________________________________________________________________

C. SPEAKING

Mai:

In the morning of the first day, we wear our new clothes, make wishes to our parents and get lucky money. Then my family go to some pagodas to pray for a happy new year.

Peter:

(5) _________________________________________________________________

Mai:

On the second day of Tet, we often visit our relatives. And I go out with my friends on the third day.

Peter:

It sounds great! I hope you enjoy yourself this year.

I. Match the sentences with the correct advices. 1. I’ve got a headache.

a.You should take it back to the shop.

2. I have an exam next week.

b.You should eat less junk food.

3. There are no clean plates.

c.You should take a painkiller.

4. I am always tired in the morning.

d.You shouldn’t play computer games all night.

5. I want to lose weight.

e.You should start revising.

6. I bought a new mobile but it is broken.

f.You shouldn’t stay up so late.

7. My eyes hurt.

g.You should do the washing up.

No. We won’t buy Chung cakes. My grandma will make Tet cakes.

D. READING I. Complete the passage with the words from the box. everywhere

II. Writethe questions for the underlined parts. 1. _________________________________________________________________________ The Vietnamese celebrate Tetbetween late January and early February 2. _________________________________________________________________________ Tet lasts ten days. 3. _________________________________________________________________________ Before Tet, people should clean and decorate their houses. 4. _________________________________________________________________________ My family usually go to pagodas on the first day of Tet. 5. _________________________________________________________________________ We will visit our relatives on the second day of Tet. 6. _________________________________________________________________________ People shouldn’t eat duck meat at Tetbecause it brings unluckiness. 7. _________________________________________________________________________ My mother buys three apricot blossoms for Tet. 8. _________________________________________________________________________ They go home every New Year. III. Complete the conversation with the questions from the box. How do you celebrate?

Will you buy Chung cakes?

Will you help your mother with cooking?

What will you do for this New Year?

What do you do on the next days? Peter:

(1) _________________________________________________________________

Mai:

I will clean and decorate our house.

Peter:

(2) _________________________________________________________________

Mai:

Yes, I will. My mother usually cooks lots of traditional food.

Peter:

(3) _________________________________________________________________ UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY 71

fortune

money

better

care

everybody

decorate

role

Since Tet occupies an important (11) ____________ in Vietnamese’s beliefs, Vietnamesewill begin their preparations well in advance of the upcoming New Year. People willspend a few days cleaning their homes, repaint, and (2) ____________ the house withkumquat tree, branches of peach blossom, and many other colorful flowers. The ancestralaltar is especially taken (3) ____________ of, with careful decoration of five kinds of fruits.(4) ____________, especially children, buy new clothes and shoes to wear on the firstdays of New Year. The color of red and yellow can be seen (5) ____________ becauseVietnamese believe that these colors will bring good (6) ____________. During Tet, people always smile and behave as nice as they can in the hope for a(7) ____________ year. Gifts are exchanged between family members and friends andrelatives, while children receive lucky (8) ____________ kept in red envelope. II. Read the passage and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). New Year’s Eve, 31st December, is a time for the British to eat, drink and party when they celebrate the beginning of a New Year. Many people go to Trafalgar Square inLondon or a street party in their city. Others visit friends or go to pubs and restaurants, which are very crowded on that night. There is a great atmosphere when everyone waits for Big Ben to strike midnight. Then people kiss and hold hands to sing the traditional Scottish song Auld Lang Syne. Many people also light fireworks at midnight. The main tradition is ‘First Footing’. This means the first person to come into your house after midnight should be a tall dark-haired man. He should bring a piece of coal, some bread, salt or a bottle of whisky to bring good luck to the family. A lot of people also make New Year’s Resolution; they promise to do things like stop smoking or ‘do more exercise’ in the New Year. January 1st (and 2nd in Scotland) is a public holiday so their people can recover from their celebrations. 1. On New Year’s Eve everyone stays at home. 2. People sing a traditional song at midnight. 3. There are no fireworks on New Year’s Eve. 4. It is good luck for a blonde woman to be your first visitor after midnight. 5. Lots of people promise to change in the New Year.

4. _________________________________________________________________________

6. New Year’s Day is a public holiday in Britain.

E. WRITING

TEST FOR UNIT 6

I. Write New Year’s resolutions, using will or won’t and the words given.

go tobed early

I will go to bed early.

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. should

b. around

c. house

d. sound

2. a. shout

b. flower

c. bow

d. throw

3. a. sure

b. shout

c. sing

d. wish

4. a. peach

b. sweets

c. eat

d. feather

5. a. celebrate

b. cousin

c. city

d. cinema

II. Complete each sentences with an appropriate word. 1. The Vietnamese _______________Tet in late January or early February. 1. do my homework in time

____________________

2. Children _______________their grandparents health and longevity. 3. Tet is a time for family _______________. 4. Thousands of people gathered to _______________ fireworks. 5. Children receive _______________ money in red envelopes.

2. spend much time watching TV

____________________

6. They believe that the first_______________ on New Year’s Day decides the family luck. 7. New Year’s _______________ is on December 31. 8. We _______________our house with flowers and plants. 9. One tradition in Thai New Year is to throw_______________ over people.

3. eat less junk food

____________________

10. Children _______________eat lots of sweets - it’s not good for their teeth. III. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. 1. Vietnamese people usually return to their families _________ Tet. a. in

b. on

c. for

d. during

2. When the clock strikes midnight, colorful fireworks light _________ the sky. 4. exercise regularly

____________________

a. in

b. up

c.on

d. over

3. You shouldn’t_________ things on the first day of Tet. a. make

b. hang

c. break

d. cook

c. busiest

d. most busy

4. Tet is the _________ time of the year. 5. be late for school

____________________

a. busy

b. busier

5. Tet is the biggest and most important_________ in Vietnam. a. festival

b. decoration

c. occasion

d. tradition

6. Tet is coming. We _________ clean and decorate our house. 6. fight with other kids

____________________

II. Choose 4 sentences to make your resolutions for this New Year. 1. _________________________________________________________________________ 2. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. _________________________________________________________________________ UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY 73

a. should

b. shouldn’t

c. mustn’t

d. are

7. I always _________ my grandparents a long life and good health. a. celebrate

b. wish

c. make

d. bring

8. The _________ is the first person to enter your house in the New Year. a. relative

b. first cousin

c. first footer

d. rooster

9. ‘_________ do Vietnamese people prepare for Tet?’‘They decorate their houses and cook

special food.’ a. What

b.Where

c.How

d.How often

b.Thailand

c.The USA

f. OK. Yes, let’s. I’ll make a cake.

g. No. We’ll buy apricot blossoms.

When will we visit grandparents, Dad?

8. How long will we stay at grandparents’ house?

10. ‘In which country do people throw water at one another?’‘_________’ a. Scotland

6. What will you do during Tet holiday?

d. Denmark

IV. There is one mistake In each sentence. Find, circle and correct the mistake. 1. My parents will to give us lucky money in red envelopes.

_________________

2. In New Year’s Eve, each family kills a rooster.

_________________

3. Before Tet, my mother go shopping to buy some new clothes.

_________________

4. April is the hotter time of the year in Thailand.

_________________

5. People have a lot of firework at Tet.

_________________

6. I write again soon to tell you more!

_________________

7. Children should fight each other at Tet.

_________________

8. They believe that the first footer decides the family’s lucky.

_________________

V. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets. 1. Vietnamese people _______________ (celebrate) the Lunar New Year every year. 2. This Tet, my family _______________(not buy) Chung cakes. We will make them. 3. Look! Mr. Quang _______________ (repaint) his house to welcome Tet. 4. You shouldn’t _______________(wear) white clothes on the first day of Tet. 5. People spend a few days _______________(clean) their houses before Tet. 6. Tet _______________(occur) in late January or early February.

h. Yes. Tet is a time for family reunion.

VIII. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. New Year is one of the most important (1) ________ in the United States. On New Year’s Eve, most people go to the parties. At twelve o’clock at night, everyone says “Happy New Year” and they (2) ________ their friends and relatives good luck. New Year’s parties usually last a long time. Many people don’t go home (3) ________ morning. Another holiday, Halloween, is mainly for children. On this holiday children (4) ________ as witches, ghosts or other characters. Most children go (5) ________ house to house and say “Trick or Treat”, asking for candy or fruit. If the people at the house do not give them candy, the children will play a trick on them. But this (6) ________ ever happens. Most people give them candy or fruit. 1. a. competitions

b. festivals

c. decorations

d. traditions

2. a. wish

b. exchange

c. bring

d. play

3. a. in

b. on

c. for

d. until

4. a. put

b. make

c. dress

d. set

5. a. from

b. in

c. to

d. for

6. a. mostly

b. hardly

c. usually

d. always

IX. Read the text carefully. Then answer the questions. Lunar New Year, or Tet, is the biggest and most important festival in Vietnam. Tet often falls between late January and early February. A great deal of excitement still builds up well before Tet. Streets are decorated with colouredlights and red banners. Shops are full of goods. People are busy buying gifts, cleaning and decorating their houses and cooking traditional foods.

7. _______________ (they/ give) a New Year party this weekend? 8. Phong loves _______________(eat) traditional food during Tet.

Homes are often decorated with plants and flowers at this time. Peach blossom is traditional at Tet in the North while apricot blossom is traditional in the South. One of Tet’s most special foods is bank chung, which is made of sticky rice, green beans and fatty pork.

VI. Write the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. Tet is coming. It’s our New Year _______________. (celebrate) 2. Easter is one of the best times for a family _______________. (gather)

6. I will help my father with the house _______________. (decorate)

On the days of Tet, people visit other family members or friends and they exchange New Year’s wishes. Children receive their “lucky money” inside red envelopes. Many people go to pagodas to pray for a happy new year for themselves and their families. Both children and adults take part in games and various forms of entertainment. Tet is really a time of fun and festivals throughout the country.

7. Everybody around is cheering and singing _______________. (happy)

1. When does Tet occur?

3. They wish each other good _______________for the New Year. (lucky) 4. You should keep _______________by eating well and exercising regularly. (health) 5. Shrimps move backwards and you will not _______________ in the New Year. (success)

8. Banh Chung is made of _______________rice, pork and green bean. (stick) VII. Match a sentence in column A to a response in column B. A 1. What should we do on New Year’s Eve?

B a. My family will travel to Thailand.

2. Will we buy peach blossoms this New Year, Mom? b. Thanks a lot. May all your wishes come true! 3. I wish you a healthy new year!

c. On the first day of Tet.

d. We should go out to watch fireworks.

Do you go home at Tet?

5. Shall we have a dinner party on New Year’s Eve?

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. What do people do to prepare for Tet?

e. For three days. UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY 75

_________________________________________________________________________ 3. Where is apricot blossom the symbol of Tet? _________________________________________________________________________ 4. What is Banh Chung made of? _________________________________________________________________________ 5. What do children receive during Tet? _________________________________________________________________________

6. On the days of Tet, what do Vietnamese people go to pagodas for?

TEST YOURSELF 2

_________________________________________________________________________ X. Rewrite these sentences, using must, mustn’t, should, shouldn’t. 1. Parking in this street is prohibited. You _____________________________________________________________________ 2. It’s not a good idea to swim immediately after a meal. You _____________________________________________________________________ 3. It’s really important to take this medicine three times a day. You _____________________________________________________________________ 4. It’s a good idea to listen to the weather forecast before going camping. You _____________________________________________________________________ 5. It’s a good for you to take exercise every day. You _____________________________________________________________________ 6. It’s very important not to drink the water there. It will make you ill. You _____________________________________________________________________

I. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest. 1. a. historic

b. exciting

c. island

d. firework

2. a. calendar

b. celebrate

c. decorate

d. school

3. a. wonder

b. compass

c. brother

d. forest

4. a. beach

b. teach

c. feather

d. peaceful

5. a. clothes

b. fireworks

c. scissors

d. mountains

II. Circle the odd one out. 1. a. pagoda

b. valley

c. desert

d. cave

2. a. compass

b. backpack

c. peach

d. rubber

3. a. holiday

b. decorate

c. spring

d. gathering

4. a. long

b. deep

c. high

d. cheap

5. a. visit

b. clean

c. slim

d. plant

III. Look at the pictures, then complete the sentences.

7. It’s not good to eat lots of sweets. You _____________________________________________________________________ 8. It’s against the rules to use your mobile phone in class. You _____________________________________________________________________

1. PhuQuoc is the largest ________________ in Vietnam.

2. Ha Long ________________is Vietnam’s most beautiful natural wonder.

3. Ban Gioc __________is located in Cao Bang Province.

4. On New Year’s Eve, colourful ________________light up the sky at midnight.

5. The Tran Hung Dao _____________ is made of bronze.

6. People often go to a ________________ to pray for luck, UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY 77

health and happiness.

VII. There is a mistake in each sentence. Find and correct it. 1. Vietnamese people prepares for Tet several weeks beforehand.

IV. Choose the correct answer a, b, c, or d.

2. Mount Everest is the most highest mountain in the world.

1. People often clean and decorate their houses ________ Tet. a. during

b.after

c.before

3. Da Nang is very interested. I really like it.

d. on

2. Turn left at the first traffic lights, and you’ll see the supermarket straight ________. a. away

b.ahead

c.aside

d. again

3. Mekong River is ________ river in South East Asia. a. long

b.longer

c.longest

4. They’ll go abroad next year, will they? 5. You look tired. You should work so hard. 6. If you read more, your vocabulary will get gooder every day.

d. the longest

VIII. Read the directions and write the name of the places in the blanks.

4. You ________ speak during the exam - it’s forbidden. a. should

b.shouldn’t

c.must

d. mustn’t

5. Some of her paintings are displayed at the local ________. a. art gallery

b.museum

c.stadium

d. hospital

6. The Vietnamese ________ Tet at different times each year. a. decorate

b. watch

c.celebrate

d. welcome

7. ________ we go out for dinner tonight? - Great! a. Must

b.Can

c.Will

d. Shall

c.What time

d. How often

8. ________ does Tet last? ~ About 10 days. a. When

b.How long

9. Life in the countryside is ________. There aren’t many things to do there. a. interesting

b.inconvenient

cboring

d.noisy

10. ‘Can you tell me the way to Tan Ky House please?’ ‘________. Go straight, then turn right.’ a. Certainly

b.Let’s go

c.Good idea

d.My pleasure

V. Put the verbs In brackets into the correct tense or form. 1. Everybody ________________ (cheer) and ________________ (sing) happily at the moment. 1. Can you tell me the way to the _______________, please?

2. Sorry, I can’t come. I ________________ (be) very busy tomorrow.

Certainly. Go straight on then take the second turning on your right. Keep going to the end of the road. It’s on your left.

3. ________________ (they/ play) football this weekend? 4. Most students ________________ (not go) to school on Saturday.

2. Excuse me! Is there a _______________ near here?

5. You must ________________ (take) a boat ride around the island. 6. After ________________ (get) up, children get dressed in new clothes and say wishes to their parents.

Yes. Go straight on. Turn left at the traffic lights. It’s on your left next to the library. 3. Can you help me please? 1 want to go to the _______________. Take this street. Go straight ahead until you reach the roundabout. At the roundabout, turn left. It’s on your right opposite the cinema.

VI. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. The weeks before Tet isthe________________ time of the year. (busy) 2. The street is always ________________ with pedestrians and traffic. (crowd) 3. The Grand Canyon is one of the ________________ wonders of the world. (nature) 4. Is living in the city ________________ than living in the countryside? (good) 5. On the first day of Tet, we dress ________________ and go to pagodas. (beauty) 6. Red symbolizes luck and ________________.(happy) TEST YOURSELF 2 79

4. Excuse me! Where is the nearest _______________? Go straight on to King’s Road then turn right. Go past the underground station. It’s on your right between the underground station and the Italian restaurant. 5. How can I get to the _______________? It’s this way. Go past the roundabout. It’s on the corner across the police station.

5. People sing a song called ‘Auld Lang Syne’ at midnight on New Year’s Eve.

6. Sir, could you tell me how to get to the _______________? Go straight on to the roundabout. Cross the roundabout and keep going to about 1 mile. It’s on your right. IX. Read these passages, then do the tasks.

6. Most British people know all the words to ‘Auld Lang Syne’. X. Complete the second sentences so that it has the same meaning to the first one. 1. It’s not good to spend a lot of time watching TV.

Mary, aged 17, Glasgow In Scotland, we celebrate Hogmanay at New Year. Last year I went to Edinburgh, our capital city, to the Hogmanay Street Party. It was epic! There were lots of cool bands. The fireworks were amazing too. I’m going again this year. My resolutions for this year are to be nicer to my little brother, spend less money on clothes and stop biting my nails.

You _____________________________________________________________________ 2. Antarctica is colder than any other place in the world. Antarctica is _______________________________________________________________ 3. Shall we go to Times Square to welcome the New Year? Why don’t ________________________________________________________________

Ben, 16, Brighton

4. A bicycle is more convenient than a car in towns.

What are my plans? Well, I’m going swimming with my parents on the New Year’s Day swim this year. It’s freezing cold in the water but it is a fun way to start the year. Quite a lot of people meet on Brighton beach for this first swim of the year. I hope it doesn’t snow! My resolutions are to do my homework on time, eat less junk food and save up for a motorbike!

A car is __________________________________________________________________ 5. Turn right at the first turning. Take ____________________________________________________________________ XI. Write sentences, using the words or phrases given. 1. Vietnamese people/ often/ clean/ decorate/ houses/ Tet.

Sophie, 18, Newcastle upon Tyne This New Year’s Eve I’m going to the centre of Newcastle with my sisters and friends to see in the new year. I love being in a crowd when the clocks strike midnight. Everyone kisses each other at twelve o’clock. Then we all sing a song called ‘Auld Lang Syne’ - it’s really funny because nobody can remember the words! We will probably get back home at four or five in the morning. As for my resolutions, I’m going to learn how to play the guitar, go running every day and study hard to get good grades for university. Stuart, 14, Devon I’m going snowboarding in Spain with my cousin and my parents. I want to stay up till midnight on New Year’s Eve but maybe I’ll be too tired after snowboarding all day. My New Year’s resolution is to not make any New Year’s resolutions. They are impossible to keep! A. Fill in the gap with the correct names. 1. ______________ is going to a street party in Scotland. 2. ______________ is going to sing on New Year’s Eve. 3. ______________ will be in a foreign country on New Year’s Eve. 4. ______________ isn’t going to make any New Year’s resolutions. 5. ______________ wants to learn to play a musical instrument. 6. ______________ wants to have a healthier diet. B. Decide if the statements are true (T) or false (F). 1. New Year’s resolutions often involve health and money. 2. People usually celebrate Hogmanay at New Year in England. 3. There are no fireworks for Hogmanay. 4. It’s traditional to go swimming in Brighton on New Year’s Eve. TEST YOURSELF 2 81

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. The air / the city / polluted / the air / the countryside. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. It/ very/ interesting/ take/ boat trip/ the Perfume River _________________________________________________________________________

UNIT 1

MY HOBBIES

A. PHONETICS I. Put the words in the correct column depending on the spelling of the letter(s) in bold. occasion, world, girl, answer, heard, mother, birth, around, neighbour, work, early, upon, parent, learn, expert, singer, nature, sunburn, collect, shirt, monopoly, hurt, carrot, doctor, word, dirty

/Đˇ:/

/É&#x2122;/ _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________

_________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________

II. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others.

1. a. pottery

b. flower

c. silent

2. a. girl

b. expert

c. open

d. service d. burn

3. a. sentence

b. world

c. picture

d. dangerous

4. a. surfing

b. collect

c. concert

d. melody

5. a. worst

b. learn

c. control

d. dessert

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Look at the pictures and name the activities. mountain climbing horse-riding making models

carving wood

bird-watching

making pottery

arranging flowers

playing board games

1. _____________

2. ______________

3. ______________

4. ______________

5. _____________

6. ______________

7. ______________

8. ______________

1. Wait a minute, please. The concert ______________ soon.

II. Complete the sentences with the words from the box.

2. When ______________ humans ______________ on the Red Planet? photos

fishing

eggshells

music

gardening

painting

model cars

swimming

3. OK. At 5 o’clock we ______________ you outside the shopping centre. 4. They probably ______________me the job. I had a terrible interview. 5. I’m sorry about losing that book. I ______________ you another one next week.

1. She usually goes _____________ with her friends in the pool near her school. 2. Sarah likes _____________. She plants lots of flowers and vegetables in her home garden.

6. ________ you ________ me when you get the news? 7. If it doesn’t rain tomorrow, we ______________ our umbrellas.

3. Every weekend, I go _____________ in my uncle’s boat, or just off the shoreline. 4. In later years, he took up _____________ as a hobby. He drew watercolour landscapes.

8. Turn on your laptop tonight. We ______________ a little bit. 9. I______________ them here again, whatever you say.

5. My hobby is listening to _____________. It can help relax my mind.

10. I think people ______________ CDs in 20 years’ time.

6. I have recently started a new hobby – collecting _____________. 7. Most people take _____________ and post them on their social networking accounts.

VI. Put the verbs in brackets into the Present Simple or Future Simple.

8. Carving _____________ is a great hobby that can make you happier.

1. I ______________ (listen) to music in my free time.

III. Put the words into the correct column.

2. It often (rain) ______________ in the summer. 3. Do you think that he ______________ (recognise) me?

skating

camping

football

swimming

stamps

badges

4. We ______________ (not want) to see that film because it looks boring.

gymnastics

chess

gardening

books

cartoons

crossword

5. What time __________ the film __________ (begin)?

sports

judo

aerobics

jogging

dolls

board games

6. I promise that I ______________ (not be) late for school again.

coins

films

tennis

television

cycling

game shows

7. Simon usually ______________ (do) his homework and ______________ (watch) TV at the same time.

PLAY: ______________________________________________________________________

8. The students ______________ (plant) some flowers in the schoolyard tomorrow.

GO: ________________________________________________________________________

9. Nam and Vinh______________ (play) volleyball three times a week.

DO: ________________________________________________________________________

10. The train ______________ (leave) at 6 o’clock in the morning.

COLLECT: __________________________________________________________________

VII. Complete the sentences, using the -ing form of the verbs in the box.

WATCH: ____________________________________________________________________ tidy

IV. Put the verbs in brackets into the Present Simple.

fly

take

watch

cook

make

wait

read

play

1. I _____________ (not visit) my parents very often.

1. Do you fancy _____________ out this evening?

2. ____________________ (Mai/ go) to school every day? ~ No, she (go) _____________ to school from Monday to Friday.

2. I like _____________ tennis at the weekend.

3. The teachers at our school _____________ (give) us lots of homework.

4. Ann’s father doesn’t like _____________ ice hockey on TV.

4. My brother _____________ (play) tennis, but he _____________ (not like) it.

5. My mother hates _____________, so we eat out every often.

5. How often _____________ (they/ go) jogging?

6. Do you like _____________ pottery?

6. We (not study) _____________ chemistry because it _____________ (be) difficult.

7. She dislikes _____________ her room every day.

7. _____________ (your parents/ watch) TV every night?

8. My niece loves _____________ adventure books.

8. Mark’s class _____________ (do) sport on Monday and Wednesday.

9. I can’t stand _____________ for buses in the rain.

9. Children often _____________ (use) a computer for school work.

10. They detest _____________, so they usually travel by train or coach.

10. Mike _____________ (usually/ not play) computer games during the week.

VIII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

V. Complete the following sentences with will or won’t and a verb from the box.

1. Would you mind _____________ (watch) my bag for a few minutes?

buy

phone

take

invite

meet offer

live

end

use

chat

3. Jim enjoys _____________ photos of himself and his friends.

2. I enjoy _____________ (listen) to music while I’m doing the cooking. 3. He wants _____________ (buy) a new computer game.

UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES 7

8 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

4. I’d like _____________ (speak) to Mr Davis, please. Is he there?

C. SPEAKING

5. Please avoid _____________ (make) silly mistakes in this exercise.

I. Write questions for the underlined parts.

6. The children would love _____________ (eat) French fries.

1. A: _________________________________________

7. She really loves _____________ (work) with children.

B: My hobby is photography.

8. We tried _____________ (call) you but your mobile was off.

2. A: ________________________________________

9. They intend _____________ (build) houses on the school playing fields.

B: I started my hobby five years ago.

10. I can’t stand _____________ (do) the washing up.

3. A: ________________________________________ B: I enjoy my hobby because I think it’s creative.

IX. Choose the correct verb form or tense.

1. I’m told you are ill. I hope you ________ better again. a. will feel

b. feel

c. are feeling

4. A: ________________________________________ d. don’t feel

2. We were getting tired, so we stopped ________ lunch. a. have

b. having

c. to have

5. A: ________________________________________ d. for having

3. ______ you ______ to school every morning? a. Does ... walk

b. Do ... walk

c. Will... walk

b. going

D. Are ... walking

b. won’t be

c. goes

d. go

B: He often plays volleyball at the court near his school.

c. doesn’t be

8. A: ________________________________________ d. is

B: He likes to play volleyball with his friends.

6. We ________ swimming because it’s fun and good exercise. a. like

b. are liking

c. will like

II. Put the dialogue into the correct order.

d. liked

7. My grandparents don’t like ________ in the city because it’s noisy and crowded. a. live

b. lived

c. living

d. to living

8. Fire needs oxygen to burn. It ________ without oxygen. a. burn

b. burns

c. don’t burn

b. to surf

c. surfing

b. watching – go

c. to watch – going

___ I like basketball, too. Shall we play together this Saturday morning? ___ I really like painting. _1_ Hey there! ___ I’m going to the judo club.

d. to be surfing

10. I don’t mind ________ a DVD, but I prefer ________ to the cinema. a. to watch - to go

___ Thanks. What else do you do in your free time?

___ Yeah, what kinds of hobby do you have? d. doesn’t burn

9. How much time do you spend ________ the Internet per day? a. surf

B: He plays volleyball three times a week. 7. A: ________________________________________

5. You needn’t wear your coat. It ________ cold today. a. will be

B: Jim usually plays volleyball in his free time. 6. A: ________________________________________

4. He enjoys ________ cycling at the weekend. a. to go

B: I spend two hours a day on my hobby.

___ Oh, that’s really cool! ___ Hey, what are you going?

d. watching – to go

___ How creative you are!

X. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition.

___ I also swim and play basketball.

1. Hi, everyone. Welcome ________ my house!

___ You do judo?

2. Is there anything good ________ television tonight?

___ Sounds great!

3. What do you like doing ________ your free time?

___ Yeah, I’m a black belt of judo.

4. He takes photographs ________ a hobby.

D. READING

5. Will you take ________ making pottery in the future?

I. Fill in each blank with a word from the box.

6. He is interested ________ collecting toy cars. It’s his favourite hobby. 7. ________ weekends, we usually go fishing in the river.

kinds

classify

books

near

8. My cousin always gives me gifts ________ special occasions.

name

collection

clean

immediately

UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES 9

10 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

Collecting (1) ____________ is my favourite hobby. I started my hobby five years ago. Thefirst item in my (2) ____________ is a book about Doraemon. And now I have a lot of books of all (3) ____________ comics, children’s, history, science, detective, adventure, etc. Whenever I find an interesting book I buy it (4) ____________. I usually buy books in the bookstores (5) ____________ my school and my house. Sometimes my relatives and my friends give me books as a gift. I (6) ____________ my books into different categories and put each category in one corner of my bookshelf with a (7) ____________ tag on it. It takes all my free time to keep everything (8) ____________ and dusted. It keeps me amused for hours, too. II. Read the text carefully, then decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F).

Our life would be hard without rest and recreation. And people have many different ideas of how to spend their free time. If you enjoy doing a thing or activity in your free time, then you have a hobby. A hobby is an activity, interest, enthusiasm, or pastime that is undertaken for pleasure or relaxation, done during one’s own time. A person’s hobbies depend on his age, character and personal interests. An interesting thing to one person can be boring to another. That’s why some people prefer reading, cooking, knitting, collecting, playing a musical instrument, photography or playing computer games while others prefer dancing, travelling, camping or sports. 1. A hobby is anything that you enjoy doing in your free time.

2. We all find painting interesting because it’s a creative activity. → We all think _______________________________________________________________

3. His hobby is collecting toy cars. → He collects ________________________________________________________________

4. It isn’t necessary to finish the work today. → You don’t ________________________________________________________________

5. When did you start your hobby? → How long _________________________________________________________________

6. It took me three hours to make this pottery jug. → I spent ___________________________________________________________________

7. My father likes to do gardening at the weekend. → My father enjoys ___________________________________________________________

8. Why don’t we go swimming this afternoon? → What about _______________________________________________________________

TEST FOR UNIT 1

2. Different people have the same hobbies. 3. A hobby can provide us with relaxation.

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

4. Your hobby may be changed as you get older.

1. a. exciting

b. excellent

5. One person’s hobby may be a boring thing to another person.

2. a. hobby

b. cycle

c. bye

d. why

6. Playing sports is not a hobby.

3. a. pottery

b. collect

c. melody

d. monopoly

E. WRITING I. Arrange the words to make sentences.

c. experience

d. expensive

4. a. heard

b. bird

c. world

d. picture

5. a. bird-watching

b. children

c. school

d. challenge

II. Match the word(s) in A with the rest in B to make a complete sentence.

1. hobby/ you/ have/ any / do/?

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. his/ do/ what/ your/ brother/ free/ does/ in/ time/? _________________________________________________________________________ 3. he/ summer/ in/ climbing/ goes/ mountain/ the/ usually/. _________________________________________________________________________ 4. friends/ monopoly/ enjoy/ I/ with/ playing/ my/? _________________________________________________________________________

1. Model making

a.is actually a part of the craft of decorating eggs.

2. Eggshell carving

b. needs a pattern, a needle and threads.

3. Reading

c.is the process of cutting a piece of wood to make decorative objects.

4. Sewing

d.means making very small replicas of real objects.

5. Woodcarving

e.is the sport or activity of climbing mountains.

6. Mountaineering

f.develops your imagination and widens your knowledge.

III. Choose the best answer a, b, c, or d to complete the sentence.

5. it/ boring/ because/ finds/ time/ models/ Jim/ takes/ lots of/ making/. _________________________________________________________________________

1. My father can make beautiful pieces of art ________ empty eggshells. a. of

6. you/ up/ will/ ice-skating/ future/ in/ take/ the/? _________________________________________________________________________ II. Complete the second sentence so that it has the same meaning as the first one.

b. from

c. in

d. into

2. Why don’t you take ________ a new hobby? a. up

b. in

c. over

d. after

3. Collecting cars is a(n) ________ hobby. It costs a lot of money.

1. What is your hobby? → What hobby _______________________________________________________________

UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES 11

a. interesting

b. cheap

12 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

c. expensive

d. unusual

4. I enjoy to ride my bike to school.

4. More people are ________ birds today than ever before. a. seeing

b. looking

c. hearing

d. watching

5. Do you enjoy ________ board games? a. play

b. to play

c. playing

d. played

c. difficult

d. unusual

6. Be careful not to drop it; it’s very ________. a. unique

b. fragile b. play

c. do

b. where

c. how

b. How long

c. How often

b. Certainly

c. No matter

7. We like doing fishing because it is relaxing.

___________

8. Do you think bird-watching interesting?

___________ a. I think it is dangerous.

2. Does your mother like watching films on TV? 3. What do you think about windsurfing?

b. Nope, I have another plan.

d. when

4. Will you take up carving eggshells someday?

d. Yes, she enjoys mountain biking.

5. Why do you find making models boring?

e. No, she loves going to the cinema.

6. What are your hobbies?

f. About three years ago.

7. When did your brother start painting?

g. Because it takes too much time.

8. Does she have any difficult hobby?

h. Swimming and playing chess.

d. When

10. ‘I think model making is an expensive hobby.’ ‘________ it’s incredibly cheap.’ a.You’re right

___________

1. Will you go swimming tomorrow?

9. ________ have you had your hobby? ~ For three years. a. How much

___________

6. Do you still play football next year?

d. work

8. I hope he’ll teachme ________ to do eggshell carving. a. what

5. We usually go in a small lake out of the city at weekends.

VII. Match the questions with the answer.

7. Sam and I ________ the same hobby. We both like playing computer games. a. share

___________

d. Not at all

c. Maybe. I find it really interesting.

IV. Complete the sentences with the correct form or tense of the verb play, go, do or collect.

VIII. Choose the word which best fits each gap.

1. He ________ tennis with his father every Sunday.

Many people (1) _______ crafting with paper. The materials are readily available and don’t cost much; and no super special talents is needed. Anyone (2) _______ be a paper crafter.

2. We ________ camping in Dam Sen Park next Saturday.

7. The children ________ volleyball on the beach at the moment.

There are many different paper craft techniques. Origami is one of ancient techniques developed in Japan where squares of paper are (3) _______ and formed into various objects such as flowers, animals, and boxes. Card (4) _______ is also a favourite paper craft technique. Birthday cards are the most popular greeting cards, followed by Christmas cards. Receiving a (5) _______ card is a special gift, because of the time and effort someone spent making it. It lets the recipient know just how much you care (8) _______ them.

8. When I’m waiting for the train, I usually ________ crosswords.

1. a. enjoy

b. decide

c. want

d. learn

9. She dislikes ________ chess because she finds it boring.

2. a. must

b. should

c. can

d.will

10. I ________ books since I was ten years old.

3. a. wrapped

b. folded

c. torn

d.taken

V. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets.

4. a. making

b. doing

c. changing

d. receiving

1. Rossie has a large ______________ (collect)of dolls.

5. a. handmake

b. handmaking

c. handmade

d. making hand

2. A______________ is someone who enjoys watching birds. (birdwatch)

6. a. in

b. on

c. over

d. about

3. My sister’s hobby is ______________.She took a lot of nice photos. (photo)

IX. Read the text carefully, then answer the questions.

4. I find woodcarving ______________ because it’s a creative activity. (interest)

My name’s Susan. I have two favourite hobbies. My first hobby is reading. I started to do it when I was four years old. The first time I did it, I felt interested. So I kept reading. I enjoy reading because it can make me relaxed and calm. Moreover, it can give me an imagination, so I can write books in the future. I can learn the different cultures and customs of other countries in the world, too.

3. ________ you ________ coins some day in the future? 4. Do you want ________ a jigsaw puzzle with me? 5. I enjoy________ cycling at the weekend. 6. My uncle ________ karate when he was young.

5. ______________ eggshells are unique gifts for family and friends. (carve) 6. A hobby is an ______________ that you do for pleasure. (act) 7. I think collecting glass bottles is ______________. (usual) 8. Susan is very ______________ and she paints very well. (create) VI. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

1. Nam is my classmates. He watches TV every night.

___________

2. I think collecting stamps are interesting.

___________

3. My dad cooks very good. He loves preparing meals for our family.

___________ UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES 13

My second hobby is gardening. I have made a small garden and planted many beds of flowers. In the spring season, my garden is full of beautiful flowers. I have a separate plot for vegetables – carrots, potatoes, etc. In the evening, I water the plants and remove the weeds. I love sitting in my garden and reading my books. It is very pleasant to be there! 1. What are Susan’s hobbies? _________________________________________________________________________

14 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

2. When did she start reading? _________________________________________________________________________

UNIT 2

HEALTH

3. How did she feel when she first read a book? _________________________________________________________________________

A. PHONETICS

4. Why does she enjoy reading? _________________________________________________________________________

I. Underline the sound /f/ and circle the sound /v/.

5. What has she planted in her garden? _________________________________________________________________________ 6. When does she water plants? _________________________________________________________________________

fun

fine

coffee

over

graph

phone

brave

verb

stuff

clever

enough

laughing

leaf

leave

vat

view

few

valley

save

valve

X. Write sentences, using the cues given.

II. Say the sentences out loud. Then write the words with the sound /f/ and /v/ in the table.

1. I/ enjoy/ play / sports/ because/ it/ good/ health

1. I feel so bad. Maybe I should take a rest for some minutes.

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. your children/ go/ camp/every summer holiday?

2. His wife is laughing at the picture of the knight on the floor. 3. Living our life and holding our fate.

_________________________________________________________________________ 3. I/ think/ photography/ can/ expensive hobby

4. Which is the best movie in Fast and Furious series? 5. The invitation cards are beautiful and creative.

_________________________________________________________________________

6. What animals have the rough skin? - Elephants, frogs, etc.

4. my cousin/ give/ me/ book/ gift/ next birthday

/f/

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________

5. he/ find/ mountain climbing/ dangerous/ so/ he/ not take/ it _________________________________________________________________________

/v/

_________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________

6. I/ hope/ the future/ he/ teach/ me/ how/ do/ eggshell carving _________________________________________________________________________

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Match the common health problem with its definition.

1. flu

a. a common illness that affects the nose and/or throat, making you cough,

2. allergy

b. an abnormally high body temperature

3. cold

c. a medical condition that makes you become ill or get a rash when you

4. sunburn

d. the pain in the middle or inner ear

5. obesity

e. the condition of having painful red skin that is caused by staying in the

sneeze, etc.

eat, smell, or touch something

sun for too long 6. earache

f. the pain in a tooth or teeth

g. the condition of being fat or overweight

toothache

8. fever

UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES 15

h. a very bad cold caused by a virus that causes fever, pains and weakness

16 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

II. Fill in the blanks with the health problems in part I.

6. The popular thing to lose weight is “eat more / less and exercise more / less”.

1. She feels very weak, has a high fever and her muscles hurt. She has __________.

7. Stay outdoors and do more / less physical activities. You will be more healthy.

2. He eats lots of junk food and be overweight. __________ is his problem.

8. Spend more / less time in front of screens, such as the phone, TV or computer. It’s not good for your eyes.

3. She went outside all day long without wearing a hat. Now her skin turns red and hurts. She has got __________. 4. I think I’m getting a __________. I’ve got a sore throat and a runny nose.

VI. Complete the imperatives with more or less, using the verbs in the box.

play

drink

eat

read

sleep

spend

watch

5. Mark had lobster for dinner, and now his skin becomes covered with red marks. Hesays he has a shellfish .

1. ____________video games or your eyes will be hurt.

6. If you’ve got __________, go and see a dentist.

2. ____________ fruit, vegetables or nuts because they are healthy.

7. His body is too hot and soaked in sweat, but he feels very cold. I think he has a __________.

3. ____________ if you want to be more active.

8. My sister feels pain in her ear. She has __________.

4. If you want to improve your knowledge, ____________ books.

III. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb have or feel. Add a or an where necessary.

5. ____________ TV because too much TV is really bad for your eyes.

1. I __________ flu. I __________ tired and weak.

7. ____________ exercise, and you will feel fitter and healthier.

2. Jane __________ sick, so she stays at home today.

8. ____________ time on social media, so you can focus on your tasks.

3. Maybe she __________ fever. Her face is red and she tells me that she __________ very hot.

VII. Fill in the text with the words in the box. You can use one word more than once.

6. If you’re outside on a hot day, ____________ water.

4. I __________ terrible headache yesterday, but I __________ better now. much

5. What’s wrong with Sarah? Does she __________ toothache? 6. ‘Have you ever __________ allergy to seafood?’ ‘Yes, I __________ ill when I ate some lobsters two months ago. 7. My friend __________ sunburn after a day at the beach. Her skin becomes red and sore. 8. I __________ itchy and I __________ runny nose. Do I __________ cold? IV. Put the words into the correct column.

flu, playing sports, cough, walking, sore throat, watching TV fever, gardening, allergy, swimming, runny nose, doing aerobics, headache, exercising, sneezing, cycling, red skin, relaxing, stomachache, sleeping

Illnesses and symptoms

Activities

many

little

less

It’s important for people to eat as (1) ________ as they need to give them energy. Ifthey eat too (2) ________ food or the wrong food they won’t have enough energy. If they eat too (3) ________, they will need to make (4) ________ exercise; otherwise they will put on weight. Fat is very high in calories, and has been linked with heart disease. (5) ________ experts believe that eating (6) ________ fat would help to reduce heart disease. Sugar isn’t good for the energy balance. There’s no doubt that too (7) ________ sugar makes you fat and it is not good for your teeth either. On the other hand, fibre that is found in cereals, fruits and vegetables is an important part of a healthy balanced diet. One of the simplest ways of eating (8) ________ fibre is to eat (9) ________ bread. It’s a good, cheap source of fibre and nutrients without too (10) ________ calories. Potatoes are good, too. So to keep healthy, eat (11) ________ fatty food, sweets, chocolate, cakes, jam and eat (12) ________ bread, potatoes, pasta, fresh fruit and vegetables. VIII. Fill in the blanks with and,so, but, or.

1. We stayed at home ________ watched a film. 2. I want to buy a new car, ________ I don’t have enough money. 3. She had a terrible headache last night, ________ she couldn’t go out.

V. Underline the correct words.

1. Your eyes look very tired. Let your eyes rest more / less and watch more / less TV. 2. If you want to stay in shape, eat more / less healthy food like fruits, vegetables or fish. 3. Drink more / less water when you have a high fever.

4. I eat cake, ________ I never eat biscuits; I don’t like them. 5. Would you like cake ________ biscuits with your coffee? 6. My job is very interesting, ________ it doesn’t pay very well. 7. We can go by bus, ________ we can walk.

4. If you want to lose weight, eat more / less junk food.

8. My classmate studies very hard, ________ she always gets good marks.

5. Sunbathe more / less to avoid getting sunburnt.

9. You had better hurry up, ________ you’ll be late for work. UNIT 2: HEALTH 17

18 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

10. The Japanese eat healthily, ________ they have high life expectancy.

I. Complete the conversation, using the phrases or sentences in the box.

IX. Join each pair of sentences by using a suitable conjunction: and, but, or, so.

1. The bus stopped. The man got off. _________________________________________________________________________ 2. Junk food tastes so good. It is bad for your health. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. You should eat less junk food. You will put on weight. _________________________________________________________________________ 4. He is a vegetarian. He doesn’t eat any meat. _________________________________________________________________________ 5. Would you likemeat for lunch? Would you like vegetables for lunch? _________________________________________________________________________ 6. Susan went to the park. She had a ride on the swing. _________________________________________________________________________ 7. I love fruit. I am allergic to strawberries. _________________________________________________________________________ 8. There was a heavy rain. The roads were flooded. _________________________________________________________________________ X. Match the two parts of the sentence.

1. The doctor advises him to relax more,

a. so he ate all the cakes.

2. The Americans love steak,

b. but I prefers coffee.

3. Burgers are very tasty,

c. or he will be sick.

4. My father likes tea,

d. or you’ll spoil the surprise.

5. He was very hungry,

e. because he had a toothache.

6. Sam went to the dentist’s,

f. and they love hamburgers, too.

7. We wanted to go to the cinema

g. although they are not very healthy.

8. Don’t tell Mary about her birthday party,

h. but there weren’t any seats left.

1. _____;2. _____;3. _____;4. _____; 5. _____;6. _____; 7. _____; 8. _____ XI. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition.

what are the best foods to eat?

can I drink it sometimes?

it's bad for your teeth and health.

what should I avoid?

how to stay healthy?

what else is important?

Tom:

Can you give me some suggestions on (1) _______________________

Doctor:

Well, first of all, you need to make sure that you eat the right foods.

Tom:

(2)_______________________

Doctor:

You should eat fresh fruits, vegetables, and whole grains.

Tom:

(3)_______________________

Doctor:

You need to avoid highly fatty and greasy foods.

Tom:

(4)_______________________

Doctor:

You need to get plenty of exercise every day.

Tom:

How about soda? (5)_______________________

Doctor: It’s okay to drink soda once in a while, but never overdo it. (6) ___________________ II. Match the health problems with the correct advice. 1. I have spots on my face.

a.You should go to your dentist.

2. I get sunburnt.

b. Eat less junk food and do more exercise.

3. I’ve got flu.

c. You shouldn’t drink cold drinks.

4. I’m putting on weight.

d. Apply an aloe vera lotion and drink lots of water.

5. I have a toothache. My tooth hurts.

e. Spend less time in front of screens.

6. I have a sore throat.

f. Stay at home and have a rest

7. My eyes are sore and tired. g. Wash your face regularly. III. Put the dialogue into the correct order. ___ My father gave me some painkillers. _1_ Hi. What’s the matter with you? ___ A horrible headache? Has anything hit you in the head lately? ___ If you are still hurts, you should see the doctor. ___ Oh! Did you take any medicines?

1. Would you like to go out? - No, thanks. I’d rather stay ________ home. 2. If you’re going to watch the football, you can count me ________. I don’t like football. 3. I’ve put ________ 2kg in the last month.

___ I had a horrible headache last week. ___ My head hit a door few days ago.

D. READING

4. The Japanese eat healthily, so they live ________ a long time.

I. Fill in each blank with a word from the box.

5. Sitting too close ________ the TV hurts your eyes. 6. Be careful ________ what you eat and drink.

put

7. She runs six miles every day to help keep herself ________ shape.

home-cooked

vitamins

weight

growing

unhealthy

diet

Good nutrition is especially important for (1) ___________ teenagers. Unfortunately many teenagers have an unbalanced (2) ___________. They buy (3) ___________ takeawayfood every day or even a few times a day. If you eat fast food regularly, you are more likely to (4) ___________ on weight than if you eat fast food only occasionally. About nine in ten teenagers

8. Watching TV too much isn’t good ________ your eyes.

C. SPEAKING UNIT 2: HEALTH 19

20 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

junk food every day. This might be fizzy drinks and snacks (5) ___________ potato chips. Compared to (6) ___________ food, junk food is almost always: higher in fat, particularly saturated fat; higher in salt; higher in sugar; lower in fibre; lower in nutrients, such as (7) ___________ and minerals.

5. Alex/ usually/ fishing/ so/ loves/ goes/ in/ near/ he/ his house/ fishing/ the lake. _________________________________________________________________________ 6. you/ some/ clean/ yourself/ avoid/ diseases/ by/ can/ keeping. _________________________________________________________________________

Junk food is poor fuel for your body. A poor diet can cause (8) ___________ gain, high blood pressure, fatigue and concentration problems.

II. Write the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first one.

II. Read the text, then decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F).

1. Sue started to eat a low carb diet two years ago.

These are some easy habits that help you stay healthy and live longer.

→ Sue has __________________________________________________________________

Go for a jog

2. Could you take me to the airport Friday morning?

Exercise is key to good health. Aerobic activity, like running, is crucial for getting your blood pumping and your heart working. A recent study showed that people who run have 25 to 40 per cent reduced risk of early death, and live about three years longer. Get more sun - but not too much

→ Would you mind____________________________________________________________

3. How about going to the movies tonight? → Let’s _____________________________________________________________________

4. July stayed home from school yesterday because she had ahigh fever.

The “sunshine vitamin” – vitamin D, that is – has been shown to fight to disease, improve bone health, and prevent depression. Concerns over skin cancer are well-founded, and sunblock is generally a good idea. But getting 15 to 30 minutes of sun exposure a day should be adequate for vitamin D production.

→ July had a high fever, ________________________________________________________

5. She eats fruits and veggies every day, but she keeps gaining weight. → Although _________________________________________________________________

6. Mark’s gained 5 kilos since he quit smoking.

Stress less The impact of stress on our overall health is huge, so reducing stress is one way to lower our risk of many deadly diseases.

→ Mark’s put ________________________________________________________________

7. Joana doesn’t eat much in order not to be overweight. → Joana doesn’t eat much because ________________________________________________

Eat more fruits and veggies If you want to live longer, eat more fruits and vegetables. The vitamins, minerals, and most importantly, the fibre help control satiety so you do not need to eat much of the animal foods. High fibre diets promote lower cholesterol levels, and reduce the risk of heart disease and cancers such as colon cancer.

8. It’s a good idea to do exercise regularly. → You _____________________________________________________________________

TEST FOR UNIT 2

1. One of the most important things you can do to stay healthy is to exercise.

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

2. Vitamin D comes from the sun. 3. Getting too much sun can be harmful.

1. a. myth

b. cycling

c. itchy

d. allergy

4. Stress doesn’t impact on your health.

2. a. headache

b. spread

c. health

d. weak

5. Fruits and vegetables contain vitamins, minerals and fibre.

3. a. fat

b. leaf

c. of

d. safe

6. A high fibre diet can cause heart disease and colon cancer.

4. a. flu

b. sunburn

c. junk

d. much

E. WRITING

5. a. wash

b. wear

c. wake

d. wrap

I. Arrange the words to make sentences.

II. Choose the odd one out.

1. cold/ I/ sore throat/ love/ a/ drinks/ but/ have/ I.

1. a. running

b. coughing

c. cycling

d. swimming

2. a. vegetables

b. fish

c. fried chicken

d. fruits

3. a. cold

b. cough

c. stuffy nose

d. sunburn

4. a. soda

b. milk

c. fruit Juice

d. water

5. a. fever

b. health

c. obesity

d. headache

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. Jim/ overweight/ so/ eats/ is/ fast food/ too much/ he. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. too much/ bad/ television/ watching/ for/ health/ your/ is? _________________________________________________________________________

III. Choose the best answer a, b, c, or d to complete the sentence.

4. the flu/ should/ you/ a cold/ if/ have/ or/ you/ home/ stay. _________________________________________________________________________ UNIT 2: HEALTH 21

1. Please wake me ________ at 5 and we will leave at 6 in the morning.

22 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

a. up

b. on

c. over

d. in

7. Lack of vitamin E can cause skin diseases and ______________. (tired)

2. If you want to ________ weight, you should follow a low-fat diet. a. lose

b. gain

c. put on

8. The symptoms of the disease include fever and ______________. (head) d. take

VI. Match the questions to the answers.

3. Junk foods are high in fat, sodium and sugar, which can lead to ________. a. fever

b. allergy

c. obesity

1. How many calories should I eat in a day?

a.A little better, but still feel tired.

d. stomachache

2. Shall we go and play basketball?

b.Wash your face daily and use gentle skin care products.

d. fit

3. What activity uses a lot of calories?

c. Eat less junk food and do more exercise

4. What should I do to prevent spots?

d.Count me out. 1 prefer to stay home.

d. less

5. How do you feel now?

e.We’ll feel tired and weak.

6. What happens when we don’t have enough calories?

f. Between 1,600 and 2,500.

d. and

7. Why should people drink green tea?

g.I think it’s running.

8. What should I do to lose weight?

h.Because it can help prevent cancer.

4. He looks so ________. He can’t keep his eyes open! a. happy

b. tired

c. healthy

5. If you want to stay healthy, eat ________ vegetables, wholegrains, fruit and fish. a. much

b. fewer

c. more

6. Fruit tastes good ________ it’s healthy for your body. a. so

b.but

c. or

7. You are ________ you eat, so don’t eat unhealthy foods. a. what

b.who

c. which

d. that

VII. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

8. She looks very tired. She should work ________ or she will get sick. a. well

b. less

c. more

d. enough

2. You can avoid many diseases by eat healthy food.

9. She stays in ________ by exercising daily and eating well. a. health

b. fit

b. size

1. Sitting close to the laptop’s screen hurt your eyes.

d. shape

3. You look so bad! How’s wrong with you? 4. Eating lots of fast food can make you fat or obesity.

10. Don’t sit too close to the screen, ________. a. and you’ll hurt your eyes

b. so you can see more clearly

5. Eating more fruit and vegetables to get vitamins, minerals, fiber.

c. or you’ll get a headache

d. but it’s bad for your health

6. Good nutrition is a important part of leading a healthy lifestyle.

IV. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

7. Watch more television; if not, your eyes will be tired.

1. ______________ (you/ eat) fried chicken last night?

8. I’ve drunk three glasses of beer, but I’ve got a headache.

2. He ______________ (put) on a lot of weight recently.

VIII. Choose the word which best fits each gap.

3. I often ______________ (drink) coca cola when I was a child.

Breakfast is the (1) ______ important meal of the day. It provides the nutrients your body needs for good health, the calories it needs for (2) ______ and helps to maintain your blood sugar level. Studies have shown that people who don’t have breakfast have a low blood sugar level and are often slow, tired, hungry and (3) ______ to concentrate. Surprisingly, breakfast actually plays a part in weight control. It's easier to (4) ______ weight if you eat in the morning rather than later in the day. Dividing the day’s calories (5) ______ three meals helps take off weight more efficiently than (6) ______ breakfast and having two larger meals a day does.

4. Joana ______________ (wash) her face regularly to prevent spots. 5. I think he ______________ (not pass) the exam. He hasn’t studied at all. 6. She ______________ (have) a sore throat, and she ______________ (cough) terribly now. 7. You should try ______________ (exercise) a couple times a week. 8. He keeps ______________ (sneeze), so I think he’s got a cold. 9. What ______________ (you/ do) tomorrow evening? 10. My mother doesn’t like ______________(eat) fast food. V. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets.

1. The Japanese eat ______________, so they have high life expectancy. (health) 2. Drinking unclean water can cause ______________. (sick) 3. My uncle is a ______________. He doesn’t eat meat or fish. (vegetable)

1. a. healthy

b. tasty

c. main

2. a. strenght

b. power

c. energy

d. effort

3. a. able

b. enable

c. unable

d. capable

4. a. lose

b. put

c. gain

d. drop

5. a. in

b. into

c. up

d. for

6. a. skipping

b. making

c. buying

d. serving

4. ______________ can increase the risk of heart disease and diabetes. (obese) 5. I’m ______________ to shellfish, so I can’t eat lobster and shrimp. (allergy) IX. Read the text carefully then choose the correct answers.

6. I got ______________ during my beach vacation. (sunburn) UNIT 2: HEALTH 23

24 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

d. most

The island of Okinawa in Japan has some of the oldest people in the world. It’s famous for its high number of centenarians – men and women who live beyond 100 years of age. There have been many scientific studies of their lifestyle and you can even buy cookery books based on their diets. Some of the reasons for their good health are that they ...

UNIT 3

COMMUNITY SERVICE

go fishing and eat what they catch. regularly do gardening and grow their own fruit and vegetables.

A. PHONETICS

go cycling and never drive when they can walk.

I. Look at the pictures and complete the words. Then put them in the correct column.

often spend time with friends. They meet at people’s houses and play games. rarely buy food from a supermarket. do regular exercise, go swimming and lead active lives. 1. According to the passage, Okinawa is well known for a.its beauty

b. its centenarians

c. its subtropical climate d. its cuisine

1.__lass

2.__lass

3.__arden

4.__up

5. __id

6. __raffiti

7. __lothes

8.blan__et

9. __old

10. __lobe

11. __ommunity

12. __ame

13. __ake

14. __ift

15. __ite

16. __rapes

2. The people of Okinawa _______. a. cook very well

b. eat a lot of meat

c.have an unhealthy diet

d. have the longest lifespan

3. Which of the followings is NOT true about the Okinawans? a. They eat what they fish and grow.

b. They often buy food at the supermarket.

c.They do exercise regularly.

d. They enjoy socializing with friends.

4. A centenarian is a person who _______. a. is 100 years old

b. is almost 100 years old

c. is 100 years old or more

d. is 100 years old or less

5. The Okinawans live a long life because _______. a.they have healthy diets and living habits. b.they walk as much as they can. c.they love gardening and going fishing.

d.they only eat fruit and vegetables.

X. Write sentences, using the words given.

1. Phong/ eat/ lots of/ junk food/ so/ he/ putting/ weight. _________________________________________________________________________

/g/

/k/

_________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________

2. I/ exercise/ daily/ because/ I/ want/ stay/ healthy. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. Sitting/ too/ close/ the TV/ hurt/ your eyes. _________________________________________________________________________ 4. She/ often/ take/ paracetamol/ if/ she/ get / bad/ headache. _________________________________________________________________________ 5. how many calories/ you/ bum/ do/ aerobics/ 2 hours? _________________________________________________________________________ 6. getting/ enough/ sleep/ help/ students/ do/ their best/ the classroom. _________________________________________________________________________

UNIT 2: HEALTH 25

II. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently.

1. a.collect

b.cough

c.think

d.certain

2. a.girl

b.game

c.gym

d. give

3. a.colour

b.face

c.city

d.recycle

4. a. global

b. geography

c. green

d. big

5. a. charitable

b. character

c. headache

d. school

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Complete the sentences with the words or phrases from the box.

street children

volunteers

homeless people

sick children

disabled people

donnors

elderly people

_______________________________

3. Street Child works to help ________________ off the streets and into school.

_______________________________

4. Most blood ________________ are unpaid volunteers who donate blood for a community supply.

III. Complete the sentences with the correct verbs in the box.

1. Sally often spends her free time helping ________________ at the hospital. 2. They provide housing and other services to ________________.

5. Schools need ________________ to help children to read.

plant

volunteer

clean up

donate

tutor

recycle

provide

6. They help ________________ with housework and gardening.

1. ______________ your used books to your local library or charities.

7. The local authority built a new home for severely ________________.

2. ______________ a fundraising event to raise money for charity.

II. Match the pictures with the volunteer activities.

3. ______________ polluted rivers and lakes.

organise

4. ______________ trees or flowers in your backyard or community garden. Pick up trash in the surroundings.

5. ______________ at a nursing home, soup kitchen, or homeless shelter.

Take care of cats and dogs at an animal shelter.

6. ______________ plastic and paper for a clean environment.

Donate blood.

7. ______________ nutritious meals to the poor and needy people.

Help the elderly at the nursing home.

8. ______________ homeless children who are unable to attend school.

Build houses for homeless people.

IV. Underline the correct answers.

Donate old clothes.

1. I saw/ have seen that film already. 2. We went/ have gone to the movies three times last month. 3. Did you ever do/ Have you ever done volunteer work? 4. I had/ have had five tests so far this semester.

_______________________________

5. Linus did/ has done his homework before he went to sleep. 6. This is my grandparents’ house. They lived/ have lived here for more than 50 years. 7. She bought/ has bought a new mobile phone two days ago. 8. Did you see/ Have you seen Peter at the party last night?

_______________________________

9. I read/ have read this book twice and I still find it very interesting. 10. They didn’t play/ haven’t played very well yesterday. They lost the match. V. Put the verbs into the correct tense, past simple or present perfect.

_______________________________

1. _____________ (you/ ever/ be) to the United States ? - No, but I _____________ (be) to England and France. 2. When we were in Canada, we _____________ (go) skiing almost every day. 3. When _____________ (you/ meet) your wife? - 3 years ago. 4. Peter _____________ (not phone) yet. I’m still waiting.

_______________________________

5. I _____________ (know) Helen since we were at school together. 6. My uncle _____________ (live) in Berlin in 1999. 7. We _____________ (not see) Beth at Mike’s house yesterday morning.

_________________________________________________________________________

8. Do you like this picture? My uncle _____________ (paint) it.

8. Sally was ill. She didn’t go to school yesterday. (since)

9. Mr. Dass _____________ (leave) for New York late last night. 10. Mr and Mrs Grey _____________ (teach) French here for over five years. VI. Choose the correct answer a, b, c, or d.

1. We ______ very busy last week. a. was

b. am

0. Why was Judy absent from school? (be sick) c. were

d. will be

2. I ______ her recently. The last time we met was at a party. a. have seen

b. haven’t seen b. are starting

c. didn’t see

d. saw

b. leave

c. started

d. have started

c. have left

d. left

b. ran b. have read

c. is running

d. has ran

b. calls

d. will read

b. am cleaning

c. called

d. is calling

c. have cleaned

d. will clean

9. I live in New York, but I ______ the Statue of Liberty. a. never visit

b. heard

c. am hearing

I ________________________________________________________________________ IX. Complete the sentences with and, but, so, or, because.

1. Olivia was very happy __________ she passed her examination. 2. He didn’t study __________ he failed the history exam.

b. have never visited c. never visited

d. will never visit

10. I ______ my favourite song when I turned on the radio yesterday. a. hear

She _____________________________________________________________________ 6. Why did you go home late last night? (miss the last bus)

8. Sometimes I ______ up the streets of my neighborhood for volunteer service. a. clean

She _____________________________________________________________________ 5. Why did the teacher scold Alex? (not complete his homework)

c. am reading

7. He ______ you as soon as he’s on the bus. a. will call

He_______________________________________________________________________ 4. Why is Sharon popular in school? (be honest and polite)

6. I ______ that book already. It’s really fantastic. a. read

I ________________________________________________________________________ 3. Why doesn’t Mike want to go and see the film? (see it already)

5. She ______ because she’s late for her class. a. runs

He ______________________________________________________________________ 2. Why didn’t you take part in volunteer programs? (not have enough time)

4. We ______ very early this morning. a. will leave

She was absent from school because she was sick. 1. Why did Sam go to the dentist’s? (have a toothache)

3. In 2012, they ______ their project for street children. a. start

_________________________________________________________________________ VIII. Answer each question using ‘because’ and the words in brackets.

3. My mother usually gets home at 5 o’clock __________then she cooks dinner. 4. I was late for class tills morning __________ the bus was late.

d. will hear

5. We went to Jane’s house __________ she was out.

VII. Join each pair of sentences using because, as or since.

6. We can go to the pool __________ we can go horse-riding, whichever you prefer.

1. He stopped the car. The traffic lights turned red. (because)

7. She is studying very hard __________ she wants to be a doctor.

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. Jane didn’t join our programme. She had to take a summer course. (as) _________________________________________________________________________ 3. He behaved very rudely. Everyone dislike him. (since)

8. Carol studied hard for the maths test __________ she couldn’t get a good mark. 9. The floor was wet and slippery __________ Mason almost fell. 10. Mike ate healthy food __________ did regular exercises to keep fit. X. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition.

_________________________________________________________________________ 4. They like doing something useful. They do volunteer work. (because) _________________________________________________________________________ 5. I won’t be able to attend the meeting. I’ll be on holiday with my family. (since) _________________________________________________________________________ 6. It was raining heavily. We decided to stay home and watch TV. (as) _________________________________________________________________________ 7. He wants to get fit. He’s training hard. (because)

1. Tom Holden worked __________ a volunteer at a charity in 2010. 2. They provided housing and other supports __________ homeless people. 3. Some volunteers enjoy helping elderly people living __________ nursing homes. 4. She donated thousands of pounds __________ children’s charities. 5. The benefits __________ volunteering are enormous to you, and your community. 6. You can volunteer to help cook and serve a meal __________ a homeless shelter. 7. UNICEF has launched a campaign to help children __________ need. 8. They provided street children __________ food and books.

UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE 29

30 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

Many people (1) ___________ in their communities. Some people work with children or the elderly (2) ___________ others clean city parks. Some student clubs require their members to participate in a certain number of hours of community (3) ___________ every month. One way that communities work (4) ___________ is by raising funds for those in need. A community might raise (5) ___________ for a school to buy new equipment or uniforms by selling baked goods or holding a yard sale. Many communities provide places for people in need to receive food, (6)___________, or shelter. Volunteering can help people feel like they are giving something (7) ___________ to their communities. Sometimes a person may need help at one time (8) ___________ be able to help others later.

C. SPEAKING I. Complete the dialogues with the sentences in the box.

Because they like doing something useful and helping others. Yes. it makes a better life and improves the society. Because volunteering teaches me a lot. Yes, I've been a volunteer teacher for Street Child Organization. It helps you stay healthy, increases self-confidence, and makes you happy. We can donate money or clothes via charitable organisations. 1. A: Do you think the community service makes a difference? B: ______________________________________________________________________ 2. A: What can we do to help homeless people? B: ______________________________________________________________________ 3. A: What are the benefits of volunteering? B: ______________________________________________________________________ 4. A: Have you ever done any volunteer work? 5. A: Why would you enjoy volunteering?

Many people participate in community service because they enjoy helping others and improving their community. _________________________________________________________________________ 2. Where is community service often done?

B: ______________________________________________________________________ 6. A: Why do you think people volunteer?

_________________________________________________________________________ 3. Is community service a paying job?

B: ______________________________________________________________________ II. Put the dialogue into the correct order.

_________________________________________________________________________ 4. What groups of people can community service help?

___ Have you ever participated in community service?

_________________________________________________________________________

___ Great! What else have you planned to do?

5. Is donation of used goods a community service example?

___ Certainly. Community service is the work which benefits the others and your community. ___ Of course you can.

_________________________________________________________________________ 6. Why do many people take part in community service?

___ Yes. I’m a volunteer for a charity organization.

_________________________________________________________________________

_1_ Could you tell me what community service is, Joana?

E. WRITING

___ What have you done so far?

I. Arrange the words to make sentences.

___ Well, we have planned to recruit more volunteers and set up a new campaign for recycling. ___ That sounds really interesting! Can I take part? ___ We have cleaned streets, planted trees and encouraged people to donate food, clothesand money to help the poor and needy people.

D. READING

back

but

clothing

1. way/ others/ community/ a/ help/ service/ is/ great/ to/. _________________________________________________________________________ 2. they/community/people/ because/ volunteer/ want/ improve/ to/ their/. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. encouraged/ books/ people/ street children/ we/ to/ donate/ and clothes/ to

I. Fill In each blank with a word from the box.

money

Community service is work done by a person or group of people that benefits others. It is often done near the area where you live, so your own community gets the benefits of your work. You do not get paid to perform community service, but get to learn a lot. Community service can help many different groups of people, even animals and the environment. Community service is often organized through a local group, such as a place of worship, school, or non-profit organization, or you can start your own community service projects. Community service can even involve raising funds by donating used goods or selling used goods like clothing.

1. What is community service?

B: ______________________________________________________________________

service

II. Read the text carefully then answer the questions.

_________________________________________________________________________ while

volunteer

together

4. what/ to/ help/ we/ can/ do/ the environment/ clean/? _________________________________________________________________________

UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE 31

32 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

5. work/ done/ you/ ever/ have/ volunteer/ any?

III. Choose the best answer a, b, c, or d to complete the sentence.

_________________________________________________________________________ 6. free time/ Joe/ doing/ work/ spent/ most/ at/ his/ local hospital/ a/ of/ volunteer. _________________________________________________________________________ II. Write the second sentence so that it has the same meaning as the first one. Use the word in brackets.

1. We are very excited ________ our 2018 Volunteer Program. a. about

b. for

c. in

d. with

2. Toys of Hope provide toys, books and clothing ________ needy and homeless children. a. from

b. to

c. with

d. against

1. I’m leaving now because I don’t want to miss the train. (so)

3. Many people donate to the Red Cross, a ________ organization that aids people free of charge. a. profit-making b. for-profit c. non-profit d. profitable

→ I’m ______________________________________________________________________

4. The river is heavily polluted. They should ________.

2. The last time I saw my uncle was two years ago. (for)

a. clean it up

→ I haven’t __________________________________________________________________

3. Let me reach my office and then I will talk to him. (when)

a. Sick

→ I ________________________________________________________________________

4. Why don’t we donate our old books, toys and clothes to charity? (suggests) → Mom_____________________________________________________________________

5. Jane stayed behind after the class in order to talk to the teacher. (because) → Jane _____________________________________________________________________

6. This is the first time they’ve been to Korea. (before) 7. How long have you been a member of Volunteers In Asia? (join) 8. We suggested people recycle glass, cans and paper. (encouraged)

a. never

b. Homeless

c. Elderly

d. Disabled

b. ever

c. already

d. yet

a. control

b. case

c. need

d. shape

8. Most people volunteer ________ they want to make a difference in their community. b. so

c. so that

d. in order to

9. We can help to reduce ________ by using public transportation, biking and walking. b. water pollution

c. social problems

d. community service

10. ________ do you like this charity work? – I really like it. a. What

→ We ______________________________________________________________________

d. recycle it

7. We help families in ________ by providing food, clothing, housing and much more.

a. air pollution

→ When ____________________________________________________________________

c. pick out

6. I’ve ________ seen this film. Let’s watch something else.

a. because

→ They’ve __________________________________________________________________

b. give it away

5. ________ people usually live on the streets, under bridges, or in camps.

b. Why

c. When

d. How

IV. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

1. Jasmine ______________ (fail) her driver’s test three times!

TEST FOR UNIT 3

2. They ______________ (establish) the Viet Nam Red Cross Society in 19‘16.

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

3. How long ____________ (they/ live) here?~They____________ (move) here two years ago.

1. a. centre

b. kid

c. encourage

d. colour

4. So far, we ______________ (finish) half of our work.

2. a. chemistry

b. school

c. mechanic

d. charity

5. I’m really busy now. I ______________ (study) for the final exam.

3. a. tutor

b. volunteer

c. student

d. community

6. When ______________(you/ buy) these shirts? ~ I ______________ (buy) them yesterday.

4. a. graffiti

b. garage

c. general

d. globe

5. a. provide

b. donate

c. program

d. clothes

7. __________________ (you/ ever/ be) to Japan? ~ No, I ______________ (not be) to Japan yet. Claire ______________ (volunteer) at the homeless shelter once a week. 8. 9. We volunteer ______________ (help) the elderly in a nursing home.

II. Choose the odd one out.

1. a. donate

b. program

c. service

d. member

10. Jane suggested ______________ (donate) old books, and toys to needy children.

2. a. sick children

b. volunteer

c. homeless people

d. disabled people

V. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets.

3. a. donating clothes

b. cleaning streets

c. providing food

d. playing games

1. Community ______________ have a lot of positive effects on students. (serve)

4. a. homeless

b. sick

c. street

d. disabled

2. ______________ people find it difficult to have a job. (disable)

5. a. volunteer

b. graffiti

c. donor

d. contributor

3. I’d like to work as a volunteer for a charity ______________. (organise) 4. He made a £5000 ______________ to charity. (donate) 5. The Soup Kitchen is a ______________ organization that provides free meals for needy people. (profit)

UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE 33

34 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

6. The homeless shelters are entirely staffed by ______________ worker. (volunteer) 7. The organization is funded by ______________ donations. (charity) 8. We help the ______________ with housework and gardening. (old) VI. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

1. She has went to visit Susan. She’ll be back tomorrow. 2. I didn’t done any volunteer work lately. 3. Matha is a great cooker and she often cooks dinner for homeless people. 4. Kim hasn’t seen the film already, so don’t tell her how it ends. 5. She has donated a lot of money for local charities. 6. Before donate a book, make sure that it is in good condition.

IX. Read the text carefully, then decide whether the following statements are true (T) orfalse (F).

The Soup Kitchen, founded in 1986, is a resource for the homeless, elderly, lonely and poor inCentral London, providing free hot meals, clothes and toiletries, and creating a sense of belonging and community. Serving around 70 people a day from 10 am -12 noon on Monday, Tuesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday, with the Clothes Closet open on alternate Mondays, four to five volunteers are required each morning to carry out this vital work. The Soup Kitchen is run by a Board of Trustees, a part-time Director and Kitchen Manager, three more staff and a team of volunteers. Support for The Soup Kitchen comes from individuals, corporations and trusts. Volunteers and donations (both financial and in-kind) are vital to support our work and enable us to continue this service to the community. 1. The Soup Kitchen is a non-profit organization.

7. We should encourage people recycle glass, cans, plastic and paper.

2. It provides free meals for people in need.

8. Did you lived in Vancouver when you were young?

3. It opens five days a week from 10am to 12pm.

VII. Match the questions with the answers.

1. What is community service?

a. Because it will help make a difference millions of children’s lives.

2. Have you ever done any volunteer work?

b. We can provide them with food, clothes and other necessities.

4. Clothing is provided every Monday morning. 5. The organization is funded by donations from individuals, corporations and trusts. 6. People can only donate money to the Soup Kitchen. X. Make sentences using the cues given.

c. I’d love to. But I don’t have much free time.

1. last year/ we/ start/ community garden/ project.

d. It’s voluntary work that someone does help their community.

2. so far/ we/ ask/ people/ donate/ books and clothes/ the poor children.

e. I’ve learned a lot of new skills.

3. because/ the lake/ be/ full/ rubbish/ they/ decide/ clean it up/ last Sunday.

f. Because they want to help other people.

→ _________________________________________________________________________

7. What have you learned from volunteering?

g. We can bring fun and enjoyment to them.

4. Green Summer/organize/ first time/ in 1997.

8. Why do people enjoy doing volunteer work?

h. No, I have never done it.

3. What can we do to help people in a flooded area? 4. Why should we donate to UNICEF? 5. How do you think we can help sick children? 6. Would you like to work as a volunteer?

VIII.Choose the word which best fits each gap.

Doing some form of voluntary work has (1) _________ been more popular with British people. Over 20 million people were engaged (2) _________ voluntary activities in 2013. Volunteering means giving up time to do work of (3) _________ to the community. It can be based in the UK or overseas. Volunteering can take many forms, from working with children with (4)_________ difficulties, in an animal hospital, or planting trees. (5) _________ London won its bid to host the 2012 Olympics, up to 70,000 (6) _________ were needed to help ensure the games were a success. 1. a. ever

b. any

c. never

d. before

2. a. with

b. in

c. to

d. for

3. a. comfort

b. benefit

c. contribute

d. profit

4. a. learn

b. learned

c. learning

d. learnt

5. a. When

b. While

c. Where

d. What

6. a. donors

b. visitors

c. foreigners

d. volunteers UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE 35

→ _________________________________________________________________________ → _________________________________________________________________________

→ _________________________________________________________________________

5. Go Green/non-profit/organisation/that/protect/environment. → _________________________________________________________________________

6. when/ you/ start/ work/ this charitable organization? → _________________________________________________________________________

36 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

8. I’ve already done my homework, _______ I am going to watch TV.

TEST YOURSELF 1 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

1. a. laugh

b. cough

c. bought

d. tough

2. a. game

b. gym

c. girl

d. bag

3. a. calorie

b. labour

c. community

d. volunteer

4. a. environmental

b. benefit

c. service

d. sick

5. a. danced

b. helped

c. watched

d. enjoyed

a. so

b.because

c.but

d. and

9. They could not afford to buy the house because it was _______. a. too pretty

b.too tight

c.too expensive

d. too cheap

10. _______ do you do volunteer work? - Every weekend. a. How long

b.How far

c.How much

d. How often

V. Write the correct tense or form of the verbs in brackets.

1. I ________________ (already/ read) that book. It’s fantastic.

II. Choose the odd one out.

1. a. flu

b. cough

c. headache

d. hobby

2. We ________________ (not do) any volunteer work five years ago.

2. a. gymnastics

b. stamps

c. books

d. dolls

3. James ________________ (do) lots of volunteer work when he was in high school.

3. a. elderly people

b. donors

c. disabled people

d. sick children

4. I think people ________________ (eat) more healthy food in the future.

4. a. fresh fish

b. fruit

c. junk food

d. vegetables

5. People ________________ (need) about 2,000 calories a day to stay in shape.

5. a. service

b. non-profit

c. charitable

d. homeless

III. Fill in each blank with a suitable word.

6. ______________ (Alex/ ever/ be) to Seattle? ~ Yes, he ______________ (be) to Seattle once. 7. Right now, Margaret ________________ (have) a shower. Do you want to ring later?

1. My friend loves _____________ dolls. She has a large doll collection.

8. Be a Buddy ________________ (establish) in 2011.

2. Two people wereseverely physically _____________ in the crash.

9. We encouraged people ________________ (recycle) bottles, cans and paper.

3. My father carves eggshells as a _____________.

10. My mother enjoys ________________(do) charitable work.

4. He keeps sneezing and coughing. I think he has a _____________.

VI. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets.

5. Walking is one of the best ways to stay in _____________.

1. Mike’s hobby is listening to music. He gets a lot ___________ from listening to music. (enjoy)

6. The government should provide housing for _____________ people.

2. John is a stamp ___________. He has a lot of rare and valuable stamps. (collect)

IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c, or d to complete the sentence.

3. One third of children in the U. S. is ___________ or obese. (weigh)

1. Have you ever taken part _______ volunteer work? a.for

b. to

c. in

d.with

2. We have raised money for people in need _______ 2015. a. in

b.at b.headache

d. for

c.sore throat

d. temperature

7. They aren’t forced to do charity work. They do it ___________. (volunteer)

4. Jane is _______ weight because she eats too much junk food. a. getting over

b. putting on

c.taking up

d. throwing away

5. The charity _______ facilities for disabled people to take part in sport. a. provides

b.donates

c.raises

d. collects

6. I can’t fasten my jeans – I’ll have to _______. a. eat more junk food

b. go out regularly

c. see my doctor

d. go on a diet

b. pottery making

c. model making

8. They opened a shelter to provide housing for the ___________. (home) VII. Each sentence has a mistake. Find and correct it.

1. My brother loves play chess when he has free time. 2. I find woodcarving interest because it’s creative. 3. Many people wait for the dentist at the moment. 4. They have donated blood three months ago. 5. Did you finished your homework yet? 6. I’d like to go, and I have to study for my test tonight.

7. My favourite hobby is _______. I spend most of my free time making vases and bowls from clay. a. woodcarving

5. Junk food is ___________, so we shouldn’t eat too much junk food. (health) 6. Blood ___________ give blood for use in hospitals. (donate)

c.since

3. She’s got a high _______ – almost 40°. a. flu

4. I have ___________ so I must go to a dentist. (tooth)

d. birdwatching

7. Eat more fast food, or you’ll put on weight. 8. Do you think staying at home all day is bored? VIII. Make questions for the underlined parts.

1. A: _________________________________________ B: My favourite hobby is taking photos. TEST YOURSELF 1 37

38 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

3. Which of the followings is not keep your body in good health?

2. A: _________________________________________ B: He spends most of his free time carving eggshells.

a.smoking

3. A: _________________________________________ B: I often share my hobby with my best friend.

a.have a good body

4. A: _________________________________________

d.Eating healthy and exercising are tips to stay healthy.

B: I started working as a volunteer in 2015.

XI. Write the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first one.

7. A: _________________________________________

1. My father finds playing board games interesting.

B: So far, we have provided food and clothes to people in need.

→ My father is _______________________________________________________________

8. A: _________________________________________

2. He hasn’t smoked cigarettes for a month.

B: My mother has done charitable work for five years.

→ The last time_______________________________________________________________

3. That apartment is more modern than any apartments.

IX. Fill in each blank with a word from the box.

parents

donating

how

charitable

It’s not uncommon in America for a person to belong to some kind of volunteer group. (1)____________ one’s time and services is very much a part of the American way of life. Most (2)____________ activities are organized by churches and groups around the nation and even encouraged by the government. The (3) ____________ hand is extended to the poor, the homeless and the (4) ____________. Some people work to teach youngsters (5) ____________ to read, others open up soup kitchens to (6) ____________ the homeless. Volunteers also take (7) ____________ of the disabled by making reading tapes for the blind and working in orphanages to help children without (8) ____________.

→ That apartment _____________________________________________________________

4. There are over two hundred stamps in Nam’s collection. → Nam’s collection ___________________________________________________________

5. I spend twenty minutes walking to school every morning. → It takes ___________________________________________________________________

6. I find losing weight very difficult. → It’s ______________________________________________________________________

X. Read the text carefully then choose the correct answers.

Maintaining a healthy body is not that easy and not so difficult also. Most important tip for a healthy body is to have healthy food and eat them at proper time. Avoid eating junk food. Your diet should contain food which has more nutrients. Try to include vegetables, fruits, milk, and fish in your daily diet. Make sure you are having your breakfast regularly. Skipping your breakfast regularly will definitely affect your health. Make sure you drink more amount of water daily. Regular exercise will also keep your body in good health. You can go for running, do cycling, walking faster etc. Apart from these always try to manage your stress. By controlling your stress you can maintain a healthy body. Your body should get enough time to take rest. Make sure you get a sleep of 8 hours daily. Sleep is very important for healthy body and also for mental and emotional happiness. 1. To have a healthy body, you should _________. a.eat junk food

b. put on weight

c. have a healthy diet

d. not consume nutrients

2. Skipping breakfast is _________ for your health. a.good

b. bad

c. sleep enough time d. stay healthy

c.Getting enough sleep can make you happier.

6. A: _________________________________________

care

b. live longer

b.Water is important for your health.

B: People need about 2.000 calories a day to stay in shape.

helping

d. jogging

a.It’s difficult to maintain a healthy body.

5. A: _________________________________________

disabled

c. running

5. Which of the followings is NOT true?

B: She went to the doctor because she had a high fever.

feed

b. cycling

4. Managing stress can help people _________.

c. necessary

d. important TEST YOURSELF 1 39

40 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

UNIT 4

MUSIC AND ARTS

A. PHONETICS

5. _____________

I. Put the words into the correct columns.

II. Complete the sentences with the words in the box.

musician special television

pleasure

ocean

delicious

sure

leisure

tradition

occasion

show

champagne decision

station

sugar

usually

machine

provision

dishwasher

garage

brochure

treasure

6. ______________

7. ______________

8. _____________

musician

singer actress composer comedian poet 1. TruyenKieu is written by the great _____________ Nguyen Du.

artist

pianist

2. Celine Dion is a Canadian _____________. _____________ She sang the song My heart will go on on. 3. Mozart was an Austrian classical _____________. He wrote over 600 pieces of music. 4. Every joke the _____________ made was greeted with gales of laughter.

/∫/

5. Vietnamese _____________ Dang Thai Son studied piano in Moscow.

/ȝ/

_________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________

6. The _____________ is playing some sad tune on his saxophone. 7. This young _____________ is currently curr exhibiting his work at the gallery. 8. American _____________ Selena Gomez starred in the film Another Cinderella Story Story. III. Complete the sentences with the correct tense or form of the verbs in the box.

II. Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently.

play

draw

compose

paint

take

perform

exhibit

sing

1. a. dish

b. sugar

c. shoes

d. sing

2. a. vision

b. pressure

c. washer

d. machine

3. a. division

b. occasion

c. leisure

d. ensure

1. Mozart _____________ his first piece of music when he was five years old.

4. a. chauffer

b. shampoo

c. children

d. cashier

2. She usually_____________ in watercolour.

5. a. exhibition

b. revision

c. anxious

d. social

3. We all _____________ ‘Happy Birthday’ to her.

III. Underline the words with the sound /∫/ and circle the words with the sound /ȝ/.

4. Most pupils learn _____________ a musical instrument.

1. Famous musicians usually perform this song.

5. We _____________ many of his works at our gallery so far.

2. There is a program on television about removing rubbish from rivers.

6. Rosie _____________ an elephant and coloured it in.

3. The garage is not far from the bus station.

7. My brother enjoys_____________ _____________ photos of the nature and landscape.

4. She made the decision to get a bed spread with striped sheets.

8. The band _____________ live at the Central Park tomorrow. tomorr

5. The physician is anxious about the living conditions of his patient.

IV. Complete each sentence with as... as and the adjective or adverb in the box.

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Write the correct word under each picture.

portrait

puppet

saxophone

violin

cello

drum

painting

relaxing

convenient

hot

deep

dangerous

quickly

frequently

boring

guitar 1. This summer is not __________________ last summer. 2. The river isn’t __________________ it looks. 3. Forr me, lying on the beach is not __________________ walking in the mountain. 4. A smartphone send messages __________________ _______ a laptop.

1. _____________

2. ______________

3. ______________

4. _____________

5. This gym is not __________________ the one near my house. 6. I think travelling by airplane is not __________________ travelling by car.

7. I hope his new movie isn’t __________________ his last one.

3. Animals feel pain the same __________ we do

8. Adam doesn’t exercise __________________ he used to.

4. Life in the country is very different __________ life in the city.

V. Choose the correct option for each of the following sentences.

5. He’s not really __________ tall as he looks on TV.

1. What is the _______________ month of the year in Vietnam? (hot, hotter, hottest)

6. This classroom is a lot nicer __________ the one we had last year.

2. Hawaii is _______________ from Hong Kong than Japan. (far, farther, farthest)

7. London was different __________ most European capitals.

3. Mozart is as _______________ as Beethoven. (famous, more famous, most famous)

8. Driving a boat is not the same __________ driving a car.

4. Which is _______________, grammar or vocabulary? (important, more important, most important)

VIII. Complete the second sentence using the word in brackets.

5. Who is the _______________ person in your family? (powerful, more powerful, most powerful) 6. Their house is three times as _______________ as ours. (big, bigger, biggest)

1. Cycling is faster than walking. (as) Walking ________________________________________________ 2. This tea doesn’t taste the same as the one I usually drink. (from) This tea ________________________________________________

7. Susan is much _______________ with children than her sister is. (patient, morepatient, most patient)

3. Money is not as important as health. (than)

8. Ann does not swim so _______________ as her coach claims. (quickly, more quickly, most quickly)

4. His new guitar isn’t different from his old one. (as)

VI. Rewrite each of the following sentences using different from or the same as.

Health__________________________________________________ His new guitar ___________________________________________ 5. Everest is higher than K2. (as)

1. Their results and our results are different.

K2 ____________________________________________________

Their results are different from our results.

6. Oil painting is not the same as pencil painting. (from)

2. The price of the scarf and the price of the gloves are the same.

Oil painting _____________________________________________

The price of the scarf is the same as the price of the gloves.

7. Yesterday’s exam wasn’t as short as today’s. (than)

3. This house and your last house are different. _______________________________________________________

Today’s exam ____________________________________________ 8. Your idea is different from mine. (as)

4. The child’s height and the height of the table are the same. _______________________________________________________

Your idea _______________________________________________ IX. Complete the sentences with too or either.

5. Jane and her sister are very different. _______________________________________________________

1. I don’t really like tomatoes. My brother doesn’t like them _____________. 2. My sister enjoys Korean movies, and she likes watching K-Pop _____________.

6. This cake and that cake taste the same. _______________________________________________________

3. He didn’t say anything, and I didn’t _____________. 4. I don’t speak French and Sarah doesn’t speak French _____________.

7. Food in San Francisco and food in New Orleans are different. _______________________________________________________

5. Danny is really tired and I am tired _____________. 6. They don’t like Rock and Roll music, and we don’t like it _____________.

8. His shoes and my shoes are the same. _______________________________________________________

7. French is a difficult language to learn. Latin is a difficult language to learn _____________. 8. Helen’s got a lovely voice, and she’s a good dancer _____________.

9. American English and British English are slightly different. _______________________________________________________

X. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition. 1. Karen Carpenter is famous __________ the song Top of the world.

10. People say I and my mother look just the same. _______________________________________________________

2. This rock band is playing __________ the Central Club.

VII. Complete the sentence with as, than or from.

3. I love his painting __________ the old Ha Noi streets.

1. The blue car is as fast __________ the red car.

4. We can watch the concert live __________ TV.

2. Physics is more difficult __________ history.

5. I’m very interested __________ pop music. UNIT 4: MUSIC AND ARTS 43

44 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

6. The puppets are made __________ wood and then painted.

leaves

7. My friend is very good __________ drawing things.

decoration

8. The water puppet show is __________ 57B DinhTien Hoang St., HoanKiem Dist.

C. SPEAKING I. Write questions for the underlined parts. 1. A: ____________________________________________________ B: I like pop music. 2. A: ____________________________________________________ B: My favourite song is Thriller. 3. A: ____________________________________________________ B: My mother’s favourite composer is Trinh Cong Son. 4. A: ____________________________________________________ B: Water puppetry began in the 11th century. 5. A: ____________________________________________________ B: Alex goes to the Art Club twice a week. 6. A: ____________________________________________________ B: I don’t like horror movies because I don’t like the feeling of being scared. 7. A: ____________________________________________________ B: She has painted for more than five years. 8. A: ____________________________________________________ B: Dong Ho paintings are made in Dong Ho Village. II. Put the dialogue into the correct order.

long

north

artists

layer

printed talk

Dong Ho Painting is a kind of Vietnamese (1) _____________ painting originating in Dong Ho Village, BacNinh Province. Dong Ho paintings have about 300 years of history in the (2) _____________ of Vietnam. Dong Ho pictures are (3) _____________ on a special kind of Dzo paper. Theprinting paper is made of bark of a tree called“Dzo”. Colours of the painting are refined from various kinds of tree (4) _____________, which people can easily find in Vietnam. Traditional (5) _____________ use all-natural colours for their pictures: burnt bamboo leaves for black, cajuput leaves for green, copper rust for blue, etc. The painting is covered by a (6) _____________ of sticky rice paste to protect the painting and their colours. They are so (7) _____________ lasting, so that it is very difficult to make them dimmer even time or daylight. Vietnamese people used to buy Dong Ho pictures for (8) _____________ during Tet. II. Read the text carefully then decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F). Many students listen to music while they are studying, and say that it helps them learn. Many parents and teachers say that music is just distracting, and that students are better studying in silence. Who is right? In a study, some scientists asked three groups of students to listen to a piece of music by Mozart or a relaxation tape for ten minutes, or just sit in silence for ten minutes. The students then did a ‘spatial reasoning’ test (a test about remembering shapes and imagining looking at objects from different directions), and the ones who had listened to the Mozart did better in the test.Taking part in musical activities and learning to play an instrument can improve verbal

___ I enjoy Rock and R&B.

memory (the ability to remember words). The longer the training lasts, the better the improvement in the memory. So, there’s no excuse to give up the piano lessons!

___ Perfect reason! Can you play any musical instrument?

1. Many students think it’s helpful to listen to music when studying.

___ Like what, for instance?

2. Teachers say music helps students to better concentrate.

_1_ What type of music do you like listening to?

3. The students who had listened to Mozart did better in the spatial reasoning test.

___ I like the kinds of instruments that they use.

4. Listening to Mozart music will not make you smarter.

___ Why do you like that type of music?

5. Music training helps to improve memory.

___ I like listening to different kinds of music.

E. WRITING

___ Thank you. That’s very kind of you.

I. Arrange the words to make sentences.

___ Wow! You are so talented!

1. who/more/don’t/attentive/arts/students/than/study/those/who/are/.

___ Yes, I can play electric guitar and drums.

D. READING I. Fill in each blank with a word from the box.

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. father/don’t/either/and/horror/watches/my/never/films/I/. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. you/think/as/classical/do/is/music/exciting/Rockand Roll/as/? _________________________________________________________________________ 4. performance/the/is/next/about/very/anxious/musician/the/. _________________________________________________________________________

46 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

2. Water puppetry began __________ the 11th century.

5. sister/interested/ is/ boring/find/I/drawing/my/in/ but/ it/. _________________________________________________________________________

a.in

b. on

c.at

d.from

3. The __________ is rather older now; however, his acting ability has never been better.

6. music/your/kind/what/favourite/is/of/? _________________________________________________________________________ II. Write the second sentences so that it has the same meaning to the first one.

a. composer

→ Her phone is _______________________________________________________________ → I think jazz music isn’t ______________________________________________________ → Are you __________________________________________________________________

→ I haven’t __________________________________________________________________ → They cancelled _____________________________________________________________

c. more tall than

d. not tall than

b. taking

c.playing

d. writing

b. concert hall

c. opera house

d.art museum

b. Because

c.As

d. However

b. When

c.How

d. Where

10. Which is the national anthem of Vietnam? a. Tieu Doan 307

7. Jim doesn’t play the saxophone as well as his brother.

b. not as tall as

9. __________ does a water puppet show take place? ~ In a pool. a. What

6. Nobody wanted to go, so they cancelled the school trip.

d. as well

8. __________ I’m not a fan of country music, I thoroughly enjoyed his lively performance. a. Although

5. The last time I spoke to David was at Christmas.

c.neither

7. I went to the 3D __________ last weekend. The paintings were excellent! a. movie theater

4. They perform the water puppet show in a pool. → The water puppet show ______________________________________________________

b. too

6. Saxophones are used mainly for __________ jazz music. a. composing

3. Do you like seeing a water puppet show?

d. actor

5. Juan and Patricia are not the same height Juan is __________ Patricia. a. as tall as

2. I think rock music is more popular than jazz.

c.artist

4. Janna can’t play the piano, and Carol can’t play it __________. a. either

1. Her phone is not the same as mine.

b. actress

b.Chien si Viet Nam c. TienQuanCa

d. Tienve Ha Noi

→ Jim’s brother plays __________________________________________________________

IV. Write the correct tense or form of the verbs in brackets.

8. What is your favourite kind of music?

1. My home town ________________ (change) a lot in the recent years.

→ What kind ________________________________________________________________

2. Please, stop! You ________________(drive) so fast. 3. The paintings ________________(make) on Dzo paper with natural colours. 4. Yesterday I ________________(go) to the centre and ________________(see) an exhibition.

TEST FOR UNIT 4 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

5. As soon as I ________________(finish) painting my room, I’ll paint the kitchen.

1. a. actor

b. painting

c. anthem

d. gallery

6. I ________________(be) to England three times so far.

2. a. decide

b. exciting

c. exhibit

d. organise

7. The children ________________ (not be) at home last Sunday.

3. a. educated

b. played

c. recycled

d. changed

8. Do you think we ________________ (write) a test tomorrow?

4. a. cello

b. choose

c. kitchen

d. concert

9. Are you interested in ________________(do) community service?

5. a. sugar

b. closure

c. share

d. anxious

10. Some teenage girls volunteered ________________ (work) at the local hospital. V. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets.

II. Choose the odd one out. 1. a. music

b. cello

c. guitar

d. drums

1. Avatar is probably the ______________film I’ve ever seen! (bad)

2. a. actor

b. artist

c. painting

d. singer

2. A dancer must throw her heart and soul into every ______________. (perform)

3. a. cello

b. violin

c. saxophone

d. guitar

3. I think Men in Black 1 was as ______________asMen in Black 3. (excite)

4. a. jazz

b. pop

c. rock

d. anthem

4. Although John and Andrew look exactly alike, they act quite ______________. (different)

5. a. The Spice Girls

b. Gangnam Style

c. The Beatles

d. ABBA

5. Dong Ho paintings are made with ______________colours. (nature)

III. Choose the best answer a, b, c, or d to complete the sentence.

6. His friends are all ______________ - they’re painters, musicians, and writers. (art)

1. His Jacket is almost the same colour __________ mine.

7. He later became a famous jazz ______________playing saxophone. (music)

a. with

b. as

c. to

d. for UNIT 4: MUSIC AND ARTS 47

8. The problems seemed so small and ______________. (important)

48 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

VI. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake. 1. A lot of people are good artists and they are successfully in life.

trains, buses and walls around the world. In the 1990s and 2000s, a lot of graffiti artists started painting pictures.

5. My mother doesn’t like rock music and I don’t too.

In some countries, writing or painting on walls is a crime and street artists can have problems with the police. In other countries, artists can draw and paint in certain places. For example, in Taiwan, there are ‘graffiti zones’ where artists can paint on walls. In São Paulo in Brazil, street artists can paint pictures on walls and houses. Their pictures are colourful and beautiful. Some tourists visit São Paulo just to see the street art!

6. The weather of Hong Kong is different from that of Canada’s.

1. Where did modern graffiti begin?

2. Music promote creativity, social development, and personality. 3. The Mona Lisa is a portrait paint by the Italian artist Leonardo da Vinci. 4. Your violin is the same with the one I’ve just bought.

_______________________________________________________

7. How long do you go to the movies? - Twice a month.

2. What was Demetrius’s tag?

8. The weather today is not so hot as it is yesterday.

_______________________________________________________

VII. Match the questions with the answers. 1. What is your favourite kind of music?

a.Let’s go to the 3D Art Gallery.

2. What shall we do this weekend?

b.Comedy.

3. Who is your favourite actor?

c.No, I don’t.

4. Do you like country music?

d.Gangnam Style.

5. What kind of this show?

e.Pop music.

6. You love dancing, don’t you?

f.Jackie Chan.

7. Do you enjoy horror films?

g.Yes. I love singing too.

8. Which Korean performance do you like?

h.No, I like rock music.

3. What did young people write on New York walls? _______________________________________________________ 4. When did aerosol paint graffiti become popular? _______________________________________________________ 5. Is graffiti legal in every country in the world? _______________________________________________________

VIII. Choose the word which best fits each gap. While art may not be vital to fulfill our basic needs, it does make life (1) ________. When you look at a painting or poster hang on your living room wall, you feel happy. The sculpture on the kitchen windowsill create a (2) ________ of joy. These varieties of art forms that we are surrounded by all come (3) ________to create the atmosphere that we want to live in. Just like art, music can make life extremely joyful and can have a huge effect (4) ________ our mood. If you have something hard or difficult to work on or are feeling tired, an energetic song will likely (5) ________you up and add some enthusiasm to the situation. Similarlywhen stress is high, many people find that relaxing to calming music is (6) ________ that eases the mind. 1. a. boring b. beautiful c. joyful d. helpful

6. Where can artists paint in graffiti zones? _______________________________________________________ X. Write the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first one. Use the word in brackets. 1. This show is the same as the show we saw last week. (different) → This show ______________________________________________ 2. She is the quickest runner at all. (quick) → No other runner __________________________________________ 3. She hasn’t made as many mistakes as last time. (fewer) → She ____________________________________________________ 4. The Eiffel Tower is as high as an 81-storey building. (same)

2. a. sense

b. feel

c. cause

d. way

→ The Eiffel Tower _________________________________________

3. a. away

b. along

c. down

d. together

5. Steven Spielberg directed Jurassic Park. (by)

4. a. on

b. in

c. at

d. of

→ Jurassic Park ____________________________________________

5. a. take

b. wake

c. pick

d. bring

6. This painting isn’t so expensive as my favourite painting. (than)

d. nothing

→ My favourite painting _____________________________________

6. a. something

b. anything

c. everything

IX. Read the text carefully, then answer the questions.

7. My English is better than my French. (as)

Modern graffiti began in big cities in the United States in the 1970s. One of the first ‘taggers’ was a teenager called Demetrius. He wrote his tag TAKI 183 on walls and in subway stations in New York. Other teenagers saw Demetrius’s tag and started writing their own tags on walls, buses and subway trains all over New York.

→ My French ______________________________________________ 8. John hasn’t done any housework for a month. (ago) → The last time John ________________________________________

Then, some teenagers started writing their tags with aerosol paint. Their tags were bigger and more colourful. Aerosol paint graffiti became very popular in the 1970s and 1980s and UNIT 4: MUSIC AND ARTS 49

50 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

UNIT 5

/ɒ/

VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK

/ɔː/

_________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________

A. PHONETICS

II. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently.

I. Look at the pictures and complete the words. Then put them in the correct column

1. a. tofu

b. opera

c. hot

d. bottle

2. a. taught

b. water

c. sandwich

d. author d. salt

o__e__e__t__

f__ __

3. a. apple

b. pancake

c. snack

4. a. sauce

b. saw

c. bought

d. yoghurt

5. a. torch

b. pot

c. omelette

d. rock

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Match the food or spice with its definition. 3.

s__u__e

s__ __s__g__ __s__g

c__ff__ __

r__ __

1. omelette

a. a thick liquid eaten with food to add flavour

2. sausage

b. a food in the form of long, thin strips cooked in soup

3. pepper

c. a dish made by mixing eggs together and frying them

4. turmeric

d. a food consisting of a small roll of pastry filled with meat and

w__t__ __

p__ __

vegetables, and fried 5. sauce

e. a small tube of skin filled with a mixture of meat, spices etc,

6. noodles

f. a soft white food made from soya beans

7. tofu

g. a yellow powder made from the root of an Asian plant

8. spring rolls

h. a grey or white powder used to give a spicy, hot taste to food

II. Complete each sentence with the word in part I. Use the picture as a cue.

p__r__

10.

s__o__m

1. Jane eats ___________ quite often because it is healthy.

2. Would you like bacon or ___________? 11.

s__l__

12.

b__t__l__ 3. Add some ___________ to give the chicken a yellow colour.

13.

f__r__

14.

h__r__e

15.

__r__n__e

16.

d__ __gh__er

4. To make an ___________ you must first beat the eggs.

5. Do you want to eat ___________ or rice?

6. Don’t put so much ___________ in the soup.

7. There aren’t __________ bananas, but there is __________ apple and __________ grapes. 8. I want __________ jam and __________ butter for my toast.

7. Heat the oil, then deep-fry the ___________.

9. Can I have __________ sausages and__________omelette with fries on the side, please? 10. My father always has __________biscuit and __________cup of tea at bedtime.

8. I made some spaghetti ___________ for dinner.

VII. Complete the sentences with How much or How many.

III. Underline the correct words.

1. _____________grams of sugar per day should we consume?

1. She bought a loaf/ bowl/ bar of bread so we can make sandwiches.

2. _____________bread do we need?

2. We’ve already eaten a tube/ packet/ slice of biscuits!

3. _____________coffee do you drink in a day?

3. Would you like a bowl/piece/glass of lemonade?

4. _____________steaks do you want?

4. There is a piece/ carton/ kilo of milk in the fridge.

5. _____________meat do we need for the barbecue tonight?

5. Could you cut me a smaller slice/ spoon/ bunch of ham?

6. _____________bottles of orange juice have you had today?

6. You can have a loaf/ piece/ pot of cake after you’ve eaten your vegetables!

7. _____________hamburgers did he eat?

7. See round the grocer’s for a bottle/ tin/ tube of sardines.

8. _____________cream would you like in your coffee?

8. She ate a glass/ slice/ bowl of noodles yesterday morning.

9. _____________potatoes are there in the basket?

9. Anna always eats a slice/ bar/ loaf of chocolate on her way to school.

10. _____________rice can I put in the soup?

10. He got a can/ piece/ carton of Coke from the fridge because he was thirsty. IV. Complete the instructions to make a basic French omelette with the verbs in the box. server

beat

fold

heat

pour

VIII. Make questions with How much or How many. 1. cups of butter/ we/ need/ for this recipe _________________________________________________________________________

place

(1) ___________ eggs, water, salt and pepper in small bowl until blended. (2) ___________butter in nonstick omelet pan. (3) ___________ in egg mixture. Mixture should set immediately at edges. When top surface of eggs is thickened and no visible liquid egg remains, (4) ___________ filling, such as shredded cheese, finely chopped ham on one side of the omelet. (5) ___________ omelet in half with turner. With a quick flip of the wrist, turn pan and invert omelet onto plate. (6) ___________ immediately. V. Write C for countableand U for uncountable. 1. beef

____

7. spinach

____

13. turmeric

____

2. apple

____

8. egg

____

14. pancake

____

3. bread

____

9. butter

____

15. vegetable

____

4. biscuit

____

10. lemonade

____

16. coffee

____

5. rice

____

11. sandwich

____

17. sugar

____

6. spring roll

____

12. ham

____

18. orange

____

VI. Fill in the blanks with a, an, some or any. 1. Have you got __________ potatoes? 2. I’d like __________bread, and __________piece of cheese, please. 3. For breakfast, I have __________ham sandwich and __________orange juice. 4. Here are __________ cereals, but there isn’t __________ milk. 5. Would you like __________ beer or would you prefer __________ bottle of Coke? 6. Is there __________ rice left? ~ I’m afraid there isn’t __________ rice left, but youcan have __________noodles instead.

2. milk/ you/ like/ in your tea _________________________________________________________________________ 3. grapes/ there/ in the fridge _________________________________________________________________________ 4. cakes/ she/ make/ for the party last night _________________________________________________________________________ 5. pork/ your mother/ want/ for the barbecue _________________________________________________________________________ 6. cat food/ you/ buy /at the supermarket/ yesterday _________________________________________________________________________ 7. exams/ they/ have/ so far _________________________________________________________________________ 8. tea/there/ in the teapot _________________________________________________________________________ IX. Read the dialogue and circle the correct words. Lucy: How about making (1) a/ an apple pie? Alan: Great idea! Have we got (2) some / any apples? Lucy: Yes, there are (3) some / any in the bowl. (4) How much / How many do we need? Alan: A lot, about a (5) kilo / litre. Lucy: We haven’t got enough. We can buy (6) some / any in the corner shop.

54 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

Alan: And we need (7) some / any flour, too. Look at the recipe. (8) How much / manyflour do we need? Lucy: About half a pound.

8. A: How many meals do you usually eat every day? B: _______________________________________________________________________ II. Complete the dialogue with the appropriate phrases (A - F).

Alan: And (9) how much / how many eggs do we need? Sue:

Four. And we also need (10) some / any butter and (11) some / any sugar. Oh, we haven’t got (12) some / any butter.

A.Then add some yeast and a pinch of salt to the mixture. Mix with a whisk. B.My pleasure. Enjoy your pancakes!

Andy: We can buy (13) a / some bar of butter in the shop, too.

C.Just cook until golden then serve with some fruit or vegetables.

X. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition.

D.Sure. All you need is some butter, 1/2 a litter of milk, 250 grams of flour and 4 eggs.

1. Is there any milk _________ the fridge? 2. There was a lot of food left over _________ the party.

E.Heat some butter in a frying pan and pour about 1/4 cup of the mixture into the pan at a time.

3. You can warm _________ the leftovers in the microwave.

F.First, beat 4 eggs together with flour and milk.

4. Beat the eggs together _________ salt, pepper and cold water. 5. Serve the pancakes _________ some vegetables or fruits.

Anna: Can you tell me how to make pancakes, please?

6. Pho is a special kind _________ Vietnamese soup.

Beck: (1)__________________________________________________

7. Pour about ¼ cup of mixture _________ the pan at a time.

Anna: What do I have to do?

8. The broth for pho bo is made _________ stewing cow bones _________ a long time.

Beck: (2)__________________________________________________

9. Simmer the sauce _________ a low heat.

Anna: What do I do after that?

10. Cut the meat _________ small pieces.

Beck: (3)__________________________________________________

C. SPEAKING

Anna: What’s next?

I. Complete the dialogues with the phrases or sentences in the box.

Beck: (4)__________________________________________________ Anna: And then?

A glass of orange Juice, please.

I Just have some cereal each morning

Beck: (5)__________________________________________________

I prefer something sweet.

I love Pho.

Anna: Oh... that sounds simple! Thanks a lot.

Four cartons, please.

Four or five small meals.

Beck: (6)__________________________________________________

Twice a month.

Yes, two slices, please.

D. READING I. Fill in each blank with a word from the box.

1. A: What kind of Vietnamese food do you like? B: _______________________________________________________________________ 2. A: What would you like to drink? B: _______________________________________________________________________ 3. A: What is your favourite taste? B: _______________________________________________________________________ 4. A: How much milk do you need? B: _______________________________________________________________________ 5. A: How often do you drink milk tea? B: _______________________________________________________________________ 6. A: Would you like some cheese?

basic

stewing

pot

most

even

broth

rice

Pho is one of the (1) ___________ popular Vietnamese dishes. What is pho? Pho is a Vietnamese noodle soup consisting of (2) ___________, rice noodles, herbs and meat. There are two (3) ___________ types of pho and that is Pho Bo (beef noodle soup) and Pho Ga (chicken noodle soup). Pho Bo is beef broth that is made by stewing cow bones in a large (4) ___________ for quite a long time. Pho Ga is very similar to Pho Bo. Instead of beef broth, chicken broth is made by (5) ___________ chicken bones. The noodle itself is made from varieties of (6) ___________. The ingredients and toppings may (7) ___________ a slight bit in the North and the South. Pho is normally eaten for breakfast, but many of people eat at lunch, or (8) __________ dinner.

B: _______________________________________________________________________ 7. A: What are you going to have for breakfast? B: _______________________________________________________________________ UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK 55

vary

56 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

II. Read the text carefully then decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F).

→ It is _______________________________________________________________

Once being a basic food of farmers and poor families in Vietnam, com tam or broken rice is now a favourite dish of most Vietnamese. It is said that the best broken rice can be found in Saigon. When you come to Saigon, you should try this dish at least one time and you will not regret it. tam literally means broken rice. Broken rice originally consisted of grains which were Com

→ There are not ________________________________________________________

broken during the harvesting and cleaning of rice. In the past, as most people preferred to eat the long, whole grain rice, broken rice grains were difficult to sell and usually eaten by the Vietnamese working class because of the cheap price. Nowadays, often favored over long grain rice for its unique flavour and texture, broken rice is one of the best-loved fares in Vietnam.

2. There are a few eggs in the fridge. 3. They have lived there for two years. → They started _________________________________________________________ 4. This is the first time I have drunk cocktail. → I have never _________________________________________________________ 5. This exercise is easier than the last one. → This exercise is not ___________________________________________________

Local broken rice eateries can practically be found on every street in Saigon. A broken rice dish is served with many beautiful colours from grilled pork chop with multi-flavour to steamed egg, shredded pork skin, pickles, vegetables such as tomatoes, cucumbers ... and especially sweet fish sauce that is the spirit of the dish.

→ I find ______________________________________________________________

1. Today, com tamis only eaten by poor Vietnamese.

→ The new building is the same ___________________________________________

2. Com tamis made from broken rice grains.

8. She had no eggs, so she didn’t make an omelette.

3. In the past, most people didn’t eat broken rice grains because they were cheap.

→ She didn’t have ______________________________________________________

6. I’m bored of playing computer games. 7. The new building is as high as the old one.

4. It is difficult to find a place to eat com tam in Saigon. 5. The most important part of com tamis sweet fish sauce.

TEST FOR UNIT 5

6. Com tamis now a favourite dish of Vietnamese people, especially Saigonese.

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

E. WRITING

1. a. bread

b. beef

c. meat

d. tea

I. Arrange the words to make sentences.

2. a. audience

b. sauce

c. sausage

d. taught

1. kilos/how many/would/potatoes/of/like/you/? _________________________________________________________________________ 2. but/went/I/fish/ I/ fishing/ catch/didn’t/any/. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. 15/ cook/for/chicken/you/over/ the/low/minutes/heat/it/before/ serve/. _________________________________________________________________________ 4. broken/tell/you/can/how/me/to/rice/cook/? _________________________________________________________________________ 5. three/in/fridge/are/there/milk/the/cartons/of/. _________________________________________________________________________ 6. has/but/egg/bread/got/he/an/hasn’t/he/any/got/.

3. a. eggs

b. cups

c. cartons

d. noodles

4. a. soup

b. salt

c. sauce

d. sugar

5. a. fridge

b. rice

c. spinach

d. milk

II. Choose the odd one out. 1. a. juice

b. sandwich

c. lemonade

d. milk

2. a. sweet

b. sour

c. salty

d. sauce

3. a. egg

b. pork

c. beef

d. ham

4. a. cheese

b. salt

c. orange

d. bread

5. a. bowl

b. glass

c. plate

d. fork

III. Choose the best answer a, b, c, or d to complete the sentence. 1. Pho is always served _________ fresh herbs, bean sprouts, sliced-up chiles, and lime.

_________________________________________________________________________ 7. electric cooker/how much/in/rice/left/the/is/?

a. for

b. with

c. in

d. on

2. This cake is made _________ fresh butter and eggs.

_________________________________________________________________________ 8. Vietnam/most/Pho/of/the/popular/is/one/dishes/in/.

a. in

b. of

c. by

d. from

3. You don’t need to take _________ food on the trip.

_________________________________________________________________________ II. Write the second sentence so that it has the same meaning as the first one. 1. I’ve never seen such a boring movie.

a. a a. carton

UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK 57

b. some

c. any

d. the

4. We need a _________ of bread to make the sandwiches foreveryone. b. bar

58 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

c. loaf

d. tube

2. Are there some eggs in the fridge?

5. There was some ham _________ from lunch. a. leave

b. leaving

c. to leave

d. left

6. My lemonade is a bit _________. Can you give me some sugar, please? a. sour

b. sweet

c. spicy

d. salty

7. Would you like _________ milk in your coffee? a. any

b. some b. many

d. a few

c. much

d. little

c. formulary

d. ingredient

9. Flour is the main _________ in cakes. a. recipe

b. dish

4. Salt is one of important ingredient for almost dishes. 5. Can you buy some breads on your way home? 6. What do you usually have in breakfast?

c. a

8. How _________ cheese do we need to make a cheese cake? ~ About 250 grams. a. few

3. Would you like a cheese with your pasta?

10. Alan: _________________

7. Vietnamese eat more instant noodles to Japanese. 8. How many glass of water should you drink per day? VII. Match the questions with the answers. 1. Are you ready to order?

a.Beer, orange juice and mineral water.

2. How much flour do we need?

b.Very good.

3. What is there to drink?

c.Two or three.

Huan: Pho, bun cha, bun bo, banh mi, com tam, etc.

4. What Vietnamese food can you cook?

d.No, thanks. I’m full.

a.What Vietnamese food should I try?

5. How many slices of ham do you want?

e.Yes. I’d like chicken with rice, please.

b.What’s your favourite drink?

6. How does this garlic soup taste?

f.Just a bottle of mineral water, please.

c.How do you cook Vietnamese food?

7. Would you like another bowl of rice?

g.Bun bo and mien ga.

d.How much food do you like?

8. Do you want something to drink?

h. 250 grams.

IV. Write the correct tense or form of the verbs in brackets.

VIII. Choose the word which best fits each gap.

1. My house is very dirty. I ______________ (clean) it tomorrow.

6. I’m very sorry Dr. Jones ______________ (not be) back in the clinic until 2pm.

Pho might be Vietnam’s (1) _______ famous dish, butbun cha is the top choice when it comes to lunchtime in Hanoi. It doesn’t matter if you eat bun cha in a restaurant or a small cart on the street, you will be (2) _______ by a plate of vermicelli (bun), a bowl of broth with grilled pork and a (3) _______ of fresh herbs. The vermicelli and fresh herbs are pretty common in a Vietnamese restaurant. The broth and the pork are the ones that make this dish (4) _______. Bun cha sets often come with the delicious nemcua be– friedcrab spring (5) _______. Still not convinced? It’s what Obama ate during his night (6) _______ with Bourdain.

7. The chicken meat served with pho ga ______________ (cut) into thin slices.

1. a. most

b. the most

c. best

d. the best

8. My father ______________(eat) pho almost every morning at the restaurant nearby.

2. a. cooked

b. made

c. served

d. tried

9. The broth is made by ______________ (stew) cow bones for a long time.

3. a. bottle

b. pot

c. bar

d. basket

10. What is there ______________ (drink), Mike?

4. a. simple

b. comfort

c. specially

d. unique

V. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets.

5. a. pieces

b. rolls

c. halves

d. slices

1. The soup had a very ___________ taste. (salt)

6. a. out

b. in

c. towards

d. along

2. She covered the cake with a ______________ of sugar and whites of eggs. (mix)

IX. Read the text carefully then choose the correct answers.

3. Most children enjoy eating ______________ chicken and French fries. (fry)

Vietnamese food culture varies by regions from the north to the south. In Northern Vietnam, food is characterized by light and balanced. Northern Vietnam is seen to be the cradle of Vietnamese cuisine with many notable dishes like Pho, Bun Rieu, Bun Thang, Bun Cha, BanhCuon, etc. Then, food culture in Northern Vietnam became popular in Central and Southern Vietnam with suitable flavors in each regions.

2. This coffee ______________ (taste) terrible, but the biscuits ______________ (be) great. 3. Pho ______________ (become) more and more popular in Saigon since 1954. 4. Last year we ______________ (go) on a school trip to Scotland. 5. At the moment Joana ______________ (learn) to cook some Vietnamese dishes.

4. The pineapple was sweet and ______________. (juice) 5. Meats and fish are ______________ used in all Vietnamese cooking. (common) 6. The chicken meat is ______________ and cut into thin slices. (bone) 7. It took about 30 minutes of ______________ and 40 minutes of baking. (prepare) 8. The sauce itself was ______________ and slightly sweet. (fragrance) VI. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake. 1. How many orange juice have you had today? UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK 59

The regional cuisine of Central Vietnam is famous for its spicy food. Hue cuisine is typical Central Vietnam’s food culture. Food in the region is often used with chili peppers and shrimp sauces, namely, Bun Bo Hue, BanhKhoai, BanhBeo, etc. In Southern Vietnam, the warm weather and fertile soil create an ideal condition for planting variety of fruit, vegetables and livestock. Thus, food in the region is often added with garlic,

60 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

shallots and fresh herbs. Particularly, Southerners are favored of sugar; they add sugar in almost dishes. Some signature dishes from Southern Vietnam include BanhKhot and Bun Mam. 1. It is considered that Vietnamese cuisine __________.

THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM

UNIT 6

a.originated from the North b.became more and more popular c.always combines taste and colour

A. PHONETICS

d.can be found only in Northern Vietnam

I. Put the words into the correct column according to the underlined part.

2. What are the features of Northern Vietnamese food? a. It’s delicious and healthy.

b. It’s sweet and sour.

c.It’s light and balanced.

d. It’s a bit fatty and salty.

3. Hue cuisine is notable for its __________. a. colorful food

b. spicy taste

c. bitter taste

d. light flavor

joke

chicken

watch

college

cheap

question

juice

july

sandwich

giraffe

garage

engine

exhaustion

gymnastic

natural

enjoy

furniture

language

statue /dʒ/

4. In Southern Vietnam, __________. a.the warm weather makes it hard to plant fruit and vegetables

/tʃ/

_________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________

b.fresh herbs are always used in cooking c.people love sweet food d.sugar is often added to dishes

cello

_________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________

5. Which of the followings is NOT true? a.Food in Vietnam changes region to region.

II. Underline the words with the sound /tʃ/. Circle the words with the sound /dʒ/.

b.Southerners do not like northern food due to its light flavor.

1. My teacher told a joke about his natural village.

c.Chill peppers and shrimp sauces are among the frequently used ingredients.

2. Soldiers are marching on the streets.

d.Bun Bo Hue is a typical dish of the Central Vietnam cuisine.

3. Enjoy your lunch!

X. Make questions for the underlined parts.

4. There’s some orange juice in the fridge.

1. She needs twelve eggs to make two cakes.

5. I have a sandwich, a chocolate bar and some jam. Which one do you choose?

_________________________________________________________________________

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Write the name in English of some historic places in Vietnam.

2. They drank a lot of wine at the party last night. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. I often drink coffee in the morning. _________________________________________________________________________

Van Mieu

_______________________

Chua Huong

_______________________

Chua Mot Cot

_______________________

Den Hung

_______________________

4. Beef noodle soup is my favourite food. _________________________________________________________________________ 5. My lemonade tastes a bit sour. _________________________________________________________________________ 6. No, there isn’t any milk in the fridge. _________________________________________________________________________ 7. No, thanks. I love cookies, but I’m full. _________________________________________________________________________ 8. The beef broth is made by stewing cow bones. _________________________________________________________________________ UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK 61

6. The Imperial Academy/ consider/ the first university in Viet Nam. _______________________________________________________ 5.

Hoang Thanh Hue

7. Three millilitres of water/ add/ to the mixture.

_______________________

_______________________________________________________ 8. The letters/ deliver/ the postman/ at 8 o’clock. _______________________________________________________

Khue Van Cac

V. Complete the sentences using the past simple passive form of the verbs in brackets.

II. Fill in each blank with a suitable word. 1. The Imperial _______________ was built by Emperor Ly Nhan Tong.

1. The Temple of Literature _________________ (construct) in 1070 under Ly ThanhTong’s dynasty.

2. The _______________ of Literature was founded in 1070.

2. The statues _________________ (build) by the Ha Noi People’s Committee in 2003.

3. QuocTuGiam, the first _______________ of Vietnam, was established in 1076.

3. The Doctors’ stone tablets _________________ (recognise) by UNESCO in 2010.

4. The 82 Doctors’ stone _______________ were recognised by UNESCO in 2010.

4. The construction of TuDuc Tomb _________________ (complete) in 1876.

5. In 2003, four _______________ of Ly Thanh Tong, Ly Nhan Tong, Le Thanh Tong and Chu Van An were built.

5. The students of the Imperial Academy _________________ (select) from regional examinations.

6. In the centre of the third courtyard is the ThienQuang _______________. 7. The teachers of the Imperial Academy were very famous _______________.

6. Originally, the Po Nagar tower _________________ (make) of wood in order to worship Goddess Po Nagar.

8. Tourists can see many beautiful Cham _______________ in BinhDinh Province.

7. Between 1442 and 1779, eighty-one exams _________________ (hold) by the Le dynasty.

III. Complete the passage using the past participle of the verbs in the box.

8. Chu Van An _________________ (bear) in Van Thon village, Thanh Dam district. VI. Complete the sentences with the passive form of the verbs In the box.

destroy

build (2)

locate

name

surround

consider

rename

XuanHuong Lake is (1) ______________ in the center of Dalat City. It is (2) _____________ the most charming lake of the foggy land. In 1919 and 1923, two dams were (3) ______________ on a branch of Cam Ly River to create two small lakes. Unfortunately, during a severe storm in 1932, both dams were (4) ____________. Between 1934 and 1935, a larger dam was (5) ______________ of boulders below the sites of the two previous dams to create one large lake. At first, the dam was (6) ______________ Grand Lac (large lake) by the French, but in 1953 it was (7) ______________XuanHuong Lake to dedicate to XuanHuong, a famous Vietnamese poetess in the 19th century. The lake is fully (8) ______________ by pine forests, meadows and flower gardens. IV. Use the prompts to write sentences, putting the verbs in the present simple passive. 1. Cheese/ make/ from milk. _______________________________________________________ 2. The Temple/ visit/ thousands of people/ every year. _______________________________________________________ 3. Toyota cars/ produce/ Toyota Motor Corporation. _______________________________________________________ 4. German/ also/ speak/ at EU meetings. _______________________________________________________ 5. Most newspapers/ print/ on recycled paper. _______________________________________________________

locate

erect

celebrate

recognise

build

write

surround

display

regard

reconstruct

1. Lunar New Year ________________ in January or February. 2. The TajMahal ________________ in the 17th century. 3. The Independence Palace ________________ on Nam KyKhoiNghia Street. 4. The novel Oliver Twist ________________ by Charles Dickens. 5. In 2000, Ha Long Bay ________________ by UNESCO as a World Heritage Site. 6. Many precious relics ________________ in the Temple of Literature. 7. The first Doctors’ Stone Tablets ________________ in 1484. 8. Many old buildings in the Temple of Literature ________________ in 1999. 9. Van Mieu ________________ by three main roads of Hanoi. 10. The three Ivory Cham Towers ________________ as one of the best Cham tower complexes in Vietnam. VII. Rewrite the sentences in passive voice. 1. People use the Internet all over the world. _______________________________________________________ 2. Did the police find the missing girl? _______________________________________________________

64 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

3. Large numbers of tourists visit these tourist attractions annually.

IX. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition.

_______________________________________________________ 4. They built Po Nagar Cham Towers to honour the goddess Po Nagar. _______________________________________________________ 5. Tourists don’t visit this museum very often. 6. She bought all this cheese in France. 7. They didn’t invite me to their New Year party. 8. Do they sell mineral water in plastic bottles? 9. People consider the Imperial Academy the first university in Vietnam. _______________________________________________________ 10. When did UNESCO recognise Ha Long Bay as a World Heritage Site? _______________________________________________________ VIII. Choose the bestanswer a, b, c, or d to complete each sentence. c. is written

d. was written

2. My passport ___________ last year while I was on vacation. c. was steal

b. were affected

d. isn’t serving

c. was affected

d. are affected

5. Someone ___________ this mirror last night. a. breaks

b. is broken b. does it make

d. was broken d. is it made

7. The school ___________ two examinations every year. a. holds

b. held

c. is held

b. has founded

c. was found

d. was founded

9. The committee ___________ a public transportation proposal. a. consider

b. is considering

c. considered

b. has shocked

Mai:

c. was shocked

(3)__________________________________________________

Huan: The Temple of Literature is located on Van Mieu Street. (4)__________________________________________________

Huan: The Temple was founded by Emperor LvThanh Tong. (5)__________________________________________________

Huan: No, not in 1076. It was built in 1070. Mai:

(6)__________________________________________________

Huan: The Imperial Academy was established in 1076. (7)__________________________________________________

Huan: Chu Van An was the first principal of the Imperial Academy. (8)__________________________________________________

Huan: There are 82 Doctors’ Stone Tablets in the Temple of Literature. ___ I’m going to the Temple of Literature and the Imperial Academy first. ___ The mausoleum might be closed for maintenance sometimes so check before you go. ___ It sounds very interesting! Have a good trip. _1_ Hi, you look quite busy. What are you doing?

d. was considered

10. Everybody ___________ by the terrible news yesterday. a. shocked

(2)__________________________________________________

II. Put the dialogue into the correct order. d. was held

8. The Temple of Literature ___________ in 1070 by Emperor LyThanh Tong. a. found

Mai:

c. did it make

(1)__________________________________________________

Huan: Yes, I’ve been to the Temple of Literature twice.

Mai:

c. broke

6. Look at this beautiful lace! Where ___________? a. was it made

Mai:

c. isn’t served

4. Most email accounts at my company ___________ by virus two days ago. a. affected

C. SPEAKING I. Make questions for the underlined parts.

Mai: d. was stolen

3. Breakfast ___________ in this hotel until 7a.m. b. didn’t serve

9. Thong Nhat Palace is located ___________ 106 Nguyen Du Street, District 1.

Huan: I last went to the Temple of Literature in 2017.

1. British author George Orwell ___________ the novel Animal Farm.

a. served

7. The One Pillar Pagoda was built ___________ the year 1049.

10. Khue Van Pavilion is the symbol ___________ Hanoi.

_______________________________________________________

b. has stolen

5. The Imperial Academy was regarded ___________ the first university in Vietnam.

8. The 82 Doctors’ stone tablets were recognised ___________ UNESCO.

_______________________________________________________

a. stole

3. The Temple of Literature was built ___________ Ly Thanh Tong’s dynasty.

6. The Po Nagar Tower Complex consisted ___________ six towers.

_______________________________________________________

b. wrote

2. She’s very keen to learn ___________ Japanese culture. 4. What do you plan to take ___________ you on the trip?

_______________________________________________________

a. writes

1. We are preparing ___________ a trip to the Temple of Literature.

___ Ok, I will. In the evening, I’ll walk round HoanKiem Lake and enjoy Trang Ten ice cream. ___ Wow! What is your plan?

d. were shocked

___ I’m making a plan for my trip to Hanoi. ___ Then I’m going to visit Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum and Ba Dinh Square.

UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM 65

66 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

___ Oh, I see. It’s a famous historic and cultural place in Hanoi.

___ Yes, sure. Thank you.

7. When was the Imperial Academy founded?

Answer the questions. _______________________________________________________

D. READING

8. How long did the Imperial Academy operate as a university?

I. Fill in each blank with a word from the box.

_______________________________________________________ destroyed

temples

statues

worship

located

about

until

E. WRITING I. Write sentences from the cues given.

(1) ___________ in the mountainous border DuyXuyenDistrict of Quang Nam Province, My Son Sanctuary is Viet Nam’s most important site of the ancient kingdom of Champa.

1. The Temple of Literature/ build/ the year 1070.

My Son is a complex of Hindu (2) ___________ that were constructed by the Champakingdom, which ruled the Central and Southern part of Vietnam, from the 3rd century (3) ___________ 1832. The first temples of My Son were constructed with wood during the 4thcentury. After they were (4) ___________ by fire, the kings of the Champa kingdom decided to build the next structures with red bricks. The Cham people used the temples as a (5) ___________ place, and also buried some of their kings there. Although the majority of the ruins were destroyed, and some (6) ___________ of the gods are missing, there are still some impressive ancient decorations that survived the bombing: snakes, elephants, scenes of battles, and Recognized priests. (7) ___________ a Cultural Heritage site by UNESCO in 1999, My Son is

2. There/ four tall pillars/ front/ the Temple of Literature.

anattractive destination for tourists to visit and learn (8) ___________ the culture, history, and architecture of Champa Ancient Kingdom.

_________________________________________________________________________ 3. The Doctors’ stone tablets/ erect/1484/ Emperor Le Thanh Tong. _________________________________________________________________________ 4. The Imperial Academy/ consider/ the first university/ Vietnam. _________________________________________________________________________ 5. ThienQuang Well/ locate/ the middle/ the third courtyard. _________________________________________________________________________ 6. 2010/ the 82 Doctor’s stone tablets/ recognize/ UNESCO/ a Memory of the World. _________________________________________________________________________

II. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks. The Temple of Literature (Van Mieu) was constructed in 1070 under the reign of King LyThanh Tong. The temple was originally dedicated to Confucius as well as other scholars and sages. Six year later, the Imperial Academy (QuocTuGiam), Vietnam’s first university, was founded by King Ly Nhan Tong on the grounds of the temple. Initially, the Imperial Academy was the school for princes and sons from royal families and then expanded to admit brilliant students from all over the country. In 1484 Emperor Le Thanh Tong ordered the erection of the first stone tablets that were carved with the names, places of birth and achievements of doctors. The university operated for more than 700 years, from 1076 to 1779. Nowadays, the Temple of Literature – Imperial Academy (Van Mieu - QuocTuGiam) is one of the most famous historic and cultural heritages of Vietnam. And the Doctors’ stone tablets were recognised by UNESCO as World Documentary Heritage in 2010. *

_________________________________________________________________________

Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F).

1. The Temple of Literature was built to honour Confucius.

7. Chu Van An/ regard/ one of the most famous teacher/ the Imperial Academy _________________________________________________________________________ 8. Lots of souvenirs/ sell/ inside the Temple of Literature. _________________________________________________________________________ II. Write the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first one. 1. Thousands of people visit the Temple of Literature every day. → The Temple of Literature _____________________________________________________ 2. In 1484, King Le Thanh Tong ordered the construction of 116 stelaes. → The construction ___________________________________________________________ 3. You should take warm clothes because it’s very cold in Sa Pa. → You had __________________________________________________________________

2. The Imperial Academy was founded in 1070.

4. Do you want to visit Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum first?

3. The Imperial Academy was established within the Temple of Literature.

→ Would you ________________________________________________________________

4. The Imperial Academy was originally established to educate students from all over the country.

→ You don’t _________________________________________________________________

5. The first Doctors’ stone tablets were erected under the Le Dynasty.

6. It’s a good idea to rent a bike or motorbike to travel around the city.

6. The Temple of Literature was recognised by UNESCO as World Heritage.

→ You _____________________________________________________________________

5. It’s not necessary to book a hotel In advance.

7. Let’s pay a visit to Huong Pagoda. → Why don’t ________________________________________________________________ UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM 67

68 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

8. Khue Van Pavilion was chosen as the official symbol for Vietnam’s capital Hanoi. → They _____________________________________________________________________

10. ‘________ to Hanoi?’‘Yes, I went there last year.’ a. Were you ever

b. Have you ever been

c. Did you ever go

d. Were you ever gone

IV. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

TEST FOR UNIT 6 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. pagoda

b.blanket

c. academy

d. tablet

2. a. children

b.scholar

c. teacher

d. lunch

3. a. question

b.nation

c. education

d.recognition

4. a. visited

b.founded

c. decided

d. developed

5. a. heritage

b.historic

c. recognise

d. literature

II. Complete the sentence with a suitable word.

1. Glastonbury festival _______________ (organise) every year in the village of Pilton, England. 2. In 1076, King Ly Nhan Tong _______________ (build) the Imperial Academy as the first university of Vietnam. 3. The first temples of My Son Sanctuary _______________ (make) of wood in the 4th century. 4. An altar to Chu Van An _______________ (set) up in the Temple of Literature. 5. We _______________ (not do) any practice tests yet so I’m not sure what they’re like. 6. Wait a minute, he _______________(speak) to someone on his mobile. 7. Many different languages _______________ (speak) in Canada.

1. The Temple of Literature was _____________ in 1070.

8. The Imperial City of Hue can _______________ (divide) into two main parts.

2. Thong Nhat _____________ is a landmark in Ho Chi Minh City. 3. Ha Long Bay was recognised by UNESCO as a World _____________ Site. 3. Khue Van Pavilion was chosen as the _____________ of Hanoi. 4. The Imperial Academy was regarded as the _____________ university in Viet Nam. 5. The One Pillar _____________ was built in 1049.

9. You’d better _______________ (rent) a bike if you want to travel around. 10. I don’t want to go to Huong Pagoda. How about _______________ (visit) Ho Chi MinhMausoleum? V. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. One Pillar Pagoda is a major tourist _______________ in Hanoi. (attract)

7. Chu Van An was _____________ in 1292 in Van Thon Village. 8. Tran Quoc Pagoda is _____________ at the southeastern shore of West Lake.

2. Imperial citadel of Thang Long is a _______________ complex built during the Ly Dynasty. (culture)

III. Choose the best answer a, b, c, or d to complete the sentence.

3. King Ly Nhan Tong was the _______________ of the Imperial Academy. (found)

1. Oxford University is regarded ________ the oldest university in the UK. a. as

b.in

c.at

d. by

2. Tickets are a bit harder to buy right on the pot, so you’d better book________ advance. a. for

b.with

c.of

d. in

3. The stone stelae were ________ with the names and places of birth of 1307 graduates. a. written

b.learned

c.carved

d.selected

4. Chu Van An was one of the most famous ________at the Imperial Academy. a. founders

b.statues

c.teachers

d.doctors

5. The students of the Imperial Academy ________ by very famous scholars. a. are studied

b. were taught

c. have learned

d. was educated

6. We ________ leave now or we’ll miss the bus. a. can

b.shall

c. had better

d. shouldn’t

7. He bought a picture of the Temple of Literature as a ________ of his trip to Hanoi. a. souvenir

b.landmark

c. symbol

d. tablet

8. ________ was the University of Cambridge formed? - In 1209. a. What

b.Where

c. How

d. When

9. Huong Pagoda is a great ________ spot in Hanoi. a. see-sight

b. sight-see

c. seeing-sight

d. sight-seeing

UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM 69

4. In 1484, King Le Thanh Tong odered the _______________ of the first Doctors’ stone tablets. (erect) 5. The Imperial Academy was opened to educate _______________ students from all over the country. (talent) 6. The circle and square of the pavilion _______________ the heaven and the earth. (symbol) 7. The 82 Doctors’ stone tablets have recently received _______________ as a National Treasure. (recognise) 8. Tourists like to visit _______________ monuments such as Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum and the Temple of Literature. (history) VI. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake. 1. Khue Van Pavilion is regarded by the symbol of Ha Noi. 2. Today, the Temple was considered one of the most popular tourist attractions. 3. I haven’t ever been to Hanoi before. 4. The students were not interested in history because it was bored. 5. Tourists should add the Temple of Literature to their visit list in Hanoi. 6. You’d better to take your raincoat because it’s going to rain. 7. The Doctors’ stone tablets was first erected by King Le Thanh Tong. 8. The Imperial City of Hue was finally complete under the reign of King Minh Mang.

70 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

VII. Match the questions with the answers. 1. Where would you like to go on your vacation?

a. To the south of the Imperial Citadel Thang Long.

2. What was he like?

2. What should I bring for the trip to Sa Pa?

b. In 2010.

3. What did he do in his early life?

3. Where is the Temple of Literature located?

c. PhuQuoc Island.

4. When was the Doctors’ recognised by UNESCO?

d. You’d better take warm clothes.

4. Who did Chu Van An teach when he was a teacher at the Imperial Academy?

5. What is the Imperial Academy?

e. Emperor Ly Nhan Tong.

5. Why did he resign?

6. Where is Khue Van Pavilion?

f. It’s the first university in Vietnam.

7. Who established the Imperial Academy?

g. For three years.

8. How long did the students of the Imperial Academy study?

h. It’s in the second courtyard.

Stone

tablets

_________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ 6. How old was he when he died? _________________________________________________________________________ 7. Where was an altar to Chu Van An erected?

VIII. Choose the word which best fits each gap.

_________________________________________________________________________

The Temple of Literature was (1) ___________ in 1070 under Ly Thanh Tong’s dynasty. The temple is divided into five courtyards. The first courtyard stretches (2) ___________ the main gate to Dai Trung gate. The second stands out with Khue Van Cac Pavilion. The third courtyard is (3)___________ doctor names were listed on stone tablets above tortoise backs. There are a total of 82 tombstones, with names and places of birth of 1307 doctors. The fourth courtyard is dedicated to Confucius and his 72 honoured students, as (4) ___________ as Chu Van An – a famous teacher known for his devotion to teaching. The last and also furthest courtyard is Thai Hoc house, which used to be the Imperial Academy (QuocTuGiam) – the first (5) ___________ of Vietnam. Thai Hoc house holds a small (6) ___________ of old time costumes for students and mandarins.

X. Change the sentences into the passive or active voice. 1. The Temple of Literature is regarded as the first university in Vietnam. → _________________________________________________________________________ 2. His father bought a picture of the One Pillar Pagoda last year. → _________________________________________________________________________ 3. Thousands of people visit the Hung Kings’ Temple every day. → _________________________________________________________________________ 4. By whom was the Imperial Academy built?

1. a. constructed

b. build

c. erected

d. considered

2. a. since

b. from

c. to

d. in

5. People can see Khue Van Pavilion symbol on street signs in Hanoi.

3. a. when

b. who

c. what

d. where

→ _________________________________________________________________________

4. a. long

b. good

c. well

d. far

6. Vietnamese people use Khue Van pavilion as a symbol of Hanoi.

5. a. university

b. temple

c. house

d. academy

→ _________________________________________________________________________

6. a. collect

b. colleting

c. collection

d. collective

7. What surrounds the Temple of Literature?

IX. Read the text carefully, then answer the questions. Chu Van An was born in 1292 in Van Thon village, QuangLiet commune, present day ThanhTri district, Hanoi. In the early life, he was famous as a straightforward man who passed the doctoral examination but refused to become a mandarin. Instead, he opened a school and began his career as a Confucian teacher in Huynh Cung village in Thanh Tri. Under the reign of Tran Minh Tong, Chu Van An became a teacher at the Imperial Academy where he was responsible for teaching the crown prince Vuong, the future emperor Tran Hien Tong. Later, he resigned and returned to his home-village because Tran Du Tong refused his request of beheading eight corrupted mandarins. For the rest of his life, Chu Van An continued his teaching career and wrote books. He died of illness in 1370.

→ _________________________________________________________________________

→ _________________________________________________________________________ 8. In 1994, Ha Long Bay was recognised by UNESCO as a World Heritage Site. → _________________________________________________________________________

After his death, an altar was set up in his honour in the Temple of Literature. 1. When was Chu Van An born? _________________________________________________________________________ UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM 71

72 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

9. _________ was the Temple of Literature founded? ~ Emperor Ly Thanh Tong.

TEST YOURSELF 2 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. food

b. cook

c. soup

d. noodle

2. a. spicy

b. fry

c. shy

d. try

3. a. salt

b. tablet

c. ham

d. pancake

a. When

b. Where

c.Who

d. By whom

10. ‘_________’ ‘There is some milk and orange juice in the fridge.’ a. What is there for lunch?

b. What is there to drink?

c. Is there anything to eat?

d. What do you drink?

4. a. musician

b. sugar

c. ocean

d. television

V. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

5. a. scholar

b. architect

c. machine

d. choir

1. Water puppetry ______________ (begin) in the 11th century. 2. Harry Potter and the Goblet of Fire ______________(write) by J K Rowling

II. Choose the odd one out. 1. a. temple

b. pagoda

c. cathedral

d. tourist

3. I think she ______________ (not agree) with this idea.

2. a. lemonade

b. tea

c. noodle

d. juice

4. When she was young she ______________(go) swimming very often.

3. a. perform

b. exhibition

c. concert

d. show

5. We ______________(not work) at the moment. Please call back later.

4. a. painter

b. musician

c. bitter

d. actor

6. During the wars, both the gate and the bell tower ______________(destroy).

5. a. located

b. built

c. recognised

d. constructed

7. They ______________ (work) at this company since 2008.

III. Fill in each blank with a suitable word.

8. In the UK, alcohol ______________(not sell) to anyone under 18. It’s against the law.

1. The _____________ of Literature in Hanoi has a long and interesting history.

9. Would you like ______________(go) to Huong Pagoda with me?

2. Water puppetry is a traditional _____________ form.

10. Many young people enjoy ______________ (watch) Korean dramas.

3. _____________ is my favourite drink. It’s made from lemons, sugar, and water.

VI. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets.

4. She won the Oscar for Best _____________ in “Three Billboards outside Ebbing, Missouri”.

1. Van Cao was a famous Vietnamese ______________. (compose)

5. What’s your favourite Vietnamese _____________? ~ I love MiQuang and Bun Bo.

2. The ______________of TuDuc Tomb was completed in 1876. (construct)

6. Chu Van An is considered one of the most famous _____________ at the Imperial Academy.

3. The children enjoyed the water puppet ______________. (perform)

IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c, or d to complete the sentence.

4. The chicken meat served with pho ga is ______________and cut into thin slices. (bone)

1. Thousands of Vietnamese scholars graduated _________ the Imperial Academy.

5. The students were ______________prepared for the national exams. (care)

a. from

c. in

c. for

d. under

7. Dong Ho ______________are made in Dong Ho village. (paint)

2. The broth for pho ga is made _________ stewing chicken bones. a. of

b. with

c. by

d. from

3. I haven’t got_________ bread left. Would you like _________ noodles instead? a. any – any

b. some – some

c. no – some

d. any – some

b. also

c. neither

b. flour

c. egg

b. selected

c. regarded

d. carton of milk

b. originated

c. was originated

5. The One Pillar Pagoda built in 1049. 6. Your idea is quite different as mine.

d.located

7. The puppets are maked of wood and then painted. 8. She would like to make an apple pie, but there isn’t any apples left!

7. Jazz _________ in the US and is now popular throughout the world. a. originates

1. Jason hasn’t telephoned me since two weeks.

4. My mother doesn’t enjoy country music, and I don’t like it too.

6. The first Doctors’ Stone Tablets were _________ in 1484. a. erected

VII. Each sentence has a mistake. Find and correct it.

3. At the age of seven, Picasso received artistic training by his father.

d. too

5. How much _________ should I use to make the cake? a. pineapple

8. The ______________of pho spread southwards in the 1950’s. (popular)

2. How many water do you drink every day?

4. My sister hates rock music, and she hates rap _________. a. either

6. He is so clever and well ______________. (educate)

d. is originated

8. From his childhood, Chu Van An was _________ for his intelligence. a. interested

b. successful

c. talented

d. famous

TEST YOURSELF 2 73

74 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

1. Hue used to be the capital of Vietnam.

VIII. Match the questions with the answers. 1. How many tomatoes do you need for the

2. The Imperial City of Hue was built in 1803 by Emperor Gia Long.

a.Milk coffee, please.

3. It took 27 years to complete the construction of the Imperial City of Hue.

sauce? 2. What would you like to drink?

b.In 1994.

4. The Imperial City of Hue includes two main parts: The Citadel and the Forbidden City.,

3. How old was Chu Van An when he died?

c.My Heart Will Go On.

5. Many relics in Hue Imperial City were badly damaged due to natural disasters.

4. When was Ha Long Bay recognised as a

d.Two bottles.

6. The Imperial City of Hue was made a UNESCO World Heritage Site. XI. Write the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first one.

World Heritage Site? 5. Which song is sung in the film Titanic?

e.Céline Dion.

1. Be calm or you’ll make a wrong decision.

6. Who is the best-selling Canadian artist of all

f.About a kilo.

→ If _______________________________________________________________________ 2. A great poet wrote these wonderful poems.

time? 7. How does the soup taste?

g.Seventy eight.

8. How much juice do you have?

h.Very delicious

→ These wonderful poems ______________________________________________________ 3. Jane didn’t go fishing yesterday because it rained heavily. → Because of ________________________________________________________________

IX. Choose the word which best fits each gap.

4. Khue Van pavilion is used as a symbol of Hanoi by Vietnamese people.

The first Glastonbury Festival took place In 1970 and was (1) _______ by Michael Eavis, who still runs the festival now (2) _______ his farm in Somerset in the south-west of England. Michael charged people just £1 to enter, and the ticket included free milk from the farm. Only 1,500 people attended on that occasion, (3) _______ this number has grown exponentially since then. In 2011, there were approximately 100 times (4) _______ people in the crowd and tickets, which cost £195 each, (5) _______ out within 4 hours. The festival takes place almost every year in the last weekend of June and lasts for three days.

→ Vietnamese people _________________________________________________________

Although it is best known for contemporary music, Glastonbury is host to other (6) _______ arts such as dance, comedy and theatre. 1. a. organise

b. organising

c. organised

5. His idea is different from mine. → His idea is not _____________________________________________________________ 6. These Dong Ho paintings are more expensive than those modern paintings. → Those modern paintings are not _______________________________________________ 7. What is your favourite food? → What food ________________________________________________________________

d. organization

8. Chefs use these machines to mix the ingredients. → These machines ____________________________________________________________

2. a. on

b. in

c. at

d. from

3. a. so

b. but

c. or

d. while

4. a. many

b. much

c. more

d. most

5. a. took

b. sold

c. bought

d. worked

6. a. performing

b. creative

c. decorative

d. academic

X. Read the text carefully, then decide whether the following statements are true (T) orfalse (F). Famously being one of Vietnam’sseven UNESCO World Heritage Sites, the ImperialCity of Hue has long been a must-see attraction for tourists. The Imperial City of Hue was actually a walled fortress and palace belonged to the ancient city of Hue which was a capital city of the Nguyen Dynasty – Vietnam’s last royal dynasty for 140 years. The grandeur architecture was planned to be built in 1803 by Emperor Gia Long. During 27 years from 1805 to 1832, the Imperial City of Hue was finally completed under the reign of the Emperor Minh Mang, making it the most massive structure being built in the history of modern Vietnam. There are total of ten main majestic gates leading to the Imperial City of Hue, which can be divided into two main parts: The Citadel and The Forbidden City. The complex of the Emperor’s residence, gates, temples, and pagodas was severely damaged during the Vietnam War, and only 20 out of 148 buildings survived. TEST YOURSELF 2 75

76 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 7 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

UNIT 1

LEISURE ACTIVITIES 5. ______________

6. ______________

7. ______________

9. ______________

10. ______________

8. ______________

A. PHONETICS I. Write pr or br to complete the words, then put them into the correct columns. ___ush

___ize

___eakfast

___ick

a___icot

___anch

___ogram

___esident

II. Complete the sentences with the words in part I.

li___ary

___ice

___occoli

___oblem

1. I really enjoy ___________ comic books when I have no work to do.

___oject

___acelet

___onze

___ince

2. He enjoyed sitting in his armchair, ___________ and reading the newspaper.

/br/

/pr/

3. She was always on her phone talking and ___________.

_______________________ _______________________ _______________________

4. Internet addicts spend too much time ___________. 5. ___________ has become very popular with teenagers, especially online games. 6. Helen fancies ___________ with her friends at weekends.

II. Complete the sentences with the words in part I. Then practise saying them.

7. He’s useless at ___________. He won’t even put up a shelf.

1. The statue of ____________ Ho Chi Minh is made of ____________.

8. Trang is fond of ___________. She made lots of beautiful bead bracelets and necklaces.

2. I’m going to paint the fence. Have you got any paint ____________?

9. ___________ is many girls’ favourite pastime. They take pleasure in lookingat the goods displayed in shop windows.

3. She won first ____________ in a poetry competition. 4. An ____________ is a small, round, soft fruit with an orange-yellow skin.

III. Put the words into the correct category.

5. ____________ and princess are the titles to call the children of a king. 6. The outer wall of Saigon Notre Dame Cathedral was built with red ____________. 7. Nowadays, traffic is a serious ____________ in big cities. 8. She has some ____________ in her jewellery box.

VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR

I. Look at the pictures and write the name of the activities. relaxing texting reading window shopping

playing games making crafts

doingDIY making origami

10. My sister is very good at ___________. She can fold paper into animals, birds, flowers, etc.

a comedy, a skill, hanging out, going to the gym, aerobics, collecting books, the news, visiting relatives, a book, a language, a poem, judo, chatting, making crafts, the newspaper, having meals together, gardening, a musical instrument, skating, a drama, visiting museums, going to a fashion show, doing DIY projects, volleyball, texting, a game show 1. Going to an event/ place

hanging out surfing the net

2. Having hobbies 3. Learning something 4. Playing sports

1. ______________

2. ______________

3. ______________

4. ______________

5. Reading 6. Socializing with friends

6 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

VII. Complete the sentences with the to-infinitive or -ing form of the verbs in brackets. 1. I have enjoyed ___________ (meet) you. Hope ___________ (see) you again soon.

7. Spending time with family

2. My father is not keen on coffee. He prefers ___________ (drink) tea. 3. I am a little busy. Would you mind ___________ (wait) a little longer? 4. Mobile games are great, but I don’t like ___________ (play) them for too long.

8. Watching TV

5. If I can choose, I prefer ___________ (stay) at home to ___________ (play) sport. 6. Tonight I’d like ___________ (go) out, but I have to do my homework.

IV. Write the correct “netlingo” abbreviation according to its meaning. WF B4N S2U WBU T2UL EZ THX J4F FYI LOL NUFF DYLI GR8 BTW OMG 2nite

7. Sue loves ___________ (make) origami. She can fold some animals, birds and flowers. 8. I detested ___________ (spend) two hours every day travelling to work and back.

1. easy

___________

2. What about you?

___________

9. He started ___________ (surf) the net hours ago. Has he stopped ___________ (surf) yet?

3. Same to you

___________

4. Rye for now

___________

10. I tried hard ___________ (concentrate), but my mind kept ___________ (wander).

5. Talk to you later

___________

6. tonight

___________

VIII. Complete the correct answer a, b, c or d.

7. By the way

___________

8. for your information ___________

9. enough

___________

10. Do you love it?

___________

11. Oh my God

___________

12. Great

___________

13. just for fun

___________

14. Thanks

___________

15. way fun

___________

16. Laughing Out Loud

___________

1. How much time do you spend _______ TV every day? a. watch

virtual

satisfied

weird

hooked

relaxing

a. failing

fun

b. to fail

3. Many teens are __________ on social networks like Facebook, Twitter and Instagram. 4. The website allows you to take a __________ tour of the art gallery.

b. to talking

VI. Complete the sentences with the correct form (to-infinitive or -ing form) of the verbs in the box. Some verbs can be followed by either a to-infinitive or an -ing form.

a. to drive

b. to be driven

travel

c. be driven

b. play

d. driving

c. to play

b. going

d. played

c. for going

d. go

a. buy

b. to buy

get

read

1. My brother loves _____________ live football on TV.

d. for buying

b. to lose - to eat

c. losing - to eat

d. losing - eat

10. I would love _______ to your party! Thank you for inviting me. a. come

2. Do people in your country like _____________ abroad on vacation?

c. buying

9. Your child needs _______ some weight. Tell him _______ less junk food and more exercise. a. to lose - eat

hang out

d. with tidying

8. I really regret _______ this computer – it’suseless.

8. Are you __________ to Facebook, Twitter, Tumblr, or Instagram?

eat

c. tidying

6. Jane prefers _______ music than to listen to it.

a. to go

7. Hanging out with friends is __________. I really enjoy it.

cycle

d. talk

7. Marlene can’t wait _______ to the beach again.

6. Bird-watching is an increasingly popular __________ activity.

c. talking

b. tidied

a. playing

5. He was not __________ with the camera, so he took it back to the store.

watch

d. failed

5. Steven dislikes _______, so he usually takes a bus to work.

2. That’s __________ - I thought I’d left my keys on the table but they’re not there.

make

c. fail

4. Could you help me _______ the kitchen? It’s a real mess! a. tidy

1. It is very __________ to lie on the beach, and listen to the sound of the waves.

stay

d. in watching

3. I always enjoy _______ to my grandfather. He always tells me great stories. a. to talk

addicted

c. watching

2. I’d hate _______ the exams, so I’m doing my best.

V. Complete the sentences with the words in the box. leisure

b. to watch

b. coming

c. to come

d. came

IX. Complete the passage with the words from the box.

3. Riding a bike is Lan’s pleasure, but she detests _____________ in the rain. 4. I don’t mind _____________ at home to look after the children. 5. As a child, he hated _____________ books, but now he finds it enjoyable. 6. Minh is in good shape. He enjoys _____________ sport and exercise. 7. She doesn’t like _____________ up early in the morning, especially at the weekend. 8. Emily dislikes _____________ crafts, but she enjoys origami. 9. I fancy _____________ out tonight because I’m too tired to cook. 10. Nancy adores _____________ with her best friend Helen. UNIT 1: LEISURE ACTIVITIES 7

therefore

in short

although

secondly

then

thirdly

inaddition

firstly

The number of people running has decreased (1)__________ running provides many benefits for health. The following advantages will help you decide if you want to try. (2)__________, running helps to improve physical body. For instance, it builds a good condition of lungs, promotes bone health, reduces stress levels. (3)__________, running reduces blood pressure while improves blood flow. (4)__________, it is a good choice for weight loss. A medium level of running can result in

8 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

weight loss.

_1_ Hello! Where are you going?

(5)__________, running is a low cost activity. You only need a quality pair of athletic shoes. You can run outdoors, in your neighbourhood or at local parks. (6)__________, you can meet your exercise goals without going to a gym centre.

___ Comic books, science fiction novels, story books, etc. I also like to draw and paint in my leisure time.

(7)__________, it’s worth running whether in every morning or in any free time. Youdon’t need a big start, but 15 minutes each day. (8)__________ add 5 minutes every weekuntil it reaches 60 minutes. You will never see the fantastic outcome if you don’t give it a try.

___ Hi! I’m going to the book store to buy some books.

X. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition.

___ What an enjoyable pastime you have! ___ Nice! You’re so talented! ___ You enjoy reading, don’t you?

1. I first got hooked ________ video games when I was eight.

___ I spend my leisure time gardening. I have planted many different types of flowers, plants, and trees in my garden.

2. The library allows you to check ________ six books at a time.

___ Thanks. What do you enjoy doing in your spare time?

3. Carpentry isn’t right ________ my street. I’d rather pay someone else to do it.

___ I don’t like reading at all. Why do you like reading?

4. Could you help me look ________ my contact lens?

D. READING

5. What do you usually do ________ your leisure time? 6. A lot of kids nowadays have become addicted ________ surfing the net. 7. We work ________ volunteers for an animal protection organization. 8. He spends most of his free time looking ________ the garden. 9. Today, teenagers rely ________ technology more than in the past. 10. Surfing the Net too many hours can be harmful ________ your health.

C. SPEAKING I. Write questions for the underlined parts. 1. A: ____________________________________________________________________ B: My mother watches films every afternoon. 2. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: They went to the movies yesterday evening. 3. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: I love hanging out with my best friend Helen. 4. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: I don’t give my personal information to websites because it’s easy to be stolen. 5. A: ___________________________________________________________________ Children should spend less than 2 hours a day on screens. 6. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: Do-it-yourself (DIY) is the most popular pastime in my country. 7. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: The art of paper folding originated in China. 8. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: 1 vs 100 game show lasts ninety minutes. II. Put the dialogue into the correct order. ___ What types of books do you like most?

I. Fill in each blank with a word from the box. models

through

origami

together upstream

folding

taught

Origami is the Japanese word for paper (1)__________. ORI means to fold and KAMI means paper. (2)__________, they form the word, “origami.” It is an art form that has been handed down from parent to child (3)__________ many generations. Origami involves the creation of paper forms usually entirely (4)__________ folding. Animals, birds, fish, geometric shapes, puppets, toys and masks are among the (5)__________ that even very young children can learn to make in just one sitting. In Japan, at one time origami was (6)__________ in schools but today, children are generally taught origami at home. Holidays are celebrated with colorful (7)__________ decorations made by the family. On children’s day (formerly boy’s day), children make colorful carp: a fish that swims (8)__________, against the current. This symbolizes strength. II. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks. The British spend their free time in different ways. People generally use it to relax, but many people also do voluntary work, especially for charities. A lot of free time is spent in the home, where the most popular leisure activity is watching television, the average viewing time being 25 hours per week. Reading is also a favourite way of spending leisure time. The British spend a lot of time reading newspapers and magazines. In the summer gardening is popular, and in winter it is often replaced by ‘do-it-yourself’, when people spend time improving or repairing their homes. Some leisure activities are mostly or entirely social. Inviting friends for a drink or a meal at home is the most usual one. Sometimes people join friends for a drink in a pub, or have dinner in a restaurant. The extra time available at weekends means that some leisure activities, many of them to do with sport, normally take place only then. Traditional spectator sports includefootball, cricket, horse racing, motor racing and motorcycle racing. Popular forms of exercise are swimming, tennis, ice skating or roller-skating, cycling, climbing, and hill or country walking.

___ Well, reading gives me much pleasure and knowledge. Books are a rich source ofinformation, you know.

Families often have a ‘day out’ at the weekend, especially in summer, with a visit to alocal event such as a festival, fair or show. Young people especially go to clubs and discos, while people of all ages go to the theatre, the cinema, art exhibitions and concerts.

___ Yeah, it’s my favourite pastime.

A. Decide whether the following sentences are true (T) or false (F). UNIT 1: LEISURE ACTIVITIES 9

10 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

1. Many British people use their free time to help people in need.

She only lets _______________________________________________________________ 4. Could you help me with this box?

2. In the summer, the British prefer indoor activities.

Would you ________________________________________________________________

3. All free time activities are individual activities.

5. DIY skills aren’t as hard to learn as I think.

4. Most British people watch or do sports at the weekend. 5. Sometimes people go with their friends to a pub or restaurant.

DIY skills are _____________________________________________________________

6. British young people don’t like going to the movies.

6. Who will take care of the garden while you are away?

B. Answer the questions.

7. How about going window-shopping this afternoon?

Who will look _____________________________________________________________ Shall _____________________________________________________________________

1. What’s the most popular free time activity in the UK? _____________________________________________________________

8. What leisure activity do you like most? What’s ___________________________________________________________________

2. How many hours a week do the British watch TV? _____________________________________________________________ 3. In winter, what do the British often do in their spare time?

TEST FOR UNIT1

_____________________________________________________________ 4. Which sports do many British people enjoy watching?

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. sound

b. out

c. found

d. enough

2. a. bracelet

b. favourite

c. craft

d. game

E. WRITING

3. a. leisure

b. sure

c. shopping

d. socialise

I. Write sentences with the cues given.

4. a. trick

b. kit

c. addict

d. virtual

1. Mai/ usually/ listen/ K-pop music/ free time.

5. a. satisfied

b. hooked

c. bored

d. socialised

_____________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. when/ I/ be/ a child/ I/ enjoy/ play/ computer games. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. my father/ spend/ most/ spare time/ look after/ the garden. _________________________________________________________________________ 4. watching TV/ most/ popular/ leisure activity/ Britain? _________________________________________________________________________ 5. many teenagers/ addicted/ the Internet/ computer games.

II. Choose the odd one out. 1. a. socializing

b. communicating

c. hanging out

d. skateboarding

2. a. having savings

b. collecting stamps

c. making origami

d. doing DIY

3. a. a thriller

b. a comedy

c. a skill

d. a reality show

4. a.J4F

b. 2moro

c. tonight

d. goin’

5. a. magazine

b. mobile game

c. newspaper

d. book

6. a. virtual

b. harmful

c.creative

d. leisure

III. Complete each sentence with an appropriate word.

_________________________________________________________________________ 6. she/ get/ hooked/ the medical drama/ after/ watch/ the first episode. _________________________________________________________________________ 7. most/ my friends/ prefer/ play sports/ to/ surf the net.

1. How much time do you spend ___________ the Web a day? 2. One of Jesse’s favourite ___________ activities is swimming. 3. ___________ exercise is good for your health. 4. What is his ___________ address? ~ It’s ejohnsonl23@yahoo.com.

_________________________________________________________________________ 8. today’s world/ teenagers/ rely/ technology/ more/ the past.

5. She enjoys making ___________. She has a collection of handmade items. 6. They loves reading ___________ such as Doraemon and Lucky Luke.

_________________________________________________________________________

7. Would you ___________ closing the window? It’s cold.

II. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one.

8. My son’s ___________ to computer games – hehardly ever comes out of his room.

1. It takes us more than two hours to see the film “Avatar”.

IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

The film “Avatar” __________________________________________________________ 2. She likes to hang out with friends on Saturday evening.

1. How much time do you spend _______ leisure activities? a.on

She’s interested ____________________________________________________________ 3. She only allows her children to watch television at weekends. UNIT 1: LEISURE ACTIVITIES 11

b. in

c. for

d. with

2. Why don’t you apply for this job? It looks right _______ your street. a.on

b. in

12 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

c.at

d. up

3. Many young people don’t _______ walking to school or playing active games? a. prefer

b. enjoy

c. suggest

4. Daisy is _______ social media. She spends lots of time on Facebook and Instagram. a.tired of

b. bored with

c. addicted to

d. curious about

5. _______ leisure time is free from compulsory activities, it is often referred to as “free time.’ a. Because

b. Although

c. When

d. As long ass

6. On YouTube you can find many videos on _______ all aspects of your English. a. surfing

b. working

c. taking

d. improving

7. Some addicts are teenagers _______ are hooked on computer games. a. which

b. who

c. what

b. hanging out

c. window shopping d. doing DIY

b. virtual

c. weird

8. Do you adore ______________ (lie) in a hot bath? 9. Please try ______________ (arrive) punctually at 8.30. 10. Many teenagers prefer ______________ (watch) TV to ______________ (read) books. VII. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. The Internet is very ______________, it takes up a lot of our time. (addict) 3. Sitting in front of the computer too long can cause ______________. (obese)

9. You can raise a _______ pet like a Neopet if you aren’t allowed to own a real pet. a. domestic

7. I’ve just bought a new CD of folk songs. I ______________ (listen) to it tonight.

2. I enjoy ______________ with friends and going out at the weekend. (social)

d. whose

8. My sister enjoys _______. She usually walks around the mall, but not buying anything. a. going shopping

5. The American ______________ (spend) 34 hours a week watching television. 6. ______________ (you/ ever/ make) origami cranes?

d. want

d. beloved

4. Are you ______________ about the new Gears Of War games? (excite) 5. She listens to classical music for ______________. (relax) 6. The Internet has changed the English language ______________. (consider) 7. She was ______________ with her job and decided to look for a new one. (satisfy)

10. “My favourite leisure activity is people watching.” “_______”

8. Face to face ______________ is better than Skype video calls. (communicate)

a. That sounds so weird!

b. That’s all right.

VIII. Match the questions to the answers.

c. OK. That’s what you’ve chosen.

d. Sure. It’s very entertaining.

1. What do you enjoy doing in your spare time?

a. I don’t know ... doing sport or playing a musical instrument.

2. How much time do you have each week for socialising with friends?

b. I want to improve my speaking skill.

V. Choose the underlined part A, B, C or D that needs correcting. 1. Having leisure activities are truly important to the elderly. A

3. What do you think is the best leisure activity for teens?

2. Although she wanted to go to the museum, she decidedstaying at home. A

3. Parents are concerned that their kids may be spendingtoo many time on screens. A

4. Collecting coins isexciting, but it can also be relaxed. A

5. Cloud watchingsound weird, but Hang adores it. A

6. For some young people, enjoyment involves sittingin front a computer playing games. A

7. His parents are thinking ofbanning him onusing the computer. A

C D

8. When you game online, be carefully when making friends with strangers. A

VI. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets. 1. At present, the social networks ______________ (become) more popular among young generation. 2. I ______________ (not listen) to their new CD yet. Is it any good? 3. When I was a student, I ______________ (not like) doing homework. 4. Facebook ______________ (found) in 2004 by Mark Zuckerberg and Eduardo Saverin. UNIT 1: LEISURE ACTIVITIES 13

4. Why do you join English club? 5. Do you prefer to spend your free time alone or with other people?

c. I prefer to spend my free time with my family and friends. d. I’m not sure. I might watch a video at home. e. For relaxation, I prefer listening to soft music.

6. What do you do to relax yourself?

f. Every day to consume updatesfrom friends and family.

Facebook

7. How often do you use social media?

g. About five hours or fewer.

8. Do you have any plans for next weekend?

h. I love reading and spend as much time as I can doing that

IX. Choose the word which best fits each gap. In the world of messengers and chat rooms, the use of Internet (1) ___________ is as naturalas seeing another selfie maker at the street. Some people call it Internet slang since manyabbreviations are (2) ___________ used in informal conversations of specific groups in socialmedia networks. However, the typical slang of British English, American English, Australian English, and others are typically localized (3) ___________ Internet abbreviations are universal and used by any person who catches the gist of a chat. The likelihood you can come up (4) ___________ ten common internet abbreviations isalmost as high as the fact that you text or (5) ___________ your friends each day. Test yourself,what does NSFW mean in texting? And can you decode at (6) __________ half of the followingabbreviations? LOL, ASAP, OMG, XOXO, B4N, FYI, G2G, FB, MSG, TTYL. Easily? By the way, FYI, ASAP, as well as other acronyms and abbreviations (7) __________

14 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

BTW(By the way), IMO (In my opinion), LMK (Let me know), PRB (Please reply by) havebeen included to the business email conversation (8) __________ almost never happens withcommon slang.

♦ How did you start doing it at first?

1. a. synonyms

b. abbreviations

c. antonyms

d. syllables

2. a. mostly

b. most

c. the most

d. almost

♦ Do your Mum/ Dad/ friend(s) also like it?

3. a. although

b. because

c. whenever

d. whereas d. against

4. a. for

b. to

c. with

5. a. tweet

b. talk

c. send

d. meet

6. a. loss

b. large

c. last

d.least

7. a. such

b. like

c. likely

d. as

8. a. this

b. what

c. which

d. it

♦ How often do you practice it? ♦ Who do you often practise it with? ♦ What free-time activities would you like to try in the future?

X. Read the passage carefully, then choose the correct answers. The latest addiction to trap thousands of people is the Internet, which has been blamed for broken relationships, job losses, financial ruin, and even suicide. Psychologists now recognize Internet Addiction Syndrome (IAS) as a new illness that could cause serious problems and ruin many lives. IAS is similar to other problems like gambling, smoking and drinking: addicts have dreams about the Internet; they need to use it first thing in the morning; they lie to their parents and partners about how much time they spent online; they wish they could cut down, but are unable to do so. A recent study found that many users spend up to 40 hours a week on the Internet. Some of the addicts are teenagers who are already hooked on computer games and who find it very difficult to resist the games on the Internet. 1. What is the best title of the passage? a. The advantage of the Internet

b. Hooked on the Net

c. Impact of Internet on teens

d. A guide to the Internet

2. According to the writer, internet addiction __________. a. is not the same as gambling

b. is not an illness

c. can lead to financial problems

d. helps people kill time

3. Internet addicts find it hard ___________. a. to use the Internet in the morning

b. to lie about the time they spent online

c. to spend more time on the Internet

d. to spend less time on the Internet

4. The word ‘it’ in paragraph 2 refers to ___________. a. the Internet

b. IAS

c. dream

d. computer

5. Which of the followings is NOT true? a.IAS is recognised as a new illness. b.Internet addiction can cause suicide behaviours. c.Many internet addicts spend more than 40 hours a week online. d.Teenagers who are hooked on computer games can suffer from IAS. XI. Write a short paragraph about your favourite leisure activity. ♦ What do you enjoy doing in your leisure time? ♦ What is your favourite leisure activity? ♦ Why do you enjoy doing it? UNIT 1: LEISURE ACTIVITIES 15

16 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

10. nomad

UNIT 2

LIFE IN THE COUNTRYSIDE

j. food made from milk, such as butter and cheese

II. Complete the sentences with the words in part I. 1. If you want to gather honey, don’t kick over the _______________. 2. Horses are grazing in the _______________. 3. He helped his uncle load hay onto a _______________.

A. PHONETICS

4. Mongolia’s nomads live in a traditional tent called _______________.

I. Say the words aloud, then circle the words that matches to the pictures.

5. We saw lots of lush rice _______________ on the way to the village. 6. In Mongolia, he spent time with the nomads of the Gobi _______________. 7. A boy was driving the herd of _______________ to the pasture. 8. It is _______________, and all the farmers are very busy.

1. clock / block

2. blaze / clay

3. blame / clap

4. clasp / blanket

9. The Maasai are _______________ and cattle raisers. 10. The doctor told me to eat less red meat and _______________. III. Complete the sentences with the adjectivesfrom the box.

5. blind / climb

6. blender / cleaner

7. clash / blast

8. cloud / blouse

generous fresh

peaceful optimistic brave exciting vast

quiet inconvenient skillful envious

1. It’s ____________ to see a kite flying high in the sky. 2. It was very ____________ there; you could just hear the wind moving in the trees. 9. clothes / blossom

10. blown / clown

11. blow / close

12. bliss / click

3. I love the ____________ open spaces and the ____________ air in the countryside.

II. Underline the words that has consonant clusters blor cl.

4. The villagers often find it ____________ to get into town due to the lack of public transport.

1. Nick enjoys looking at the clear blue sky.

5. People in rural areas are more ____________ than their city counterparts.

2. I climbed over the hill and found the bright bloom of the wild flowers. 3. They claimed that those special clinics were built for blind people. 4. Tight winds are blowing over the blackberry farm. 5. We will have a clear view after passing these building blocks.

6. I’m so ____________ of you getting such an exciting holiday. 7. Billy is clearly a ____________ person. He contributed lots of money to charity. 8. It was very ____________ of him to jump into the river to save a drowning child,. 9. Most of Mongolian people are ____________ at riding a horse.

6. There are some clues about the blast near the church yesterday.

10. Life in the countryside is more ____________ and healthier.

7. Clay may stick on your clothes when you go flying kites on the field.

IV. Put the words in the box in the correct rows.

8. The blades of her juice blender was broken.

strawberries hay a donkey a fence sheep flowers rice straw ahorse a tent grass a building grapes cattle a camel a memorial rainwater a bike roses buffaloes a motorcycle cows lettuces a poster stamps goats

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Match the word or phrase with its definition. 1. buffalo drawn cart

a. a circular wooden canvas and felt tent

♦ride: _________________________________________________________________

2. harvest time

b. land covered with grass where sheep, cows, horses, etc., feed

♦ herd: ________________________________________________________________

3. paddy field

c. a vehicle with two or four wheels pulled by buffalo

♦collect: _______________________________________________________________

4. cattle

d. a structure where bees are kept for producing honey

♦pick: _________________________________________________________________

5. pasture

e. cows and bulls that are kept as farm animals

6. ger

f. a high mountainous area of a country

V. Underline the correct form of the word.

7. beehive

g. a field in which rice is grown

1. We’ve all been working very hard / hardly and now we’re tired

8. highlands

h. the time of year when crops are cut and collected from the fields

2. Our school Internet connection is really slow / slowly.

9. dairy products

i. a member of a community that moves with its animals from place to place

3. What’s the matter with him? He looks angry / angrily.

UNIT 1: LEISURE ACTIVITIES 17

♦ put up: _______________________________________________________________

4. The children are playing quiet / quietly in the garden.

18 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

5. Rural areas are common / commonly known as the countryside or a village.

4. An ox doesn’t plough weller / better than a buffalo.

6. Nomadic children are very brave / bravely to learn to ride a horse at the age of five.

5. These 7 thinking habits will help you become more confident / more confidently.

7. The sun is shining bright / brightly through the trees.

6. Don’t worry. The river is not as deep / deeper as it looks.

8. We all find living in the city very stressful / stressfully.

7. After a hard working day, you may sleep soundlier / more soundly than usual.

9. Don’t talk so fast / fastly– I can’t understand what you’re saying.

8. My father has been much healthier / more healthy since he stopped smoking.

10. John was a kindly and generous / generously man.

9. The air in the mountainous zones is more fresh / fresher than that in the cities.

VI. Complete the dialogue with the comparative form of the adjectives in brackets.

10. I can’t understand. Would you ask him to speak clearlier / more clearly?

David:

How do you like living in the big city?

IX. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in brackets.

Maria:

There are many things that are (1) ______________ (good) than living in the country!

1. Some people think that health is _____________ than money. (important)

David:

Can you give me some examples?

2. The pollution in our city is much _____________ than it used to be. (bad)

Maria:

Well, it certainly is (2) ______________ (interesting) than the country: Thereis so much more to do and see!

3. My new teacher explained the lessons _____________ than my old teacher. (clear)

David:

Yes, but the city is (3) ______________ (dangerous) than the counting

5. Get rid of the sorrow! You will do it _____________ next time. (good)

Maria:

That’s true. People in the countryside are (4) ______________ (friendly) thanthose in the city.

6. Communication is a lot _____________ than it was 50 years ago. (easy)

David:

I’m sure that the country is (5) ______________ (relaxed), too!

Maria:

Yes, the city is (6) ______________ (busy) than the country. However, the country is much (7) ______________ (slow) than the city.

8. Robert arrived at the meeting _____________ than Francis. (late)

David:

I think that’s a good thing!

Maria:

The country is so slow and boring! It’s much (8) ___________ (boring) than the city.

David:

Life in the country is a lot (9) ______________ (healthy) than in the city, I think.

Maria:

Sure, it’s (10) ____________ (clean) too. But, the city is so much (11) ____________ (exciting).

VII. Complete the sentences with the comparative form of adverbs in the box. Add ‘than’ where necessary.

4. He doesn’t play volleyball as _____________ as his brother. (good)

7. People in rural areas wear _____________ than those in cities. (simple) 9. These trousers are too wide. Do you have any that are _____________? (narrow) 10. My mother always gets up _____________ than everybody else in the house. (early) 11. Rene speaks _____________ than the other ESL students in the class. (fluent) 12. Can’t you think of anything _____________ to say? (intelligent) 13. I think his new book is much _____________ than his last one. (boring) 14. Max finished the homework _____________ than anyone else in the class. (fast) 15. He doesn’t look as _____________ as he used to. (happy) X. Fill in each blank with an appropriate preposition. 1. The farmers loaded the rice straw _________ buffalo drawn carts.

carefully

hard

quietly slowly

healthily well

badly quickly

far

fast

2. She is always envious _________ her cousin’s long blond hair.

1. The teacher spoke ___________ to help us to understand.

3. He joined the boys _________ herding the buffaloes.

2. She answered all the questions __________ the other students and she got a very good mark.

4. Would you like to visit the countryside _________ harvest time?

3. The Spanish athlete ran ___________ the other runners, so he won the race.

5. I think it’s better for children to grow _________ in the countryside.

4. Jim threw the ball ___________ Peter.

6. The computer provides access _________ all the information.

5. This street is crowded and narrow. Couldn’t you drive a bit ___________?

7. The nomad move two or three times a year to look _________ new pastures.

6. These days we are eating ___________ ever before.

8. A ger can be put _________, then taken _________ and transported.

7. I did ___________ on the test than Mark did. He got an A+ and I just got an A.

9. My father used to live _________ a farm when he was younger.

8. Machines can help farmers harvest ___________.

10. Last summer holiday I went _________ a trip _________ the countryside.

9. Does more money make you work ___________?

C. SPEAKING

10. You’re talking so loudly. Could you speak a bit ___________, please?

I. Match the questions with the answers.

VIII. Underline the correct words or phrases.

1. What is your hometown, Michele?

a. I usually played outside with my friends. Sometimes we went into the city to go shopping or see a movie.

2. How big is the town?

b. Actually I find it exciting to live in the city, but it’s so crowded and the people aren’t friendly.

1. Cattle usually cross over the road. You should drive more careful / more carefully. 2. Life in some parts of the country is boring / more boring than that in other parts. 3. The old usually get up earlier / more early than the young. UNIT 2: LIFE IN THE COUNTRYSIDE 19

20 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

3. What is the town’s population?

c. It’s pretty small, just about 1.86 sq mi.

4. Did you like your hometown?

d. Ten years ago.

5. What did you usually do for fun?

e. I lived in a small town called Beaverton.

6. How often did you go to the city?

f. About three thousand people I think.

7. When did you move to the city?

g. When I was little I liked it, but when I got older I found it pretty boring being in such a small town.

8. Do you prefer city or country life?

h. Twice or three times a month.

In (8)____________, there are both pros and cons to living in the countryside. However, in my opinion, the peacefulness of the countryside makes it a very attractive option.

II. Complete the conversation with the sentences from the box. Sounds great! I wish I could join... Hi Thang. It’s Tony. How is your stay there? Two hours? Wow! It must be fun. I’m so envious of you! I wish I could ride that cart. But where can you fly kites? What are you doing? Have you got lots of new friends there? Really? Who did you go swimming with?

II. Read the text carefully, then answer the questions. Many people enjoy living in a big city because they think life is more exciting there. However, I come from a small village and in my view, there are lots of benefits. The main reason I prefer village life is because it’s very quiet, so I always feel calm when I’m here. Another reason is that the air is so fresh and clean. We have more green spaces and bigger gardens, too. In addition, I think the people here are friendlier. Personally, I’m interested in wildlife photography, so the countryside is perfect for me. The only downside is transport. I have an early start for a long Journey to school in Faro and the school bus is always stopping to pick up more people. Also, it’s boring sometimes, but I enjoy chatting to my friends. Fortunately, I’m learning to ride a moped. On balance, I disagree that city life is better, as I think my village lifestyle is healthier and more relaxing. In spite of that, some of my friends couldn’t cope with life in the country, so it comes down to personal opinion.

Thang: Thang speaking. Tony:

(1) ______________________________________________________

Thang: Hi Tony! It’s very exciting here. I’m having a wonderful time. Tony:

(2) ______________________________________________________

1. Where does the writer come from?

Thang: Lots of interesting things. Yesterday we went swimming in a river. Tony:

___________________________________________________________________

(3) ______________________________________________________

2. Does he like living in a big city?

Thang: My cousins and their friends. We played and swam for 2 hours. Tony:

___________________________________________________________________

(4) ______________________________________________________

3. Why does he prefer village life?

Thang: Yeah. Then we rode a buffalo cart to home. Fantastic! Tony:

___________________________________________________________________

(5) ______________________________________________________

Thang: Tomorrow afternoon we’re going to fly kites together. It’s even more exciting, I think. Tony:

Sure. (6)__________________________________________________

6. How does he go to school? ___________________________________________________________________

(8) ______________________________________________________

7. Does he think city life is better than village life?

Thang: Well, I wish you were here Tony.

___________________________________________________________________

D. READING

8. What is he interested in?

I. Fill in each blank with a word from the box. outdoor

around

___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________

(7) ______________________________________________________

Thang: There are lots of open fields nearby. They’re great places to fly a kite. Tony:

4. How does he think about the people in his village? 5. According to the writer, what is the disadvantage of living in the village?

Thang: Yes. I made friends with many local boys. They’re very friendly. Tony:

On the one hand, life in the countryside is very (2)____________. There are less cars and that means that there is less noise, and that it is less (3)____________. Furthermore, there is more land available in the countryside, and people can often live in bigger houses or flats than in cities. Finally, it is easier to do a lot of (4)____________ activities such as walking or cycling if you live in the countryside. On the other hand, life in the countryside can be (5)____________. There are fewer restaurants, cinemas and shops to go to. Moreover, there is little public transport, which makes it difficult to get (6)____________ if you don’t have a car. Finally, you can feel (7)____________ if you live a long way from other people.

peaceful

conclusion boring

___________________________________________________________________ isolated

possible

polluted

Nowadays, some people choose to live and work in the countryside. New ways of working, such as online working, have made it (1)____________ for more people to live there. There are both advantages and disadvantages to living in the countryside. UNIT 2: LIFE IN THE COUNTRYSIDE 21

E. WRITING I. Put the words or phrases in the correct order. 1. I say/ people/ it / is/ Some/ for/ better/ children/ that/ in the city/ to/ than/ grow up/ in the countryside.

22 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

___________________________________________________________________ 2. in/ Is/ the country/ living/ healthier/ living/ much/ in/ than/ the city? ___________________________________________________________________ 3. because/ the air/ People/ living/ fresh/ the villages/ enjoy/ is/ clean/ in/ and. ___________________________________________________________________ 4. We/ onto / load/ helped/ buffalo drawn carts/ the farmers/ the rice. ___________________________________________________________________ 5. changed/ in/ has/ a lot/ ten/ over/ Life/ the/ countryside/ past/ the/ years. ___________________________________________________________________ 6. In/ children/ the city/ play/ the countryside/ freely/ than/ more/ in. ___________________________________________________________________ 7. learn/ a/ Nomadic/ horse/ when/ to/ children/ they/ small/ are/ ride. ___________________________________________________________________ 8. jobs/ many/ formers/ Unlike/ depend/ other/ the/ heavily/ weather/ on. ___________________________________________________________________ II. Write a comparative sentence using the information and the word in brackets. 1. The average rainfall in Arica, Chile is 0.76mm per year. The average rainfall in the Libyan Sahara Desert is less than 15mm per year. (dry) Arica, Chile _______________________________________________________________ 2. Henry arrived at the meeting at 7 o’clock. I arrived at 6:45. (soon) I ________________________________________________________________________ 3. It costs 100 million dong to build a concrete bridge, but only 50 million dong to build a steel bridge. (expensive) Building a concrete bridge ____________________________________________________ 4. It takes Linh 45 minutes to load hay onto the cart, but his father needs only 30 minutes. (slowly) Linh _____________________________________________________________________ 5. His house’s yard is about 100 square meters while your house’s yard is about 50 square meters. (large) His house’s yard ____________________________________________________________ 6. It was very difficult to travel to the town 5 years ago. Now people can drive a car or take a bus to the town. (easily) People can travel ___________________________________________________________ 7. I do yoga three times a week, but my sister does it almost every day. (frequently) My sister _________________________________________________________________ 8. The Australian athlete jumped 8.78m. The American athlete jumped 8.59m. (far) The Australian athlete _______________________________________________________ 9. Red River is 1.149 km long. Mekong River is 4.350km long, (long) Mekong River _____________________________________________________________ 10. A horse can run 80km/h while a dog can run 50km/h. (fast) A horse ___________________________________________________________________ UNIT 2: LIFE IN THE COUNTRYSIDE 23

TEST FOR UNIT 21 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. ride

b. excite

c. ridden

d. beehive

2. a. pasture

b. vast

c. brave

d. farm

3. a. cattle

b. circular

c. country

d. collect

4. a. generous

b. ger

c. grassland

d. guess

5. a. worked

b. watched

c. relaxed

d. crowded

II. Complete the passage with the comparative form of the adjectives in brackets. Is life better now than it was in the past? Of course in many ways life is (1)_________ (easy) now. We live in the world which is (2)_________ (clean) and safer. It is generally (3)_________ (healthy) as well, and because of improvements in medical care, both men and women can expect to live (4)________ (long) lives. Our day-to-day existence is (5)________ (comfortable), but are we (6)_________ (happy)? The rhythm of life is faster, and (7)_________ (stressful). People are always in a hurry. In the end it is hard to say things were (8)_________ (good) or (9)_________ (bad) before. As the saying goes ‘the grass is always (10)_________ (green) on theother side of the fence’. III. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. 1. I went on a trip to the countryside and had my first experience _______ farm work. a.on

b. with

c. for

d. of

2. We usually spend our holiday in the village _______ our grandparents live. a.what

b. where

c. which

d. when

3. I think country life is so boring and _______ because you’re not close to shops and services. a. unhealthy

b.inconvenient

c. comfortable

d. peaceful

4. On the farm, uncle Duong showed us how to _______ cucumbers. a. plough

b.produce

c. pick

d. put up

5. Mongolian children start to learn _______ before they can walk. a. horse riding

b.riding horse

c. ride horse

d. horse ridden

6. On the side of the road, a herd boy was herding _______. a. kites

b.hay

c. cattle

d. blackberries

7. Mongolian children learn to ride when they are _______ as three years old. a. as young

b.younger

c. younger than

d. so young

8. Does your new stereo play music _______ than your old one did? a. louder

b.more loudly

c. loudlier

d. more louder

9. Countryside is not polluted _______ you can breathe there fresh air. a. although

b.however

c. therefore

d. as

10. ‘Children in my village often fly their kites in dry rice fields.’ ‘_______’ a. It’s right up my street!

b. That’s awesome.

c. Exactly what I want.

d. How interesting!

IV. Choose the underlined word or phrase, A, B, C or D that needs correcting. 1. Farzana didpoor on her algebra quiz because she couldn’t concentrate well.

24 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

2. The test was more difficult than I expected. I could finish it at least 20 minutes early. A

3. Although the island has no clean water and electric, it attracts lots of tourists. A

4. The bee can easy sting anyone coming close to their beehives. A

6. She is boring with the silent surrounding because she used to live in a big city. A

7. Life in the countryside is much peaceful and the life is also slower. A

8. Nomadic children learn riding a horse when they are very small. A

c. My father.

4. Why do you store the hay?

d. Its peacefulness.

5. Do you think country people are friendlier?

e. Both have pros and cons.

6. When would you like to visit the countryside?

f. To feed our cattle.

7. Are there any street markets in your hometown?

g. In dry paddy fields.

8. What do you love most about countryside?

h. Yes. They’re also happier.

VIII. Choose the word which best fits each gap.

5. I love farm work, such as digging holes, sowing seeds and I pick fruit. A

3. Where can you fly a kite in your village?

V. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets. 1. We ___________(play) football this afternoon. Do you want to play too? 2. Could you meet me at the airport tomorrow? My flight___________(arrive) at six. 3. Last summer, my friends and I ___________(spend) our holiday on a farm. 4. Nick ___________(not ride) a buffalo drawn cart before. 5. The cattle ___________(graze) on the green pastures right now. 6. Millions of Mongolians ___________(be) semi-nomadic herders for thousands of years. 7. My family ___________(live) in a small town for ten years before moving to Boston. 8. Country life ___________(not excite) me at all. It’s so boring. 9. Nick would like ___________(visit) the countryside at the harvest time. 10. I don’t mind ___________(drive) for 1.5 hours on the weekend to get out to the countryside. VI. Write the correct form of the word in brackets. 1. People seem to have lost their ___________ in boating on small rivers. (enjoy) 2. More and more ___________are leaving the countryside to city. (farm) 3. A town has a ___________ population than a village does. (large) 4. Sylvia likes the ___________ atmosphere during her stay in the valley. (peace) 5. The firefighters were praised for their ___________ and devotion to duty. (brave)

Although the city seems to have a lot of great things, the country can offer as (1)_________ satisfaction as well. The country is a marvelous place to live in. It offers a very relaxing feeling, and it is filled (2)_________ magnificent views and scenery. Rural towns offer more open space than cities and aren’t overcrowded. The country can also maybe help you become a more independent and (3)_________ person. You can buy a small piece of land, plough it and put some (4)_________ in order to grow your own vegetables. This way you (5)_________ your own crops, and eat and live in a very healthy way. (6)_________, being in the countryside makes you more of an outdoor person often enjoying the voices and wild places of nature. Not everyone is (7)_________ to the city life and not everyone has the desire to live permanently in the countryside. It is a matter of perspective and personal point of (8)_________. 1. a. most

b. more

c. much

d. many

2. a. in

b. out

c. up

d. with

3. a. active

b. idle

c. passive

d. quiet

4. a. weeds

b. seeds

c. breeds

d. branches

5. a. collect

b. damage

c. complete

d. rotate

6. a. By contrast

b. However

c. Therefore

d. In addition

7. a. Interested

b. bored

c. suited

d. excited

8. a. care

b. view

C. contact

d. way

IX. Read the text carefully, then choose the correct answers. For 3,000 years, Mongolians have lived in the rural areas, adopting a pastoral way of life, moving in the search of new pastures. They depend largely on their livestock for a living and sustain themselves with what they can get from the land. Today, approximately half of Mongolia’s population is still roaming the vast plains living in the ger and moving their campings several timesa year. Nomadic life thrives in summer and survives in winter. When temperatures are warm, they work hard on their farms to get milk and make airag, consuming meat from their sheeps and goats. Once winter comes, temperatures dip extremely low and they stay indoors and survive on horse meat.

9. Villages and towns are not as densely ___________ as cities. (populate)

With the rise of technology, changes in the Mongolian nomadic lifestyle are almost inevitable. While they still lead their lifestyle as pastoral herders, many use motorbikes to herd cattle and horses. To move their homes, trucks have taken the place of ox carts. Solar panels are also becoming an addition to the ger, giving them access to electricity without being confined to one place. The nomads use solar energy to power television sets and mobile phones.

10. The trip was an ___________ experience. We enjoyed it very much! (forget)

1. Mongolians regularly move from place to place in order to _________.

6. Visually the house is very pleasing, but it’s ___________. (comfort) 7. It is true that the city can provide much ___________. (convenient) 8. Agricultural work is ___________ seen as a male occupation. (tradition)

VII. Match the questions with the answers.

a.look for food for their family

b. find pastures for their livestock

1. Which is better, city life or rural life?

a. Yes, there are some.

c. herd their cattle and horses

d. sell their animals and farm products

2. From whom did you learn to make kites?

b. At harvest time.

2. How many Mongolians still live a traditional nomadic life? a.Close to 40 percent

UNIT 2: LIFE IN THE COUNTRYSIDE 25

26 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

b. More than 50 percent

c. About 50 percent

d. Approximately 60 percent

3. What is a ger? a.A portable, round tent

b. A thatched house

c. A circular house made of snow

d. A wooden hut

UNIT 3

PEOPLE OF VIETNAM

4. What is the Mongolian’s main food in winter? a.airag

b. goat meat

c. sheep meat

d. horse meat

5. Today, Mongolian nomads _________.

A. PHONETICS I. Look at the pictures and write the clusters /sk/, /sp/ or /st/.

a.don’t lead their lifestyle as herders any more b.use ox carts to move their homes c.use solar energy to power electronic devices d.have the advantage of urban life 6. Which of the followings is NOT true about Mongolian nomads?

1. cri___s

2. ___i

3. ___eed

4. ___ars

5. ___eak

6. ___ider

7. de___

8. co___ume

9. fe___ival

10. ba___et

11. ___ilt house

12. ___irt

13. ___ort

14. ___icky rice

15. we___

16. __ating

a.They live in the countryside. b.They live by and for their livestock. c.They work hard in winter when the temperature dip very low. d.They are now taking advantage of technology. X. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one. Use the words in brackets. 1. This supermarket isn’t as expensive as the one across the street. (less) ______________________________________________________________________ 2. The English teacher started teaching at our school three years ago. (for) ______________________________________________________________________ 3. My doctor advised me not to eat in front of the television. (said) ______________________________________________________________________ 4. You won’t pass the exam unless you study harder. (if) ______________________________________________________________________ 5. Hanoi urban districts are noisier than its suburban areas. (as)

II. Underline the clusters /sk/, /sp/ or /st/ of the words in the box and then put them into the correct column.

______________________________________________________________________ 6. Why don’t we go to uncle Huan’s farm this weekend? (going) ______________________________________________________________________

spicy, vest, story, scare, tourist, stilt, school, especial, aspect, kiosk, skip, toaster, ask, stairs, correspond, skill, risky, sparse, costume, speech, sky, speciality

7. Sarah found it difficult to learn to read in Japanese. (difficulty) ______________________________________________________________________ 8. The book was so complicated that we couldn’t understand it. (too) ______________________________________________________________________

/sk/

/sp/

/st/

9. Sandy now doesn’t study so diligently as she did in the past. (more) ______________________________________________________________________ 10. The Chinese printed the first books more than a thousand years ago. (by) ______________________________________________________________________

UNIT 2: LIFE IN THE COUNTRYSIDE 27

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Match the word or phrase with its definition. 1. shawl (khan pieu)

a. a wheel for raising water to a higher level

2. costume

b. a field that is on the side of a hill and divided into layers that look like steps

3. terraced field

c. local trading site for highlanders to exchange food or hand made

28 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

products 4. stilt house

d. a traditional dance of a particular area or counted

5. waterwheel

e. a building used for the worship of a god or gods

6. folk dance

f. the largest stilt house in the village where village ceremoniesand festivals take place

7. communal house

g. clothes that are typical of a particular place

8. temple

h. a metal disc that makes a loud deep sound when it is hit witha stick

9. gong

i. a house raised on piles over the surface of the soil

10. open-air market

j. a large piece of cloth worn by Thai women or girls overtheir head

II. Complete the sentences with the words or phrases from the box. terraced fields unique

7. ‘Let’s go to the local open-air market’ ‘_________’ a. Good idea.

b.I’d love to.

c.Not at all.

‘_________’ a. What a pity!

b.How interesting

c. How thoughtful!

2. Five-colour sticky rice is well-known as a ____________ of the north-western region of Vietnam. 3. The goods in the open-air market are ____________. You can find almost everything there. 4. Thai cloth is well-known for being ____________, colourful and strong. 5. Xoe and Sap are ____________ of Thai ethnic minority people. 6. The ____________ of the Nung is not as colorful as that of other ethnic groups.

1. _____________ ethnic group has larger population, Cho Ro or Chu Ru? – ChoRo. 2. _____________ groups of languages do all ethnic groups speak? – Eightgroups. 3. _____________ is the biggest house in the village? – It’sthe communal house. 5. _____________ do the San Diu mainly live? – InQuang Ninh province. 6. _____________ do the Thai hold ceremonies to worship their ancestors? – Everyyear. 7. _____________ is the village chief of the Phu La? – Theoldest man. 8. _____________ is it from here, to the communal house? – Justabout one kilometre. 9. _____________ is “khan pieu”? – It’s a shawl with colorful embroidery. 10. _____________ do they cook five coloured sticky rice? – Onspecial occasions. V. Change each sentence Into a question using the question words in brackets. 1. The girl with a shawl on her head is a member of the Thai. (who) _________________________________________________________________________

7. My Son sanctuary has been recognized by UNESCO as a world ____________.

2. The Khmer have three main festivals in a year. (how many)

8. Thai women retain their traditional clothes including short vests, long black skirts, scarves, and ____________.

3. Odu is the smallest ethnic group in Vietnam. (which)

9. Sa Pa is famous for the ____________ located in the mountainous area. 10. ____________ make up between 10 to 15 percent of the population in Vietnam. 1. ‘Is it true that Y Moan was the greatest pop singer of the Ede?’ ‘_________’ c. Come on!

d. Exactly.

b. What a shame!

c. Sounds bad.

d. Okay.

3. ‘In some ethnic groups, women play the leading role in the family’ ‘_________’ a. Well, of course.

b. That’s awesome!

d. It’s all right

c. It’s wrong.

d. No problem.

5. ‘The ethnic minorities are mainly concentrated in Northern Uplands and Central Highlands.’ ‘_________’ a.Oh, I see.

b. So far so good.

c. How convenient!

d. Almost certainly.

6. ‘I have two tickets to a gong performance. Would you like to go?’ ‘_________ What time?’ a. Sorry, I can’t.

b.Not very good.

_________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ 7. They built their houses on stilts to prevent flooding from tides or storms. (why) 8. The population of the Tay ethnic group is about 1.7 million. (what)

4. ‘After a 20 day homestay tom, I can use chopsticks, harvest rice, and cook some Vietnamese dish.’ ‘_________’ a.Yeah, I’d like to.

5. We can find terraced fields in the northern mountainous regions. (where)

_________________________________________________________________________

b. I don’t think so.

c. Wow, that’s surprising!

_________________________________________________________________________ 4. Ok Om Bok Festival is the biggest festival of Khmer people. (what)

6. Bom Bo village is about 200 kilometres from Ho Chi Minh city. (how far)

2. ‘Look at this dish, Nick. It has five colours.’ ‘_________’ a.How nice!

_________________________________________________________________________

Ill. Choose the best expression in response to each sentence. b. How beautiful!

d. Well done.

IV. Complete each sentence with a suitable question word.

4. _____________ arts are displayed in a museum in Da Nang city? – TheCham’s.

costume stilt houses heritage site ethnic minorities diverse speciality ornaments folk dances

1. The Nung mostly live in ____________ though they also live in earthen houses.

a. Really?

d. Yes, of course.

8. ‘Tomorrow we will go to Coc Ly market. You can buy lots of handmade items there.’

c. Yes, I’d like that.

_________________________________________________________________________ 9. The Tay have lived in Vietnam for thousands of years. (how long) _________________________________________________________________________ 10. The M’nong mainly live in Dak Lak province. (where) _________________________________________________________________________ VI. Underline the correct option. This may include a space (–) for zero article. 1. Vietnam is a/an/ the multiethnic country with 54 ethnic groups.

d. Never mind.

UNIT 3: PEOPLES OF VIETNAM 29

30 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

The Viet (Kinh) people account for 87% of a / the / – country’s population.

3. Chaul Chnam Thmey is a/ an/ the celebration of New Year by Khmers. 4

Folk singing of the Bru-Van Kieu is popular, particularly cha chap and sim, the / a / an alternating chant between young men and women.

Ancestor worship is the / a / – most important religious activity among the Bru-Van Kieu.

Vietnam’s traditional music. That is also a basis leading to (8)___________ recognition of thespace of gong culture as (9)___________ Masterpiece of (10)___________ Intangible Heritage of Humanity by UNESCO. IX. Complete the sentence with the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. Many ethnic groups managed to live together ___________. (peace)

6. The La Ha grow the/ – /a cotton but do not weave.

2. How often is the Gong Festival ___________? (celebrate)

7. The Rong house of the Xo Dang is a / an / the big stilt house with a high roof which looks like a/an/ the axe.

3. The ___________ of people in Vietnam belong to the Kinh people. (major)

8. The young Co Ho women play an / a / the active role in marriage.

4. The ___________ house is the place where village ceremonies and festivals take place. (commune)

9. The Ba Na are one of the / a / an oldest ethnic minority groups living in a / – / the Central Highlands.

5. ___________ is a traditional folk art of the Miao people. (embroider)

10. The / A / – right of inheritance in Ede families is only for the / – / a daughters.

7. H’mong people live in the northern ___________ region of Vietnam. (mountain)

11. Y Phon lives in the city, but his family still live in a / the /–small village in a / – / the mountains.

8. The Tai are known for their ___________ garments and their houses on stilts. (weave)

12. A / The /– M’Nong live in houses built on the / – /a stilts or level with a/ – /the ground.

10. Muong people are ___________ more closely related to the Tai people. (culture)

VII. Complete the sentences with a, an or the.

X. Complete each sentence with an appropriate preposition.

1. ___________ number of ethnic minorities had mastered some farming techniques.

1. Nick is curious ___________ the ethnic minority groups in Vietnam.

2. The Kinh or Viet is ___________ largest group, accounting for 86 percent of ___________ population of Vietnam.

2. The Viet account ___________ about 86% of Vietnam’s population.

3. The Thai have ___________ population of over one million people, account forapproximately 1.8% of ___________ Vietnamese population.

4. The Hmong live mostly ___________ the mountainous regions ___________ the north.

4. Dao women usually wear ___________ long blouse with ___________ dress or trousers. 5. Mua sap is ___________ folk dance of ___________ Muong. 6. The Raglai have __________ musical instrument made of bamboo called __________ chapi. 7. S’tieng is ___________ ethnic group living mostly in ___________ Vietnam. 8. Gathering and hunting still play the Laha.

southern provincesof

___________ important role in ___________ economy of

Five-coloured sticky rice is a traditional ___________ of Tay people. (special)

9. The ___________ you can find in Sapa include the Hmong, Dao, and Tay. (ethnic)

3. The M’Nong live in houses built ___________ stilts. 5. The M’Nong in Ban Don are well known _______ their elephant hunting and domestication. 6. Many ethnic minority students are studying ___________ boarding schools. 7. The Thai have a population ___________ about one and a half million people. 8. Tay language belongs ___________ the Tay-Thai language group. 9. The communal house is used ___________ village meetings and festivities. 10. The chapi is made ___________ a section of an old bamboo.

C. SPEAKING

9. Vietnam has 54 ethnic groups and more than 40 of __________ groups living in __________ highlands. 10. When eating is finished, the Dao have ___________ tradition that they never put down the chopsticks on ___________ bowl. VIII. Complete the text with a/an, the or leave blank (–)for zero article. The space of gong culture in Central Highlands coversfive provinces of Kon Turn, Gia Lai, Dak Lak, Dak Nong and Lam Dong. Masters of this art are (1)___________ ethnic people of Bahna, Sedang, M’nong, Coho, Ede, Giarai... Gongs appear in (2)___________ most important events of (3)___________ community such as ceremony for babies, weddings, funerals, celebration of new houses, harvests, etc. Gongs have different sizes with diameter ranging from 20cm to 120cm. (4) _________set of gongs has 2 to 20 units. A gong orchestra consists of 3, 5 or 6 basic sounds and (5)_________ additional 12 or more sounds. In most groups, gongs are reserved for males. In Ma and M’nong, both males and females can play (6)___________ gongs. With their plenty, uniqueness and diversity, gongs hold (7)___________ special position in UNIT 3: PEOPLES OF VIETNAM 31

I. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: We’d like to know something about the cultural groups of Vietnam. 2. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: The Tay don’t allow guests to sit in the room of their altar because that room is such a sacred place. 3. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: The Pu Peo farm on burned land and terraced fields. 4. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: They dug canals to bring water to their rice fields. 5. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: The Muong speak the Muong language. 6. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: A typical La Chi stilt house has three apartments.

32 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

D. READING 7. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: Some ethnic groups lived a semi-nomadic life decades ago. 8. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: Ako Dhong village was established by chief of village Ama H’rin. 9. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: Most people in the village live simply and happily. 10. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: The open air market is about 3 kilometres from our village. II. Complete the dialogue with the appropriate phrases or sentences (A - J). A.Exactly. B.Yes. But they also live in earthen houses, and half stilt-half earth houses. C.They mostly live in the northern provinces. D.Let’s go. E. Hi, Thao! I’m reading about Nung people. F.It’s growing wet rice. G.OK, thanks. Look at this note and ask me about this ethnic group. H.A lot. And I must learn by heart. I. They celebrate many festivals in a year, but “Lung Tung" is the most famous one. J.About 1 million people. Thao: Hi, Phong! What are you reading? Phong: (1)____________________________________________________________________

I. Fill in each gap with a word from the box. including

display

ethnic

which

diversity

viewed

throughout

home

Vietnam Museum of Ethnology in Hanoi offers an insight into the 54 different (1)______ groups of Vietnam in an effort to preserve cultural heritage and promotesocio-cultural (2)_________ within the country. The museum has over 15,000 artefacts (3)________ photographs and othermulti-media such as audiotapes. Its indoor exhibition space can be (4)________ viaa virtual tour (5)________ includes the Viet, Muong, Tho, Chut, Tay, Thai, Ka Dai,H’Mong-Dao, Tang, San Dui, Ngai, Mon-Khmer, Nam-Dao, Cham, Hoa and Khmerethnic groups. There are priceless antiques on (6)_________ alongside everydayobjects such as pipes, baskets and knives. The outdoor area presents a range of traditional (7)________ including a laystilt house and a Viet house. The museum is suitable for children, and all documents and display signs (8)______ have been translated into French and English. II. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks below. The Muong are among the ethnic minority groups that have big populations in Vietnam. The Muong share an estimate of 1.3 million people from their six sub-groups, such as Mol, Mual, Moi, Moi Bi, Au Ta and Ao Ta. They are largely concentrated in the provinces of Hoa Binh and Thanh Hoa particularly in mountainous districts. Theirlanguage belongs to the Viet-Muong group and they hold many ceremonies year round. The Muong have practiced farming for a long time and wet rice is their main food staple. Most of their family’s other income is generated through the exploitation of forest products including mushrooms, dried fungus, ammonium, and sticklac. The men are known for basketry as women are skilled in silk spinning and loom weaving.

Phong: (2) ___________________________________________________________________

The Muong have diverse folk arts including folk songs and poems, sorcerer’s worshiping songs, tales, proverbs, lullabies, and riddle songs. The gong is the most popular musical instrument along with the flute, the two-string violin, the drum, and the panpipe.

Thao: What have you learned so far?

A. Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F).

Phong: (3) ___________________________________________________________________

1. The Muong is one of the largest ethnic minorities in Vietnam.

Thao: Let me help you to revise it.

2. The Muong are also called Mol, Mual, Moi, Mol Bi, Au Ta and Ao Ta.

Phong: (4) ___________________________________________________________________

3. The Muong don’t have their own language, so they speak Vietnamese.

Thao: Well, where do the Nung live?

4. The Muong live mainly on forest products, such as mushrooms and dried fungus.

Phong: (5) ___________________________________________________________________

5. Muong women are very good at making baskets and loom weaving.

Thao: What is the population of the Nung?

6. The Muong have a rich treasure of folk arts.

Phong: (6) ___________________________________________________________________

B. Answer the questions.

Thao: Do they live in stilt houses?

1. What is the population of the Muong?

Thao: Oh, I see. You’ll give a lecture on ethnic minorities, won’t you?

Phong: (7) ___________________________________________________________________ Thao: What is their main source of living?

___________________________________________________________________ 2. Where do the Muong mostly live?

Phong: (8) ___________________________________________________________________ Thao: How many festivals do they have in a year?

___________________________________________________________________ 3. What is the main food product of the Muong?

Phong: (9) ___________________________________________________________________ Thao: All correct! You did study hard. Take a rest. Let’s go out for a drink. Phong: (10) __________________________________________________________________ UNIT 3: PEOPLES OF VIETNAM 33

___________________________________________________________________ 4. What are musical instruments of the Muong? ___________________________________________________________________

34 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

E. WRITING TEST FOR UNIT 3

I. Make sentences from the cues given. 1. which ethnic group/ second largest population/ Vietnam?

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

______________________________________________________________________ 2. Sap dance/ typical dance/ Muong people/ the north. ______________________________________________________________________ 3. Most/ ethnic minorities/ Vietnam/ live/ mountainous areas. ______________________________________________________________________ 4. Thai ethnic minority/ well known/ beautifully woven garments

1. a. school

b. skull

c. scenery

d. sky

2. a. visited

b. recommended

c. wanted

d. hoped

3. a. important

b. boring

c. minor

d. northern

4. a. community

b. custom

c. costume

d. museum

5. a. ethnic

b. gather

c. though

d. clothing

II. Complete the sentences with the suitable words.

______________________________________________________________________ 5. The New Year celebration/ Lao ethnic group/ lunar April. ______________________________________________________________________

1. Cong-Chieng, or ________, is a musical instrument made of bronze.

6. Thai people/ account/ approximately 1.8%/ Vietnam’s population ______________________________________________________________________ 7. The Tay/ live/ fertile plains/ they/ cultivate/ rice/ keep/ cattle and poultry

2. Five-coloured ________ ________ is an important dish of almost allethnic minorities.

______________________________________________________________________ 8. How long/ the Ede/ lived/ the high plateau region/ central Vietnam? ______________________________________________________________________ II. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one.

3. The Rong house of the Xo Dang is a big ________ ________ with a high roof.

1. Your village is so beautiful! What__________________________________________________________________ 2. How long is it since you built this stilt house?

4. Hmong farmers have been growing rice on the ________ ________ for hundreds of years.

When _________________________________________________________________ 3. Living in a big city is more convenient than living in a village. It’s ___________________________________________________________________

5. The Xoe dance is one of the most popular ________ ________ of the Thai ethnic group.

4. Where does he live? What__________________________________________________________________ 5. Although the villagers are quite poor, they live a happy and healthy way. In spite of ______________________________________________________________

6. Black Thai women wear the ________ with colourful embroidery called ‘khan pieu’.

6. What did the local people say? Could you tell me ________________________________________________________ 7. Romantic films interest me more than war films.

7. My Son Sanctuary includes Cham ________ in a valley about 2 km in diameter, surrounded by hills.

I find__________________________________________________________________ 8. A lot of people take the train from Oxford to London every day. A lot of people travel _____________________________________________________ 9. How about asking the local people for help? Why __________________________________________________________________ 10. Is there an ancestral altar in the La Chi’s largest apartment? Does __________________________________________________________________

8. Hoa Ban ________ takes place on March, when orchids and peach blossom everywhere in the north-western region. III. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. 1. The Dao in the Sapa area is famous ________ its “love market.” a. for

b. in

c. with

d. to

2. The Thai live ________ farming on their burnt-over land and wet-rice terraced fields. UNIT 3: PEOPLES OF VIETNAM 35

36 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

a. in

b. on

c. out

6. We _______________(be) to Buon Me Thuot city twice, but we _______________(never/ visit) Don Village.

d. up

3. The ________ house is a place where villagers gather for festivals and rituals. a. terraced

b. splendid

c. communal

d. thatched

4. There were lots of interesting folk games, _______ Kenny stayed a little longer to join them. a. but

b. because

c. however

d. so

8. These stilt houses _______________(build) over 50 years ago by the Tay people.

d. When

10. The elephants help local people _______________(work) in the fields, and carry goodsor construction materials.

9. Tourists to Don Village enjoy __________(ride) elephants around the hamletor to the forest.

5. ‘________ dress in red and black costume?’ ‘The Dao’ a. What

b. Which

c. Who

6. What colour is ________ symbol of good luck for the Hoa? a. a

b. an

c. -

VI. Write the correct form of the words in brackets.

d. some

1. Vietnam is one of the most ____________ diverse countries in South East Asia. (ethnic)

7. ________ in terraced fields is the main economic activity of ethnic people in Sapa. a. Fishing

b.Rice cultivation

c. Hunting

2. The Pa Then believe that the god of fire brings them ___________ and prosperity. (peaceful)

d.Gathering

3. Festivals characterize customs and ____________ of a community. (believe)

8. ________ ethnic Khmer live in ________ Mekong Delta of Vietnam. a. The / -

b.The / a

c.A / the

4. The Glay practice rice ____________ in submerged fields. (cultivate)

d. The / the

9. The Vietnam Museum of Ethnology ________ by the architect Ha Duc Linh, a memberof the Tay ethnic group. a. designed

b. has designed

c. was designed

d. was designing

b.Really?

c.Terrible.

9. Each time I returned I was struck by the ____________ of Sapa and its people. (unique)

1. Most ethnicgroups live in rural areas, growing rice and practising slash-and-burn farm. B

2. The Muong people are the ethnic minority who live in the mountainous regions of Vietnam. A

3. We have recently visited some of the remote communities in the north highlands. A

4. Youth Ngai women did not receive the inheritance after their parents died. A

5. The Ta Oi managed preserving their proverbs, folk songs, and stories. A

6. Another typical musical instrument of the Raglai is the flat gong called Ma La. A

7. I want to visit the Vietnam Museum of Ethnology to learnfor 54 ethnic minority groups. A

10. The government carried out a programme to ____________ the health service inremote and rural areas. (modern) VII. Match the sentences. 1. Which ethnic group has a larger population, the Ede or the Muong?

a. Not exactly. They are the third.

2. Shall we join their folk games?

b. It’s a folk dance called mua sap.

3. What is that dance?

c. In Binh Phuoc and Dak Lak.

4. When does Sapa Love Market take place?

d. The Muong.

5. Have you ever tried any ethnic specialities?

e. By motorcycle or bus.

6. How can we go to Don village from Buon Me Thuot city?

f. Every Saturday evening.

7. The Thai is the second largest ethnic group in Vietnam.

g. Sure. Which of those games would you like to play?

8. Where do the M’Nong mainly live?

8. Xo Dang men are good at architecture, sculpting, and paint. A

6. The population of Vietnam contains a rich ____________ of ethnic groups. (diverse) 8. The communal house is usually used for village ____________. (festival)

d. Exactly.

IV. Choose the underlined word or phrase, A, B, C or D that needs correcting. A

5. The Tay community practice ______________ religious beliefs including ancestorworship. (tradition) 7. Ethnic ____________ make up about 15 percent of Vietnam’s population. (minor)

10. ‘I have just taken an elephant ride in Buon Don.’ ‘________ How interesting!’ a. Certainly.

7. In the future, the local government _______________(organize) more activities topromote the culture of ethnic groups.

V. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets. 1. The first Brau _______________(come) to Vietnam about a century ago. 2. The majority of people in Vietnam _______________(belong) to the Kinh ethnic group. 3. Hoa Ban festival ____________(start) on March 17thand ____________(end) on March 19th. 4. Listen! _______________ those ethnic girls _______________(speak) the Ede language? 5. So far Nick _______________(learn) a lot about the ethnic minorities in Vietnam. UNIT 3: PEOPLES OF VIETNAM 37

h. Yes, I’ve tried some. They’re very delicious.

VIII. Choose the word which best fits each gap. There are nine sub-groups that are (1)_________ by the ethnic minority M’Nong, suchas Bru Dang, Preh, Ger, Nong, Prang, PJam, Kuyenh, Chil Bu Nor, and M’Nong Bu Dang,with combined estimate of 105,300 populations. They are concentrated (2)_________ southernparts of the provinces of Binh Phuoc and Dak Lak and in parts of Lam Dong. They livein houses built on (3)_________ or level with the ground, in every village where they usuallyhave dozens of households. (4)_________ is observed and the children take the family nameof their mother. The wife holds the key position in (5)_________ household. This grouplikes to have many children, (6)_________ daughters and speak the language traced tothe Mon-Khmer Group. The M’Nong

38 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

______________________________________________________________________

use the slash-and-bum method of (7)_________.The M’Nong in Ban Don are well known for their elephant hunting and domestication. Women handle the weaving of cotton cloth, (8)_________ the men work on basketry.

3. Most/ live/ of/ ethnic/ in/ minorities/ the/ the/ areas/ in/ north/ the/ mountainous.

1. a. ordered

b. represented

c. expressed

d. symbolized

2. a. on

b. at

c. for

d. in

4. Vietnam/ Tay/ second/ the/ largest/ are/ the/ ethnic/ in/ group.

3. a. bricks

b. stilts

c. slabs

d. stones

4. a. Monarchy

b. Patriarchy

c. Matriarchy

d. Democracy

5. a. a

b. the

c. every

d. some

6. a. special

b. specially

c. especially

d. especial

7. a. transport

b. working

c. researching

d. farming

8. a. while

b. when

c. which

d. where

IX. Read the text carefully, then answer the questions.

______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 5. are/ The/ known/ Nung/ including/ music and poetry/ for/ folk-art/ richness/ traditions/ their/ of. ______________________________________________________________________ 6. people/ a/ The/ Dao/ language/ speak/ Hmong-Dao/ of/ language system. ______________________________________________________________________ 7. not/ as/ The/ Nung/ costume/ is/ colourful/ of/ the/ as/ that/ of/ ethnic/ other/ groups. ______________________________________________________________________

Vietnam is a multiethnic country with 54 ethnic groups. The Viet (Kinh) people account for 87% of the country’s population and mainly inhabit the Red River delta, the central coastal delta, the Mekong delta and major cities. The other 53 ethnic minority groups, totaling over 8 million people, are scattered over mountain areas spreading from the North to the South. Among ethnic minorities, the most populated are Tay, Thai, Muong, Hoa, Khmer, Nung... with a population of around 1 million each; while the least populated are Brau, Roman, Odu with several hundred people each.

8, The/ Ede/ built/ on/ live/ in/ stilts/ in/ wooden/ villages/ longhouses/ as/ buon/ known. __________________________________________________________

The main economic activity of most ethnic peoples is wet rice cultivation. A number of ethnic minorities had mastered some farming techniques. They grew rice plants in swamped paddy fields and carried out irrigation. Others go hunting, fishing, collecting and live a seminomadic life. Each group has its own culture that is diverse and special. Beliefs and religions of the Vietnamese ethnic minority groups are also disparate from each other. 1. How many ethnic groups are there in Vietnam? ______________________________________________________________________ 2. Where do the Kinh people mostly live? ______________________________________________________________________ 3. What is the population of the Tay? ______________________________________________________________________ 4. Which ethnic groups have the smallest population? ______________________________________________________________________ 5. What do most ethnic peoples mainly live on? ______________________________________________________________________ 6. Do the ethnic minority groups have the same culture, religion and belief? ______________________________________________________________________ 7. How is the culture of each ethnic group? ______________________________________________________________________ X. Reorder the words to make sentences. 1. country/ with/ Vietnam/ 54/ is/ multiethnic/ a/ groups/ ethnic. ______________________________________________________________________ 2. minorities/ make/ population/ Ethnic/ up/ 15 percent/ of/ the/ of/ about/ Vietnam 3 UNIT 3: PEOPLES OF VIETNAM 39

40 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

8. The highlands of northern Vietnam are home to the 1.5 million-strong Tay, ________ minority group.

TEST YOURSELF 1 I. Choose the word that has underlined part pronounced differently from the rest. 1. a. vast

b. cart

c. craft

d.paddy

2. a. scarf

b. school

c. science

d. scare

3. a. terraced

b. satisfied

c. hooked

d. relaxed

4. a. ethnic

b. unique

c. basic

d. diverse

5. a. sure

b. soundly

c. simple

d. stilt

II. Choose the word that has different stress pattern. 1. a. generous

b. nomadic

c. interesting

d. comfortable

2. a. community

b. identify

c. expensive

d. socialize

3. a. colourful

b. buffalo

c. blackberry

d. convenient

4. a. active

b. commune

c. diverse

d. heritage

5. a. leisure

b. minority

c. exciting

d. traditional

III. Complete each sentence with an appropriate word. 2. Carpentry isn’t really right up my __________. I’d rather pay someone else to do it. 3. Cycling, running and swimming are all good leisure __________ you should try. 4. I’m curious __________ethnic groups in Vietnam. 5. Gong is a traditional __________ instrument of peoples in the Central Highlands. 6. My sister is __________ to Facebook. She checks Facebook all the time. 7. There are some famous open-air __________ in the northern provinces such asCoc Ly, Bac Ha, Lung Phin, etc. 8. I love __________ out with my best friend Helen.

b.for

c.in

d. to

b.taking

c. accounting

d. since d. numbering

4. I’m tired of ________ inthe city. It’s too busy, noisy and dirty. a. live

b.to live

c.to be lived

d. living

5. ________ drop that mobile phone and do your homework? a. Why don’t you

b. How about

c. Would you mind

d. When did you

6. The Hmong of Sa Pa are called Black Hmong ________ their mainly black clothing. a. because of

b.in spite of

c.in order to

d. according to

7. People in rural areas live ________ than those in cities. a. simplier

b.more simply

c. more simple

b.Which group

c. What colour

d. Whose

a. my pleasure

b. it’s my fault.

c. it sounds great!

d. it’s right up your street!

V. Choose the underlined word or phrase, A, B, C or D that needs correcting. 1. We’ve listed lots of better things to do instead of watch TV. A

2. The clothing of one group is quite differently from that of other groups. A

3. When you play game online, be carefulwhen you make friends to strangers. B

4. She goes to the dance club with her friends every evening Sunday. A

5. Han lives in ancottage house in Cuc Phuong national park. A

6. Playing team sports gives you much fun than individual sports. A

7. They found the games more difficultyto win than they had expected. A

3. The Kinh have the largest number of people, ________ for 86% of the population. a. holding

a. What

10 ‘I find it hard to build a toy car.’ ‘But ________’

9. Co Tu people love to share with guests about their live and tradition.

2. Their family have moved to the city ________ 2001. a. horn

9. ________ is the Nung’s clothing? ~ Indigo.

1. We are all hook ________ making star lanterns. c. on

d. the largest Vietnam

8. Wonderful family days outare some of most special memories

IV. Choose the answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. b. off

b. the Vietnam’s largest

c. a Vietnam’s largest

1. Nomadic people live in a __________, their traditional circular tent.

a. in

a. Vietnam’s largest

d. simpler TEST YOURSELF 1 41

10. Do you know that an average person check Facebook over30 hours a week? A

VI. Supply the correct tense or form of the verbs in brackets. 1. ______________ (you/ ever/ take) a trip to the countryside? It’s really interesting! 2. For many nomads, their cattle ______________ (provide) meat, milk, and hides fortheir own use. 3. When I was a kid, I ______________ (spend) hours gleaning rice from paddy fields. 4. Sa Pa’s love market ______________ (be) an unique aspect in the culture of the Mong and Dao ethnic groups for a long time. 5. Where is Jeanny? ~ She ______________ (practise) the piano in the music room. 6. ______________ (your family/ move) to the city in 2008? 7. Basketry, pottery and indigo cloth _____________ (produce) by the Rhade for theirown use.

42 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

8. I’ve got the tickets. Next week we ______________ (visit) Hanoi.

2. a. in

b. off

c. out

d. up

9. Do you fancy ______________ (come) on a day trip to my uncle’s form next Saturday?

3. a. everything

b. something

c. anything

d. nothing

10. Nomadic children learn ______________ (herd) the cattle when they are small.

4. a. relate

b. socialize

c. join

d. communicate

VII. Write the correct form of the words in brackets.

5. a. carry on

b. get off

c. turn to

d. find out

1. His ______________ to the Internet is taking over his life. (addict)

6. a. either

b. all

c. both

d. whether

2. Who lives more happily, ______________ or city dwellers? (nomadic)

7. a. which

b. where

c. what

d. that

3. Children in rural areas often travel to school ______________ than those in big cities. (far)

8. a. probable

b. difficult

c. comfortable

d. satisfied

4. Red River Delta is an agriculturally rich area and densely ______________. (populate)

X. Read the test carefully, then do the tasks below.

5. Dao and San Chay have ______________ practised shifting cultivation. (tradition)

The Hmong, or Meo, who number about 800,000, are found in villages known as giao throughout the highlands of northern Vietnam. The Hmong migrated to Vietnam from the southern China at the beginning of the 19th century.

6. The Internet has already changed the way people ______________. (social) 7. Thai women are very skilled ______________ and produce beautiful embroidery. (weave) 8. Groups of boys and young girls perform traditional love songs in ______________ that can last all night. (festival) VIII. Match the sentences.

The Hmong minority group has been subdivided into branches classified by women’s costume, dialect and customs. For example, the Hmong of Sa Pa are called Black Hmong because of their predominantly black clothing. The most colourful sub-group are the Flower Hmong, found in large numbers around Bac Ha in Lao Cai province, who wear bright-coloured clothes with embroidery.

1. Where would you like to go for our holiday this year?

a. Very nice! Most of them are colourful and creatively crafted.

2. Is there any open-air market in your neighborhood?

b. Why? Is life in a big city more convenient?

3. My brother used to hate chatting, but now he likes doing it.

c. Exactly. Web gives too many teens too many distractions.

4. We’ll take you to a floating market. You can buy fruits and have lunch on a boat.

d. Really? Who does he usually chat with?

5. What do you do at the weekend?

e. I hang out with my friends.

1. The Hmong in Vietnam have a population of 8 million people.

6. How do you think about the ethnic minority costumes?

f. How interesting! Where isit?

2. They immigrated from China approximately 300 years ago.

7. Although I really love my hometown, I want to live in Ho Chi Minh city.

g. How about going to Sapa and visiting some ethnic minority villages?

4. Rice is the most important crop of Hmong people.

h. No. But there’s a big one not far away. Just a 30-minute drive.

6. The Hmong don’t have their own language.

8. Nowadays young people are becoming too dependent on the Internet.

Corn is the main staple of Hmong people, but rice is often grown on terraces watered with the aid of irrigation. Hemp is grown to be woven into textiles, and cotton is also cultivated in some villages. As skilled artisans, the Hmong produce a variety of items, including handwoven indigo-dyed cloth, paper, silver jewellry, leather goods, baskets and embroidery. The Hmong have no written language. Their legends, songs, folklore and proverbs have been passed down from one generation to the next through the spoken word. A. Decide if the statements are true (T) or false (F).

3. Black Hmong women wear black clothing. 5. Hemp is cultivated for textile fiber. B. Answer the questions.

IX. Choose the word which best fits each gap.

1. What Is the other name of the Hmong?

Are you a screenager? Are you (1)________ glued to the TV, texting your friends,chatting online, or perhaps trying to move (2)________ another level in one of yourfavourite video games? Well, if you are, you are in the majority.

2. When did the Hmong come to Vietnam?

Most teenagers do almost (3)________ electronically. They watch digital TV, listento music on a digital MP3 player and (4)________ with friends through email, instantmessaging or by mobile phone. Teenagers even do most of their reading online now. When they need help with their homework, it’s often the Internet that they (5)________. Experts from all over the world worry that teenagers’ addiction to technology ishaving an effect (6)________ on their health and on their behaviour. In some countries,teenagers are getting help. In Asia, there are even boot camps (7)________ childrenreceive psychological help and treatment. It’s (8)________ that these types of camps willbecome common in other countries in the future. 1. a. definitely

b. constantly

c. hardly

d. finally TEST YOURSELF 1 43

______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 3. Why are the Hmong of Sa Pa called Black Hmong? ______________________________________________________________________ 4. Where do the Hmong grow rice? ______________________________________________________________________ 5. What are the products of the Hmong people? ______________________________________________________________________ 6. How have their legends, songs, folklore and proverbs been passed down? ______________________________________________________________________

44 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

XI. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one. 1. Flying a kite in the countryside is very exciting. It’s ______________________________________________________________________

UNIT 4

2. I have done voluntary work for three years.

OUR CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS

I started __________________________________________________________________ 3. It’s not necessary to change the dates of our trip.

A. PHONETICS

We ______________________________________________________________________ 4. Do you want me to show you how to use this?

I. Look at the pictures and write the clusters /spr/ or /str/.

Would ___________________________________________________________________ 5. It took me two hours to walk to her village. I spent____________________________________________________________________ 6. Millions of tourists visit the Museum of Ethnology every year.

1. ___eet

2. ___ing

3. ___ing

4. ___inkler

5. ___out

6. ___awberry

7. ___ay

8. ___ong

9. ___eam

10. ___ain

11. ___ipe

12. ___ead

13. new___int

14. pede___ian

15. off___ing

16. fru___ated

The Museum of Ethnology ____________________________________________________ 7. Jane makes crafts better than her sister. Jane’s sister doesn’t _________________________________________________________ 8. Let’s go to my uncle’s farm at the weekend. Amy suggested _____________________________________________________________

II. Underline the words with /spr/ and circle the words with /str/. Read the sentences. 1. People in Poland celebrate the first day of spring with dramatic fashion, and they parade through the street. 2. The bean seed sprouted from straw is an example of overcoming challenges. 3. The string was attached to the back of the participant’s shorts and unwound during the sprint. 4. Spread potatoes out in a pan, spray them with coconut oil, and sprinkle a half of spices over the potatoes. 5. Astronauts aboard the ISS have blended the first espresso in space. 6. Pedestrians greeting strangers seems to be the custom in our town. 7. Would you like orange juice and Sprite mixed with strawberries? 8. It’s their tradition to call surname first, and they may feel frustrated if you mispronounce it.

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Match the word or phrase with its definition.

TEST YOURSELF 1 45

1. custom

a. the feeling of being comfortable and happy in a particular place or with a particular group of people

2. tradition

b. the knives, forks, and spoons that you use for eating food

46 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

3. sharp

c. an accepted way of behaving or of doing things

4. table manners

d. exactly right

5. cutlery

e. all the people who were born at about the same time

6. prong

f. a belief, custom or way of doing something that has existed for a long time

7. generation

g. the socially acceptable way to eat your food, especially when eating a meal with others

d. you take off your shoes before going into a house. e. for three generations to be living together under one roof. 6. It’s an old custom in many birthday parties that 7. Considered as the symbol of Vietnamese tradition,

8. There is a custom in Japan that f. Ao dai is most commonly worn by women at school, work and on special occasions. g. the birthday cake is decorated with lighted candles. h. tip 10% for passable service and 15% for good service.

8. sense of belonging

h. each of the two or more long pointed parts of a fork

V. Complete the sentences with should or shouldn’t.

9. host

i. at a particular time exactly

1. In Japan, you __________ point at people or things because it’s considered rude.

10. spot on

j. a person who invites guests to a meal, a party, etc.

2. When invited to a Vietnamese home, you __________ bring gifts wrapped inbrightly coloured paper.

II. Complete the sentences with the words in part I. 1. Your ___________ are awful - don’t you know how to use a knife and fork? 2. The major items of ___________ in Western dining style are the knife, fork and spoon.

3. You __________ stand up chopsticks in your food between mouthfuls or when finished – it resembles incense sticks that are burned in memory of the dead.

3. The extended family generally consists of at least three ___________ – grandparents,parents and children living together.

4. You __________ sweep your house on the first three days of the new year becauseall your money and success will be swept out too.

4. The ___________ will offer you drinks or foods if he invites you to his home.

5. You __________ smile and say “thank you” when receiving a gift.

5. It’s the ___________ in Japan to take your shoes off when you go into someone’s house.

6. When travelling on public transport, you __________ avoid loud phone conversations.

6. The weather forecast was ___________ – itrained all day! 7. Are you sure that other people have had a ___________ in your group?

7. When visiting Thailand, you _____________ mention the King and do anything that’sdisrespectful.

8. My extended family has a ___________ of having reunions every summer.

8. You __________ take your shoes off when entering homes or temples.

9. You shouldn’t point the ___________ of the fork upwards during the meal.

9. You __________ use both hands when giving and receiving things.

10. Please be here at seven o’clock ___________.

10. When dining in Thailand, you __________ eat with your fork, but do use it topush food onto your spoon.

III. Complete the sentences with the correct form or tense of the verbs in the box. respect

wrap

worship

pass

take

reflect

reunite

break

1. She ___________ the present in red paper and tied it with yellow ribbon. 2. All students should ___________ their teachers. 3. The culture of xoe dancing ___________. Thai people’s lifestyle and culture. 4. We decided ___________ with tradition and go away for Tet holidays. 5. In my family the tradition that has been ___________ down is eating together every Sunday. 6. Almost every Vietnamese household sets an altar ___________ their ancestors. 7. It is considered very impolite not _________ off your shoes before entering a house in Japan. 8. Lots of people come back ___________ their families during Tet holiday. IV. Match the two halves to make a full sentence. 1. In Vietnam, it is not uncommon

5. My province broke with tradition by

2. If you are invited to a Swede’s home, 3. It’s our tradition at Mid-Autumn festival that

a. everyone will give moon cakes to their parents, relatives or friends. b. not having fireworks on New Year’s Eve. c. you should bring a gift such as chocolates, flowers or liquors as the Swedish gift giving custom.

4. It’s the custom in Mexico to

UNIT 4: OUR CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 47

VI. Write the second sentence, using should or shouldn’t and the words given. 1. White and black are colours of funeral in Vietnam. (you/ wear/ white or black clothes/ the first days/ the New Year) _________________________________________________________________________ 2. The Japanese take punctuality seriously. (we/ arrive/ on time) _________________________________________________________________________ 3. Respecting old people is our tradition. (you/ say “hi”/ when/ meet/ old people) _________________________________________________________________________ 4. In India, food isn’t seen clean once it touches your plate. (you/ never/ offer/ the food in your plate/ anyone) _________________________________________________________________________ 5. In Thailand, the head is seen as the most sacred part of the body. (you/ never/ touch/ adult or child/ the head) _________________________________________________________________________ 6. Alcohol is not good for your health. (you/ try/ alcohol) _________________________________________________________________________ 7. You’ve had that headache for two days. (I/ think/ you/ go/ the doctor) _________________________________________________________________________ 8. It’s not good for you to sit still for long and look at a screen. (you/ watch TV/ use the

48 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

6. John can’t come because he _________ work tomorrow.

Internet/ for long)

a. should

_________________________________________________________________________ VII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of have to and the verbs in brackets.

b.can

c.must

d. has to

7. I know they enjoy their work, but they ______ work at the weekends.It’s not goodfor them. a. shouldn’t

1. When visiting a temple, tourists ___________ (follow) some important customs.

b.don’t have to

c. mustn’t

d. have to

8. Elderly people _________ be treated with great respect

2. The secretary ___________ (answer) all the phone calls at work.

a. shouldn’t

3. I ___________ (go) to work tomorrow. There’s a holiday. 4. ___________ we ___________ (buy) another ticket to see this part of the castle?

a. must

5. Everyone ___________ (recycle) as much as possible. 6. Susan ___________ (come) to the town with us if she doesn’t want to. 7. In our country, children ___________ (wear) a uniform at school.

b. should

c.aren’t obliged to

b.has to

c.doesn’t have to

d. should

10. Everyone _________ wear a helmet when riding a motorbike. It’s mandatory according to traffic law. a.isn’t allowed to

8. ___________ he ___________ (do) his work tonight? Can he do it tomorrow?

b. must

c. can

d. shouldn’t

9. You ___________ (put) a stamp on this letter. It says FREEPOST on it.

X. Choose the correct option, a, b or c to complete the sentences.

10. We ___________ (stop) talking when the lesson starts.

1. _________ sit here, or do you want me to sit somewhere else? a. Could you

11. ___________ all the students ___________ (take) the final test? 12. She ___________ (take) an umbrella. I’m sure it isn’t going to rain.

d. mustn’t

9. He _________ use chopsticks for spring roll. It is finger food.

b.Shall I

c. Why don’t we

2. I don’t think you’ve understood this. _________ look at Unit 12 again. a. If I were you

13. I ___________ (leave) the party early last night – I wasn’t very well.

b.You shouldn’t

c.I think you should

3. We need to talk about our presentation. _________ meet after school tomorrow?

14. It was a lovely holiday. We ___________ (do) anything.

a. Why don’t we

15. The children are happy because they ___________ (do) any homework today.

b. How about

c. Do we have to

4. That’s not very nice way to talk to other people. _________ speak like that.

VIII. Underline the correct form.

a. Is it all right if I

1. Children must / have to start school when they are five. 2. In many countries, you should / must wear a seat belt in the car - it’s the law.

a. Let’s

3. I know you like sugar but you shouldn’t / don’t have to eat quite so much - it’s bad for you. 4. I’m not working tomorrow, so I mustn’t / don’t have to get up early.

b. Would you mind

c.I don’t think you should

5. Mrs Allan is leaving at the end of term. _________ buy her a present. b.We don’t have to

c.Why not

6. I don’t think I can do this on my own. _________ helping me? a. Would you like

5. The manager suggested that we have to / should try to find another hotel.

b.I think you should

c. Do you mind

7. Parking in this street is prohibited. _________ park here.

6. Kids should / have to wear a life vest. That’s bur regulation.

a. I think you should

7. You mustn’t / don’t have to smoke in here; smoking isn’t allowed in the airport. 8. You must / should hand in your homework on Tuesday or your mark will be zero.

b. You mustn’t

c. You don’t have to

8. I’m sorry I haven’t got my homework. _________ forget it again? a. Do you mind if I

9. You have to / don’t have to dress up for the party. Wear whatever you feel comfortable in.

b. Shall I

c.Why don’t we

10. You should / have to ask the teacher to help you if you don’t understand the lesson.

XI. Complete each sentence with a suitable preposition.

IX. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences.

1. Today we’re going to learn _________ customs and traditions.

1. You look really tired. You _________ take a few days off and have a holiday.

2. The tradition has been passed _________ from father to son for generations.

a. should

b. must

c. have to

d. can

b. don’t have to

c. should

d. shouldn’t

b.ought to

c.mustn’t

d. have to

4. You _________ look’ at other students’ work. It’s against the rules. a. shouldn’t

b.don’t have to

c. mustn’t

d. can’t

5. The airline only allows two piecesof luggage. You _________ pack too much! a. shouldn’t

b. mustn’t

c. don’t have to

5. We decided to break _________ tradition and have fish for Thanksgiving dinner. 6. They take their shoes _________ when entering the house to avoid getting the floor dirty.

3. Sorry, but my train is at 6.00. I _________ leave now. a. shouldn’t

They still follow the custom _________ pinning moneyto the bride’s dress.

4. Vietnamese women often wear ao dai _________ special occasions.

2. In Vietnam, you _________ take a deep bow as you do in Japan. a. mustn’t

d. couldn’t

UNIT 4: OUR CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 49

7. According to tradition, we have fireworks _________ New Year’s Eve. 8. It is the custom in that country _________ women to marry young. 9. We often talk about our day at school or work _________ the dinner table. 10. Gifts should be wrapped _________ colourful paper.

C. SPEAKING 50 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

I. Complete the dialogue with the appropriate phrases or sentences (A - H). A. What should I do at the dinner table? B.Try to finish everything on your plate. C.and do not sit down until the oldest member has seated. D.Do you mind if I ask you something E.place your chopsticks, fork or knife on your bowl or plate. F.You can ask whatever you want. G. Do I have to wear formal clothes?

bow

given

rather

addressing

usual

wai

with

Thais often greet one another with a wai – a palms-together gesture accompanied by a (1)____________, slight bend of knees and smile. ‘Khun’ is used as a prefix, instead of Mr and Ms when (2)____________ people. It can be used for both males and females, For example, a 30-year-old male, Kullawat Chaowanawatee, will (3)____________ be Khun Kullawat. Every Thai has a nickname, and once you are more familiar with people it is(4)____________ for them to encourage you to call them by their nickname instead oftheirfirst name. Most Thai nicknames are single syllable words which are (5)____________ from birth and can be Thai or English words, colours, fruits, or shortenings of their first name.

Hi, Mai! I’m going to take a trip to Vietnam next month.

Thais don’t use ‘please’, ‘thank you’ and ‘hello’. Instead of saving ‘thank you’, ‘hello’ or ‘good bye’, many Thais simply smile or offer a (6)____________ equivalent of‘please’ in Thai is complex and varies (7)____________ the rank and status one is speakingto. Many Thais ask ‘where are you going?’ (8)____________ than saying. ‘How are you?’

(1)_______________ about Vietnamese customs and etiquette?

II. Read the passage carefully and choose the correct answers.

H.What should I do when I’m invited to a Vietnamese house for a meal? Maria:

simply

Mai:

Not at all. (2)_______________

Marla:

(3)_______________

Mai:

You should bring a small gift, such as flowers, fruits or sweets wrapped in colourful paper.

Maria:

What should I wear? (4)_______________

Mai:

No. Just dress conservatively.

GIFT-GIVING CUSTOMS IN VIETNAM

Maria:

(5)_______________

Mai:

Wait to be shown where to sit (6)_______________

Maria:

What else?

Mai:

(7)_______________ Leaving food on your plate is considered impolite... When you have finished eating, (8)_______________

Maria:

Thanks for all.

II. Rearrange the sentences to make a complete conversation. _____ Thanks for teaching me. How about the customs before a meal? I’m a little nervous... _____ No. We sit on a mat with foods on a tray in the middle. Everyone has a bowl and a pair of chopsticks.

Gift giving is important in Vietnam because of the significance of interpersonal relationships in Vietnamese culture. First and foremost, do not encourage corruption. There is a clear cut between gift-giving and bribery. Nevertheless, it is common in Vietnam for exchanging small gifts on certain occasions such as anniversary, Tet holiday... to express your respect, love, appreciation or gratitude. Gift-giving customs depend on the context. If it is a private gift for one Vietnamese partner you should give the gift at a private occasion. If you have a gift for the whole officeor company, you should give it after the business meeting with the whole office’s employee. Do not wrap a gift in the black paper because this colour is unlucky and associated with funerals in Vietnam. Gifts that symbolize cutting such as scissors, knives and other sharp objects should be avoided because they mean the cutting of the relationship. Vietnamese may or may not open these gifts when they are received; leave the option to them. You will also receive gifts and should defer to your host as to whether youshould open it when received or not. Regardless of when it is opened or what it is, profuse thanks are always appropriate. 1. According to the passage, why is gift giving important in Vietnam?

_____ Let’s see if I can follow you!

a.Because it helps to establish a friendship.

_____ No, in my parents’ house. We’ll have a big meal with my family members.

b.Because it’s common in Vietnamese culture.

_____ Yes, you can have a spoon, but no fork and knife. I’ll teach you to use chopsticks.

c.Because it’s the best way to build up a stable relationship.

_____ In your parents’ house? But I don’t know your table manners. __1__ Hey Jennifer! I would like to invite you to our dinner. _____ Chopsticks? I don’t know how to use them. Is there any fork, knife or spoon? _____ Don’t worry! You’re a foreigner, so you don’t have to know the manners clearly. _____ Wow, that’s nice. Where? In a restaurant?

d.Because personal relationships play a vital role in Vietnamese culture. 2. Which of the followings should not be a reason for gift giving? a. Toshowappreciation

b. To bribesomebody

c. To express gratitude

d. To show affection

3. Whengiving a gift, you should ______________.

_____ It’ll be OK, Jennifer! Just follow my directions when we get home.

a. wrap it in black or white paper

_____ I should learn something first though. Do you sit around a table?

b. give it in the business meeting

D. READING

c.never give sharp objects, such as knives or scissors

I. Fill in each blank with a word from the box.

d.avoid giving it at a private occasion UNIT 4: OUR CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 51

52 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

4. When receiving a gift, you should ______________. a. always say “thank you?

b. try to find what is it

c. open it in front of the giver

d. ask your host to open it

5. Whichofthe following is NOT true about gift giving customs in Vietnam? a.Gift giving is a good way of strengthening relationships. b.Gifts for your partners should be given at private occasions.

_________________________________________________________________________ 8. It’s Saturday tomorrow, so it’s not necessary for Jane to get up early. (have to) _________________________________________________________________________ 9. If I were you, I’d ask them about their customs. (should) _________________________________________________________________________ 10. Why don’t we look for the information on the Internet? (how)

c.You should avoid giving anything sharp. d.It is considered rude not to open the gift in front of the giver.

_________________________________________________________________________

E. WRITING TEST FOR UNIT 4

I. Put the words in order to make sentences. 1. If/ a/ should/ Vietnamese home/ bring/ invited/ to/ gift/ you/ a/ small _________________________________________________________________________ 2. as/ custom/ ojigi/ bowing/ in/ Known/ is/ important/ Japan/ an _________________________________________________________________________ 3. greeting/ shake hands/ when/ saying/ The Vietnamese/ and/ both/ when/ good-bye _________________________________________________________________________ 4. don’t/ wear/ a/ You/ tie/ to/ have to/ dinner party/ if/ want to/ you/ don’t/ a _________________________________________________________________________ 5. taking off/ when/ house/ a/ It’s/ entering/ the Japanese/ shoes/ custom/ of _________________________________________________________________________ 6. follow/ cleaning/ the tradition/ the house/ Do/ before/ we/ of/ have to/ Tet? _________________________________________________________________________ 7. We/ together/ on/ have/ dinner/ a/ family/ of/ eating/ New Year’s Eve/ tradition. _________________________________________________________________________ 8. wear/ occasions/ special/ on/ women/ Vietnamese/ ao dai/ usually

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others. 1. a. wrap

b. worship

c. wear

d. wife

2. a. chopstick

b. tradition

c. gift

d. knife

3. a. obligation

b. occasion

c. expression

d. celebration

4. a. mat

b. tray

c. place

d. table

5. a. cutlery

b. custom

c. compliment

d. circle

II. Complete each sentence with a suitable word. 1. Good table ____________ make for a more pleasant meal! 2. Many family ____________ have been passed down through generations. 3. We are Christian, so our family has the ____________ of giving presents at Christmas. 4. We decided to ____________ with tradition and have fish for Thanksgiving dinner. 5. You ____________ touch an adult’s head or shoulders because it’s disrespectful. 6. Family traditions provide family members with a sense of ____________. 7. Lots of people come ____________ to reunite with their families during the Obon festival.

II. Rewrite the sentence using the word in brackets.

8. A typical extended family in Vietnam often includes three ____________; grandparents, parents, and children.

1. It’s impolite of them to wear hats in the pagoda. (shouldn’t)

III. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. Children have to live with their parents until they reach the age of 18. (obliged) _________________________________________________________________________ 3. Is it necessary for me to tip in a coffee shop? (have to) _________________________________________________________________________ 4. It’s not mandatory for staff to wear vests in their company. (need) _________________________________________________________________________ 5. It’s good for us to keep our traditional customs. (should) _________________________________________________________________________ 6. It’s really important to remove your shoes when entering a temple. (must) _________________________________________________________________________ 7. Photography is not allowed at some sacred places. (mustn’t) UNIT 4: OUR CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 53

1. There’s a tradition of having parties _________ Christmas. a. on

b.in

c. at

d. for

2. Generally, rice is served _________ fish, meat, soup and vegetable. a. to

b.as

c. in

c. with

3. You _________ speak when the teacher is speaking. a. needn’t

b. can’t

c. don’t have to

d. mustn’t

4. Christmas Eve is the day _________ people in some countries exchange their presents. a. that

b. which

c. when

d. what

5. Japanese have developed the custom of eating meals sitting on tatami _______, not on chairs a. towels

b,prongs

c. trays

d. mats

6. You have to _________ your hat when going inside the main worship area of the temple. a. take off

b.puton

54 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

c. break with

d.getout

7. You _________ place your chopsticks on your rice bowl when finished with a meal. Don’t rest them on the table. a. shouldn’t

b. don’t have to

c. should

b.obliged

VI. Write the correct form of the words in brackets.

c. reflected

d. agreed

9. In the UK, families often celebrate Christmas together, _________ they can watch each other open their presents! a.though

b.but

c. because

d. so

b. You’re kidding!

c. You’re right.

1. _____________ when dining, South Koreans use cushions to sit on the floor and eat from a low table. (tradition) 2. The wai is the traditional form of _____________ in Thailand. (greet) 3. They weren’t _____________ to live with their parents after the wedding. (obligation)

10. ‘We don’t sweep the floor on the first day of Tet.’ ‘_________ Why?’ a. What a bad day!

10. The Japanese tend ____________(use) their mobile phones discreetly when in public.

d. mustn’t

8. He _________ a long family tradition of serving the military. a. followed

9. I think you should ____________(go) to the doctor. You look terrible.

4. It is considered _____________ to address an elder with his or her given name. (polite)

d. Spot on!

5. Is that woman the _____________ of the party? (host)

IV. Choose the underlined word or phrase, A, B, C or D that needs correcting.

6. The children in our family are always _____________ to their elders. (respect)

1. Some people think young people shouldto follow the tradition of the society.

7. Custom _____________ from tradition in some aspects such as scale and time. (different)

8. Don’t use your personal chopsticks to get food from the _____________ dish. (serve)

2. According for tradition, the first person to enter the house on New Year’s Eve bringseither A B C good luck or bad luck. 3. The traditional Vietnamese wedding is one of the most important ceremony in Vietnamese A B C culture. D 4. The Japanese are familiar with the western custom to eat a turkey dinner forChristmas. B

5. In Vietnam the engagement is sometimes considered much important than the wedding. A

6. Dressingwell is important in South Korea; it is considered a sign of respectful. A

7. In India, you shouldn’t never use your left hand to eat because it’s considereddisrespectful. A

8. He asked me anxiously what he has to do when visiting a Vietnamese home. A

10. We have lots of customs and it can get a bit _____________ for visitors. (confuse) VII. Match the questions with the answers.

9. Many families have three _____________, which create unique cultural features. (generate)

V. Supply the correct tense and form of the verbs in brackets. 1. Last week, we ____________(have) dinner with a French family. 2. I hate eating with spoon because it____________(cause) trouble when I eat fish. 3. In the past, ao dai ____________(wear) by both men and women. 4. The speaker ____________(give) a presentation on Vietnamese customs and traditions right now. 5. She ____________(travel) to six countries since she ____________(start) the job. 6. Our family __________(have) dinner together every Saturday night. It’s our family tradition. 7. I hope I ____________(have) a chance to visit your country soon. 8. When in Japan, you should avoid ____________(eat) on the go. UNIT 4: OUR CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 55

1. Hi, Dan. How was your trip to Italy? 2. I heard you had a new friend. Is she Italian? 3. You went to her home? How exciting! 4. How was the dinner? 5. Why? Was there any problem? 6. Really? Why not search them on Google beforehand? 7. And now? Do you know everything about them? 8. I can help you to practice it. Let’s go to an Italian restaurant.

a. Yes. Her name’s Sofia. I went to her home last Saturday. b. No, not everything. However, I’ll try my best next time. c. You’re kidding! But thank you anyway. d. Well, I was invited for dinner. e. Yeah. I was a bit confused about Italian table manners. f. I did but Italian table manners are so complicated. g. Oh, it was great. h. The food was good, but I felt somewhat embarrassed.

VIII. Choose the word which best fits each gap. Vietnamese people often enjoy sharing a meal with the whole family. The meal is often shared with loved ones over a lot of (1)___________. They eat from bowls and use chopsticks and spoons but chopsticks still remain as the most popular means of eating. Learn how to use chopsticks and how to put them (2)___________ when not using. For instance, you should place them neatly on the table or on the bowl when breaking to drink or speak. When finished (3)___________ a meal, rest your chopsticks on your rice bowl. Sticking the chopsticks straight up from a bowl of rice is a (4)___________ because it indicates funeral incense. It is also best to keep in mind that (5)___________ the chopsticks on the side of a bowl is considered rude. You should also wait to be seated in the dining table and ask the elders to eat first(6)___________ this is a mark of honor to them. The women normally sit right next to the rice cooker to serve rice for the diners. It is a common table (7)___________ and a sign of affection and care to pick up food for each other. Before starting the meal, Vietnamese have a catchphrase: “Chúc mọi người ăn ngonmiệng”.

56 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

It means “Have a nice meal”. This not only shows your politeness (8)___________ also your eagerness before enjoying the food.

1. She couldn’t afford to buy the car.

1. a. laugh

b. laughing

c. laughed

d. laughter

2. I would like you to help me to put the chair away.

2. a. cleanly

b. properly

c. easily

d. mainly

3. a. to

b. by

c. with

d. up

4. a. taboo

b. offence

c. disrespect

d. crime

5. a. tapping

b. kicking

c. fitting

d. cutting

6. a. although

b. because

c. as long as

d. when

7. a. setting

b. dining

c. manner

d. style

8. a. or

b. so

c. and

d. but

IX. Read the text carefully, then answer the questions. BRITISH STRANGE FOOD HABITS Perhaps you know about some of the food that British people eat, but do you know about their strange food habits? People from different parts of the UK and from different classes call their meals by different names. They call the midday meal, lunch or dinner and the evening meal, dinner, supper or tea. Tea is also sandwiches, cakes and tea (the drink) at four or five o’clock. What do the British eat when they want something quick and easy? Baked beans, of course! You must warm them in a pan and eat them on toast.

The car is too ________________________________________________________ Do you mind ________________________________________________________ 3. If I were you, I wouldn’t sweep the house on the first day of Tet. You _______________________________________________________________ 4. Is it really necessary for us to finish the work today? Do we _____________________________________________________________ 5. Learning about other cultures is one of my interests. I’m _______________________________________________________________ 6. Unless he phones her immediately, he won’t get any information. If _________________________________________________________________ 7. It’s very difficult to leave here after such a long time. It isn’t _____________________________________________________________ 8. Let’s get together and talk about our presentation before we do it in class. Why _______________________________________________________________

Cheddar cheese is so popular in Britain that people run after it down a hill! This is a very strange English sport. You can see it once a year in Coopers Hill. There are four races, three for men and one for women. At the start of the race someone drops a big, round cheese down a very, very steep hill. About 15 racers run and jump after it. The first person to get to the bottom of the hill gets the cheese. There is another strange race that the British have. It is a special Pancake Day race. Only women can run in the race. They must run with a pancake in a frying pan and throw it in the air three times. After the race, many English families eat pancakes with lemon juice and sugar. Be careful if you have Christmas dinner with a British family – some of their Christmas customs are risky! Be very careful! Eat the Christmas pudding slowly if you don’t want to eat a coin! When they are making their delicious dessert, British people put a coin in the mixture. The person who finds the coin in their pudding will be rich and happy. 1. What do the British call the evening meal? ___________________________________________________________________ 2. What do the British have with baked beans? ___________________________________________________________________ 3. How often is the Cheddar cheese sport event held? ___________________________________________________________________ 4. What is the prize if you win the Cheddar cheese race? ___________________________________________________________________ 5. Who can take part in a pancake race? ___________________________________________________________________ 6. Why is it dangerous to eat Christmas pudding? ___________________________________________________________________ X. Rewrite the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one. UNIT 4: OUR CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 57

58 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

UNIT 5

FESTIVALS IN VIETNAM

1. Their wedding ____________ was held in the county park.

2. This is the band’s first live ____________ since last year.

A. PHONETICS I. Look at the pictures and write the suffixes -ion or -ian.

3. Buddhist monks perform a prayer ____________ in the main hall of the pagoda.

1. music____

2. reun____

3. electric____

4. confus____

5. magic____

6. tradit____

7. compan____

8. fash____

4. We went through a stone ____________ into the garden.

5. The ____________ in Rio de Janeiro is a festival held every year and considered the biggest in the world.

6. Hoi An ____________ Festival takes place monthly – on the 14th day of each lunar month. 9. pedestr____

10. celebrat____

11. librar____

12. vegetar____

II. Say these words aloud and underline the stressed syllable. 1. congratulation

2. procession

3. musician

4. vegetarian

5. magician

6. electrician

7. companion

8. confusion

9. preservation

10. competition

11. politician

12. historian

13. production

14. generation

15. tradition

16. Canadian

17. physician

18. pedestrian

19. librarian

20. communication

7. Our grandparents celebrated their 50th wedding ____________ week.

last

8. We have a family ____________ every New Year’s Day.

III. Choose the word which is stressed differently from the rest. 1. a. reunion

b. ceremony

c. performance

d. procession

2. a. oriental

b. politician

c. celebration

d. questionable

3. a. anniversary

b. explanation

c. traditional

d. electrician

4. a. specialities

b. activities

c. impression

d. technician

5. a. lantern

b. companion

c. Christian

d. incense

9. Lots of people poured down the street to watch a colourful ____________ of dragon dances, lion dances.

10. Many people visit the shrines to make ____________ of fruit or rice to the gods.

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Complete the sentences with the correct words. Use the pictures as a clue. archway

lantern procession

reunion offerings ceremony performance carnival

anniversary ritual

II. Complete the sentences with the correct form or tense of the verbs from the box. worship

preserve cheer

offer

pray

commemorate

perform

float

1. Quan ho singing is _____________ in traditional festivals in Bac Ninh. 2. On Tet holiday, Vietnamese people _____________ their ancestors a five-fruit tray. 3. I enjoy going to Huong Pagoda and _____________ Buddha. 4. The book will be published in October to ________ the 100th anniversary ofMorris’s death.

UNIT 4: OUR CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 59

60 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

______________________________________________________________________

5. The crowds are shouting and _____________ to encourage their teams. 6. We should _____________ our tradition and culture for future generations.

2. You need to work harder. You won’t get a passing grade. ______________________________________________________________________

7. Lotus lanterns are _____________ on the small river in the old town. 8. On the first day of the New Year, we visit the temples ____________ for goodfortune and health.

3. Roberta didn’t have all the ingredients to bake a cake. She decided to prepare something else.

III. State whether the following sentences are simple, complex or compound.

4. I was not confident of winning. I decided to give it a try.

______________________________________________________________________

1. The Elephant Racing Festival is the biggest cultural festival in Tay Nguyen. 2. You can either choose to ride in a cable car up to the pagoda or walk up.

______________________________________________________________________ 5. I had a problem with my bike. I was late for school.

3. We first learned to sing quan ho when we were between 15 and 17.

______________________________________________________________________

4. The oarsmen are encouraged by the sounds of drums and the cheering crowds while they are racing.

6. Drinking and driving is against the rules. It’s dangerous.

5. Maya doesn’t follow the procession, but she supports the dancing team.

7. We were supposed to go dancing after dinner. We went home instead.

6. Hundreds of thousands of people gather on the two banks of the river to watch the Ngo junk race. 7. Ngo junk race is a community sports which enhance unity among Khmer people from villages. 8. Even though many people come to Buon Don to ride the elephants, a lot of them fail to witness the Elephant Racing Festival. 9. Tet is the most important festival in Vietnam; therefore, most Vietnamese return home for Tet.

______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 8. Milos said his English is terrible. He got a 9.0 on his IELTS Writing test. ______________________________________________________________________ 10. Remember to use sun cream when you go down to the beach. You’ll get sunburnt within half an hour. ______________________________________________________________________ 10. Diet and exercise will help you lose weight. It is good for your health. ______________________________________________________________________

10. They played together as a team very well; however, they didn’t win the race.

VI. Complete each sentence with and, but, so, or, moreover, however, therefore, or otherwise.

11. After taking a boat to the mountain, we can take a cable car up. 12. It was an exciting festival, so I felt very lucky to participate in it.

1. You must do your homework; ____________, you might get a bad grade.

13. Last year, I went to Huong Pagoda with my family and friends. IV. Complete each sentence using the correct conjunction from the parenthesis. 1. He’s overweight, ___________ he continues to eat lots of cakes and biscuits. (and, so, yet) 2. I’ve drunk six cups of coffee today, ___________ I’ve got a headache. (and, so, but) 3. The lesson finished, ___________ everyone went home. (and, or, but) 4. We’re making good progress, ___________ we’ve still got a long way to go. (but, so, or) 5. The climate is getting warmer. Maybe it’s natural, ___________ maybe it’s caused byus. (and, but, or)

2. He’s seventy-two, ____________ he still swims, runs and plays football regularly. 3. John studied hard for the math exam; ____________ he got an A+. 4. Do you want a cup of tea, ____________ would you prefer coffee? 5. Smoking gives you bad breath. ____________, it is harmful to your health. 6. There are many learning English websites; ____________, some of them are not free. 7. I like to read, ____________ my grammar is always on-point. 8. I hope you are feeling better ____________ will be back at college soon.

6. Maria didn’t do any revision, ___________ she didn’t pass the exam. (but, so, or)

9. Engineering is an interesting career. ____________, you have to be good at maths.

7. To get to Vancouver, you can fly, ___________ you can ride the ferry. (and, or, yet)

10. To be a doctor you have to study biology, ____________ chemistry is also important.

8. I’m afraid of heights, ___________ I appreciate the view from the top of this building. (and, yet, so)

VII. Combine a clause in column A with a clause in column B to make complex sentences. A

8. George was obviously in a bad mood,

9. It isn’t in a very nice part of town, ___________ it’s a good restaurant. (but, and, so)

1. Before I have breakfast,

9. He’ll be able to maintain a healthy weight

10. I found it hard to follow what the teacher was saying, ___________ eventually I lostconcentration. (yet, and, or)

2. They were talking

10. Whenever they eat at this restaurant

3. Although he worked very hard,

V. Join the two sentences using the conjunctive adverbs in the box.

4. Since Joe has high blood pressure,

a.his parents let him play video games.

5. Never look down on anybody

b.Matt got a job in a software company.

6. After he finished his homework,

c.because he didn’t even say good morning.

7. When he finished his degree,

d.unless you’re helping him up.

however

nevertheless

moreover

therefore

otherwise

1. My penpal has lived in the Alps all his life. He has never learnt to ski. Unit 5: FESTIVALS IN VIETNAM 61

62 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

e.they order a hamburger and fries.

h.he didn’t manage to pass the exam.

f.if he keeps exercising.

i.I spend half an hour doing exercises.

g.he has to watch what he eats.

j.while the teacher was explaining the lesson.

VIII. Combine each pair of sentences using the conjunction in brackets. 1. The world is getting warmer. Polar bears are in danger of becoming extinct. (because) ______________________________________________________________________ 2. There weren’t enough students. They closed the village school. (as) ______________________________________________________________________ 3. I really enjoyed the concert. The music was too loud. (although) ______________________________________________________________________ 4. He got a creampie smashed in his face. Everyone laughed. (when) ______________________________________________________________________ 5. Paul was walking to the bus stop. He found somebody’s wallet on the ground. (while) ______________________________________________________________________ 6. Jackie will take out the trash. She is done with her chores. (after) ______________________________________________________________________ 7. You study for the test. You will do much better. (if) ______________________________________________________________________ 8. Rex practiced his guitar. He could play the song perfectly. (until) ______________________________________________________________________ 9. We could get back to shore. It started to rain hard. (before) ______________________________________________________________________ 10. I saw him. He was always carrying a plastic shopping bag. (whenever) ______________________________________________________________________

7. The festival only lasted for three days; _________ they spent nearly a month preparing for it. a. when

b. moreover

c. otherwise

d. however

8. In Quang Ninh, you can go to Yen Tu Mountain to attend the Yen Tu Festival, _________ you can visit Ha Long Bay. a. so

b.yet

c.or

d.otherwise

9. _________ there are loads of festivals in Vietnam, Tet or Tet Nguyen Dan is the most important one. a. Since

b.Although

c.When

d. As long as

10. Festival visitors can take part in cultural activities, such as visiting art galleries, historical places and parks. _________, they can taste exotic food and dishes. a. Moreover

b.Therefore

c.However

d.Otherwise

X. Complete each sentence with an appropriate preposition. 1. The Lim Festival takes place every year _________ the 13th day of the first lunar month. 2. Elephant Race Festival is held _________ Don Village, Dak Lak Province. 3. Fishermen pray _________ the good fortune at Whale Festival. 4. _________ the Mid-Autumn Festival, children carry beautiful lanterns. 5. They decorate their homes _________kumquat trees and peach branches. 6. The Hung King Temple Festival has become a public holiday

_________ 2007.

7. The Buddhist Festival lasts _________ three months from the first to the third lunar month. 8. Foreigners are always keen ________ watching Vietnamese families prepare ________ Tet. 9. At the Kate festival, Cham people take part _________ a procession to the nearby temple. 10. The Lunar New Year typically takes place _________ late January or early February.

C. SPEAKING

IX. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences.

I. Make questions for the underlined words.

1. Mid-Autumn Festival not only recalls the family love, _________ is also a festival for both children and adults in Vietnam.

1. _________________________________________________________________________

a. and

b. but

c. yet

d.therefore

2. Tran Temple Festival lasts from the 15th-20th of lunar August. _________, visitors all over the country eagerly go on a pilgrimage far prior to the day. a. Nevertheless

b. Otherwise

c. Therefore

d. Moreover

3. _________ the main worship event is taking place at Hung Temple, 100 lanterns are released into the sky. a. Because

b. Even though

c. While

d. If

4. Lim Festival is among the most impressive festivals, ceremonies _________ singing events. a. or

b. but

c. yet

d. and

5. The navigation of the boat, called ghe ngo, requires great skills _________ it can easily be flipped. a. therefore

b. because

c.when

d. although

6. _________ you consider yourself a culture enthusiast, Hue Arts Festival is a must. a. If

b. Though

c. Because

d. As Unit 5: FESTIVALS IN VIETNAM 63

The Elephant Race Festival is usually held in Don Village or in forests near the Sevepoi River. 2. _________________________________________________________________________ Thirteen elephants joined the elephant race on March 12 in Lak District. 3. _________________________________________________________________________ The Lim festival takes place on the 13th day of the first lunar month. 4. _________________________________________________________________________ The spring festival of Bai Dinh Pagoda lasts for three months. 5. _________________________________________________________________________ Saint Giong Festival was recognized by UNESCO as world intangible cultural heritage. 6. _________________________________________________________________________ Vu Lan Festival is so-called “Xa toi vong nhan” festival because this is the day for the death’s souls. 7. _________________________________________________________________________ The Kate Festival is celebrated by the Cham ethnic group.

64 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

8. _________________________________________________________________________ The Perfume Pagoda is about 70 kilometers away from Hanoi. 9. _________________________________________________________________________ Tran Temple Festival is held to commemorate the Kings of the Tran dynasty. 10. _________________________________________________________________________ To celebrate the Mid-Autumn Festival, children commonly join street parades, carrying lanterns and wearing masks. II. Complete the dialogue with the appropriate sentences (A - H).

Tung:

A. Well, I had a lot of fun there.

B. It’s a unique attraction of Hoi An.

C. That sounds great!

D. Is it Hoi An speciality?

E. You should try it sometime.

F. When did you go?

G. I’ve just come back from Hoi An.

H. Yeah, very impressive.

Tung! Hi! (1)_____________________

Tung:

Really? I’ve never been to Hoi An. (2)_____________________

Nhan:

I arrived in Hoi An last Friday, and stayed there for 3 nights.

Tung:

Then you spent the weekends there. It must be fun.

There are also entertaining activities include enjoying boat cruise along Yen Streamfor watching (6)____________ scenery, climbing mountain and exploring holy caves. In addition, cultural activities and sporting contests are also (7)____________ on the occasion of Huong Pagoda Festival: boat racing, climbing, folk song singing, etc. The Huong pagoda festival is imbued with national identity in which people are oriented towards Truth, Beauty, and (8)____________. II. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks. Ok Om Bok is a traditional festival of Khmer people in Mekong Delta. Ok Om Bok Festival takes place on the Full Moon day of the tenth month in Vietnamese Lunar Calendar, aiming at worshipping the Moon. At the night of the Full Moon day, Khmer people set up a table of offerings; new sticky rice, yam, coconuts, bananas, sweeties, etc and bow their head to show their thanks to the Moon. After that, there is a colorful and sparkling lanterns ceremony on Ba Om Lake. Khmer people not only drop these lanterns on the lake but also fly them to the sky. Dozens of great lantern lighten the night sky in bustling music and the joy of Khmer people. Khmer people believe that these lanterns will bring bad luck and risk far away.

Hello, Nhan! Long time no see.

Nhan:

ceremonies and the entertaining activities. Ceremonial (3)____________ consist of incense offering procession and Zen ceremony in which Monks and Buddhists offer (4)____________, flowers, candles and fruits. During the ceremony, two monks (5)____________ beautiful and flexible dances.

Nhan: (3)_____________________ I visited traditional houses, pagodas and bridges,tried special foods, walked around the old town...

The most attractive and exciting activity of Ok Om Bok Festival is Ngo race (a special kind of boat of Khmer people in shape of Nagar snake). Ngo race is a traditional sport of Khmer in Ok Om Bok Festival. Ngo is a long boat with 25 - 30 meters in length and 1 - 1.4 meter in width. There are about 40 to 60 boatmen in every “Ngo” with a leader at the top to guide the whole team. Before the race, people gather along the riverbanks making an exciting atmosphere. During the race, the boisterous sound of drum, trumpet, cheers and applause urge boatmen row as fast as possible to the end.

Tung:

But what do you like most in Hoi An?

Nhan:

The Lantern Festival (4)_____________________ I wandered down to theriverfront during the evening when all of the electric lights were turned off, and thousands of lanterns lit up the narrow streets.

Tung:

Wow! It’s a picturesque scene, isn’t it?

Nhan:

(5)_____________________ Then I took part in the folk game Bai Choi andstopped by an old restaurant to try cao lau.

Overall, Ok Om Bok is an important festival in Khmer people’s life. Ok Om Bok Festival has sacred meaning in spiritual life of these people, making a cultural characteristic of this ethnic community.

Tung:

Cao lau? (6)_____________________

A. Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F).

Nhan:

Yes. It’s verydelicious. (7)_____________________

1. Ok Om Bok Festival is celebrated in October in the Western Calendar.

Tung:

I wish I could visit Hoi An one day.

Nhan:

Why don’t we go together this summer holiday?

2. At the night of the festival, Khmer people drop lanterns on the lake and fly lanterns to the sky.

Tung:

(8)_____________________

3. Ngo is a snake-shaped boat of Khmer people. 4. Ngo boat race takes place right after Ok Om Bok Festival.

D. READING

5. The boatmen are encouraged by the people gathering along the riverbanks.

I. Fill in each blank with a word from the box. picturesque

rituals

goodness

among

6. Ok Om Bok Festival promote traditional cultural identity of Khmer community. perform

spiritual

held

incense

Together with Bai Dinh and Yen Tu Pagoda Festival, Huong Pagoda Festival is(1)____________ the greatest Buddhist festivals in northern part of Vietnam. Huong Pagodafestival plays an important role in the (2)____________ life of Vietnamese people in generalVietnamese Buddhists in particular. As other festivals in Vietnam, Huong Pagoda Festival is divided into two parts: the Unit 5: FESTIVALS IN VIETNAM 65

B. Answer the questions. 1. When does Ok Om Bok Festival take place? _____________________________________________________________ 2. What is Ok Om Bok Festival celebrated for? _____________________________________________________________ 3. Where do Khmer people float their lanterns?

66 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

_____________________________________________________________

6. So that Susan would be fit for the skiing, she went to the gym three times a week. (order) Susan _________________________________________________________________

4. How long is a Ngo boat? _____________________________________________________________

7. My family went to Huong Pagoda Festival two months ago. (since) It ____________________________________________________________________ 8. You won’t get in to see the show if you don’t have reserved seats. (unless)

5. How many boatmen are there in every Ngo boat? _____________________________________________________________ 6. Why is Ok Om Bok an important festival in Khmer people’s life? _____________________________________________________________

You __________________________________________________________________ 9. Brian was really interested in Vietnamese cultural and spiritual events. (interest) Brian _________________________________________________________________ 10. If you don’t start early, you will get stuck in the traffic. (otherwise)

E. WRITING I. Make sentences, using the words or phrases provided. You can add some words or make changes.

You __________________________________________________________________

1. Giong Festival/ hold/ commemorate/ Saint Giong/ who/ defeat/ An invaders ______________________________________________________________________ 2. The Khmer/ believe/ they/ have to/ float/ lanterns/ otherwise/ may not/ get/ good luck ______________________________________________________________________ 3. Lim Festival/ take place/ every year/ 13th day/ first lunar month ______________________________________________________________________ 4. officially/ national holiday/ Tet/ last/ three days/ however/ Vietnamese people/ often/ spend/ nearly a month/ celebrate/ this special event ______________________________________________________________________ 5. prepare/ Mid-Autumn Festival/ make/ colorful lanterns/ happy activity/ between/ families/ children ______________________________________________________________________ 6. Whale Festival/ a festival/ worship/ the whale/ pray/ the good fortune/ the fishmen ______________________________________________________________________ 7. while/ elephants/ race/ people/ cheer/ encourage/ them ______________________________________________________________________ 8. Hung Kings Temple Festival/ one of/ most important/ national holiday/ Vietnam/ commemorate/ Hung Kings ______________________________________________________________________

TEST FOR UNIT 5 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others. 1. a. lantern

b. invader

c. nation

d. race

2. a. carnival

b. command

c. ceremony

d. encourage

3. a. tradition

b. question

c. procession

d. preservation

4. a. performed

b. worshipped

c. prayed

d. offered

5. a. sound

b. crowd

c. found

d. court

II. Choose the word whose main stress pattern is placed differently. 1. a. confusion

b. magician

c. important

2. a. performance

b. nevertheless

c. however

d. otherwise d. procession

3. a. preserve

b. fortune

c. ritual

d. lantern

4. a. reunion

b. bamboo

c. festival

d. display

5. a. participate

b. politician

c. communicate

d. commemorate

Ill. Complete each sentence with an appropriate word. The first letter of each word is given. 1. At Tet, Vietnamese people usually d___________ their homes with yellow apricotblossoms or peach blossoms. 2. Vietnamese believe that the colour of red and yellow will bring good f ____________.

II. Rewrite the sentences without changing their meaning. Use the words in brackets.

3. We have the custom of lighting the candles and burning i____________ before prayingin front of the altar.

1. Although Hue is far from Hanoi, Peter often travels to Hanoi by motorbike. (but)

4. His grandmother’s funeral was a private c____________ attended only by the family.

Hue __________________________________________________________________ 2. Christian went to Soc Trang to join Ok Om Bok Festival. (because) Christian ______________________________________________________________ 3. Sebastien is a French, but he plays Vietnamese folk games well. (although) Although ______________________________________________________________ 4. He has to join the festival in order to play Vietnamese folk games. (so) He ___________________________________________________________________ 5. Although the weather was terrible we had a good time. (spite) We ___________________________________________________________________ Unit 5: FESTIVALS IN VIETNAM 67

5. Streets lead to Huong pagoda are very c____________ during its festival time. 6. On the first day of Tet, Vietnamese people often visit a pagoda to p____________ forgood luck and happiness. 7. Buddhist o____________ include fruit, flowers, incense and candles. 8. The Giong Festival is held to commemorate Saint Giong who d__________ theAn invaders. IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. 1. Tet is a best time for Vietnamese people paying respects _______ their ancestors. a. for

b.to

c.with

d. on

2. Tran Temple Festival is held _______ the 15th day of the first lunar month.

68 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

a. in

b. for

c. at

d. on

3. Ghe Ngo Race is a religious ritual of the Khmer to _______ the Snake God Nagar. a. commemorate

b. preserve

c.command

b. Although

c. If

d. As

5. Originally, Tet was celebrated by farmers to thank the gods for the arrival of Spring. ______, through the years, Tet has turned into the official Vietnamese New Year. a. Otherwise

b. Therefore

c. However

d. Moreover

6. _______ do you visit Huong Pagoda? - Every year. On the 5th day of the first lunar month. a. When

b. How often

c. How long

d. What day

7. On the 13th day of the first lunar month, the visitors come to Lim Hill to watch _______ of “quan ho”. a. performances

b. features

c. ceremonies

d. processions

8. Perfume Pagoda is famous not only for its scenic landscape _______.

d. process

4. _______ Vietnam has been influenced by Buddhism for thousands of years, there areplenty of Buddhist pilgrimage sites. A.When

to communicate with their peers.

9. She was offered the prestigious job, however she turned it down because she did not want A B C to move to Texas. D 10. It started to rain hardly while we were playing some folk games at the festival. A

VI. Supply the correct tense or form of the verbs in brackets. 1. Hung King Temple Festival ____________(become) one of the greatest nationalfestivals in Viet Nam for a long time. 2. The Saint Giong Festival ____________(hold) many years ago but it officially ____________(become) a national festival in the 11th century.

a. or also for its sacredness

b. and for its sacredness as well

3. While children ____________(wait) for the moon to rise, they sing, dance andlisten to the story of Hang Nga and Cuoi.

c. but also for its sacredness

d. and yet for its sacredness

4. The local authority ___________(arrange) a meeting on promotion of the festivallast Friday. 5. Our school ____________(take) part in the festival since 2008.

9. _______ graduate a semester early, I took three extra classes. a. Although I was determined to

b. Because I was determined to

6. While we ____________(play) some folk games at the festival, it started to rain heavily.

c. If I was determined to

d. While I was determined to

7. Each year, thousands of tourists ____________(come) to visit Lim Festival and enjoythat Intangible Cultural Heritage.

10. ‘I was wondering if you’d like to go to Da Lat Flower Festival’ ‘_______ When does it take place?’ a. Not bad!

b. Are you sure?

c. For what?

d. Sure, I’d love to!

V. Choose the underlined word or phrase, A, B, C or D that needs correcting. 1. The ritual is made in order to thank the Sun Goddess for the rice harvest. A

2. Ifoundit very excited to take part in the spring festival of Bai Dinh Pagoda. A

3. I like both the green or the blue T-shirt, but I don’t have enough money to buy two T-shirts. A

4. Your marks in English are low although you don’t study hard enough. A

5. Which festivaldo you like much, Huong Pagoda or Hung Temple? A

6. We follow a custom to buy lanterns and moon cakes at Mid-Autumn Festival. A

7. Before Tet, Vietnamese people are busy cleaning and decorating their houses andthey cook A B C D traditional foods. 8. Until recently, people talk to each other instead of relying on texting and e-mail Unit 5: FESTIVALS IN VIETNAM 69

8. Traditionally, Quan ho songs ___________(perform) by both men and womenon the boats and in the Lim Pagoda. 9. Duong recommended Peter ____________(attend) the Hue Festival. 10. Before Tet, women are very busy ____________(prepare) traditional foods. VII. Write the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. At the end of the service, a lot of ____________ streamed down to the altar. (worship) 2. ____________ lanterns feature special heritage night at Hoi An. (float) 3. ____________activities are official procession, sporting events and singing. (festival) 4. ____________for the Lunar New Year begin weeks before the festival. (prepare) 5. Tet is the privileged occasion for family members to ____________. (reunion) 6. Hung King Temple Festival is held in __________ of Vietnam’s first kings.(commemorate) 7. The tribe has different ____________ masks for each ceremony. (ceremony) 8. ____________ of culture can be achieved by keeping cultural elements, such asfood, clothing, shelter, and language. (preserve) 9. The Whale Festival is ________ of the many different festivals in villages inVietnam. (type) 10. HatXoan is a folk song ____________ in festivals and worshipping genie. (performance) VIII. Match the sentences. 1. Excuse me! Do I need to buy a ticket for the show?

3. Why are you so serious about the ceremony?

2. How long does the Huong Pagoda last?

4. Would you like to participate in the

70 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

6. How often do you go to the festival?

and martial arts.

5. What’s the festival called?

7. What offerings should I make?

a. Hardly ever these days.

8. Could you please tell me about Vietnamese festivals and celebrations?

The Tran Temple Festival was recognized as a national intangible heritage in 2014. The historical complex of the Tran Kings’ shrines and tombs received special national relic status last year.

performance?

b. Vu Lan.

f. Yes, certainly!

c. Three months.

g. I’d love to, but I’m rather busy now.

d. No, Sir. It’s totally free.

h. Fruits, flowers, incense and candles.

e. It’s sacred, and I respect it. IX. Choose the word which best fits each gap.

- ornate (adj): được sơn son thiếp vàng

- palanquin (n): kiệu rước (lễ hội)

1. How often is the Tran Temple Festival held? a. every month

b. every year

c. every two years

a. formal ceremonies

b. a water procession

c. prayers of thanks

d. incense offerings to the gods

Elephant Racing Festival, one of the biggest festivals in Tay Nguyen, is held (1)________ in the third lunar month.

3. The word ‘they’ in the passage refers to ________.

As preparation for the festival, villagers (2)________ their elephants with a wide range of food apart from grass, including corns, sugar canes, sweet potatoes, papayas, and bananas. Also, in order to preserve their strength, the elephants take a rest (3)________ hard work.

4. What does ‘plaque’ mean?

On the day of the event, elephants from several villages (4)________ at Don Village. Each time, ten elephants will run at the same time for about one or two kilometers. The competition is guided by the sound of tu va, a kind of horn. The first elephant (5)________ reaches the appointed destination will receive a laurel wreath as a sign of victory, and it will enjoy the achievement excitedly with sugar canes and bananas from surrounding people. (6)________ finishing the race at Don Village, the elephants move to Serepok River for competition – swimming. They also participate in games (7)________ football and tug of war. At the end of the festive day, all festival goers mass at Don Village’s community house for feasting, drinking stem wine, and dancing in a jubilant (8)________ with the boisterous sound of gongs and drums. 1. a. mostly

b. constantly

c. monthly

d. annually

2. a. poach

b. herd

c. feed

d. train

3. a. without

b. with

c. of

d. from

4. a. come

b. drive

c. round

d. gather

5. a. who

b. what

c. which

d. whose

6. a. Although

b. After

c. While

d. However

7. a. alike

b. like

c. likely

d. liking

8. a. atmosphere

b. experience

c. tradition

d. feature

X. Read the text carefully, then choose the correct answers. Tran Temple Festival, one of the largest annual spring festivals in Vietnam, is held on the 14th night and 15th day of the first lunar month at the national historical complex of the Tran Kings’ shrines and tombs in Tien Duc Commune, Hung Ha District, Nam Dinh City. It usually begins with an incense-offering rite at the kings’ tombs and a ritual for the opening of the gates of Den Thanh (Thanh Temple), Den Mau (Mother Temple) and the Tran Kings’ shrines. They are followed by a ‘water procession’, in which people will carry nine ornate palanquins with memorial plaques of the Kings of the Tran Dynasty and members of their royal families. A series of folk games are also organized during the festival, such as a rice-cooking challenge, clay firecrackers, chung cake wrapping and tug of war, alongside traditional performances and sport games including lion dances, dragon dances, cheo and chau van singing, human chess, wrestling Unit 5: FESTIVALS IN VIETNAM 71

d. twice a year

2. The Tran Temple Festival usually begins with ________.

a. temples

b. offerings

c. shrines

d. rituals

a. a large picture printed on paper b.a wide piece of cloth with a message on it c.a small piece of paper with information on it d.a flat piece of metal, wood or stone with writing on it 5. Which of the followings is not organized in the festival? a. rice cooking

b. tug of war

c. boat race

d. human chess

5. Based on the information in the text, which statement is false? a.The Tran Temple Festival aims to honour the Tran Dynasty. b.The seal opening ceremony takes place on the 14th night. c.The main rituals are preceded by a water procession. d.Traditional cheo and chau van singing is performed in the festival. 7, Which of the followings is not mentioned in the text? a.The Tran Dynasty is the most brilliant reign in Vietnamese history. b.Tran Temple Festival was recognized as a national intangible heritage. c. Nine ornate palanquins are carried in the water procession. d.There are plenty of activities to keep festival goers entertained. XI. Write the second sentence without changing the meaning, using the words given. 1. Three hundred students entered the swimming competition last year. (part) Three hundred students ______________________________________________________ 2. The children are always fascinated by nature programmes on TV. (find) The children _______________________________________ when they watch them on TV. 3. What about going to Bac Ninh to see the Lim Festival? (should) Duong ___________________________________________________________________ 4. Although he studied very hard, he still didn’t pass the exam. (despite) He_______________________________________________________________________ 5. Governments should preserve all the world’s languages. (ought) All the world’s languages _____________________________________________________ 6. The tennis players’ match is still going on. (finished)

72 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

The tennis players __________________________________________________________ 7. I have been to the Huong Pagoda Festival three times now. (time) This _____________________________________________________________________ 8. The date for the Vu Lan Festival is the 15th day of the seventh lunar month. (place)

UNIT 6

FOLK TALES

The Vu Lan Festival _________________________________________________________ 9. While we were going home, we had an accident. (way)

A. PHONETICS

We ______________________________________________________________________ 10. I can’t wait to see the elephant race festival in Dak Lak. (forward)

I. Look at the pictures and complete exclamatory sentences with the correct phrases in the box. Then say these sentences aloud.

I am _____________________________________________________________________ goodfairy brave knight strongwoodcutter gorgeouscastle cruel witch fierce dragon generous emperor ugly ogre lovely princess cunningfox

1. What a ________________ it is!

2. What a ________________ he is!

3. What a ________________ it is!

4. What a ________________ she is!

5. What a ________________ he is!

6. What a ________________ it is!

7. What a ________________ he is!

8. What a ________________ she is!

9. What a ________________ he is!

10. What a ________________ she is!

II. Change the following sentences into exclamatory sentences, using what. Then practise saying these sentences aloud; pay attention to the intonation.

Unit 5: FESTIVALS IN VIETNAM 73

1. Windsor is a very old castle.

________________________________

2. It is a fantastic fairy tale.

________________________________

3. Tiana is a very intelligent princess.

________________________________

4. Cinderella has beautiful brown eyes.

________________________________

5. The weather was terrible that day.

________________________________

74 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

6. We’ve just learned a humorous folk tale.

________________________________

7. The Queen is wearing an elegant gown.

________________________________

IV. Match the titles with the short descriptions.

8. They are greedy foxes.

________________________________

1. It describes a race between two animals.

9. The monster is a great fool.

________________________________

10. Saint Giong is a dramatic legend.

________________________________

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR

2. In the story, a girl fell through a rabbit hole and travelled The Legend of Robin Hood into a fantasy world. 3. The prince in this fairy tale eventually found the girl Chung Cakes, Day Cakes whose foot fitted into the glass slipper.

I. Match each word with its definition. 1. emperor

Sleeping Beauty

a. a woman who has magic powers, especially to do evil things

2. knight

b. a man who rules an empire

3. giant

c. a person whose job is cutting down trees

4. fairy

d. a man of high social rank who had a duty to fight for his king

5. ogre

e. a very large strong person

4. At the end, the dragon turned into a handsome prince Saint Giong and married the princess. 5. The Princess slept for 100 years before being awakened Little Red Riding Hood by a prince’s kiss. 6. It’s a European fairy tale about a young girl and a big The Tortoise and the Hare bad wolf.

6. servant

f. a creature like a small person with wings who has magic powers

7. witch

g. a person who works in another person’s house

7. Prince Tiet Lieu pleased the emperor by creating two The Starfruit Tree types of rice cakes that represented Heaven and Earth.

8. woodcutter

h. a large, cruel, and frightening person who eats people

8. A legendary outlaw robbed the rich and helped the poor.

Alice’s Adventures Wonderland

II. Complete the sentences with the correct adjectives from the box. brave

cruel cunning evil

fierce

mean

wicked

generous

greedy cheerful

1. In the story, the ___________ fox outwits the hunters. 2. Kama was a _________ king. Every morning, he gave to the poor a hundredpounds of gold. 3. Heroes are never perfect, but they are ___________. 4. His lively sense of humour helps to keep the meeting very ___________.

9. It’s about the three-year-old boy who helped Hung Cinderella Vuong King defeat the An invaders. 10.“Starfruits I eat, with gold I pay, be ready with a three- The Princess and the Drago foot bag and follow me to get it.” V. Complete the sentences with the past simple form of the verbs in the box. turn

travel

tell

enjoy

know

ring

play

cry

teach

visit study

5. The elder brother was very _______. He filled a very large bag and all his pocketswith gold.

1. I really __________ the concert last night. It was great!

6. Cinderella’s stepmother is very ___________ to her.

2. We __________ tennis yesterday because it was raining.

7. The ___________ fairy bewitched the princess and made her fall into a long sleep.

3. Last summer my friend and I __________ around the south of France.

8. The Queen was an ___________ woman. She offered the poisoned apple to Snow White.

4. __________ you __________ at the end of the film? I thought it was really sad.

9. Everyone in the village was frightened of the ___________ dragon.

5. He __________ hard for the exam, so he failed.

10. He was _________ to those who worked for him and generous to those who he hardly knew.

6. Where __________ he __________ before he came here?

III. Put the words into correct columns.

7. My PC was making a strange noise so I __________ it off.

dancer, considerate, beast, kind, fairy, brave, greedy, knight, mean, dancer, cheerful, cruel, witch, fierce, dragon, determined, woodcutter, prince, emperor, ogre, clever, wolf, princess, eagle, wise, tortoise, cunning, fox, loyal, thoughtful, honest Characters

Personality

________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________

8. Our teacher __________ us a very interesting legend two days ago. 9. They __________ each other very well when they were kids. 10. She __________ the job because the salary was too low. 11. __________ your parents __________ the Acropolis when they were in Greece? 12. I was playing a computer game when the doorbell __________. VI. Use the prompts and the past continuous tense to write sentences. 1. I/ play/ computer games/ all day yesterday ___________________________________________________________________ 2. your friends/ wait/ for you/ all that time? ___________________________________________________________________ 3. Sid/ not clean/ his room/ at 8p.m last night

UNIT 6: FOLK TALES 75

76 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

___________________________________________________________________ 4. We/ have/ dinner/ when Tim arrived ___________________________________________________________________ 5. Sarah and Luke / not surf/ the Internet/ at that time ___________________________________________________________________ 6. What/ Jack/ do/ while/ you/ cook/ dinner? ___________________________________________________________________ 7. This time last week/ my family/ visit/ my grandmother ___________________________________________________________________ 8. It/ not snow/ when I left ___________________________________________________________________ 9. you/ sleep/ when I phoned you last night? ___________________________________________________________________ 10. While/ the children/ talk/ the teacher came into class ___________________________________________________________________

3. What did they do / were they doing at 11pm last night - it was really noisy? 4. When I walked / was walking into the class, the teacher talked / was talking about the new course. 5. My parents lived / were living in Berlin for ten years. They lived / were living that when the Berlin wall came down in 1999. 6. How many pictures didyou take / were you taking while you travelled / were travelling around Ireland? 7. The Titanic crossed / was crossing the Atlantic when it hit / was hitting an iceberg. 8. As soon as I saw / was seeing the accident I called / was calling the police. 9. While Matt did / was doing his homework, his mother made / was making the dinner. 10. When the ambulance came / was coming, we carried / were carrying him into it. 11. We played / were playing a computer game when Mum called / was called for lunch. 12. When the teacher said / was saying “Stop!”, I stilltried / was still trying to finish the last question. X. Complete the sentences with the past simple or past continuous form of the verbs in brackets.

VII. Complete the sentences with the past continuous form of the verbs in brackets.

1. My car _____________(break) down when I _____________(drive) home from work.

1. Sam _____________(play) his guitar at half past seven last night

2. Alan _____________(look) out of the window when he _____________(see) a UFO.

2. ________ you ________(drive) to work when the accident happened?

3. When he _____________(see) me, he _____________(fall) off the wall.

3. It _____________(rain) on Monday so we didn’t play football.

4. We _____________(try)to log on when the Wifi _____________(stop) working.

4. At 6 o’clock on Saturday morning we _____________(travel) to the airport.

5. I _____________(not listen) to my teacher when he asked a question.

6. She _____________(be) so tired that she _____________(sleep) for twelve hours.

6. In 1986 my father _____________(live) in Paris. That’s where he met my mother.

7. The tortoise _____________(run) while the hare _____________(have) a nap.

7. What _________ they ________(do) when you arrived?

8. I _____________(phone) you four times last night but you _____________(sleep).

8. Greg _____________(not study) for the test when we went to his place.

9. The police __________(ask) them lots of questions before they ___________(release) them.

9. ______ Caroline _________(ski) when she broke her leg? 10. My parents _____________(not sleep) when I came home last night.

10. While the children __________(surf) the Internet, they __________(find) a really interesting website about music.

VIII. Complete these sentences by putting the verbs into the past simple or past continuous.

11. He _____________(walk) down the road when he _____________(hear) a loud noise.

1. Last week we _____________(drive) through the Alps into Switzerland.

12. When we _____________(be) in Canana, we _____________(go) skiing almost every day.

2. At 8p.m yesterday, we _____________(watch) a film. 3. _____________(you/ see) the football match yesterday?

13. Where _________ you ________(go) last summer holiday, Jim? ~ Well, I __________(take) a trip to Minneapolis.

4. James broke his arm when he _____________(play) rugby.

14. When I _____________(arrive), they _____________(say) hello but continued working.

5. Kylie _____________(make) her first film when she was 21. 6. Mrs Jones _____________(not know) how to open the attachment in her email.

15. When you _____________(meet) me yesterday, I _____________(not go) to school, I _____________(go) to the doctor’s - I felt terrible.

7. What _____________(your father/ do) when the alarm sounded?

XI. Complete each sentence with an appropriate preposition.

8. When we _____________(leave) school yesterday, it was pouring with rain.

1. Nick was doing some Internet research _____________ Vietnamese legends.

9. They _____________(walk) through the forest when the storm started.

2. The eagle picked _____________ the tortoise and off they went.

10. I _____________(not queue) for the bus when the accident happened.

3. The greedy brother filled a very large bag _____________ gold.

IX. Choose the correct option.

4. The elder brother offered to swap his fortune _____________ the starfruit tree.

1. He joined / was joining the company 25 years ago and he still works for us.

5. _____________ the way home, the eagle got tired and got him into the sea.

2. At this time last week, we lay / were lying on a beach in the sun.

6. The hare always boasted _____________ how fast he could run.

_________ Jim _________(smoke) when he _________(turn) on the gas?

7. When the princess touched the spindle she fell _____________ a deep sleep. UNIT 6: FOLK TALES 77

78 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

8. The tortoise challenged him _____________ a race.

_____ Well, I haven’t watched the film yet. But I really like its original song Let it go.

9. The witch put a magic spell on the prince and turned him _____________ a frog.

D. READING

10. The princess slept _____________ one hundred years until a prince arrived _____________ the castle and kissed her.

I. Fill in each blank with a word from the box. while

C. SPEAKING

alongside

ever

1. Hi, Khiet What are you reading?

a. Thach Sanh married the princess and lived happily ever after.

2. Vietnamese folktales? They’re very interesting, aren’t they?

b. You’re right. Thach Sanh was the victim, but he overcame dangerous challenges.

3. Which story are you reading?

c. The king granted Thach Sanh the right to judge Ly Thong, but Thach Sanh allowed Ly Thong and his mother to go home.

4. Are they the names of the main characters? 5. How about Thach Sanh’s life? I guess he suffered a lot. 6. What happened in the end? 7. Then Thach Sanh had a chance to tell the truth. What did the king do? 8. Yeah. That was what a good man should do. Ly Thong was lucky, too. 9. And Thach Sanh? Did he have a happy life? 10. What an interesting story!

loudly

when

line

challenged

The Tortoise and The Hare

I. Match the sentences in column A with the responds in column B. A

speedy

d. The story of Thach Sanh and Ly Thong. e. Hi, Isabella. I’m reading a book of Vietnamese folktales. f. I really like it! You should read it yourself.

There once was a (1)___________ hare who bragged about how fast he could run. Tired of hearing him boast, Slow and Steady, the tortoise, (2)___________ him to a race. All the animals in the forest gathered to watch. Hare ran down the road for a (3)___________ and then and paused to rest. He looked back at Slow and Steady and cried out, “How do you expect to win this race (4)___________ you are walking along at your slow, slow pace?” Hare stretched himself out (5)___________ the road and fell asleep, thinking, “There is plenty of time to relax.” Slow and Steady walked and walked. He never (6)___________ stopped until he came tothe finish line. The animals who were watching cheered so (7)______ for Tortoise they woke up Hare. Hare stretched and yawned and began to run again, but it was too late. Tortoise was over the (8)_____. II. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks. The Legend of Robin Hood

g. Yeah. Really interesting! h. Yes. Thach Sanh is the good, and Ly Thong is the bad. Ly Thong cheated Thach Sanh several times and had a rich life. i. Not this time, actually. Ly Thong and his mother were killed by thunder on the way home, j. In the end, Thach Sanh, with his guitar’s melodies, helped the princess to smile and speak happily. The king knew everything after inviting him to the court.

Robin Hood was born near the end of the 12th century. His real name was Robert. He was the son of the Earl of Huntingdon. At that time, England had many problems. The King was cruel and greedy. His men were arrogant and brutal. The poor people of England suffered a lot. Many families died of hunger! One day, the cruel Sheriff of Nottingham killed Robin’s father, and took away his lands. Young Robin lost his father, his home, his lands and all his possessions. He escaped to Sherwood Forest with his loyal servants. They decided to live as free men in the forest. They didn’t want to be slaves of King John. However, the King considered them outlaws. Robin and the outlaws lived in caverns in the forest. They all wore green clothes and carried bows and arrows. The outlaws were excellent archers. Robin Hood became the best archer in the region. Some years passed, and there were more than 200 outlaws living in Sherwood Forest. Robin Hood was the hero of the poor. He continued robbing the rich to give to the poor. The Sheriff of Nottingham sent an army of soldiers to Sherwood Forest to capture Robin Hood. But Robin and his outlaws were in the trees. They killed all the soldiers except one.

B II. Put the sentences into the correct order. _____ Frozen. It’s a fantasy film produced by Walt Disney. _____ Yeah. It was very fun and exciting. I really like it. __1__ What were you doing at 8p.m last night, Susan? _____ It tells the story of a fearless princess who sets off on an epic journey to find herestranged sister.

Robin Hood’s fame was everywhere. The people called him Saint Robin, and Robin, Sheriff of Sherwood Forest. A lot of new outlaws joined Robin Hood. They were loyal to him and followed him everywhere. A. Match the words that mean the same.

_____ I was watching a film on Youtube.

1. cruel

_____ Not exactly! It’s her sister’s name. Her name is Anna.

2. rob

b. cave

_____ What film?

3. rich

c. property

_____ Me too. It’s a lovely song. And the film is also really good. You should see it.

4. outlaw

d. steal

_____ Ok. I’ll watch it tonight.

5. cavern

e. evil

_____ Was it good?

6. possessions

f. criminal

_____ What is it about?

B. Decide if the statements are true (T) or false (F).

_____ The princess’s name is Elsa?

1. Robin Hood was born in Sherwood Forest. UNIT 6: FOLK TALES 79

a. wealthy

80 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

2. Robin Hood was descended from the noble family of the Earl of Huntingdon.

What_______________________________________________________________ 2. The book was so good that I couldn’t stop reading it.

3. King John wasn’t kind to his people.

Itwas _______________________________________________________________

4. Robin Hood lived with his slaves in the forest.

3. The children were doing their homework when I got home.

5. Robin Hood only stole from the rich.

While ______________________________________________________________

6. Robin and his men used guns as their weapons.

4. She finds it difficult to remember all the story.

7. The ordinary people of Nottingham hated Robin Hood. C. Answer the questions.

It’s ________________________________________________________________ 5. Sleeping Beauty is not as interesting as Beauty and the Beast.

1. When was Robin Hood born? ___________________________________________________________________

Beauty and the Beast is ________________________________________________ 6. In spite of having no interest in folklore, Sylvia still enjoyed the story.

2. What was the England King at the time like? ___________________________________________________________________

Although ___________________________________________________________ 7. My mother last told a fairy tale two years ago.

3. Who did Robin live with in Sherwood Forest. ___________________________________________________________________

It’s ________________________________________________________________ 8. I think it would be a good idea if you joined the beginner’s class.

4. Why did Robin Hood and his servants decide to live in the forest? ___________________________________________________________________

I suggest ___________________________________________________________ 9. Charles Perrault wrote Cinderella in French in 1697.

5. How many outlaws were there in Sherwood Forest? ___________________________________________________________________

Cinderella ___________________________________________________________ 10. I had a shower and the telephone rang.

6. What did the people call Robin Hood? ___________________________________________________________________

When I _____________________________________________________________

E. WRITING TEST FOR UNIT 6

I. Write full sentences, using the words or phrases provided. You can add some words or make suitable changes.

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

1. Prince Tiet Lieu/ please/ the emperor/ by/ create/ Chung cakes/ Day cakes

1. a. fable

b. brave

c. dragon

d. tale

2. a. scream

b. read

c. reach

d. hear

3. a. walked

b. filled

c. swallowed

d. screamed

4. a. giant

b. witch

c. knight

d. kind

5. a. eyes

b. ogres

c. stories

d. cakes

___________________________________________________________________ 2. While/ Little Red Riding Hood/ pick/ some flowers/ path/ she/ meet/ wicked wolf ___________________________________________________________________ 3. When/ the crow/ drop/ cheese/ the fox/ eat/ it ___________________________________________________________________

II. Tick ( ) the opposites.

4. The fox/ sleep/ under/ tree/ when/ she/ hear/ sound of humans. ___________________________________________________________________

1. cheerful

happy depressed

6. brave

fearful fearless

2. evil

bad kind

7. wicked

righteous immoral

3. greedy

considerate eager

8. cunning

honest insidious

4. fierce

gentle violent

9. cruel

goodhearted brutal

5. generous

mean helpful

10. mean

miserly open-handed

5. The princess/ sleep/ one hundred years/ until/ prince/ arrive/ the castle/ give/ a kiss ___________________________________________________________________ 6. Once/ time/ there/ little girl/ live/ village/ near/ forest ___________________________________________________________________ 7. When/ the dwarfs/ return/ their cottage/ they/ find/ Snow White/ sleep/ their beds ___________________________________________________________________ 8. As/ we/ wander/ through/ the castle/ we/ see/ beautiful girl/ cry/ help ___________________________________________________________________ II. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence. 1. The fable is very exciting.

III. Put the verbs in brackets into the past simple or the past continuous. THE ANT AND THE DOVE

UNIT 6: FOLK TALES 81

82 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

a ‘happily ever after’ story.

On a hot day of summer, an ant (1. search)__________ for some water.After walking around for some time, she (2. come)____________ near the river. Todrink the water, she climbed up on a small rock. While she (3. try)____________ to drink a water, she (4. slip)____________ arid (5. fall)______________ into the river.

2. Little Red Riding Hood’s mother sent her to Grandma’s house with a basket of goodies and A B

There was a dove sitting on a branch of a tree who (6. see)______________ the ant falling intothe river. The dove quickly (7. pluck)______________ a leaf and (8. drop)______________ it into the river near the struggling ant. The ant (9. climb)______________ onto the leaf andreached the shore safely.

3. Snow White’s evil stepmother wanted to be more beautiful in the land and was jealous of

Soon later, the ant (10. see)______________ a bird catcher getting ready to trap the dovewith his net. The dove (11. rest)______________ and he had no idea about the bird catcher.When the bird catcher was about to throw his net, the ant (12. bite)______________ him on thefoot. Feeling the pain, the bird catcher dropped his net and (13. let)______________ out a lightscream. The dove (14. notice)______________ it and quickly (15. fly)______________ away. IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. 1. The tale is about a prince who is turned _________ a frog by his wicked stepmother. a.to

b. into

c. out

d. over

b. for

c. on

d. about

b. folktale

c. fable

d. fairytale

b. fierce

c. cunning

b.because

c.while

b. generous

c. gruel

d. kind

d.whereas

b. have talked

c. was talking

after ever. D 5. The Hare ran across a field as fastly as he could, and all the animals agreed that the Hare was A B C D was very fast.

D 7. Whatan amazing fables they are! Most children enjoy hearing or reading them. B

b. pushed

c. challenged

with interesting stories. D A

b. swear

c. cloud

10. Despite of her misfortune, she is always cheerful and ready to play a small joke.

d. were talking

VI. Write the correct tense or form of the verbs in brackets.

1. He _____________(receive) £300 when his uncle died.

d. suggested

2. The day we heard the news we _____________(have) holidays with our family.

9. Sleeping Beauty was under a _________ when the prince found her. a. spell

d. greedy

8. Tired of hearing the hare’s boast, the tortoise _________ him to a race. a. urged

9. Snow White and Sleeping Beauty are bothfascinating fairy tales, butSnow White is best.

7. Helen and I _________ together when the accident happened. a. talked

4. The fog turned into a handsome prince, married the princess and they lived happily A B C

6. What a _________ man he is! There’s nothing he wouldn’t do for us. a. mean

8. Read folktales is a great way to share valuable lessons with your children and entertain them A B C

5. Vanessa is interested in reading Vietnamese folktales _________ she can’t readVietnamese well. a.although

A Snow White’s beauty.

4. In many cultures, a fox is the symbol for a _________ person. a. brave

rushed to go home.

3. A _________ is a story from ancient times about famous people and events that may ormay not be true. a. legend

6. While Cinderella danced with the prince, she remembered her fairy godmother’s words and A B C

2. The hare always boasted _________ how fast he could run. a. at

told her to not talk to strangers.

3. Why ________________(you/ not answer) my phone call last night? ~ Oh, sorry,I _____________(take) a shower at that time.

d. wave

10. _________ young Ella finds herself at the mercy of her cruel stepmother and stepsisters. a.Despite her father unexpectedly dies,

4. She _____________(not see) her father since he _____________(start) to work inMarseille two years ago.

c.When her father unexpectedly dies,

5. My mother ____________(fly) home from London today. Her flight _____________(arrive) in an hour.

d. Due to her father unexpectedly dies,

6. We decided not to go because it _____________(rain) very hard.

b.After her father unexpectedly dies,

V. Choose the underlined word or phrase, A, B, C or D that needs correcting.

7. When I ________(be) a child, my mother __________(read) me bedtime stories every night.

1. The beloved tale of Cinderella is one of the world’s best-known fairy tale, renowned as

8. ________________(you/ ever/ hear) a Vietnamese folktale before?

UNIT 6: FOLK TALES 83

9. The hare believed he would win the race, so he stopped _____________(take) a nap.

84 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

10. Once upon a time, there was a rich man _____________(live) in a village. VII. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets.

1. a. summoned

b. invited

c. ordered

d. arranged

1. Is The False Grandmother one of the ____________ versions of Little Red Riding Hood? (origin)

2. a. including 3. a. he

b. despite

c. except

d. apart

b. it

c. which

2. The king wanted to repay his servant’s ____________ in another way. (loyal)

d. who

4. a. over

b. in

c. on

d. of

3. The fox ____________ stole the egg by distracting the mother with a rock. (cunning)

5. a. considering

b. signing

c. symbolizing

d. presenting

4. The first thing that saved All Baba was his lack of ____________. (greedy)

6. a. shape dome

b. dome shape

c. shaped dome

d. dome shaped

5. Saint George is one of the most ____________ heroes in the western world. (legend)

7. a. Therefore

b. Otherwise

c. Moreover

d. However

6. The stepfather was a wicked man and treated his stepson very ____________. (cruelty)

8. a. ceremonial

b. traditional

c. customary

d. social

7. Giving gifts to servants is an example of King’s ____________. (generous)

X. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks.

8. Princess Elsa ____________ magic that allows her to control and create ice and snow. (possession) 9. ____________, his parents passed away when he was 12 years old. (fortune) 10. The princess was so ____________ that she lost her ability to speak. (fright) VIII. Match the sentences. 1. I phoned you at 7 p.m. last night, but you didn’t answer. 2. What did you buy? 3. You wanted to find some books, didn’t you? 4. What book were you looking for? 5. What for? 6. I see. Your brother will be glad. 7. Why couldn’t? 8. Bad luck! Why don’t you buy him a video game instead? IX. Choose the word which best fits each gap.

a. When I came to the shelf, another boy was holding the book. It was the last one. b. It’s a gift for my brother’s birthday. c. That sounds like a good idea. d. Yeah. I just wanted to check if they had the book I was looking for. e. Just some stickers. And then I stopped by the bookstore on the way home. f. But I couldn’t buy it! g. At 7 o’clock? I was riding to the stationery shop. h. A children’s book of myths and legends.

The story of Chung Cakes and Day Cakes According to legend, King Hung wanted to choose one son as a successor to his throne. He (1)________ all of his sons, and told them that whoever could bring him the most precious offering to the altar of the ancestors, would be awarded the throne.

The Legend of "Stingy Jack" According to Irish folklore a man named Jack, well known for his drunkenness and quick temper, got very drunk at a local pub on All Hallows Eve. He met the Devil outside the pub because the Devil wanted his soul. Jack asked him one more drink but he didn’t have the money to pay. So he convinced the Devil to turn himself into a coin and Jack put it into his wallet that had a silver cross that catched the Devil. Jack agreed to free the Devil under one condition: he should let him live for another year. The Devil accepted. The following year the Devil reappeared and asked Jack to accompany him. Jack told the Devil to take an apple from a tree; when the Devil climbed up, Jack carved a cross on the tree and the Devil was trapped again. This time Jack asked the Devil ten more years of life in exchange for his freedom; again the Devil had to accept. Soon after, Jack died. God would not allow such an unsavory figure into heaven. The Devil kept his word not to claim his soul, would not allow Jack into hell. He sent Jack off into the dark night with only a burning coal to light his way. Jack put the coal into a carved-out turnip and has been roaming the Earth with ever since. The Irish began to refer to this ghostly figure as “Jack of the Lantern,” and then, simply “Jack O’Lantern.” The Irish used to carve turnips or beets as Jack’s lanterns and place them into windows or near doors to frighten away evil spirits on Halloween night. When they emigrated to the USA, they brought their traditions with them. They couldn’t find turnips in America but they found a lot of pumpkins which were suitable substitutes to make a JackO’Lantern; since then, pumpkins are an essential part of Halloween celebrations. A. Match the words to their definitions.

All of the princes traveled throughout the country in search of the tastiest and most exotic foods to offer their father, (2)________ Lang Lieu, the 18th prince. Being the poorest prince, he could not afford such luxurious foods and had no idea where to begin looking. One night, he dreamed of a genie (3)________ told him “There is nothing greater than the sky or the earth. And the rice grain is the most precious thing (4)________ the world. Now, use glutinous rice to make Chung Cake, a green and square cake, (5)________ the earth*. Then use ground glutinous rice to make Day Cake, a white, (6)________ cake, symbolizing the sky.” When he awoke, Lang Lieu was very happy and prepared the two kinds of cakes described by the genie.

1. stingy

a. dishonest or morally offensive

2. convince

b. a round white root vegetable

When the day of the contest came, Hung King was impressed by the favors and the meaning of Lang Lieu’s cakes. (7)________, he chose him as the successor to the throne. Since then, Chung Cake and Day Cake became the (8)________ food for the Tet holidays.

1. Where did Jack O’ Lantern first appear?

(*) Long time ago, people thought the earth was square. UNIT 6: FOLK TALES 85

3. carve

c. unwilling to spend, give, or use a lot of money

4. unsavory

d. to persuade someone to do something

5. roam

e. to write something on a surface by cutting into it

6. turnip

f. to move or travel with no particular purpose

B. Choose the correct answers. a. England

b. The USA

c. Scotland

2. Why did Jack meet the Devil outside the pub?

86 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

d. Ireland

a.Because he wanted to invite the Devil for a drink. b.Because the Devil wanted to collect his soul.

TEST YOURSELF 2

c. Because he sold his soul to the Devil.

I. Choose the word that has underlined part pronounced differently from the test.

d.Because he didn’t have money to pay for his drink.

1. a. sticky

b. fairy

c. story

d. reply

2. a. honest

b. human

c. hero

d. historian

a.to prevent the Devil taking his soul

3. a. looked

b. stopped

c. screamed

d. missed

b.to turn theDevil into a coin

4. a. character

b. church

c. choose

d. cheerful

c.to drive the Devil away from him

5. a. procession

b. confusion

c. production

d. tradition

d. to prevent the Devil from changing back into his original form

II. Choose the word that has different stress pattern.

3. Jack had a silver cross in his wallet _________.

4. What did the Devil have to do before he could come down from the tree? a. Let Jack live for more ten years.

b. Promise not to bother Jack any more.

c. Take an apple from the tree.

d. Exchange his life for his freedom.

5. When he died, Jack wasn’t allowed into heaven because _________. a.he was a honest man

b. the Devil didn’t accept him

c. he was a bad man

d. the God didn’t want his soul

6. Which of the following statements is true?

1. a. anniversary

b. celebration

c. ceremony

d. politician

2. a. lantern

b. princess

c. emperor

d. incense

3. a. reunite

b. defeat

c. command

d. swallow

4. a. preservation

b. communicate

c. commemorate

d. participate

5. a. cunning

b. unkind

c. greedy

d. generous

III. Filling each blank with a suitable word. The first letter of the word has been provided. 1. Tet, or Lunar New Year, is the most important f___________ in Vietnam.

a. The Devil gave Jack a candle to light his way.

2. In the UK, there are a lot of c___________ for table manners.

b.The original Jack O’ Lanterns were carved from pumpkins.

3. Most Vietnamese people have family altars to w___________ their ancestors.

c.People place Jack O’ Lanterns near doors to keep evil spirits away. d.The Jack o’ lantern tradition was introduced to England by native Americans.

4. Saint Giong is a mythical h___________ who helped King Hung to defeat the An. 5. It’s important to p___________ our culture for future generations.

XI. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence, using the words given.

6. Xoan singing is traditional f___________ singing originating from the northernprovince of Phu Tho.

1. It was not a good idea for you to refuse the offer of that job. (down)

7. The Fox and the Grapes is one of the most popular f___________.

You should __________________________________________________________ 2. My teacher suggested that I spent the summer in England. (advised)

8. At the beginning of the festival, they p___________ a ritual of offering incense. 9. Millions of Japanese visit homtowns for family r___________ during theObon Festival.

My teacher __________________________________________________________ 3. The film is not as interesting as the novel was. (much)

10. The o_______ demanded the annual sacrifice of a young village girl to satisfy hisblood lust. IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

The novel ___________________________________________________________ 4. Could you speak English when you were younger? (able) When you were younger, ______________________________________________ 5. Could I borrow some change for the telephone? (lend) Could ______________________________________________________________ 6. It’s ages since my sister and I had an argument. (for) My sister and I _______________________________________________________ 7. While we were going home, we had an accident. (way) We ________________________________________________________________ 8. I’ve been learning English for three years. (started) I __________________________________________________________________

1. The Giong festival is held _______ the 9th day of the 4th lunar month. a. at

b. in

c. on

d. from

2. Last year, my family _______ tradition and travelled abroad during Tet holiday. a. broke with

b. passed down

c. kept on

d. handed up

3. The Mid-Autumn Festival is also known as Moon Festival _______ Harvest Moon Festival. a. but

b. or

c. so

d. and

4. You _______ eat squid, duck, or shrimp during Tet because they are seen as bad symbols. a. have to

b. should

c.don’t have to

d. shouldn’t

5. A _______ is a traditional story, usually about animals, that teaches a moral lesson. a. legend

b. fable

c. folktale

d. fairy tale

c. What

d. What a

6. _______ bad luck he had! a. How

b. How a

7. My salary is really low; _______ I find the work incredibly rewarding. UNIT 6: FOLK TALES 87

88 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

a. therefore

b. moreover

c. otherwise

d. nevertheless

5. ____________(you/ watch) this programme or can I turn the TV off?

d. despite

6. My friends and I ____________(not play) football at 3p.m yesterday because it was raining hard at that time.

8. She tried to remain cheerful _______ she had failed the test. a. even though

b. because

c. even if

7. The Hung King Temple Festival ____________(recognise) as a national holiday in 2007.

9. While Amber _______ the tale, her friends were talking about another story. a. narrated

b.was narrated

c. was narrating

d. has narrated

9. What ____________(you/do) when you’ve spent all your money?

10. ‘The film was very exciting, but the ending was unexpected.’ ‘_______ I didn’t like its ending.’ a. It’s great!

b.Spot on!

8. When I shouted, they ____________(jump) off the roof and ____________(run) away.

c. Sounds bad!

d. Hold on!

10. The Chinese custom of binding feet to make them smaller ____________(cease) in the twentieth century.

V. Choose the underlined word or phrase, A, B, C or D that needs correcting.

VII. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets.

1. The custom to carve jack-o’-lanterns can betraced backto an old Irish folk tale.

1. He calls people sir and madam and he is very ____________. (respect)

2. One day a dragon flew over the tower when he heard the princess cry for help. A

3. There is the Poh Bang ____________ by a magician in the temple. (perform)

4. A fairy tale usually involves ____________ creatures and magic. (image)

3. Legends relate to history because they are based on history events and heroes. A

5. In the story, a ____________ rescues Red Riding Hood with his axe. (woodcut)

4. Itis considered impolite to not take off your shoes before entering a house in Japan. A

5. Erin had a three-weeks vacation; therefore he went to Vietnam and took part in some spring A B C D festivals. 6. When we arrived at home last night, the children were doing their homework. A

7. Because breathing is something we do automatically, so we rarely think about it. A

8. Thanks formoderntechnology, we can now preserve our culture for future generations. A

2. In Japan, up until recently, marriages were ____________ arranged by a special matchmaker. (custom)

9. Tree Planting Day is very important in Singapore because the country needs to protect A B C it’s natural parks and green spaces. D 10. The Hung King Temple Festival is annual held in honourof the Hung Kings who are the A B C foundersof the nation. D VI. Writethe correct tense or form of the verbs in brackets. 1. Do Son Buffalo Fighting Festival ____________(hold) every year on the 9th day of the eighth lunar month.

6. When Alice heard footsteps, she was ____________ and started to run. (fright) 7. Cinderella’s stepmothers was ____________ and treated her ____________. (kind - bad) 8. Jack is very bright, but he’s also ____________ of his accomplishments at school. (boast) 9. When Jack was going to the market, he met a ____________. (magic) 10. She smiled ____________, waved, and vanished into thin air. (wicked) VIII. Match the sentences. 1. What a lovely bouquet of flowers! You’re very kind. 2. Why do you say this restaurant mainly serves Western dishes? 3. Chasing the cheese down the hill? You’re kidding! 4. I don’t know the rules of this folk game. 5. Buffalo fighting festival? That sounds scary! 6. Is The Story of Son Tinh and Thuy Tinh a fairy tale? 7. We have a family tradition of eating dinner together. 8. Have you read any Vietnamese folktales? 9. What a lovely dress! 10. Who are the main characters in the fable?

2. Everything is going well. We ____________(not have) any problems so far. 3. Perfume Festival ____________(take) place at the Perfume Pagoda on the 15th day of the 1st lunar month. 4. Little Red Riding Hood___________(walk) through the forest when she met a wicked wolf. TEST YOURSELF 2 89

a. Look at the cutlery on the table! They are using knife and fork. b. Me neither. Why not search them on the Internet? c. A fox and a crow. d. Oh, no. I’m telling you the truth. It’s one of our old traditions. e. Not yet I can speak a little Vietnamese but I cannot read it. f. That’s interesting! It encourages family togetherness, I think. g. No. It’s a myth. h. Never mind. You also look as pretty as the flowers. i. Thanks, buddy! I’m glad you like it. k. Yeah, somehow terrible. But it was recognized as a national intangible cultural heritage.

IX. Choose the word which best tits each gap. My friends and I are having a (1)_________ time at this year’s Roswell UFO Festival in New Mexico, USA. It’s a four-day event that takes (2)_________ every year in early July. Some

90 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

people believe that an alien (3)_________ – aUFO – crashedin a field near Roswellin 1947 and the festival (4)_________ that event. Not everyone believes this story, of course, but the festival is still a lot of fun. Everyone dresses up (5)_________ aliens for the Alien Costume Competition. The costumes are fabulous and even family pets take part. There are dogs dyed blue and tortoises (6)_________ in aluminium foil! Today we’re watching the (7)_________ down Main Street and tomorrow the firework display starts at 9 pm. They say it’s really amazing. (8)_________ are some of the aliens you meet.

b. a traditional breakfast consisting of rice, soup, fish c.a simple breakfast consisting of coffee and bread d.a healthy breakfast of fruits, veggies and milk 5. According to the passage, _________. a.Spaniards don’t often eat their evening meal anytime before 9 pm b.Dinner is always served with tapas and wine c.The locals usually eat dinner after 11pm

1. a. terrible

b. fantastic

c. leisure

d. difficult

2. a. break

b. part

c. place

d. time

3. a. spaceship

b. race

c. custom

d. planet

4. a. symbolizes

b. performs

c. organizes

d. celebrates

XI. Make sentences, using the words or phrases provided. You can add some words or make changes.

5. a. of

b. as

c. with

d. by

1. Pingxi Lantern Festival/ celebrate/ the fifteenth day/ the first lunar month

6. a. covered

b. filled

c. included

d. carved

7. a. companion

b. scenery

c. parade

d. heritage

8. a. Such

b. Much

c. Neither

d. So

d.Dinner is also as large as lunch

______________________________________________________________________ 2. Today’s children/ hardly/ listen/ stories/ their elder/ because/ they/ live/ the digital era ______________________________________________________________________ 3. LittleRed Riding Hood/ have/ important lessons/ the dangers/ talk/ strangers

X. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks. People visiting Spain for the first time can find it difficult to get used to the eating customs of the Spanish. It’s not so much the food itself, but the timing of the meals that visitors aren’t used to. I used to live in Cadiz myself for a few years and I actually quite like the way they do things. Breakfast is a light continental affair – justa roll and some coffee usually – eatenbetween 8 and 9.30 a.m. The main meal of the day is lunch, which people usually eat sometime between 1.30 p.m. and 3.30 p.m. Quite a few of the shops, museums and galleries close around this time, because the locals like to take time over lunch. They will rest for a short time afterwards, although the traditional afternoon siesta is not as common as it used to be. People eat late in the evening – rarelybefore 9 p.m. and at the weekend the locals often won’t eat before 11 p.m. or even midnight. This is a much lighter meal than lunch – oftenjust a few tapas taken with a drink. A. Decide whether the following sentences are true or false.

______________________________________________________________________ 4. Once/ time/ there/ beautiful princess/ who/ not live/ castle ______________________________________________________________________ 5. When/ Cinderella/ enter/ the palace/ everybody/ dance/ happily ______________________________________________________________________ 6. My family/ have/ custom/ visit/ pagodas/ the first day/ lunar New Year ______________________________________________________________________ 7. Visitors/ make offerings/ incense, flowers and fruits/ worship Buddha/ the pagoda. ______________________________________________________________________

1. Mealtimes in Spain can be confusing for visitors.

8. Most of the children/ like/ imagine/ visualize/ the stories/ while/ listen/ the folktales/ especially/ the fairy tales

2. In Spain, breakfast is the largest meal of the day.

______________________________________________________________________

3. Spaniards like to have a long lunch. 4. The entire country closes up shop from about 1:30 to 3:30 p.m. 5. Most Spaniards still enjoy taking a siesta after lunch. 6. Dinner is generally eaten between 9 p.m. and midnight. B. Choose the correct answers. 1. What is the passage mainly about? a. Spanish culture

b. Spanish eating customs

c.Spanish table manners

d. Spanish mealtimes

2. What does the word “siesta” mean? a. a light meal

b. a short nap

c. an afternoon snack d. a deep sleep

3. Which is the most important meal of the day in Spain? a. breakfast

b. lunch

c. snack

d. dinner

4. What is a continental breakfast? a. a full breakfast of cereal, bacon and eggs and toast TEST YOURSELF 2 91

92 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

5. Hoi An is famous for its colorful paper

UNIT 1

LOCAL ENVIRONMENT

A. PHONETICS

6. HangGai is obviously a right place to shopfor

in Hanoi.

I. Underline the content words in the sentences.

1. Dalat is famous for its sceneries. 2. I go to the cinema every week.

7. A number of Dong Son bronze 1924.

3. The artisan is carving a statue skillfully.

were foundby chance

4. This workshop was set up on the river bank years ago. 5. Foreign tourists often visit Ben Thanh Market for souvenirs. 6. Where did you buy this knitted tablecloth? II. Place a mark over the words that should be stressed In the following sentences.

sculptures made

8. We’re all impressed with a wide variety of by Non Nuoc artisans.

E.g. Her 'hobbies are 'music, 'reading and 'handicraft. 1. The craftsmen worked in a freezing cold workshop.

III. Match the word with its definition.

2. The street is full of vendors selling handicrafts.

1. artisan

a. a product that is made by hand rather than by using a machine

3. The town survives mainly through tourism.

2. workshop

b. the process of encouraging members of a group to work well together by having them take part in activities and games

4. Independence Palace is a major tourist attraction.

3. authenticity

c. a person who does skilled work, making things with their hands

4. handicraft

d. a long, thin strand of cotton, nylon, or other fibers used in sewing or weaving

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR

5. team-building

e. the place where something first started to exist

I. Complete the sentences with the appropriate words or phrases. Take the picture next to each sentence as a clue.

6. birthplace

f. a room or building where things are made using tools or machines

7. thread

g. a work of art that is a solid figure or object made by carving or shaping wood, stone, clay, metal, etc.

8. sculpture

h.the quality of being real or true

5. They sell rugs made by local artisans. 6. Do you know about the other services available at your local library?

drums

lanterns

conical hat

1. Along with the Ao Dai, the Vietnamese people.

2. Dong Ho mass.

marble

paintings

silk

lacquerware

is a culturalsymbol of

are simple, meaningful and createdfor the

pottery

III. Complete the sentences with the words from the box. carved

cast

knitted

embroidered

produced

mould

woven

ironed

1. She 3. I’ve

3. The art of

4. Thanh Ha crafted products.

her uniform every chance, keeping it crisp and fresh.

2. These baskets are

dates back to China some 10,000years ago.

Village in Hoi An is famous for itsmanually

from strips of willow. a sweater for John, and now I’m making one for me.

4. The dragon pattern was sometimes 5. The statue was

on the cloth.

out of a single piece of stone.

6. This video shows how to

a cup from clay.

7. Dong Son drums were

in bronze and designed with traditional patterns.

8. Every year, a lot of products are

from the workshop ofPhong’s family.

IV. Fill in the blank with an appropriate preposition or adverb to form a phrasal verb.

bus and walked to the craft village.

1. They got

2. His shoes are quite

. He’ll have to get a new pair. the football match because of snow.

2. The museum has been temporarily closed

for reconstruction.

3. They have had to

3. Bat Trang Ceramic Village is facing up

the lack of artisans.

4. Rachel knew that Ross would be worried if she didn’t

4. He asked her to go on a vacation with his family but she turned him 5. Tourists coming

Western countries find conical hats interesting.

6. She is used to dealing 7. He got

all kinds of people in her job.

8. Tomorrow’s match has been called 9. I’m looking

6. An investigation was

by the local police. last night.

8. He’s been feeling much better since he

because of the icy weather.

9. She

her clothes

10. Zedco wants to

to the reunion with my family in Vietnam.

10. These traditional stories have been passed generations.

while I was in Paris?

7. A house in our neighborhood was

to find himself alone in the house.

from parent to child overmany

1. Local people can earn their livings by providing tourists with necessary services. (LIVE) → Local people _______________________________________________________________ 2. That man has a friendly relationship with the owner of Los Angeles County Museum of Art. (GETS) → That man _________________________________________________________________ 3. Pictures of the suspect were published in all daily papers. (BROUGHT) → Pictures __________________________________________________________________ 4. There is no oil and gas left on Earth. (RUN) → The Earth has ______________________________________________________________ 5. The council had to cancel the football match because of the storm. (CALL) → The council _______________________________________________________________ 6. She was reading a magazine as she waited in the doctor’s office. (LOOKING) → She _____________________________________________________________________ 7. I will return to Hoi An to have another week of adventure this summer. (COME) → I ________________________________________________________________________ 8. After leaving college, he started his own business with a bank loan. (SET) → After _____________________________________________________________________ 9. She promised to meet me at the cinema this evening, but she didn’t arrive. (TURN) → _________________________________________________________________________ 10. Nicholas began his trip to the remote farmhouse in Connecticut yesterday. (SET) → Nicholas _________________________________________________________________ VI. Complete the sentences with the phrasal verbs from the box.

smoking. and got into bed.

a new sales office in Germany.

VII. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

1. I almost missed my flight

V. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence, using the word in capital.

5. Can you imagine who I

a. although

there was a long queue in the duty-free shop.

b. since

2. I want to be well-groomed a. in order to 3.

c. despite

b. so as not to

c. so that

d. as soon as

she is young, she is very independent. a. Although

b. Because

c. In order that

d. In spite of

I met the Gills, I had been gardening for nearly ten years.

a. As soon as 5.

b. Although

c. After

d. Before

he had finished his studies, he went to America. a. While

b. Before

6. You’ll never guess what happened a. as long as 7.

b. as soon as

c. After

d. Until

I left my room. c. while

d. as far as

they’re expensive, they last forever and never go out of style. a. When

b. As soon as

8. She went back to live with her mother own house. a. although

b. so that

9. They were driving to Dallas a.when 10.

d. because of

other people think nice things about me.

b. while

c. Even though

d. Because

she did not earn enough money to live in her c. in order to

d. because

they caught an accident. c. before

d. as soon as

she was asleep, thieves broke in and stole her handbag. a.In order that

b. Although

c. Because of

d. While

VIII. Join each pair of sentences, using the word or phrase in brackets.

1. Hoa was born in Doc So craft village. She knows the process of making pottery. (BECAUSE) _________________________________________________________________________ 2. The library was bombed. Many important historical documents were destroyed. (WHEN) _________________________________________________________________________

call off

set up

turned down

gave up

turn up

carried out

worn out

came across

took off

broken into

3. She entered the room. She knew there was something wrong. (AS SOON AS)

4. We decided to take rooms in Longwood House. We knew we could not afford the rent.

_________________________________________________________________________ 1. Sue was offered a job as a translator but she

UNIT 1: LOCAL ENVIRONMENT 7

8 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

THOUGH)

5. Harry:

_________________________________________________________________________ 5. My mom instructed me through 15 stages of making a conical hat. I could make one forme. (SOTHAT) _________________________________________________________________________

Quang: 6. Hung: Nhu: 7. Ann:

6. You want to knit a hat for your friend. You should watch tutorials on YouTube. (BEFORE) _________________________________________________________________________

Loan: 8. Lam:

7. I was not enjoying the party. I wanted to leave early. (AS)

Nam:

_________________________________________________________________________ 8. I was cleaning out my cupboards. I found these photos. (WHILE) _________________________________________________________________________ 9. I went to Malaysia last year. I wanted to experience a whole new world. (IN ORDER TO) _________________________________________________________________________ 10. I attended a knitting workshop last Sunday. I don’t know how to knit a scarf. (ALTHOUGH) _________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________ My favorite destination is Asia Park. ________________________________________________________________ I often go to Diamond Plaza with my classmates. ________________________________________________________________ The best time to visit Nha Trang is in the summer. ________________________________________________________________ It’s nearly 4km from my house to Tan Son Nhat Airport.

II. Put the dialogue into the correct order.

___ There are various choices that you can consider, such as by bike, by coach or even on cruise. ___ Hmm, I think traveling by coach may be the best choice. By the way, do you have anyrecommendation for local food? 1

I am planning a day out for my family at the end of this month.

___ Ah, I heard about this beach before. How can we travel there? ___ Well, in my opinion, your family can go to Vung Tau for new fresh air.

IX. Complete each sentence with an appropriate preposition.

___ Oh, cool! Do you need any help?

1. This handcrafted cushion reminds me Chinatown.

___ You’re welcome! Have a nice trip!

the wonderful time I spent inBangkok

___ Of course. I still don’t know which place we should visit.

2. Another method, used especially for figures, was to pour the clay 3. Amritsar is famous

a mould.

___ Thank you so much! I think my trip will be great!

its carpet-weaving industry.

4. After playing some team-building games, we gathered and had afternoon tea lawn. 5. Maldives is among the countries relying heavily 6. We took some clay and made it

___ Well, “banh khot” is a must-try... and don’t forget to eat the seafood. I bet its taste will absolutely appeal to you.

the

D. READING

tourism.

I. Fill in the gap with one word from the box.

a vase shape.

7. Saigon Notre Dame Cathedral is considered as a place 8. The scarf, which he wrapped around his neck, was made girlfriend.

interest in HoChi Minh City. wool

threadby

his

I. Write questions for the underlined parts.

Mi: 2. Hoa: Nick: 3. Jane: Linh: 4. Henry: Long:

skillful

handicraft

completely

long-standing

souvenirs

where

set

I’ve just been back from my vacation in Hanoi, Vietnam. In this trip, I had a chance to visit some (1) villages that produce the finest craft works exported over the world. The very first place I (2) foot on was Van Phuc silk village,

C. SPEAKING 1. Jack:

artisans

________________________________________________________________ Cinemas, amusement parks, Nguyen Hue walking street, etc. are the placesof interest in my hometown. ________________________________________________________________ Bau Truc Pottery Village is located in Ninh Thuan Province. ________________________________________________________________ I go to the library every weekend. ________________________________________________________________ People like Nguyen Hue Walking Street because it has an open space plusmany activities that attract them. UNIT 1: LOCAL ENVIRONMENT 9

the cradleof best silk in Vietnam once. I totally fall in love with many colourful clothes, hats, bags, tie... made of authentic silk. Then, I moved on to Bat Trang ceramic village, themost pottery village in Vietnam with a nearly 1,000years famous and (3) old historic development. Here, I visited a small family factory to see how the(4) form, paint and glaze with unique products and have a chance topractice my talent with wet clay and a mould. Afternoon, I continued to visit Dong Hofolk painting village, (5) the traditional woodblock paintings are preserved.I was completely impressed by the folk paintings made by the local (6) artisans with natural materials and colors. Each painting is (7) handmadeon paper of the Dzo tree and is coloured with other natural materials and its glittery surface is finished with oyster shell dust. I took home a lot of handmade (8) friends. 10 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

which were later given to my familyand

II. Read the text and decide whether the following statements are True (T) or False (F).

7. although/ they/ come/ Vietnam/ the first time,/ they/ can/ easy/ get/ local people. _________________________________________________________________________

Symbolic Meaning of Matryoshka

Everyone knows that a Matryoshka is a nesting doll. It is a set of typically seven wooden dolls of decreasing sizes that all fit inside of each other, one by one. Each stacking doll splits in half at the midsection and opens to reveal another smaller doll nested within. Each Matryoshka is handmade, for this reason, it is unique: you cannot find two Matryoshka identical. Matryoshka is made by different dolls. The biggest doll is called “mother”, the smallest one is called seed. Originally, the biggest doll represents a strong female matriarch who is the main symbol of the Russian family. In itself, the doll fits inside little dolls which represent daughters and sons. For this reason, Matryoshka represents fertility and motherhood. The Matryoshka is also the symbol of Russia: the big doll represents Russia mother, and in itself she hosts children, women, men, but also feelings like pain, happiness, joy. It is a mother who can host all these things. Matryoshka can represent also our life: we are like a big doll with other dolls inside which represent our stories, relationships, experiences. We are one person with different experiences. The seed represents our soul which is innocent and it is the real essence of ourselves.

8. government/ be/ face/ pressure/ environmentalists/ at present _________________________________________________________________________ II. Complete the second sentence so that it has the same meaning as the first.

1. I’m really excited about the upcoming pottery workshop. → I’m looking _______________________________________________________________ 2. We invited a pop star to the chat show, but he didn't arrive. → The pop star _______________________________________________________________ 3. He misbehaved in the class so the teacher asked him to go out. → The teacher asked ___________________________________________________________ 4. The artisans carved figures of lions and unicorns on the top of the box. → Figures ___________________________________________________________________ 5. Don't leave the computer on when you leave.

1. Russian doll matryoshka is composed of dolls of different sizes fitting into each other.

→ Turn _____________________________________________________________________

2. It is true that you can find two Matryoshka identical.

6. They wanted to apologize for their behavior: that’s why they paid for dinner.

3. Matryoshka is a symbol of motherhood and fertility of nature.

→ They paid for dinner in order __________________________________________________

4. The biggest doll represents a powerful woman in a family.

7. When I was a child, I usually went to the local park every Saturday afternoon.

5. Matryoshka shows the role of members in a family.

→ When I was a child, I used ____________________________________________________

6. Dolls inside the Matryoshka depict different aspects of human life, such as our stories, relationships and experience.

8. Their teacher is making them study hard.

7. The seed, the smallest doll, represents the purity of childhood and our nature.

→ They _____________________________________________________________________

E. WRITING

TEST FOR UNIT1

I. Write sentences with the cues given.

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

1. Lam Yen Drum village/ stand/ between/ Red River/ Tich River _________________________________________________________________________ 2. waste pollution/ should/ treat/ properly _________________________________________________________________________ 3. life expectancy/ craft village residents/ be/ lower/ rest of Vietnam _________________________________________________________________________ 4. many handicraft villages/ Quang Nam Province/ succeed/ combining/ traditional handicraft/ tourism _________________________________________________________________________ 5. villagers/ learn/ make/ green sticky rice/ when/ they/ be/ very/ young _________________________________________________________________________ 6. craftsmen/ add/ paintings/ Hue poems/ between/ two layers/ leaves/ create/ famous/ poetic/ conical hats _________________________________________________________________________

1. a. pottery

b. product

c. workshop

d. conical

2. a. surface

b. layer

c. frame

d. birthplace

3. a. weather

b. thread

c. together

d.rather

4. a. historical

b. system

c. landscape

d. business

5. a. carved

b. impressed

c. embroidered

d. weaved

II. Choose the word that has the main stress placed differently from the others.

1. a. craftsman

b. attraction

c. museum

2. a. embroider

b. lantern

c. impress

d. desire

3. a. workshop

b. remind

c. outskirts

d. village

4. a. competition

b. generation

c. conical

d. authenticity

5. a. family

b. typical

c. grandparents

d. embroider

III. Choose the underlined word that does not receive stress.

1. We shouldn’t build cable car system in Son Doong Cave. A

UNIT 1: LOCAL ENVIRONMENT 11

12 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

d. department

2. IsBen Thanh Market a place of interestin Ho Chi Mlnh City? A

V. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

1. You can’t really have seen a UFO! You

3. Many internationaltourists are interested in making woven baskets. A

2. Linda was busy when we exam.

4. I picked up apiece of wood and started carving. A

5. Lam and hisfriends often go to the cinema to enjoy the new films. A

c. presence

d. beads

b.on

d.status

sculpture on exhibition. c.in

4. David Ferris’s father was a bank manager living of Preston. a.of

the outskirts ofthe Lancastrian town

c.in

6. doing. a.That

b. when

c.because

can

gainbetter

d.even though

we were waiting, a woman with a phone on her hand asked us what wewere

7. The bus a.hits

b.In order that

c. While c. lays

8. After visiting Van Phuc village, they came a.at

d.Although

uppassengers outside the airport. b.sends b.up

d.picks to their hotel for lunch.

c. down

d. back

9. A: I’ll pick you up at eight o’clock on my way to the airport. B: a.For pleasure

b. Great. I’ll see you then.

c. I have a phone.

d. Would be.

5. Craft village tourism has also proved an visitors, especially foreign tourists. (attract) 6. Mass

d.at we

off the streets. (young)

3. Poem conical hats are believed to come from Tay Ho Village in Hue, which was famousfor hat makers. (skill) 4. Today, Hang Trong paintings are found only in museums or fine angalleries. (authenticity)

d.for

5. All people should join hand in protecting the environment health. a.in order that

2. He started the youth group to keep local

accessible to all.

c.heritage

3. I have ten pictures and eight pieces a.of

(revive) local culture.

(you/ ever/ be) to Bat Trang Ceramic Village?

1. The price of clay, supplies and equipment is a small percentage of the total cost to pottery. (product)

from Nubia.

2. Our aim is to make the performing arts, museums and our b.patriotism

(be) a traditional craft for hundreds of years. (complete) at the end of last month.

VI. Write the correct form of the words in brackets.

1. The museum has a superb collection of ancient

a.love

(close)it down

7. Individuals should be responsible for

b. leather

4. The owner of Hakata Traditional Craft and Design Museum because of dropping profit.

IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

a.artefacts

(preserve)and

6. The building

7. Touristscan’tenter the War Remnants Museum after 10pm.

(study) for an

3. The festival is held by the Hanoi City Department of Tourism develop traditional trade villages in Hanoi.

5. Conical hat making

6. They were walking through Nguyen Hue Avenuewhen an accident happened.

(imagine) things! (go) to see her yesterday. She

receiving

great

attentionfrom

started in 1989 when the first 340 Windsurf guests arrived. (tour)

7. The tribe is concerned with the

of its culture and traditions, (preserve)

8. The second collection was more decorative, inspired by (embroider)

and

9. Vietnamese people have a strong desire to maintain a distinct (culture)

identity.

10. I’d like to thank everyone for helping to make this day

for us. (memory)

VII. Mark the letter A, B, C or D to indicate that underlined part that needs correction in each of the following sentences.

1. As soon as I know, Nga Son mats village has existed for more than 150 years with manyups A B C D and downs. 2. Tho Ha village gate has nice, large and antique architecturemaking by skillful handsof the A B C village’scraftsmen. D

10. A: Would you like to join us on the trip to La Khe Silk Village?

3. Chinese Painting became popularlyaround 581 AD since more and more peoplebegan A B C to appreciate its beauty.

B: a.Sounds great.

b. For now.

c. Better things happened.

d. I don’t think so. UNIT 1: LOCAL ENVIRONMENT 13

pattern.

D 14 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

4. In order that promote the development of the craft village, more support from localauthorities A is needed.

D 5. Careful planning is very important to help craft villages growing and flourish toattract more A B C tourists to the country. D 6. All families in Phuoc Tich village earned their living from making ceramics for the past500 A B C D years. 7. Some of the most excited architecture in Britain can be found in Manchester and the nearby A B C D Salford Quays area. 8. Artisans in the traditional craft village are facing difficulties in seeking markets fortheir A B C product. D VIII. Match a sentence in column A to a response in column B.

A 1. Why are Dong Ho paintings so special? 2. This kind of team-building activity seems to attract a lot of tourists. 3. Do you have any intention to visit Hoi An the second time? 4. Who will you go to the painting workshop with? 5. Hanoi is the birthplace of the conical hat, isn’t it? 6. Yogurt made in Dalat will surprise you. 7. Where can we observe the process of making marble sculptures? 8. Have you ever tried making a handmade keychain?

B a. My friends. b. You can go to Non Nuoc marble village. c. No, I haven’t. Can you show me how to do it? d. No. It’s Hue. e. Absolutely. They should promote it more and more. f. Yes, I do. Next summer I will come back there. g. Wow, I will definitely try it when coming there. h. Because the artisans use special materials to make the paint.

Friday night at 6pm, the road is closed (7) market. The famous Chicken Rice Ball dish (8) start of Jonker Walk near the bridge.

to traffic and turns in a verycrowded night also be found here,just opposite the

1. a. common

b. commonly

c. commony

d. commoned

2. a. history

b. historic

c. historical

d. historically

3. a. both

b. each

c. every

d. very

4. a. in

b. back

c. on

d. for

5. a. lived

b. made

c. did

d. put

6. a. cars

b. handicrafts

c. houses

d. rice

7. a. after

b. in

c. out

d. off

8. a. must

b. should

c. might

d. can

X. Read the text then answer the questions.

HANOI, A CAPITAL OF TRADITIONAL CRAFTS Hanoi has long been home to hundreds of craft villages. Over the years, many of the crafts have developed, while some have disappeared altogether. The heart and soul of Hanoi’s vibrant old crafts are its craftsmen and women. One such coupleare Nguyen Van Hoa and his wife Dang Huong Lan of Ba Dinh District’s Hang Than Street. They are among the few artisans still making elaborate cardboard masks in order to preserve the traditional culture. Although the work itself requires many steps, the materials required are simple: newspapers,glue, paint and paintbrushes. The first step entails tearing the newspapers to pieces and then using glue to combine them into a mold. The masks are painted one color at a time and then laid out to dry. Cardboard mask making is therefore dependent on dry weather and the couple can only make about 2,000 masks per festival. These are priced from VND25.000 to VND35,000 a piece, bringing in VND50-60 million - a sum is not commensurate with the efforts that go into making these elaborate crafts. Making swans out of cotton is also a traditional craft. Only artisan Vu Thi Thanh Tam of 79Hang Luoc Street in the capital makes these swans. The swan frames are made of notebook paper and are stuffed with cotton, then a skillful artisan puts each layer of cotton on the swan frames and uses rice water to smooth them. The swan neck is made of steel wire and is covered by cotton. The finished product is placed in a rattan basket with cotton around and glass-beads and silk flowers are added for color. The continuity of traditional crafts adds to the capital’s attractiveness in the eyes of citizens and international visitors. 1. Who plays role as the heart and soul of Hanoi’s crafts?

IX. Choose the correct answers to completethe passage.

Jalan Hang Jebat, or (1) known as Jonker Walk, is a street in (2) Chinatown of Melaka starting just across the river from the Dutch Square. Jonker Walk is flanked on (3) sides of the road with heritage houses dating (4) to the 17thcentury. At that time, rich Baba Nonyas (also known as Perankans, descendants of 15th - 16th century Chinese immigrants marrying local Malay women) lived and (5) theirbusiness here. Today, the street houses many shops selling antiques, textiles, (6)

and souvenirs

(similar to what youcan find at Central Market in Kuala Lumpur). On the weekends, starting UNIT 1: LOCAL ENVIRONMENT 15

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. Which traditional craft do Mr. Hoa and his wife preserve? _________________________________________________________________________ 3. How many materials are there to make that craft? What are they? _________________________________________________________________________ 4. Which kind of weather does the craft making process depend on? _________________________________________________________________________ 16 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

5. What are the swan frames made of?

6. We went to Dong Xuan Market. We flew back to Ho Chi Mirth City at 7pm.

_________________________________________________________________________ 6. What does the artisan use to smooth the frames?

a. We went to Dong Xuan Market while we flew back to Ho Chi Minh City at 7pm. b. Before we flew back to Ho Chi Minh City at 7pm, we went to Dong Xuan Market.

_________________________________________________________________________ 7. What is added to color the finished product?

c. We went to Dong Xuan Market in order that we flew back to Ho Chi Minh City at 7pm. d. As we went to Dong Xuan Market, we flew back to Ho Chi Minh City at 7pm.

_________________________________________________________________________ XI. Mark the letter a, b, c or d to indicate the sentence that best combines each pair ofsentences.

1. Elizabeth was writing a note to her friend. The train arrived. a. Elizabeth was writing a note to her friend as soon as the train arrived. b. After the train arrived, Elizabeth was writing a note to her friend. c. The train arrived while Elizabeth was writing a note to her friend. d. Elizabeth was writing a note to her friend whenever the train arrived. 2. The water is very cold in January. We go swimming anyway. a. When the water is very cold in January, we go swimming anyway.

7. You need to plan your trip to South America carefully. You don’t spend all your money too quickly. a. You need to plan your trip to America carefully so that you don’t spend all your money too quickly. b. You need to plan your trip to America carefully although you don’t spend all your money too quickly. c. You need to plan your trip to America carefully as you don’t spend all your money too quickly. d. Even though you need to plan your trip to America carefully, you don’t spend all your money too quickly. 8. Richard is very wealthy. He can afford to buy almost anything he wants.

b. As the water is very cold in January, we go swimming anyway.

a. Although Richard is very wealthy, he can afford to buy almost anything he wants.

c. The water is very cold in January if we go swimming anyway.

b. Richard is so wealthy that he can afford to buy almost anything he wants.

d. Although the water is very cold in January, we go swimming anyway.

c. Richard is very wealthy so that he can afford to buy almost anything he wants.

3. The water was very rough. The lifeguards made all of the swimmers leave the water. a. Since the water was very rough, the lifeguards made all of the swimmers leave the water. b. The water was very rough so that the lifeguards made all of the swimmers leave the water. c. The water was very rough because the lifeguards made all of the swimmers leave d. The lifeguards made all of the swimmers leave the water though the water was very rough. 4. Mike goes jogging two miles every morning. Then he gets ready for work.

d. Richard can afford to buy almost anything he wants, but he is very wealthy. XII. Write an email to your friend to give information about a place of interest in your hometown.Use the cue questions below.

What is that place? Where is it located? How can people visit there?

a. Mike goes jogging two miles every morning after he gets ready for work.

Do they need to pay any cost to get in?

b. Mike goes jogging two miles every morning before he gets ready for work.

What can they do at that place?

c. Mike goes jogging two miles every morning as soon as he gets ready for work. d. Mike goes jogging two miles every morning when he gets ready for work. 5. Ticket prices might be more expensive. Going to the movies is still much cheaper than going to a concert. a. Ticket prices might be more expensive then going to the movies is still much cheaper than going to a concert. b. Ticket prices might be more expensive that going to the movies is still much cheaper than going to a concert. c. Going to the movies is still much cheaper than going to a concert since ticket prices might be more expensive. d. Going to the movies is still much cheaper than going to a concert although ticket prices might be more expensive.

UNIT 1: LOCAL ENVIRONMENT 17

18 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

4. the feeling of tiredness and confusion after you fly between

UNIT 2

CITY LIFE

______________

places that have a time difference of several hours. 5. a tower with a powerful flashing light that guides ships away

______________

from danger

A. PHONETICS

6. a fact or situation that influences the result of something

I. Underline the pronouns in bold that sound strong.

7. the situation when there are too many people or things in one place

______________

1. A: He is still playing games.

B:Is he?

8. the spread of a city into the area surrounding it, oftenwithout

______________

2. A: Do you recognize that man?

B:Him? No, I don’t know him.

3. A: Shall I cook the meal?

B:Yes, I think you should.

II. Completes the sentences with words from part I.

4. A: It seems that you don’t like the new mall.

B: I don’t. How about you?

1. The consumer prices

5. A: Who broke the window?

B:He did!

2. Vung Tau’s

6. A: Do you find the food tasty?

B:I do, but he doesn’t.

3. I’m still suffering from

planning hit 1.6 per cent last month. was first built in 1907 on the lower peak of Small Mount. after my trip to Australia.

II. Mark the underlined words as W (weak) or S (strong).

4. Mumbai is attempting to control the fast-growing

1. A: What did she (

5. Price will be a major

) say?

2. A: Listen! She (

) working here?

system.

III. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

1. French bakers are fighting for the traditional baguette to be given UNESCO WorldHeritage .

A: Joseph. B: No. Everyone is gathering here, but he ( some food. 4. A: Shall we ( B: No, you (

) has just gone to the supermarket tobuy

a. conflict

) don’t need to.

b. status b.fight

3. They see the outdoors as a

) would come here.

a. exhausted

) hasn’t appeared!

b.international

4. Savannah is one of the best

) doesn’t smoke or drink!

B: Ah, that’s what she (

a. site

c. admission

2. The government has done nothing to resolve the

) wait here?

) told me she (

B: But she ( 6. A: She (

on the roads.

8. You can explore Kuala Lumpur by making use of the

B: Who?

5. A: She (

7. Investment in the railway network would reduce

) is talking with someone.

B: What? I can’t hear her ( 3. A: Is he (

in the success of this new product.

6. San Marino is the only surviving Italian

B: She ( ) said nothing.

______________

a. part

) told you!

b.whole

d. recognition

over nurses’ pay.

c.crash

d. war

activity, not a job opportunity. c. recreational

d. volunteering

cities for job growth. c.full

d.medium-sized

5. The railway station was criticized for its lack of disabled a. facilities

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR

6. About 85 per cent of city

I. Choose the word from the box and write it next to the correct definition.

a. villagers city-state

overcrowding

urban sprawl

jet lag

factor

lighthouse

metro

index

b.system b. livers

c.schedule

. d. preparation

breathe heavily polluted air. c. dwellers

d. members

7. Dublin was a very different place in those days, like a village, not the wonderful is now.

1. an independent state consisting of a city and the area around it

______________

2. an underground train system

______________

3. a system that shows the level of prices and wages, etc. so that

______________

they can be compared with those of a previous date

a. rural 8. We are a. affording

c. reliable

d. pleasant

a survey to find out what our customers think of their local bus service. b. indicating

9. We are looking for someone who is a. hopeful

UNIT 2: CITY LIFE 19

b. cosmopolitan

city it

b.lacked

20 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

c. considering

d. conducting

and hard-working. c.reliable

d. smooth

10. It is difficult to a. attract

3. He is the tallest boy in his class.

the exact cause of the illness. b.forbid

c.take

→ No one in _________________________________________________________________

d. determine

4. She sings better than anybody else in the class.

11. Sacramento’s central location and low cost of living make this place a _city. a. fabulous

b.forbidden

c.poor

12. How can we encourage people to get along with each other in this a. considerable

b. multicultural

c. rural

13. Some workers can only afford homes outside a. outskirts

b.rural

a. high

society?

6. Mary thinks Melbourne is the most “liveable” city in Australia.

areas.

→ Mary thinks Melbourne ______________________________________________________

d. metropolitan

7. Lifestyle in Malaysia is the same as Thailand.

price.

b.costly

5. Munnar is prettier than most other hill stations in India. → Munnar is _________________________________________________________________

d. crashing

c.growing

14. This is a top-quality product at a very

→ She is ____________________________________________________________________

d. determining

c.affordable

→ Lifestyle in Malaysia is ______________________________________________________

d. effective

IV. Complete the sentences with the suitable form of the adjectives or adverbs in brackets.

8. Beijing is much busier than Ho Chi Minh City.

1. Tokyo is one of

→ Ho Chi Minh City isn’t ______________________________________________________

cities in the world. (liveable)

2. You should go by train, it would be much 3. Universal Studios is by far

. (cheap)

4. The price of electronic devices in Vietnam is not (reasonable) 5. Today is

VII. Complete the sentences with correct form of verbs.

place to visit in Singapore. (good) that

1. People tend inJapan.

6. Your team is much

(learn) English as soon as possible.

4. It took me a whole day

today than last week. (lucky)

9. I ran pretty far yesterday, but I ran even a lot

(play) online games. (travel) to Dalat last week.

5. I can’t see the attraction of

experienced. (little)

8. I didn’t want to wake anybody up, so I came in 10. Singapore is the second

2. My parents advised me 3. Many young people spend the whole day

day I’ve had in a long time. (bad)

7. Of the four participants, Bill is

(think) that the problem will never affect them.

(sit) on a beach all day.

I could. (quietly)

6. A positive aspect of education is that it contributes to identity.

today. (far)

7. I like to listen to the birds

destination in Asia. (popular)

V. Complete the text with the most suitable form of the adjectives in brackets. Add the when necessary.

New York City (NYC) is considered as one of (1) (good) places to livein the world. The city of New York is (2) (densely populated) in the US witha population of about 8.55 million spread over an area of 305 square miles. Although NewYork and San Francisco are probably two of (3) (iconic) cities in America,the former seems to attract more tourists thanks to a wide range of landscapes and activities it offers. In addition, its standard of living is also a strong point. It’s hard tobelieve, but rent is actually (4) (cheap) than other cities. It’s a fun fact thatcity life isn’t just (5) (good), it’s (6) (lengthy): NYC residentslive about two years (7) (long) than the national average. Remarkably, NYChas the (large) Jewish population in the world – a massiveinfluence on the second (8) city’s identity. This is the city that most people surveyed said they would want to visit this year.

(confirm)

one’s

(sing) when I get up early in the morning.

8. The team has tried their best 9. Do the plants need

(perform) in the final round. (water) every day?

10. If you can, please A1Raha Beach Hotel.

(give) me more information about the kids club at

VIII. Use a phrasal verb from the list to replace the words underlined.

went on

go over

got on with

getting over

look forward to

think over

came across

knock down

looked after

turned down

1. She’s never had a good relationship with

her sister.

2. Maria is slowly recovering from

her illness.

3. I found

this article while I was doing my project.

4. Could you examine

this report and correct any mistakes?

VI. Complete the second sentence so that it has the same meaning as the first one.

5. He refused

1. Real Madrid is not as good as Real Zaragoza.

6. She continued

the job because it sounded boring.

→ Real Zaragoza is ____________________________________________________________

7. I need some time to consider

talking about her trip although everyone found it tiring. his proposal.

2. He thinks no language in the world is more difficult than Chinese.

8. My mother says she’s feeling happy and excited about

→ He thinks Chinese is _________________________________________________________

9. The city is going to destroy

the old train station and build a new library.

10. Our neighbour took care of

our cats while we were away.

UNIT 2: CITY LIFE 21

22 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

meeting you.

IX. Choose the correct verb from the box to complete each phrasal verb. Make an changes if necessary.

set

cheer

pull

find

dress

take

turn

get

up their own printing business.

1. Kate and her partner are 2. Many of those old buildings will soon be

down.

3. The weather became so bad that they had to

back.

4. You’d better get dressed and 5. One of the actors was unwell and couldn’t 7. Please

your shoes off before entering the temple.

8. We may never 10. Richard had

B: Seoul is located in the northwest corner of South Korea. B: Seoul was founded as the capital of Korea in 1394. B: The population of Seoul is about 9.8 million.

up on Christmas Eve with Tony.

5. A: _______________________________________________________________________ B: The weather in Seoul is warm and humid in the summer but cold and snowy inthe winter.

living, London is a great place to live. the number of tourists visiting Thailandthese

6. A: _______________________________________________________________________ B: There are 27 bridges across Han River throughout the city. 7. A: _______________________________________________________________________

3. City dwellers are more likely to suffer live in the countryside.

stress and anxiety than peoplewho

4. West Indian culture has had a big influence 6. The historic city Melaka is 122 kilometers 7. West Hampstead has a variety

B: N Seoul Tower is the best attraction in Seoul. 8. A: _______________________________________________________________________

me. the effects ofthe war.

5. It took a long time for the British economy to recover

8. The hotels were packed

2. A: _______________________________________________________________________

4. A: _______________________________________________________________________

X. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition.

2. There has been an increase days.

___ I will visit the airlines websites soon. Anyway, what are the main features of the city?

3. A: _______________________________________________________________________

over the flu.

1. Despite the high cost

___ Great! Thank you so much.

B: The capital of Korea is Seoul.

out the truth about what happened.

9. It’s taken me ages to

___ Hmm, I wonder how we can travel there.

1. A: _______________________________________________________________________

on with the performance.

up in old sheets, pretending to be ghosts.

___ Can you tell me some details about it?

II. Write questions for the underlined parts.

up. The guests are coming any minute.

6. They were

1 __ Have you ever been to Da Nang?

Kuala Lumpur. good shops and supermarkets.

B: K-pop appeals to youngsters because of its unique, quirky costumes, dance moves and catchy songs.

D. READING I. Complete the passage with words from the box.

tourists during high season.

C. SPEAKING

salary

enact

standard

dealt

I. Put the dialogue into the correct order.

material

accommodation

attract

number

___ Of course. What do you want to know? ___ Yes, I have. It’s a very interesting city indeed. ___ What are the attractions in Da Nang? ___ Da Nang attracts a great number of tourists with Marble Mountain, Ba Na Hill, SonTra Peninsula, etc. ___ It has both mountains and beaches. In addition, the city is famous for its DragonBridge, which is the longest bridge in Vietnam. The local food is cheap yet special and tasty. ___ Travelling by plane is the best option. However, you can also go there by coach. ___ Well, I’m worried about financial matters a bit. Is the flight reasonable? ___ Absolutely yes. You should book it in advance to get the best price.

With the socioeconomic development, more and more cities around the world have been(1) with the shortage of housing. These day, there are a large (2) of laborers flooding into city centers to search for suitable jobs with highlevel of (3) . As a result, the demand of the (4) has risen significantlythan ever before because the demands outweigh the supplies. Moreover, most peoplewould like to live in cities because they have a higher (5) of living than thatof the countryside. Obviously, with stable and high income of the employees, they wouldhave a better cultural life as well as (6) life in cities.this social problem, governments should call for investment in thecountryside to To address (7) labor forces. In addition, they also need to put an effort intoraising a great deal of a law money to build more skyscrapers to meet demands of housing and(8) that sets strict conditions to work and to live in cities.

___ You’re welcome. UNIT 2: CITY LIFE 23

24 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

III. Read the text carefully, then choose the correct answers.

E. WRITING

Life in the big city is face-paced, fun and exciting. There are countless job opportunities and activities to occupy your time. However, with the good, there also comes the bad. Although the big city has more job opportunities; there are also more people competing for a single job. This can make your job search frustrating. Oddly enough, you will see hundreds, if not thousands of jobs available each week, but you still might remain unemployed, especially when the economy is down. In addition, the cost of living is typically higher in big cities, and it can cost you an arm and a leg for a small apartment in a decent area of the city, not to mention other costs to fulfill your basic demands. Diversity is a good thing, but the amount of people can be a bit overwhelming if you are not accustomed to it. There will always be crowds and always be people around. Moreover, traffic can be a nightmare in the big city. It can get so bad that it can turn you into an evil person. If you hate driving in traffic, then the big city life is not for you. Heavy traffic also contributes to the pollution, which is one of the biggest disadvantages of living in the city. Obviously, our health is affected most with certain diseases relating to respiratory system and other body parts. A lot of premature deaths are supposed to be the result of longtermexposure to small particles. Most importantly, there is always more crime in a big city, causing you second case your decision for living in a big city. You are much more likely to be a victim of a crime living in a big city than in a small town. 1. According to the passage, some good things of living in the city are

a.excellent educational system and recreational activities

_________________________________________________________________________ 3. I/ never/ read/ such/ romantic story/ this/ before _________________________________________________________________________ 4. she/ spend/ most/ time/ surf/ net/ information/ the next trip _________________________________________________________________________ 5. Van Gogh/ have/ major Influence/ development/ modern painting _________________________________________________________________________ 6. despite/ Brexit,/ London/ remain/ one/ most/ open/ cosmopolitan/ city/ the world _________________________________________________________________________ 7. the house/ that/ we/ rent/ London/ last year / be/ fully/ furnish _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________

c.countless job opportunities and activities to occupy your time

II. Complete the second sentence so that it has the same meaning as the first sentence.

d.a lot of kinds of entertainment and shopping centers

1. I’ve never had to wait this long for a bus before. .

→ This is ___________________________________________________________________

a.more competition for a single job

2. Remember to take note of what the tour guide said.

b.higher salary

→ Remember to put ___________________________________________________________

c.growing economic crisis

3. It took us more than 3 hours to discover the inner Hanoi.

d.greater chances of being unemployed

→ We spent _________________________________________________________________

3. What does the phrase “cost an arm and a leg” mean?

4. No other book is more popular than Dickens’ “David Copperfield”.

a. your legs and arms have good value

b. cost a small amount of money

c. you must work hard to earn money

d. cost a lot of money

4. According to the paragraph, city is not a perfect place for

→ Why don’t you think ________________________________________________________

b. introverted people

c. people who hate driving in traffic

d. people who prefer a busy life when traffic is getting heavy.

a. go crazy

b. get enough time to relax

c. wait a bit longer

d. slow down themselves

→ Dickens’ “David Copperfield” is _______________________________________________ 5. Why don’t you consider our suggestion before making official decision?

a. extroverted people 5. In the big city, people tend to

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. these days/ more/ more/ people/ be/ suffer/ air pollution

8. people/ face/ large/ amount/ environmental problems/ every day

b.excellent educational system and countless job opportunities

2. While big cities have more job opportunities, it also give

I. Write sentences, using the clues given.

1. there/ be/ steady/ increase/ demand/ hotel accommodation/ since 1998

6. Watching TV is not as important as doing homework. → Doing homework ___________________________________________________________ 7. My friend plays piano brilliantly. → My friend is _______________________________________________________________ 8. I find most of the young men of my own age so boring.

6. Which of the following sentences is NOT true?

→ I feel _____________________________________________________________________

a.Pollution causes health problems. b.Cities are always crowded. c.It costs a lot of money to live in a big city. d.Crime is not a serious problem in big cities. UNIT 2: CITY LIFE 25

26 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

6. The street food in Hoi An is delicious and

TEST FOR UNIT 21 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

1. a. childhood

b. champagne

c. chapter

d. charity

2. a. culture

b. popular

c. regular

d. fabulous

3. a. conflict

b. forbidden

c. reliable

d. determine

4. a. lighthouse

b. heritage

c. hotel

d. hour

5. a. conducts

b. returns

c. wanders

d. wonders

II. Choose the word that has the main stress placed differently from the others.

1. a. negative 2. a. access

b. determine

c. forbidden

b. wander

d. attraction

c. conduct

d. asset

3. a. cosmopolitan

b. communication

c. multicultural

d. metropolitan

4. a. acceptable

b. affordable

c. reliable

d. fashionable

5. a. skyscraper

b. populous

c. financial

d. fabulous

III. Underline the pronouns that sound weak.

1. A: They are rich, but they suffer a lot of stress. B: Are they?

3. A: Everyone is preparing for the exam. What about us? Shall we do the same? B: I won’t. But you can do whatever you want.

5. A: Can you help me carry this suitcase?

c. No worries.

a. How old are you?

b. How’s it going?

c. What’s your life?

d- What’s the matter?

9. Life in Ho Chi Minh City is a. far the busier

than we thought at first.

b. the more busier

c. much more busy

10. Of the cities we surveyed, Singapore was a. a bit

b. a lot

B: Let him come in and ask him what he wants.

c. much

d. by far

1. Summer

(really/ not begin) in Rio de Janeiro until late November.

2. What tends housing.

(happen) is that the poorest families end up in theworst (go) on a trip to Pattaya the previous summer. (originally/ design) for the Suez Canal in Egypt

5. Many scientists 6. He

(still/ search) for life in other parts of the universe. (visit) Paris three times this year. (play) in the garden when it suddenly began to rain. (get) dressed, we’ll go to

b. jet lag

4. The town’s most popular

c. confusion

d. recreation

- I’ll do it later. d. in the nick of time

making city life more difficult for its residents.

4. Tower blocks from the 60s and 70s could be

c.to

d. on after Grenfell Tower fire.

c.turned down

d. pulled down

5. The trip to the National Gallery has been until next Friday. c. turned up

d. found out

UNIT 2: CITY LIFE 27

city in Canada. (culture) is the Marine Science Museum. (attract)

5. The Province Of Luxemburg is the largest and least of Belgium. (populate) 6. The illustration shows examples of

a. for the time being b. from time to time c. in any time b.with

custom-made clothing. (afford)

and honest man who would never betray anyone. (rely)

3. Toronto is officially named the most

1. Every time I fly to the United States, I get really bad

b.looked into

d. much busier

the worst rated by its residentsfor culture.

V. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

2. He was a very

IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

b.let down

d. I’d love to.

?” “Everything is fine. How about you?”

1. Hoi An is known as the centre for very

6. A: He wants to talk to you.

a. put off

a. You don’t need to. b. Yes, thanks. 8. “

VI. Write the correct form of the words in brackets.

B: I will.

3. These factors contribute

d. fascinating

I was heading this direction anyway.”

8. As soon as Daddy and Jonathan finish theamusement park.

B: Yes. Will you be there?

a. got down

“

7. The kids

4. A: Will you be at the meeting on Friday?

a. in

c.affordable

4. The Statue of Liberty

B: I think I’ll give him a shirt. What about you?

2. Leave the ironing

b.fabulous

7. “Thanks for giving me a ride to work today.”

3. They told me they

2. A: What are you going to give him?

a. asthma

a. available

dress in the late 1840s. (fashion)

7. The disease spread quickly among the poor slum 8. I often think of the

of the nineprovinces

of the city. (dwell)

time we had all together in Boston last spring. (please)

VII. Mark the letter A, B, C or D to indicate that underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions.

1. Last year, 16% of the EU population (75 million people) suffered with material andsocial A B C deprivation. D

28 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

2. What buildings are being demolish to make way for the development? A

McDonald’s with special Japan-(7)

If you ever have the chance to visit Japan, make sure you stop in Tokyo for (8) a few days.

3. In terms of GDP rankings,New York is the most secondwealthiest city in the world. A

4. Operated between 06:00 and 24:00, KL monorail trains arriveonceevery five minutes A B C during peak traveling hours. D 5. It’s by far more expensive if you hire car fordiscovering Kuala Lumpur. A

6. The spectacular Royal Palace of the Imperial City is one of Hue’s main tourist attraction. A

7. She remained calmly and waitedtill he had finished shouting at her. A

8. Martin was chosen because she is a good administratorwho gets along for everyone. A

VIII. Match a sentence in column A to a response in column B.

A 1. Could you show me how to get to the cinema? 2. What can we do when visiting Ho Chi Minh City? 3. How can people determine which city is worth living? 4. What makes you feel bad about cities? 5. 6. 7. 8.

items foundonly in Japan.

B a. There are a lot of well-known buildings and fashion malls. b. Not bad. I’ve been so busy this week, though. c. Go straight, then turn left. It is opposite the bakery. d. You can visit Ben Thanh Market and join the crowd on Bui Vien Walking Street. Which do you like best about your city? e. Because they have more job opportunities as well as entertainment. Why do most people enjoy living in the f. Two hours. cities? Good evening! How’s it going? g. They conduct a survey with different factors and then give scores for each. How long does it take you to go to the h. It seems to me that every city is center of the city? overcrowded and polluted.

1. a. Found

b. Founded

c. Founding

d. Finded

2. a. metropolitan

b. influence

c. attractive

d. complex

3. a. what

b. which

c. that

d. this

4. a. run

b. show

c. drive

d. roam

5. a. provinces

b. attractions

c. festivals

d. religions

6. a. at

b. in

c. on

d. of

7. a. inspire

b. inspiring

c. inspired

d. inspiration

8. a. at time

b. at all

c. at least

d. at first

X. Read the text then answer the questions.

Toronto is one of the world’s most multicultural cities. Almost half of its population are immigrants. You’ll hear more than 140 languages and dialects spoken on the streets in this “City of Neighborhoods”. It’s the most populous city in Canada (more than 5 million in the Greater Toronto Area) and the province of Ontario’s economic engine. Toronto’s motto is “Diversity Our Strength”. Toronto prides itself on its wide range of cultures, languages, food and arts. Visit Toronto, and one of the first things you’ll notice is that the city’s appeal lies in its citizens’ friendliness: ask for directions, and you’ll be helped. Along with its highly artistic culture and fascinating museums that proudly display the country’s history, it’s clear that a Toronto trip has something for everyone. Although Toronto’s climate is partially moderated by its Great Lakes location, it is more extreme than Bordeaux’s and Christchurch’s, with somewhat hotter summers and considerably colder winters. Summertime in Toronto is festival time. Just about every weekend, and some weekdays, you’ll find one happening. If crowds aren’t your thing, avoid Caribana festival (July 28 through July 31), when the city greets more than one million visitors. 1. Where is Toronto? _________________________________________________________________________ 2. What is the population of the Greater Toronto Area? _________________________________________________________________________ 3. What makes Toronto proud of itself? _________________________________________________________________________ 4. What is one of the first things in Toronto that appeals tourists? _________________________________________________________________________ 5. Which of Toronto proudly displays the country’s history?

IX. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage.

Tokyo is Japan’s capital and largest city. It’s also one of the largest cities in the world.(1) in 1457, Tokyo has grown into a major part of a (2) region that alsoincludes the cities of Yokohama and Kawasaki. The metropolitan region, also knownas Greater Tokyo, has over 30 million residents, (3) makes it one of the largestmetropolitan the world.metropolis. Tourists (4) Tokyo today is aareas very in welcoming about the street, taking in Japanese culture. Hundreds of shrines and temples adorn the city. Shinto andBuddhism are the major (5) of Japan. Tourists can also experience Japanesecuisine. There are Tokyo. You can choose from noodle shops, sushi bars, or even of restaurants (6) UNIT 2: CITY LIFE 29

_________________________________________________________________________ 6. How is the climate in Toronto? _________________________________________________________________________ 7. When is the festival time in Toronto? _________________________________________________________________________ 8. How many visitors does the city greet in Caribana festival? _________________________________________________________________________ 30 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

XI. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence, using the word in capital.

1. This gym is less convenient than the one near my house. (AS)

UNIT 3

TEEN STRESS AND PRESSURE

→ This gym _________________________________________________________________ 2. Mount Everest is higher than any other mountain in the world. (HIGHEST)

A. PHONETICS

→ Mount Everest _____________________________________________________________

I. Look at the verb form of be in bold in each pair of sentences. Tick ( ) Stressed or Unstressed.

3. His writings have influenced modern Christian theology. (BEEN) → Modern Christian theology ___________________________________________________ 4. The group plans to establish an import business. (SET) → The group plans to __________________________________________________________ 5. His father is the most capable man in the office. (MORE) → No other __________________________________________________________________

Stressed Unstressed 1. - Isn’t too late to say sorry? - No, it isn’t. 2. - Was he busy with his schoolwork? - Yes, he was.

6. The product quickly made an impact on the market. (INFLUENCE) → The product quickly _________________________________________________________ 7. Jonah had obviously made an effort to put on smart clothes for the occasion. (UP) → Jonah had obviously made an effort to ___________________________________________

3. - Isn’t fried chicken your favorite food? - Yes, fried chicken is my favorite food, but it can make me fatter and fatter. 4. - Is it your mobile phone?

8. Losing weight is not so easy as putting on weight. (DIFFICULT) → Losing weight______________________________________________________________ XII. Make an outline, then write a short paragraph (100-150 words) to tell about ONE problem that your city is facing. Use the cue questions below.

What is that problem?

- Yes, it is my mobile phone. 5. - Do you think they are on the way here? - They are on the way. Don’t worry. 6. - You aren’t working this weekend?

What causes that problem?

- Iam, but I can’t spend some time meeting you.

How does it affect people’s life? Are there any solutions for that problem? If yes, what are they?

II. Place a mark over the verb form of be that should be stressed in the following sentences.

1. She is interested in Korean films but her husband isn’t. 2. A: Are you reading this book? B: Yes, I am. 3. A: Isn’t it the best way to release stress? B: Yes, it is. 4. A: Do you think he is a great actor? B: He is. But he’s quite reserved. 5. A: Is she confident that she will get the job? B: Yes, she is. She has prepared for the interview very well. 6. A: Will Hoa visit you this summer? B: Yes, she will fly here on her own. A: But she is too young! B: She is. But she can take care of herself.

UNIT 2: CITY LIFE 31

32 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR

Emotion control skills

I. Complete the sentences with the words from the box. There are two words that you do not need to use.

Self-care skills

confident

grateful

frustrated

tense

delighted

IV. Turn the following sentences into reported speech.

calm

worried

appreciated

depressed

relaxed

1. “Our daughter wants to study abroad for a year,” they said. _________________________________________________________________________

1. He gets

when people don’t understand what he’s trying to say.

2. I’m not

about her - she can take care of herself.

3. She was very

_________________________________________________________________________

as she waited for the interview.

4. The teacher wants the children to feel don’t understand.

3. “Yesterday I couldn’t watch my favourite cartoon on Disney Channel,” he said.

about asking questions whenthey

5. Anna got 10 marks for her English test. She felt absolutely result. 6. She’s terribly

aboutthat

whenever he was put into a harsh situation.

8. As soon as I had made the final decision, I felt a lot more

II. Match the beginnings to the correct endings.

A 1. It might be a good idea to resolve 2. Have you ever thought about breaking 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

_________________________________________________________________________ 4. “Is the weather good in Shanghai in the summer?” Jane asked me. _________________________________________________________________________ 5. “What are the skills that you find the most difficult to learn?” she asked me.

about losing her job.

7. He told himself to stay

2. “Have you ever experienced school pressures?” she asked me.

B a. a big risk by going skiing. b. for support from friends when I am under pressure. If I were you, I would try to overcome c. your budget to have enough money for the things you need. I don’t think you should take d. serious conflicts between neighbors. If I were you, I would ask e. a healthy habit of doing exercises regularly? Have you ever thought of developing f. informed decisions about their occupational goals. You should manage g. stress by maintaining a healthy lifestyle and staying healthy. It might help to give students advice so h. the habit of staying up late for better they can make more concentration?

_________________________________________________________________________ 6. “Would you bring me a cup of coffee, please?” she told me. _________________________________________________________________________ 7. “I’ll come and help you on Saturday,” Joana told me. _________________________________________________________________________ 8. “When will you come back home?” my mom asked me. _________________________________________________________________________ 9. “Do you need any help on this assignment?” the teacher asked me. _________________________________________________________________________ 10. “My friend got engaged to a German last month,” Danny told Ann. _________________________________________________________________________ V. Complete the sentences with correct tense of verbs.

1. The interviewer asked me what I

(can) do if I were offered the job.

2. Mandy asked me if the boys

(read) the book at present.

3. The manager told me that I month.

(travel) from place to place thefollowing

III. Put the skills in their category.

4. They said they

stay calm with others, feel sympathy for others, follow directions or rules, cope with loneliness, comprehend reading materials, determine the problems you’re facing, listen to others, go to sleep early, clean your room, fix the light bulb, ask for help, take out the trash, be grateful, determine the symptom of common diseases, use appropriate words in certain circumstances, drink enough water

5. Jason and Victoria told me they 6. Iday. wondered why Nick

(not go) to New York the summer before.

7. John told me that there

(may) not be dessert after dinner.

8. She asked me if everyone situations.

(must) contact the Magic Number inemergency

Social skills

9. My mom said she

Cognitive skills

10. Shannon said that she

(never/ be) to Scotland until last year. (do) their best in the exams thefollowing

(be) going to visit a friend of hers in London. (need) to take care of her baby.

Housekeeping skills VI. Complete the sentences with suitable question words. UNIT 3: TEEN STRESS AND PRESSURE 33

34 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

1. He doesn’t know 2. Be sure

to ask for advice about this situation. to eat when you arrive in Vietnam.

3. They are going to tell me

to do to survive in a storm.

4. I asked Jane to show me

to deal with bullying at school.

5. He wondered 6. The rules didn’t specify 7. You need to find out 8. I don’t know 9. I had no idea 10. Tell me

to start revising for the final exam. to speak to in case of an emergency. to overcome stress and worry.

An asked Mary _____________________________________________________________ 4. “How should we find a support center for the homeless?” James and Lily couldn’t tell ___________________________________________________ 5. “When should we start our campaign?” They had no idea ___________________________________________________________ 6. “Mom, who should I call upon arriving at the airport?” Trang asked her mother ______________________________________________________ 7. “Should I dial 18001567 to ask for advice about family problems?"

to turn for help. to write my home paper about.

Phong was not sure _________________________________________________________ 8. “What should we do to help those disadvantaged children?”

to press the button.

VII. Rewrite the following sentences using question words before to-infinitives.

They wondered_____________________________________________________________ 9. “When should I start teaching my children to cook?”

1. I don’t know where I should visit this summer vacation. _________________________________________________________________________

She couldn’t decide _________________________________________________________ 10. “How should I deal with negative emotions and stress?”

2. Could you tell me who I should ask for advice? _________________________________________________________________________ 3. She wondered what she should write in the final essay.

Hoa asked Nam ____________________________________________________________ IX. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition.

_________________________________________________________________________ 4. I have no idea who I should contact in case of emergency. _________________________________________________________________________ 5. They can’t decide when they leave for America. _________________________________________________________________________ 6. I’m not sure what I should cook for my son’s birthday party. _________________________________________________________________________ 7. Could you tell me where I should put my umbrella?

1. He felt that they were making fun 2. He wasn’t able to cope

him, though he could not understand why. the stresses and strains of the job.

3. We have to improve and increase mass participation

what is accepted.

5. My parents never put any pressure

me to get a job.

6. You can dial 114 in case of fire

dealing area codes.

7. She gave up German in order to concentrate 8. Parents need to continue to empathize

_________________________________________________________________________ 8. He asked himself what he should send her as a present. _________________________________________________________________________ 9. I have no idea when I should leave for Japan. _________________________________________________________________________ 10. She wondered how she should resolve the conflict. _________________________________________________________________________ VIII. Rewrite the following questions in reported speech, using question words before toinfinitives.

1. “What should we do to help her overcome stress?” They didn’t know ___________________________________________________________ 2. “Should I discuss this matter with my teammates?”

sports.

4. This goes beyond the boundaries

her French. the child.

C. SPEAKING I. Complete the conversation with the sentences from the box. Write the letters of the sentences.

A. Are you worried about the upcoming exam? B. Well, have you thought of solving this problem? C. So, what makes you stressed out? D. It will. After starting the conversation, remember to apologize her for the argument and present your ideas once more time with calmness if you want. E. What’s wrong with you? E. Seriously? G. If I were you, I would smile at her, then choose a common topic to talk about.

Jonas wondered ____________________________________________________________ Mom: (1)____________________________________________________________________ 3. “Where should I register for a course on life skills?” UNIT 3: TEEN STRESS AND PRESSURE 35

36 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

Hoa:

I’m not sure but I think I am stressed.

When you have a job, leadership and presentation skills may be useful, along with a whole host of other skills.

There will be times throughout your life when you’ll need (5) stress management and problem solving skills too.

Mom: (2)____________________________________________________________________ Hoa:

No, I’m not. I have prepared for it, so I can tackle it easily.

Mom: (3)____________________________________________________________________

resolution,

Hoa: Yes. We discussed how to set up a camp for our group and we couldn’t agreeon any plans. Mom: (5)____________________________________________________________________

However, perhaps the (6) important life skill is the ability and willingnessto learn. By learning new skills we increase our understanding of the world around us and equip ourselves with the tools we need to live a more productive and fulfilling life, findingways to cope (7) the challenges that life, inevitably, throws at us. Life skillsare not always taught directly but often learned indirectly (8) experienceand practice.

Hoa:

II. Read the text carefully. Then do the tasks.

Hoa:

Well, I argued with my best friend yesterday.

Mom: (4)____________________________________________________________________

Yes, I have. However, I don’t know how to start a conversation with her.

Mom: (6)____________________________________________________________________ Hoa:

Will it work?

Mom: (7)____________________________________________________________________ Hoa:

Oh, great! Thank you, mom! I will try.

II. Put the dialogue into the correct order.

___ United States I think, but I’m so worried about myself. 1 __ I’m planning to study abroad next year. ___ What are you worried about? ___ Oh dear. It may cause you a lot of problems then. I think you should prepare for yourtrip from now. ___ I mean, I don’t know how to cook, study by myself or manage my budget. ___ What should I do? ___ What else can I do? ___ What do you mean? ___ I think you should share your thoughts with your parents when you are tense.They can give you some useful advice. ___ Right. Thank you very much! ___ I don’t think I have enough skills to live far away from my family. ___ You can register for a soft skill course at the Youth Cultural House , KDI or Vietskills,etc. After that, try to practice as much as possible.

D. READING

less

most

through

Although teens may have a solid group of friends, their peers may pressure them to hang out instead of studying or experiment with drugs, alcohol or sexual activities that go against their morals or family rules. Peer pressure, bullying on campus and harassment may distract teens from studying, leading them to feel additional stress and anxiety.

When at school or university, you’ll need (4)

Teenagers can also feel stress at home because of family pressures and problems. Arguments with siblings, disagreements with parents over rules and expectations and the need to consistently care for younger siblings may also contribute to teen stress. Sense of Loss Teens may also feel stress and anxiety when experiencing a sense of loss. “Loss” can mean the end of a relationship, friendship or cherished extracurricular activity. Breaking up with a boyfriend or best friend, for example, may lead them to doubt their self-worth or feel anxious about attending school or social functions because of their change in social status. A. Decide whether the following sentences are true (T) or false (F). 2. Youngsters can’t be stressed if they do well in their classes.

ambitions

with

studying

The term “Life Skills” (1) to the skills you need to make the most outof life. Life skills are usually associated with managing and living a better quality of life.They help us to accomplish our (2) and live to our full potential. Any skillthat is useful in your life can be considered a life skill. Different life skills will be more or(3) relevant at different times in your life, for example:

Teenagers often feel stressed about academic and extracurricular demands. Students feel pressure to complete daily homework, finish projects and study for exams. In addition to the quest for good grades, teens may also participate in extracurricular activities, such as sports, student council, cheerleading and clubs. The added pastimesmay contribute to teenage stress and anxiety if the activities arc competitive and require scheduling that cuts into study and relaxation time. Peer Pressure

1. Stress is a problem of both adults and young people.

I. Complete the passage with words from the box.

refers

School Pressure

Family Problems

___ Cool! Which country will you set foot on?

conflict

Stress isn’t just a problem for adults. Young people, however, are also suffering from stress with different causes. Below are some factors that contribute to those youngsters’ unhealthy levels of stress.

skills. UNIT 3: TEEN STRESS AND PRESSURE 37

3. Peer pressure can make teens unable to concentrate on studying. 4. The family is always the best place, so it doesn’t cause stress for teenagers. 5. Some problems in the social relationship can lead teens to doubt or anxiety. B. Answer the questions. 6. What can the added pastimes cause to teens? _________________________________________________________________________ 7. What can distract teens from studying? 38 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

_________________________________________________________________________ 8. What are family problems that put teens under pressure?

→ She wondered ______________________________________________________________ 7. I’m not sure what I should do to help her overcome her mom’s death.

_________________________________________________________________________ 9. What can “loss” mean?

→ I’m not sure _______________________________________________________________ 8. “I am going to work for a new company next week,” John said.

_________________________________________________________________________

→ John said _________________________________________________________________

10. Why can teens doubt their self-worth after a broken relationship? _________________________________________________________________________

E. WRITING

TEST FOR UNIT 3 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

I. Write sentences, using the clues given.

1. a. treasure

b. pleasure

c. ensure

1. it/ be/ important/ keep/ calm/ emergency.

2. a. daughter

b. author

c. laundry

d. sausage

3. a. dials

b. calls

c. says

d. plays

4. a. education

b. graduate

c. individual

d. confident

5. a. embarrassed

b. awareness

c. abandoned

d. captain

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. the schools/ nationwide/ experience/ teacher shortages/ at present. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. he/ said/ he/ send/ us/ postcard/ following day.

II. Choose the wordthat has the main stressplaced differently from the others.

_________________________________________________________________________ 4. Jane/ find/ it/ easy/ empathize/ characters/ the books. _________________________________________________________________________ 5. they/ cannot/ make/ final decision/ where/ visit/ Malaysia. _________________________________________________________________________ 6. if/ I/ be/ you, I/ call/ the helpline/ help.

1. a. frustrated

b. confident

c. delighted

d. embarrassed

2. a. assure

b. pressure

c. figure

d. leisure

3. a. concentration

b. favorable

c. adolescence

d. relaxation

4. a. recognize

b. concentrate

c. assignment

d. cognitive

5. a. teenager

b. vehicle

c. activate

d. nationwide

III. Underline the verb forms of be which should be stressed in the following sentences.

_________________________________________________________________________ 7. after/ live/ France/ a year, I/ feel/ much/ more/ confident/ my French. _________________________________________________________________________ 8. she/ wondered/ whether/ tell/ her/ best friend/ what/ she/ think. _________________________________________________________________________ II Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence.

1. - Isn’t he your best friend? -Yes, he is. 2. - Oh my God! We are late for the wedding. -Actually, we aren’t. The card says it begins at 7pm. It’s just 6.30 now. 3. - You aren’t happy about your test? - I am happy! But I don’t want to be overexcited.

1. “Where did you meet him?” Jimmy asked.

4. Who are they?

→ Jimmy asked_______________________________________________________________

5. - Where are you? You aren’t in front of the cinema.

d. measure

“When should I register for the new course on Chinese?” Jim asked his teacher.

→ Jim asked his teacher ________________________________________________________ 3. Joana couldn’t decide when she should start her journey.

- I am in front of the cinema, but I can’t see you. 6. - Are you going out now? -Yes, I am. Can you wait for me for a while?

→ Joana couldn’t decide ________________________________________________________

IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

4. “You must stay in bed until next Monday!” the doctor said.

1. Did you forget your purse

→ The doctor said _____________________________________________________________ 5. I have no idea who I should call for help in this situation. → I have no idea ______________________________________________________________ 6. “Should I tell her the truth about her misery?” she asked herself. UNIT 3: TEEN STRESS AND PRESSURE 39

a.on

b. of

purpose so you wouldn’t have to pay? c. in

2. He was sentenced to ten years in prison on charges of drug a.charging

b.stealing

c.trafficking

d. for . d.trading

3. In recent years, there has been thousands of victims of sexual and physical 40 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

a.sentence

b.crime

c.abuse

4. Harrison’s greatest attribute is his ability to work a.within

b.under

d.conduct

10. Her networking and hosted. (organize)

d. on

VII. Mark the letter A, B, C or D to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following sentences.

pressure.

c.in

5. My parents always criticize me for not getting good grades at school. I wish they put themselves in my . a.pants

b.legs

6. He wondered

b.how

c.what

b.sent

c.took

3. Sarah wondered if to attend the life skills workshop that weekend. A

d.gained

4. Robert told me that his father had flownto Dallas last year. A

a.She told me I come to her party.

b. She told me to come her party.

c. She told me I had to come to her party.

d. She told me I came to her party.

5. He always feelsleft off when his friends talk about sports. A

9. “My life’s got stuck these days. I am so depressed and unable to think of anything.”

6. For more information, call our free-tollnumber and speak to acustomer servicerepresentative.

”

a. You will be tired. c. Stay calm. Everything will be alright. a.Well done!

b. Stay stuck there,

b. Thank you!

”

c. Never mind!

1. She asked him where he 3. His doctor advised him

(not take) any strenuous exercise.

4. He asked me what I

(want) to eat that night.

5. I am driving John to the airport tomorrow. His own car

(repair).

(take) the book back to the library for me? (think) for themselves.

(work) as a research and development chemist for 10 years, thenhe retired.

VI. Write the correct form of the words in brackets.

1. Nowadays young people want to leave home as soon as they reach 2. A good night’s sleep will improve your 3. Teens should learn to be

. (adult)

. (concentrate) when making a presentation. (confidence)

4. Going away to college has made me much more 5. A lot of people eat too much when they’re 6. I have a bad habit of taking on more 7. Students have spoken of their growing administrators.(frustrate)

B A

(spend) his money so far.

7. The new teaching methods encourage children

VIII. Match a sentence in column A to a response in column B.

(ask) me the same question three times since yesterday.

6. Would you mind

8. Joan made the laundry, washing up, and housework holding her with one arm.

d. Let’s go!

V. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

2. She

7. He asked his father where to cope with negative emotions.

d. No, thanks.

10. “Mom, I’ve got the first rank in class this semester!” “

8. He

d.which

8. “You must come to my party,” she told me.

“

2. They said the support service will be set up the next month.

a bachelor’s degree in computer information systems in 1951.

a.forced

1. At the moment, aidagencies are focusing their efforts of women and children.

d. shoes

to tell the news to his parents.

a.why 7. He

c.hands

skills came in handy for a charity boxing eventshe

. (depend) . (depress) than I can handle. (responsible) with

school

8. Ann suffered from depression and a number of other

problems. (emotion)

9. Have you thought of talking to a marriage guidance

? (counsel) UNIT 3: TEEN STRESS AND PRESSURE 41

A B 1. What should I do if I were bulliedat a. Hmm, I think you should smile with school? them at first and say something fun to attract their attention. 2. I am so depressed about the upcoming b. Because they have enough knowledge to exam. If you were me, what would you give us the most suitable advice. do? c. My best friend. She understands me 3. How long have you been sleepless? much more than anyone else in this world. 4. Could you give me some advice about d. You should tell your teacher about the how to make new friends? situation. 5. Why do we need to talk to the counselor? e. This Sunday at 3pm. 6. How do you feel now? f. For a week. 7. Who do you share with when you’re g. If I were you, I would share my feelings depressed? with my mom. 8. When will you attend the conference on h. Very terrible. I don’t know how to human rights? overcome it. IX. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. When we feel anxious, we often give ourselves negative messages like: “I can’t do this”, “I’m useless” and “I’m going to fail”. to replace these with positive thoughts such as: ‘this is just It can be difficult but (1) anxiety, it can’t harm me’ and, ‘relax, concentrate - it’s going to be okay’. 42 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

Picturing how you’d like things to go can help you feel more (2) . Try to imagineyourself (3) up to an exam feeling confident and relaxed. You turn over your paper,write down what you do know and come away knowing you tried your best on the day. grades you get. There It can sometimes feel like your whole future depends on (4) can be a lot of pressure (5) young people to do well in exams which cancause a lot of stress and anxiety. You might have (6) certain grades or put into ahigher set, and feel if you don’t get the grade you’ll let your teachers or parents (7) . Remember, exams are important – but they’re not the only way to a successful future. Lots of people (8) success in life without doing well in school exams.

b.Not to put much pressure on time management. c. Follow the timetable strictly. d. Go outside for fresh air, do regular exercises and drink more water. 4. Why is organization important in academic life? a.Because it can help students get good grades. b.Because it is a must for all students. c.Because it can help students reduce stress. d.Because it leads to better results.

1. a. afford

b. allow

c. let

d. try

2. a. positive

b. negative

c. tense

d. stressful

a.You should stay alone when being under pressure.

3. a. to turn

b. turning

c. turn

d. turned

b.When you feel lonely, you should grab someone to talk.

4. a. why

b. when

c. what

d. how

c.The more lonely you are, the more stress you can have.

5. a. about

b. with

c. on

d. for

6. a. been predict

b. predicted

c. be predicted

d. been predicted

7. a. down

b. up

c. on

d. off

a.Take time for reflection on your progress.

8. a. take

b. achieve

c.go

d.seek

b.Ease your soul and your mind.

5. Which of the following sentences is true?

d.It is believed that stress can control itself. 6. What should you do when you are feeling stressed?

X. Read the text then choose the correct answers.

c.Stay away from other people.

Practical stress management can help students deal with their worries and become more productive, competent and efficient. First of all, students must be able to design and stick to a timetable. Choose a relaxing break between work and study, even if it’s just taking out time to breathe. In addition, a healthy lifestyle is essential for students. Let’s drink more water as well as take out time to get some air and exercise. Furthermore, organization is very important in academic life for dealing with stress. By keeping academic notes organized, turning in assignments on time, and keeping track of all deadlines, stress can be reduced to a great extent. Stress can also get worse if a person feels lonely. Therefore, by letting out all your thoughts to someone you trust, you immediately feel a lot better. However, if you feel extremely stressed out, take a break and do something you love. Whether it is painting or listening to music, doing something you enjoy can cheer up your mood and distract you from a stressor. It’s about time that we students accept that we can achieve just as much in life without all the stress.

d.Take a break and do what you enjoy.

1. Practical stress management can help students

XI. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence, using the word in capital.

1. He said he wouldn’t have enough time to finish the job. (WILL) _________________________________________________________________________ 2. When did your friends eat that chocolate cake? (WAS) _________________________________________________________________________ 3. “What are the skills you concern most?” my teacher asked. (I) _________________________________________________________________________ 4. I have never read such as interesting novel as The Little Prince. (MOST) _________________________________________________________________________

a.deal with stress

b. have more time

c. face up to the worst situation

d. think critically

2. What should students pay attention to when designing a timetable? a.They have to arrange time to breathe.

5. Finish your homework or you can’t go out with your friend. (IF) _________________________________________________________________________ 6. They’re not sure how they should operate the new system. (TO) _________________________________________________________________________

b.They need to set time for relaxation.

7. It took me 4 hours to read the first chapter of the book. (SPENT)

c.They don’t need to take notice of certain tasks.

_________________________________________________________________________

d.They should stop working and studying.

8. Snowboarding is more dangerous than tennis. (AS) _________________________________________________________________________

3. What can students do to lead a healthy lifestyle?

XII. Read the following tips for time management and rewrite them in form of advice. Use the phrases for giving advice you have learnt.

a.Visit their doctor as scheduled. UNIT 3: TEEN STRESS AND PRESSURE 43

44 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

Examples: Encourage the group to reach their goals

TEST YOURSELF 1

→I think you should encourage the group to reach their goals. 1. Set goal

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

_________________________________________________________________________ 2. Keep a to-do list _________________________________________________________________________ 3. Prioritize your tasks _________________________________________________________________________ 4. Avoid distractions and interactions to your work

1. a. concentration

b. question

c. attraction

d. emotion

2. a. exist

b. exchange

c. extreme

d. expect

3. a. recognize

b. opinion

c. adolescence

d. conflict

4. a. urban

b. craft

c. organize

d. Canada

5. a. artisan

b. handicraft

c. machine

d. heritage

II. Choose the word that has the main stress placed differently from the others.

_________________________________________________________________________ 5. Learn how to take a positive attitude towards frustration and failure _________________________________________________________________________ 6. Organize your work to meet deadline _________________________________________________________________________ 7. Review your progress

1. a. encourage

b. volunteer

c. overcome

2. a. informed

b. worried

c. relaxed

d. understand d. depressed

3. a. recognition

b. affordable

c. independent

d. adolescence

4. a. artisan

b. frustration

c. emotion

d. forbidden

5. a. recreational

b. university

c. individual

d. communicator

III. Underline the bold words that should be stressed in the following sentences.

_________________________________________________________________________

1. What can Ido to control my anger? 2. A: Aren’t you writing the application letter? B: Yes, I am. 3. A: Can you come to my home and give me a lift? B: OK, wait for me. 4. You should discuss with your classmate during the lesson. 5. A: Are they working on the project? B: She is, but he isn’t. 6. A: Who sent you this email ? B: She did. 7. The air is cleanerin the countryside. 8. A: My father is always a mystery to me. B: Is he? Mine is a good friend of mine. IV. Complete the sentences with the words from the box.

lacquerware abandoned sprawl

metropolitan

multicultural embarrassed

emergency

1. The charity’s work involves finding foster homes for 2. We try to teach the children self-reliance and 3. During

self-discipline

adolescence lanterns children. .

, boys are sometimes very shy and lacking of self-confidence.

4. The chair broke when Tim sat on it – he was pretty

5. The services in this area simply couldn’t cope if there were a majoraccident or terrorist attack. UNIT 3: TEEN STRESS AND PRESSURE 45

46 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

6. Urban population.

is caused in part by the need to accommodate a risingurban

8. Vietnamese believe that hanging a couple of bring the warmth and happiness to the family.

8. Parents need to continue to

in front of theirhouses will

9. Duck eggshell is especially applied in Vietnamese

areas by household income.

V. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

1. Studies show that having good conflict outcomes. a. resolutional

skills is associated with various positive

b.resolving

c.resolve

2. For most of us, however, positive thinking and a. self-awareness

b.self-abuse

c.self-access

3. He asked her to marry him but she a. carry him out

d.self-analysis

b.turned him down

c. took him out

d. let him in

living in Singapore is higher than any countries in South East Asia.

a. for

b.on

c.of

a. the day before 16. Jane said that she a. can

b.this day

c.today

a. most warmer

d. that day

come and look after the children the following day. b.will

7. The weather was

c.could

d. should

c.more warmer

d. much warmer

all our efforts to save the school, the authorities decided to close it. a. Since

b.Despite

c.Although

9. He still doesn’t know a. when to manage

c. where to manage

(get) my pre-paid train ticket. (feel) hurt by what I had said.

6. She said she

(write) three books and she was working on another one.

7. She was made weekends.

(work) on Saturday, even though she hatedworking at (find) her address, I would send her an invitation.

9. Japanese (become) one of the most popular courses at the universitysince the Asian studies program was established. (rain).

10. Look at those black clouds. I think it

VIII. Mark the letter a, b, c or d to indicate that underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions.

2. They’d pulled the registry office out, which then left an open space. A

3. A lot of modern art is showing at the exhibition whichlasts until next Monday. A

4. The new manager wondered if to adopt a new technology from their partner in the UK. A

. It’s always so busy.”

VI. Write the correct form of the words in brackets.

5. If you have a lot of informationabout the different universities you can make a more A B C informative decision. D

1. Many people enjoy the pleasures and

6. Based on computer statistics, what is the less greatest profession in the world?

a. I couldn’t agree with you more.

b. I like it.

c. I don’t like it.

d. No, it’s not that.

2. Cigarette smoking is 3. He went on to work in film

of living in a city center. (convenient)

for about 90% of deaths from lung cancer, (respond) and shared a flat with his father. (produce)

4. John changed from a friendly and cheerful young boy into a confused .(adolescence) 5. The weather was

the

5. Dana admitted

d. what to manage

10. A: “I really don’t like shopping around the holidays.” B: “

(sing)in

(you/ travel) to Paris tomorrow?

d. Because

his budget when living alone in the city. b. how to manage

(must) learn to love each other.

1. By mistake the candidate wrote all her answerson pencil despite the instructions.

in England than in Spain last week. b.by far warmer

1. He told them again that they

2. When I woke up this morning, it was raining and my father kitchen.

8. If I

d. in

5. I met James in a restaurant on Friday and he said that he had seen Caroline there

VII. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

can be learned.

society.

difficulties after her parents had passed away. (finance)

3. I wondered where

d. resolution

. (graduate)

with the child. (empathy)

9. During the 19th century, Britain became the world’s first modern (urban) 10. She got into

10. San Francisco tops the list of the 25 largest

to youngsters. (attract)

7. She managed to find a job immediately after

7. Singapore’s mix of cultures – mostly Chinese, Indian, and Malay – makes it a society.

4. The cost

6. Schools must try to make science more

, so we arrived earlier than expected. (favor)

TEST YOURSELF 1 47

7. Despite they said construction was completed, there were builders working on thehotelwhen A B C D we arrived.

48 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

8. Do you think the Harry Potter films are by far better than the books? A

XI. Read the text carefully then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F) and choose the correct answers.

9. She said that she doesn’t want to see any of them and asked them to go away. A

10. Tom managed to convince Mary tomake the laundry for him. A

B C

IX. Match sentences.

A 1. What is the function of the Magic Number? 2. I wonder whether to encourage him to follow his dream. 3. Was she delighted to take a course on medicine as her parents wished? 4. Artisans have to follow 15 stages to make a conical hat, don’t they? 5. Shall we try making a lantern when visiting Hoi An? 6. Sherry, getting over the jet lag?

B a. That’s cool. b. We can use public transportation instead of cars or motorbikes. c. I had an appointment with my doctor.I suffered from stomachache those days. d. I think you should do it. e. No, she wasn’t.

f. It is a service for counseling and protecting children and young adults in Vietnam. g. Yes, I slept like a log right after arriving 7. Why did you turn down his invitation to home. the party? h. Yes, they do. 8. How can we reduce the pollution in urban area? X. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. Living in a city has a (1) of drawbacks. Firstly, there is the problem of traffic(2) and traffic accidents. The increase (3) population and the increasingnumber of vehicles have (4) many accidents to happen every day. Secondly, airpollution (5) affects people’s health, and is also has a bad (6) on theenvironment. More and more city dwellers suffer from coughing or breathing problems. Thirdly, the city is noisy, even at night. (7) pollution comes from the traffic andfrom construction sites. Buildings are always being knocked down and rebuilt. These factors contribute to making city life (8) difficult for its residents.

Spending your free time on the Internet can be fun. You can chat, share photos with friends, and play online games. But some people are addicted to the Internet. They just can’t turn it off. Being online for many hours at a time does not mean you have a problem. The Internet is very useful. Online, you can pay your bills, buy clothes, and read the news. There are many good reasons to spend time online. However, people with an Internet addiction are online too much. They don’t spend time with their friends and family. Instead, they spend their time chatting with their Internet friends, people they have never met in real life. Some also play online games all day or night. Some people with Internet addictions even leave their jobs so they can spend even more time online! People with Internet addictions don’t just go online to shop, have fun, or do work. People who have this problem often go online because they want to escape the stress and problems in their lives. Many internet addicts stop caring about their real lives, and focus only on their online lives. One way Internet addicts can get help is by using special software. This software controls how much time someone can spend online. It tells the computer to turn off the internet after a certain amount time. This helps people focus on real life. The software’s goal is to teach people to use the Internet for good reasons and not just as an escape. 1. People with Internet addiction spend most of their free time on the Internet. 2. Paying bills online is a useful way to use the Internet. 3. Internet addiction causes problems in one’s daily life. 4. Most Internet addicts play online games all day or night. 5. Using special software is a way of helping people stop their Internet addiction. 6. What is the main idea of the article? a.People should not spend time on the Internet. b.The Internet is very good for people. c.Spending too much time online is not good. d.Families should use the Internet together. 7. Which is NOT a problem for people with Internet addiction? a.They stop spending time with their family. b.They learn to type very fast. c.They might lose their jobs.

1. a. amount

b.large

c. number

d. quantity

2. a. calm

b. jams

c. light

d. legacy

3. a. with

b. on

c. for

d. in

a. their life is stressful and has problems

b. their job is boring

4. a. caused

b. made

c. done

d. got

c. they enjoy online gaming

d. they have a lot of online friends

5. a. actively

b. negatively

c. positively

d. weakly

XII. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence.

6. a. pressure

b. consequence

c. influence

d. result

1. The wounded persons were taken to hospital by the police.

7. a. Noise

b. Air

c. Water

d. Soil

→ The police ________________________________________________________________

8. a. mostly

b. very

c. much

d. more

2. “Don’t leave your luggage unattended.”

d.They stop caring about their real lives. 8. According to the passage, a person is most likely to become an Internet addict if

→ He asked me _______________________________________________________________ TEST YOURSELF 1 49

50 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

3. The salary of a professor is higher than that of a secretary. → The salary of a secretary is ____________________________________________________

UNIT 4

LIFE IN THE PAST

4. He felt very miserable, so he looked for someone to share his life with. → He looked _________________________________________________________________ 5. I didn’t realize how late it was and I didn’t stop studying till after midnight.

A. PHONETICS

→ I didn’t realize how late it was and I went ________________________________________

I. Underline an auxiliary if it is stressed.

6. When did you start working on the project?

1. I have told you many times not to play video games that much.

→ How long _________________________________________________________________

2. We hope you don’t have an accident on your way to school.

7. I am leaving now so that I won’t be late for work.

3. A: Why aren’t you going to the party?

→ I am leaving now in _________________________________________________________

B: I can’t go to this one, but I am going to the one next week. 4. A: You said you would phone me!

8. New York City is the busier than any other city in the world. → New York City ____________________________________________________________

B: I did phone you! But you didn’t answer. 5. A: Mark doesn’t eat meat, does he?

9. Dina is like her mother’s side of the family. → Dina takes ________________________________________________________________

B: Actually, he does nowadays. 6. A: You’re not telling the truth, are you?

10. “How long have you been standing here?” he asked me. → He asked me _______________________________________________________________

B: Yes, I am. II. Circle the underlined auxiliary verbs if they are stressed.

1. A: Do you love me? B: I do love you. 2. I haven’t bought any potatoes, but I have bought some pasta. 3. I won’t call him unless he apologizes me first. 4. A: Did you phone Jack? B: Yes, I did phone Jack. 5. A: You haven’t tidied your room! B: I have tidied it! I did it this morning. 6. I didn’t have a good time at the cinema, but I did enjoy the restaurant.

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Complete the sentences with the words from the box.

illiterate

Igloo

Arctic

loudspeaker

worthwhile

strict

barefoot

dogsled

1. The voice over the

said the flight was delayed.

2. The Stuarts are very

with their children.

3. Programs like this one get kids involved in

activities.

4. The Eskimos cut the ice into squares, and they use these to build the 5. The

teams have to travel about 1,600 kilometers, from Anchorageto Nome.

6. We took off our shoes and socks and walked 7. Being 8. The TEST YOURSELF 1 51

along the beach.

, my grandfather signed the document with an ‘X’. is a polar region located at the northernmost part of Earth.

52 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

2. I/ not have to/ go/ school.

II. Underline the correct word to complete the sentence.

I wish ____________________________________________________________________

1. He followed the family habit/practice/ tradition and became a doctor.

3. I/ go camping/ friends.

2. The boys were suspended from school for bad practice/ behaviour/ habit. 3. I’ve got into the habit/practice/ tradition of turning on the TV as soon as I get home. 4. There’s a practice/ tradition/ habit in our family that we have a party on New Year’s Eve. 5. The bank has continued its habit/ practice/ behaviour of charging late fees.

I wish ____________________________________________________________________ 4. there/ be/ no more/ bullying/ school. I wish ____________________________________________________________________ 5. I/ be dancing/ you/ the ballroom.

6. Parents can influence the habit/ behaviour/ tradition of their children. 7. It is good tradition/ behavior/practice to check your work before handing it in. 8. It’s all right to borrow money occasionally, but don’t let it become a tradition/ habit/ practice. III. Use used toordidn’t use to with the verbs from the box to complete the sentences.

I wish ____________________________________________________________________ 6. no one/ be suffering/ depression. I wish ____________________________________________________________________ 7. he/ can come/ party/ tonight.

get

wear

handwrite

came

cost

fly

play

1. I

homework when I was a student 5 years ago.

2. Oranges 3. They 4. People

very little in Florida, but now they are quite expensive.

7. I

to the beach.

traditional games like hide and seek when I was young. him, but now they’re married. a strange concept to most of people 20 years ago. glasses, but now she wears them all the time. (can) think of a way of helping.

2. The teacher wish that her students

(pay) more attention to the lessons.

_________________________________________________________________________

(be) near my house. (can) be as it used to be.

7. Don’t you ever wish you

(have) someone to share your troubles with?

8. I wish I

(eat) Spanish food in Barcelona.

9. I wish I

(know) how to use a computer.

10. These seats are very uncomfortable. I wish we

5. I d like you to take me to the zoo after school. _________________________________________________________________________

(drive) a Lamborghini in Paris.

6. I just wish that everything

_________________________________________________________________________ 4. It’s a pity John can’t come to my birthday party this weekend. _________________________________________________________________________

(not live) so far away.

4. I wish Dam Sen Water Park 5. He wishes he

2. I’d like my younger brother to concentrate more on his studies. 3. I’m sorry I don’t have time to go to the cinema with you.

IV. Put the verb info the correct form.

3. I wish you

1. It’s a pity my computer is out of order. _________________________________________________________________________

8. She 9. Obesity

1. Andy wished that he

I wish ____________________________________________________________________ VI. Rewrite the following sentences using a wish construction.

kites for pleasure as I did.

10. My granny

9. we/ be traveling/ first class. 10. they/ learn/ communicate/ their peers.

married at much younger ages.

6. My sister

I wish ____________________________________________________________________ I wish ____________________________________________________________________

to work on time, so they were fired.

5. We lived on the coast for years but we

I wish ____________________________________________________________________ 8. there/ snow/ Christmas.

6. It’s a pity it is raining heavily outside. _________________________________________________________________________ 7. It’s a pity my favorite book is out of stock. _________________________________________________________________________

(travel) first class.

8. I’m sorry I’m not old enough to drive a car. _________________________________________________________________________

V. Make up wishes from the prompts.

9. It’s a pity they are having a class at the moment.

1. I/ can afford/ new car. I wish ____________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________ 10. It’s a pity my school doesn’t organize outdoor activities. _________________________________________________________________________

Unit 4: LIFE IN THE PAST 53

54 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

VII. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition.

1. You can take a ride

II. Put the dialogue into the correct order.

a dogsled when visiting Hokkaido.

2. As we didn’t have many forms of entertainment, we often danced whenever we could. 3. I was taught to pay respect

___ I totally agree with you. We talked a lot, and it helped us understand each other more. the

music

___ It must be tiring! How about your pastime? ___ Yes, it is. Besides, we also took care of our siblings while our parents worked.

elder people when I was a child.

Dad, can you tell me about your childhood?

4. My teenage daughter has a habit family members.

leaving home without saying goodbyeto any

___ We often played football on the soil ground with a plastic ball only. Hide and seek wasanother game that we never got bored of.

5. Nowadays, young couples tend to eat

a lot instead of cooking themselves.

___ Of course, dear! What do you want to know?

6. In the past, we had to walk a lot, which kept us

good shape.

7. We were taught to value everyone’s contribution and treat everyone 8. Bamboo jacks is a childhood game that begins to die

respect

___ That would be great! Sometimes I think chatting or texting using mobile devices cancause misunderstanding. ___ Well, at that time, we didn’t have smartphone for distant communication. We would rather talk face to face with each other.

C. SPEAKING I. Complete the conversation with the sentences from the box. Write the letters of the sentences.

___ I wish I could experience your childhood once. ___ Sounds fun. Did you text your friends to talk about stuffs? ___ Hmm, I learnt that students had to help their parents with farming. Is it true?

A. Really? How come? B. What are you reading?

___ It’s impossible, my darling. Instead, you can create your own life with things thatfulfill your wish and lifestyle!

C. Well, I’m afraid that I can’t agree with their viewpoint.

D. READING

D. I mean, as time goes by, people are supplied with better service, facilities as well as standard of living. However, we haven’t lost our identity or morality. We only change it to fit the social background.

I. Complete the passage with words from the box.

E. I agree that life has changed but it offers us with both benefits and drawbacks.

shift

than

mostly

indicate

held

declines

spans

obense

F. Interesting. What does it say about that topic? G. Thanks. I think that we should pay more attention to how we can improve our lives rather than criticize it. Nam:

(1) _________________________________________________________________

Phong:

I’m reading an article about life in the past and present.

Nam:

(2) _________________________________________________________________

Phong:

They argue that life in the past was much better than now.

Nam:

(3) _________________________________________________________________

Phong:

They said many values in life had changed and they destroyed humans’ morality.

Today, childhood is spent (1) indoors, watching television, playing videogames and surfing the Internet. When children do go outside, it tends to be for scheduled events soccer camp or a fishing derby - (2) under the watch of adults. The (3) to an indoor childhood has accelerated in the past decade, withhuge (4) in spontaneous outdoor activities such as bike riding, swimming andtouch football, according to separate studies by the National Sporting Goods Association. In addition, a child is six times more likely to play a video game on a typical day (5) to ride a bike. The change can be seen in children’s bodies. In the 1960s, 4% of . Today, 16% are overweight. It can also be seen in theirbrains. that children who spend lots of time outdoors have longerattention than those who watch lots of television and play video games.

Nam:

(4) _________________________________________________________________

kids were (6) Studies (7) (8)

Phong:

Why?

II. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks.

Nam:

(5) _________________________________________________________________

Phong:

What do you mean?

Nam:

(6) _________________________________________________________________

Phong:

Hmm, it’s quite complicated, but I think you’re right somehow.

Nam:

(7) _________________________________________________________________

Phong:

I totally agree with you.

Unit 4: LIFE IN THE PAST 55

Changes in Food Habits Before Stone Age, people used to eat fruits, leaves and anything they found from the forest. However, this habit changed into hunting animals, preserving food items and planting and growing vegetables, which eventually led into farming different crops like maize, corn, and rice. People were healthy, they rarely had diseases and never needed extra exercise because their daily work kept their bodies running.

56 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

At present, we have turned the agriculture into a mass scale production, including machinery,technology and pesticides, all of which came in with the green revolution. With green revolution agriculture and the traditional farming culture turned upside down. As far nor now, farmers who are able to cope up with the multinational cooperation’s and their large-scale, expensive products, pesticides and high-yielding varieties of seeds, keepproducing crops for the market. Yet the traditional, low-income farmers even today, especially in Asian countries, are in a dire state. Fast food is another major factor in modern food habits. Although many people find it convenient, it leads to many health conditions. Today people are unhealthy, needs medicine and functions on diets and exercise machines. A. Decide whether the following sentences are true (T) or false (F).

_________________________________________________________________________ II. Complete the second sentence so that it has the same meaning as the first sentence.

1. They often went to school by bike when they were young. → They used _________________________________________________________________ 2. She has taught her children to play piano for 4 years. → She started ________________________________________________________________ 3. It’s a pity I can’t cook as well as my mom. → I wish ____________________________________________________________________ 4. He doesn’t have meals with his family any more. → He used __________________________________________________________________

1. People in the past ate healthy food so they rarely had diseases.

5. It took me a long time to be accustomed to living in the country.

2. The green revolution is the decrease in agriculture production.

→ It took me a long time to get___________________________________________________

3. The green revolution caused agriculture to change completely.

6. My school is near my home, so I go to school on foot every day.

4. Farmers nowadays can’t meet the great demand of the food market.

→ My school isn’t ____________________________________________________________

5. Fast food is convenient but it’s not good for health.

7. I would like my sister to improve her English speaking.

B. Answer the following questions.

→ I wish ____________________________________________________________________

6. In the past, why didn’t people need extra exercise? _________________________________________________________________________ 7. Who is still in the serious situation despite the development in agriculture?

8. Vietnamese people only eat dried candied fruit at Tet. → Dried candied fruit __________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

TEST FOR UNIT 4

8. How are people nowadays compared to those in the past? _________________________________________________________________________

E. WRITING I. Write sentences, using the clues given.

1. he/ used/ play/ football/ local team,/ but/ he/ too/ old/ now. _________________________________________________________________________ 2. Beth/ wish/ she/ can/ stay/ Cambridge/ forever. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. American family life/ change/ greatly/ the last three decades. _________________________________________________________________________ 4. she/ travel/ over/ the world/ if/ she/ be/ rich. _________________________________________________________________________ 5. they/ urge/ the parliament/ approve/ plans/ their reform program. _________________________________________________________________________

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

1. a.emotion

b. indecisive

c.obesity

d. believable

2. a. hanging

b. belong

c. singer

d. anger

3. a. behaved

b.passed

c. entertained

d. changed

4. a. imagination

b. average

c. language

d.appearance

5. a. increase

b.surprise

c. release

d. promise

II. Choose the word that has the main stress placed differently from the others.

1. a. worthwhile

b. igloo

c. habit

d. practice

2. a. obese

b. dogsled

c. extend

d. remote

3. a. household

b. suppose

c. Arctic

d. diet

4. a. transformation

b. independence

c. understanding

d. illiterate

5. a. uncontrollable

b. biological

c. particularly

d. seniority

III. Place a mark over the auxiliary that should be stressed in the following sentences.

1. A: Why don’t you attend the singing contest? Is it because you can’t sing?

6. how/ you/ get/ know/ this university? _________________________________________________________________________ 7. I/ suppose/ we/ can/ pay/ credit card/ but/ we/ had better/ check/ first. _________________________________________________________________________

B: I can sing. Listen! 2. A: You like Mark, don’t you? B: No, I don’t! What, me and Mark? Don’t be silly! 3. You really must see this new film

8. women/ stay/ home/ preparing food/ making clothes/ the past. Unit 4: LIFE IN THE PAST 57

58 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

7. He is so annoying! He 4. A: Why didn’t you book the hotel before traveling?

(always/ leave) his things everywhere.

8. I have decided

B: I did, but the service got some problems.

(study) more and improve my overall average.

9. As far as I know, he’s coining. But I

5. A: You haven’t done your homework.

(not speak) to him for weeks.

10. I will call you when the guests

B: I know, but I have learnt all the lessons by heart.

(arrive).

VI. Write the correct form of the words in brackets.

6. I never did understand why he talked bad about me.

1. Asa

7. He is putting on a bit of weight. He has eaten a lot these days.

2. I can never make up stories – Ihave absolutely no

IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

3. People who are

1. The children were acting

4. People didn’t pay much attention to

appearance a decade ago. (physic)

5. Overeating is surely the main cause of

. (obese)

a.out

the story of the birth of Jesus.

b. on

c. down

the message I had just read.

2. The manager told me to pass a.in

d. at

b. to

c. on

b.direct

c.indirect

4. Youngsters love to eat from street a.vans

d. face to face

c.trucks

a.used travel 6. I wish I

b.used to travel

c. used to traveling

b.will

c.could

7. When I see the kids playing football, I almost wish I a. was

b.am

8. Where

c.would be

d. can

2. I am goingfor a diet next week and hope to lose ten pounds before Christmas.

d. could be

d. do you use to live

a. How crazy

b. That’s right

c. Really? I can’t imagine that

d. That’s cool!

D C

8. Alan didn’t use to liked children, butit’s different now he has his own. A

(do) to preserve the local tradition?

9. Alex said he will ask his grandparentsabout their old days.

(be) the best restaurant in town.

(wait) on the platform.

(go) to bed earlier, you

7. A magical way is going to prepareby the inhabitants to solve this curse.

V. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

6. The doctor told him to stop

A A

5. I only wish you

6. Despite giving a second chance, she couldn’t manage topass the exam.

b. I suppose it was.

3. When her train got to the station, we

5. Today’s children no longer engage with the nature world. d. How cool

”

4. If you

B A

! c. Thanks a lot

a. Sure. That’s right.

1. What should

4. The children had to go barefootedlybecause there was no money for shoes.

10. “In the past, marriages used to be arranged by parents.”

2. This used

3. I wish I have his mobile phone number so that we could tell him the good news. A

c. used you to live 9. I’ve just found 20 dollars in my pocket!

. (believe)

1. Those who come from Baffin Island often live in an igloo: a house building fromblocks of ice. A B C D

before you moved here? b. did you used to live

. (credible)

and loyalty mean nothing in the workplace.(senior)

VII. Mark the letter A, B, C or D to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions.

their age again.

a. did you use to live

“

9. Today,

d. is used to traveling

find the time to do more reading.

a.may

and their causes.(behave)

8. She appears to actually like the man, which I find 10. I found the ending of the novel a bit

d. business

a lot in his job but now, since his promotion, he doesn’t.

5. Ben

lack the basic reading and writing skills. (literate)

7. This approach can help identify common .

for the cheap price.

b.vendors

. (imagine)

6. __________ couples do not have the same rights as married couples.(marry)

d. for

3. Stern insisted that she come downtown so that he could explain this to her a.face

businessman, he couldn’t imagine real poverty.(wealth)

(not be) so tired.

(smoke) and take a trip.

Unit 4: LIFE IN THE PAST 59

10. I’m hopelessat foreign languages, but I wish I speak Spanish and French. A

(be) all as happy as I am.

60 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

VIII. Match a sentence in column A to a response in column B.

A 1. When I was young, I was isolated by my friends because I was so reserved. 2. I used to try riding on the dogsled in my trip to Canada. 3. A lot of people sacrificed their lives for the peace of our country. 4. Would you mind if I read your diary a little bit, mom? 5. Years ago, students had to do manual work as a part of their studies. 6. Do you want to experience your childhood again, dad? 7. Do you think I could use your cell phone for a moment? 8. My mom got married to my dad when she was 16 years old.

X. Read the text then do the tasks.

B a. I suppose I do. I wish I were a child once more time. b. I think it’s a good way to foster “love and respect” for manual labor. c. I can’t imagine that. d. Unbelievable! Why did she marry too soon? e. Sure, no problem. Here you are. f. I respect them for what they did. g. I’d rather you didn’t. h. It must be an incredible ride. I wish I could do that once in my life.

IX. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage.

Living in Vietnam today (1) greatly from the lifestyle of 100 years ago. People in the past mainly worked in agriculture (2) today there are significantly less peopleworking in this sector of the economy. These days, (3) , people are more likely tobe employed in manufacturing and tourism than in the rice fields. Moreover, Vietnam, which was (4) agrarian, is transforming into an entirely different country. Whileagriculture is still an important component of the Vietnamese economy, other enterprises are (5) an increasing amount of economic activity. However, along with the differences, similarities also exist. The people of Vietnamhave retained many of the characteristics of their (6) . The Vietnamese people areas friendly today as they were in the past. This is best exemplified in the way they welcomeforeigners (7) their unique country. Moreover, the resilience and determinationof the people of Vietnam has not changed. The Vietnamese work (8) and happilytowards the development of their country. 1. a. compares

b. differs

c. becomes

d. offers

2. a. however

b. therefore

c. whereas

d. when

3. a. in conclusion

b. on purpose

c. by comparison

d. for once

4. a. traditionally

b. gradually

c. occasionally

d. presently

5. a. grasping for

b. holding for

c. making up for

d. accounting for

6. a. founders

b. forefathers

c. descendants

d. seniors

7. a. on

b. at

c. to

d. for

8. a. collectively

b. separably

c. accordingly

d. similarly

LIFE IN THE PAST VS LIFE IN THE PRESENT Over the last century, there have been many significant changes in the way we live.Obviously, it is difficult to compare the life of ancient people and the life of the people living in the twenty-first century because so many changes have occurred. Even the changes that have occurred over the last ten years are amazing. To start with, in the past people had to work harder as they did not have tools and machines to make their work easier. Today, most of the difficult and dangerous work is done by computers and other powerful machines. In the past living conditions were not as comfortable as they are now. Besides, many people could not afford household appliances like a fridge or a vacuum cleaner because those used to be luxurious goods. Another difference between living now and in the past is the fact that nowadays education is accessible to everyone. In the past men were mainly the only ones educated and women were not allowed into public or private schools. Besides, nowadays it is much easier to find the educational materials and the information you need – thanks to the Internet. We are able to speak to a friend who is on the other corner of the world because we are connected 24/7. Nevertheless, people had better relationships with the neighbors in years gone by.it is an obvious conclusion that life has changed significantly during All things considered, the course of history. In some ways, it is definitely easier to live in the present. On the other hand, however, life now is much faster and stressful than it used to be in the past. The standard of living has definitely improved but it can be discussed whether the quality of our lives is also better. A. Decide whether the following sentences are true (T) or false (F). 1. Life nowadays is the same as life of our ancestors. 2. Technology has made our lives easier. 3. In the past, household appliances were very expensive. 4. Public schools allowed females and males to be educated in the same schools. 5. We can use the internet to communicate with people around the world. B. Answer the questions.

6. Is life today faster or slower than life in the past? _________________________________________________________________________ 7. What has happened to the standard of living? _________________________________________________________________________ 8. What makes it easy to access information? _________________________________________________________________________ 9. Who or what does some difficult jobs for us? _________________________________________________________________________ 10. What makes our lives easier at home? _________________________________________________________________________ XI. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence, using the word in capital.

1. That house is part of the town’s heritage, but the council is demolishing it. (WISH)

Unit 4: LIFE IN THE PAST 61

62 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

_________________________________________________________________________

UNIT 5

WONDERS OF VIETNAM

2. I’m not good at English, so I can’t become a tour guide. (IF) _________________________________________________________________________ 3. Mary said she would hold an event about skin care the following month. (WILL) _________________________________________________________________________ 4. He gave her the book “The fault in our stars” as a birthday gift. (SHE) _________________________________________________________________________ 5. He feels sorry that he can’t come to his brother’s wedding. (WISHES) _________________________________________________________________________ 6. “If I were you, I would no longer spend most of my time chatting on Facebook”, he said. (ADVISED) _________________________________________________________________________ 7. When did you start searching for some facts in the past? (HOW) _________________________________________________________________________ 8. My mother no longer cooked for me since I married my wife. (USED) _________________________________________________________________________ XII. Write a paragraph about a facility you like in your class that you think it was unavailable in the past. Use the following questions as clues:

A. PHONETICS I. Underline the short words If it is stressed.

1. A: What are you thinking about? B: I’m thinking about how to get to Binh Ba Island. 2. A: Can you tell me where the food is served? B: This is the place where the food is served. 3. A: Look! He is a person I’m looking for. B: It’s not a person, but the person. 4. A: Do you think my essay is good? B: In general, you have good writing skill. However, you shouldn’t put “and” at the beginning of a paragraph. 5. A: Who are you waiting for? B: I’m waiting for my friends. 6. A: Which subject are you good at? B: I’m good at Maths. 7. A: What do you want from me?

-What is that facility?

B: I want you to talk to me or I will cry.

-How does it look like?

8. A: Is this educational fair calling by volunteers?

-How is it functioned?

B: No. It is calling “for” volunteers, not “by” volunteers.

-Why do people like using it in class? -Do you think that facility is useful or not? Why?

II. Place a mark over the short words that should be stressed in the following sentences.

-How do you feel about its being used in class?

1. A: Does he the one that I can rely on? B: Yes, you can rely on him at any time. 2. A: How does the word “and” function? B: You can use it to join the two statements. 3. A: Do you need Phillips or George to help you? B: I need Phillips and George to help me. 4. A: Who are you smiling at? B: I’m smiling at Jim, an old friend of mine. 5. A: Will you pay a trip to Ha Giang this summer? B: I want to, but my parents don’t. 6. A: Would you like to come to my house this weekend? B: Yes, I’d love to. 7. A: I’m interested in reading Beloved Oxford. B: Beloved Oxford is not what I’m interested in.

Unit 4: LIFE IN THE PAST 63

64 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

8. A: Was this house made with wood?

2. I/ suggest/ the government/ pass/ law on banning deforestation.

B: No. It was made of wood, not with wood.

_________________________________________________________________________ 3. We/ suggest/ students from universities/ participate more/ social work.

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR

_________________________________________________________________________

I. Complete the sentences with the words from the box.

4. My classmates/ suggest/ use bus and bicycle/ go to school. Citadel

cavern

fortress

Cathedral

tombs

sculptures

limestone

pagoda

welcomes millions of international tourists.

1. Every year, Saigon Notre-Dame 2. The pyramids in Egypt are really the 3. The Imperial in 2010. 4. A attack.

_________________________________________________________________________ 5. His father/ suggested/ he/ read more books/ environmental issues. _________________________________________________________________________ 6. They/ suggest/ teachers/ provide students/ knowledge on historical facts.

of ancient pharaohs.

of Thang Long was made a UNESCO World HeritageSite

_________________________________________________________________________ 7. People/ suggest/ exhaust fumes from vehicles/ reduce.

is a large, strong building or group of buildings that can be defendedfrom

_________________________________________________________________________ 8. My mom/ suggested/ keep the surroundings/ clean and green.

5. Located in Phong Nha - Ke Bang National Park, Son Doong might be the world’slargest subterranean . 6. Phong Nha - Ke Bang National Park is one of the world’s two largest regions. 7. The One Pillar water.

10. My friends/ suggest/ visit/ the Royal Citadel/ when being in Hue. _________________________________________________________________________ IV. Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

of people and animals.

1. You can’t expect action.

II. Complete the sentences with the words from the box.

rickshaws

settings

complex

reigned

paradise

monument

recognition

pilgrims

structure

measures

1. The government should take

9. I/ suggest/ visitors/ stop littering/ Phong Nha Cave. _________________________________________________________________________

is said to represent a lotus flower growing up out ofthe

8. The museum has several life-sized

_________________________________________________________________________

(preserve) the man-made wonders withouttaking

2. She’s a good manager because she never avoids (deal)withtheproblems of her staff.

to control population growth in the city.

(tell) me about the French Gothic architecture?

3. Would you mind

2. Queen Victoria

over Britain from 1837 to 1901.

4. I imagine (go) back to the 20th century and (witness) the construction of Cu Chi Tunnels.

3. He erected a

on the spot where his daughter was killed.

5. We recommend

4. Thousands of Christian Eve. 5. It is suggested that you use

converged on Bethlehem to celebrateChristmas to get around Hue City for its speed and reasonable

price. overlooking the bay.

7. The station building was a high wooden

8. E-mail allows us

with a curved roof.

9. I suggested

that the study techniques of many students are weak.

9. Some old buildings were pulled down to make space for a new shopping 10. His idea of

6. Youngsters nowadays seem places.

(lack) awareness of protecting thepublic

7. A lot of small towns in the area are definitely worth

6. I imagine working in a beautiful 8. There is general

(book) early, as this is a popular event.

is to spend the day lying on the beach.

III. Write sentences using suggest + V-ing or suggest + clausewith should.

1. I/ suggest/ take a course/ photography.

(visit).

(send) messages all around the world quickly and easily. (put) the matter of restoring Ben Thanh Market to the committee.

10. On the way to Hue, we stopped

(pay) a visit to a relative in Da Nang.

V. Each sentence has a mistake. Underline the mistake and correct it.

1. Tracey suggested to pay a visit to Thien Duong Cave at the end of this month. ____________________ 2. I suggested him talking about how to preserve the man-made wonders of Vietnam.

_________________________________________________________________________

Unit 5: WONDERS OF VIET NAM 65

____________________

66 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

5. They think that the first temple existed during the reign of Le Thanh Tong in the 15th century.

3. Hey! Stop to work so hard. It’s bad for you. ____________________

It _______________________________________________________________________

4. I’d advise to buy your tickets well in advance if you want to travel in August. ____________________

6. People know that Phong Nha Cave was found in the 16th century by Cham people. It _______________________________________________________________________

5. I suggest you to stay in Continental Hotel when visiting Ho Chi Minh City. ____________________

7. People claim that the site of the Perfume Pagoda was discovered over 2000 years ago. It _______________________________________________________________________

6. At my school they encourage all students doing some sport.

8. They said that the government was conducting a project to investigate the harmful effects of air pollution.

____________________

It _______________________________________________________________________

7. Tonight I’d like going out but I have to do my homework.

9. They thought that he went to a local restaurant with his girlfriend.

____________________ 8. Her friend suggested to asking the tour guide for more information about Po Nagar Cham Towers. ____________________

It _______________________________________________________________________ 10. They have suggested that bright children should take their exams early. It _______________________________________________________________________

9. Factory owners made young children to work twelve hours a day. ____________________ 10. I suggested Mike that we go out for a meal with his colleagues. ____________________

VIII. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition.

1. A home for the elderly will be built

the site of the old hospital.

2. Years of fighting have left the area

ruins.

3. North American literature is the main theme

VI. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form.

It (1) (say) Cu Chi Tunnels are part of a massive war museum in HoChi Minh. Visitors (2) (offer) a sneak-peek at the underground life ofVietnamese soldiers back in 1948. The site has over 120km of underground tunnels, with trapdoors, living areas, kitchens, storage facilities, armory, hospitals, and commandcenters. After the war against the French, it (3) (claim) that Vietnamesesoldiers expanded the tunnels and included effective air filtration systems, which helps them survive the Cu Chi carpet-bombings. It (4) (consider) that Cu Chi Tunnels are now one of Ho Chi Minh’smost iconic attractions. You can enjoy plenty of activities during your visit. A popular option is following the narrow routes of the underground tunnel. Before entering theunderground tunnels, a short film of Cu Chi Tunnels (5) (show) tovisitors so that they understand how the tunnel system works. It (6) (expect)that parts of Cu Chi Tunnels (7) (cement) and (8) (widen) so that the crawl is less harrowing than it would have been in the past. VII. Rewrite the following sentence using the impersonal passive.

1. They expect more than two million Muslim pilgrims from all over the world head to Mecca this year. It _______________________________________________________________________ 2. People believe that many more people will die of skin cancer over the next ten years. It _______________________________________________________________________

this year’s festival.

4. Hung King festival is held annually from March 8th to March 10th calendar. 5. Notre-Dame Cathedral and Ben Thanh Market are City. 6. At 3,143 meters peninsula.

the

the center of Ho Chi Minh

sea level, Fansipan is proclaimed the roof of the Indochina

7. My Son Sanctuary is regarded as one of the main religious centers of Hinduism Southeast Asia. 8. Ha Den Mountain is located

the northeast of Tay Ninh Province.

9. It has been claimed that wine helps protect 10. It is all the royal palaces

heart disease.

the Hue Citadel that draws internationaltourist attention.

C. SPEAKING I. Complete the conversation with the sentences from the box. Write the letters of the sentences.

A. Have you got any other tips? B. Guess what? I’m on a holiday to Hoi An next weekend. C. What about night activities? D. Well, I’ve just booked the flight there. I don’t know which hotel I should stay in.

3. People are thinking that drugs are very dangerous. It _______________________________________________________________________ 4. People have reported that Bitexco Tower is the tallest skyscraper in Vietnam. It _______________________________________________________________________

Unit 5: WONDERS OF VIET NAM 67

lunar

E. Cool! Can you suggest some famous places there? F. What is the best way to get around? G. Great! You have been in Da Nang before, haven’t you?

68 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

John: (1)____________________________________________________________________

D. READING

Nam: Wow! It must be exciting. What have you prepared for the trip?

I. Complete the passage with words from the box.

John: (2)____________________________________________________________________ Nam: Oh, if I were you, I would stay in Lavender Riverside Hotel. It offers a very nice sea view from the balcony and refined decoration. John: (3)____________________________________________________________________ Nam: Yes, I visited there last month. John: (4)____________________________________________________________________ Nam: Sure. You should definitely visit Son Tra Peninsula and Marble Mountain. And don’t forget the beaches. They are really clean and beautiful. John: (5)____________________________________________________________________ Nam: In the evening, you can see the Dragon Bridge or have an overall view of brilliant panorama Da Nang at night from top of Sun Wheel cabin. John: (6)____________________________________________________________________ Nam: It’s probably best to hire a motorbike and take a ride around the city. It’s cheaper and more convenient than other types of transportation. John: (7)____________________________________________________________________ Nam: If you travel there on Saturday, find somewhere near Han River Bridge and wait for its swing at 11pm. It would be a memorable moment. II. Put the dialogue into the correct order.

___ So, do you have any suggestion on preserving them? ___ Okay. I’ll wait. ___ "Man-made wonders of Vietnam: How to protect and preserve?” ___ Do you know what the causes are? ___ I totally agree with you. Furthermore, the government doesn’t have plans for timely restoration. ___ Wow, interesting! ___ Well, as you can see, there are too many tourists visiting man-made wonders every day, and not all of them are aware of protecting it. ___ Yes. Vietnam has a lot of man-made wonders. However, it is reported that they havebeen damaged. 1 __ Lan, what are you doing? ___ I suggest limit the number of tourists visiting those places on a daily and yearly basis, they should be restored once or twice. Additionally, the media should convey information about this topic to raise awareness of the citizens. ___ I’m finding the ideas for the next discussion in speaking class. ___ That’s a good idea. Let me think more about it, then I will share my ideas with you. Isit ok? ___ What’s the topic?

Unit 5: WONDERS OF VIET NAM 69

unknown

twice

wonders

regarded

formations

attempt

capacity

measurements

With (1) of over 200 meters (656 feet) wide and 150 meters (492 feet)high as well as a length of 9 kilometers (5.6 miles), Son Doong Cave is the largest cave in the world. Before 2009, Malaysia’s Deer Cave was (2) as the largest cave in the world until a group of scientists from the British Cave Research Association explored and studied the Son Doong Cave finding it was in fact over (3) the size ofDeer Cave. Named by BBC News, the “most beautiful cave on the globe” makes this one of thegreat natural (4) of Asia. It is a mountain river cave featuring a fast flowingsubterranean river. Son Doong Cave is mostly comprised of limestone that has overtime shaped into some of the tallest stalagmite (5) in the world. WithinSon Doong Cave visitors will find it is to be able to fit a 40so big that it contains its own jungle and riverand has the (6) story skyscraper inside. The sourceof the river still remains (7) to this day with future plans of the BritishCave Research Association to return soon and (8) to solve the manymysteries this cave holds. II. Read the text carefully, then choose the correct answers.

After only 50 minute flying from Ho Chi Minh City, you will set foot on the tropical paradise of Vietnam and the world: Phu Quoc Island. The island has a roughly triangular shape with a north-south length of 50km and a west-east width of 25km. A great part of the terrain is filled with beautiful sandy beaches, but there is a mountainous region with 99 peaks, among which the Peak of Chua Mountain is the tallest one at 603 meters. Due to Phu Quoc’s location in the Gulf of Thailand, its climate is sub-equatorial with a temperate weather all year round, making trips to Phu Quoc possible any time in the year. However, the best time to travel to this island is during the dry season, from November until March, when the sky is blue and clear and the rains are away. Phu Quoc is most famous for its the cuisines and a natural wonderful coastline. The most famous food of Phu Quoc is fish sauce, which has become quite popular all over Vietnam and the world. Besides, another thing worth trying there is the spicy yet interesting black pepper. However, the factor that will definitely intrigue you to visit Phu Quoc is its untouched coastline featuring several heavenly beaches. They have yet to be explored to their full ability, but this fact might be actually positive as it gives the shores a romantic beauty that you can find in nowhere else in the world. 1. What is Phu Quoc Island regarded as? a. Pearl of the Orient

b. Tropical Paradise

c. City of Eternal Spring

d. Lanterns Paradise

2. According to the passage, Phu Quoc Island

a. has both beaches and mountains

b. doesn’t have much tourist attraction

c. has the tallest mountain in Vietnam

d. doesn’t have rains all the year round

70 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

3. Tourists can visit Phu Quoc anytime in the year thanks to

2. Although I had all the necessary qualifications, they didn’t offer me the job.

a. its location by the sea

b. its friendly local people

→ Despite ___________________________________________________________________

c. its temperate climate

d. its dry season

3. “Please do not litter as you are walking along the coast”, the guard said to us. → The guard told _____________________________________________________________

4. What are Phu Quoc’s specialities? a. red pepper and fish sauce

b. black pepper and dried fish

c. red pepper and soya sauce

d. spicy black pepper and fish sauce

5. The word “intrigue” has the closest meaning to a. attract

b. promote

c. inspire

4. I haven’t bought any clothes since my trip to Hanoi. → The last time_______________________________________________________________ 5. They think that a garden would be a perfect setting for the house.

. d. pay attention to

→ It _______________________________________________________________________ 6. Jack’s parents made him study a lot for the entrance exam to high school.

6. Which of the following statements is NOT true? a. Phu Quoc Island is located in the Gulf of Thailand.

→ Jack was _________________________________________________________________

b.The beaches in Phu Quoc Island have been explored to their full potentials.

7. You can’t register for a course abroad if you don’t have a passport.

c.Phu Quoc’s dry season begins from November and lasts through March.

→ Unless ___________________________________________________________________

d.The island is roughly triangular in shape.

8. “Why don’t we visit the Royal Citadel first?” Quang said.

E. WRITING

→ Quang suggested that ________________________________________________________

I. Write sentences, using the clues given.

9. People expect that he will join the company soon. → He_______________________________________________________________________

1. it/ know/ that/ Bao Dai/ be/ last/ Emperor/ Vietnam _________________________________________________________________________ 2. locate/ center/ Hanoi/, One Pillar Pagoda/ attract/ millions/ visitors/ every year

10. Shall we use Perfume Pagoda as a theme of the presentation? → She suggests _______________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________ 3. what/ be/ the things/ we/ should/ not miss/ once/ we/ come/ Hue City? _________________________________________________________________________ 4. I/ suggest/ travel/ motorbike/ as/ you/ can/ see/ lot/ beautiful sceneries/ along/ street _________________________________________________________________________ 5. Hung Kings’ Temple Festival/ be/ one/ most/ important/ holidays/ Vietnam _________________________________________________________________________ 6. although/ Tu Duc King/ build/ himself/ tomb, he/ be/ actually/ bury/ different location/ Hue _________________________________________________________________________ 7. it/ be/ claim/ that/ Ma Pi Leng/ be/ one/ most/ dangerous/ pass/ Vietnam

TEST FOR UNIT 5 1 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

1. a. limestone

b.pilgrim

c. rickshaw

d.citadel

2. a. geological

b.imagine

c. agency

d.together

3. a. wonder

b.complex

c. backdrop

d. proper

4. a. historic

b.picturesque

c. enter

d.sentence

5. a. plumber

b.sculpture

c.measure

d.structure

II. Choose the wordthat has the mainstress placed differently from the others. 1. a. particular

b. spectacular

c.remarkable

d. picturesque

_________________________________________________________________________

2. a. structure

b. commune

c. cavern

d. cement

8. locate/ Ninh Binh,/ Trang An Lanndscape Complex/ know/ its scenic landscape/ boat cave tours

3. a. museum

b. monument

c. cathedral

d.contestant

4. a. contest

b. fortress

c. astounding

d. setting

_________________________________________________________________________

5. a. religious

b. situate

c. calendar

d. literature

9. there/ be/ growing/ recognition/ the ethnic groups/ Central Highlands/ need/ more/ support _________________________________________________________________________ 10. her teacher/ suggest/ she/ study/ harder/ so/ she/ can/ get into/ good university _________________________________________________________________________

III. Underline the words in bold if they are stressed.

1. Watching American movies is a way to improve your listening skill, but not the only way. 2. You shouldn’t put the conjunction“or” at the end of the sentence. 3. He tried to come up with a solution for the problem, but he failed.

II. Complete the second sentence so that it has the same meaning as the first.

4. This bag is beautiful, but it is too expensive.

1. He is carrying out a research on how people spend their money for clothes.

5. It is not loving orunderstanding, butlovingand understanding.

→ A research ________________________________________________________________ Unit 5: WONDERS OF VIET NAM 71

72 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

6. Gaining a scholarship from Harvard is what I’m thirst for.

VI. Write the correct form of the words in brackets.

7. I’m always confident of myself.

1. There is a growing natural wonders. (recognize)

8. What are you apologizing for? IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. 1. The limestone formation of Thien Duong Cave is more a. spectacular

b.probable

than that of PhongNha Cave.

c. geological

d. sight-seeing

2. During PerfumePagoda festival, alarge number of happiness and prosperity in the coming year. a. spectators

b.passengers

c. pilgrims

3. In the 17th century, the Viet people ThanhMau Tower. a. put on a. under

c. got into

a. parents

c. on

7. It is

b. for parents b. to contact

c. toward parents

d. to parents

the manufacturer directly. c. contacting

d. to contacting

that the best time to visit Hanoi is September.

a. believed 8. It

d. in

that they should adopt a different way of bringing uptheir children.

6. If there is a mechanical problem, we suggest a. contact

d. took over

the corner of Cascade and Plum Streets.

b. at

5. He suggests

d. travellers

the temple tower, calling it Thien Y

b. looked for

4. The police caught the thief

flocktothe pagodatopray for

b.worth

c.rumored

d. wondered

that Po Nagar Cham Towers were built in the 8th century.

a. considered

b.was considered

9. I suggest you a. to visit

c. has considered

d. considers

Ha Long Bay. It’s very picturesque. b.visiting

c.visited

d. should visit

10. A: You really must go to Hoi An to enjoy the full moon at Mid-autumn Festival. B:

a. Yes, that’s what I’ve heard.

b. Do you really know about it?

c. Yes, I won’t go there.

d. No, thank you.

V. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

1. Too many office buildings 2. It

3. I suggested to Mike that we 5. It

(expect) that we will have more than a dozen guests this evening.

7. He said he

(discover) by the Chinese thousands of years ago.

8. If I won a lot of money, I

structure

3. It was a pretty town with a (picture)

harbor

and

ofthe

region.

well-preservedbuildings.

4. Beijing announced that it would speed up construction of a subsidiary (administrate) 5. She had once been a

center.

in the Miss World competition. (contest)

6. The snow-capped summit, 2,642 meters high, offers 7.

views. (astound)

education is compulsory in all English schools. (religion)

8. The rockets are a purely

measure against nuclear attack. (defense)

9. Oxford attracts large numbers of

. (sightsee)

10. A mountain in the Rockies became the

for a film about Everest. (locate)

VII. Mark the letter A, B, C or D to indicate that underlined part that needs correction in each of the following sentences.

1. Stronger measures will have to bemade to reduce the environmental pollution in HoChiMinh A B C D City. 2. It is thought that the first temple was built at the current site in the 15th century. A

3. It’s worth to talk to your financial adviser before making your final decision. A

4. She suggests that the whole class go to Ngon Restaurant to enjoy food from all inVietnam. A

5. Dragon Bridge in Da Nang is the must-see for all lovers of architecture. A

6. Po Nagar Kalan is the main tower, that is one of the tallest Cham structures. A

8. Sometimes our efforts on protecting man-made wonders of the city aren’tfull appreciated. A

9. I’d prefer leave early because I have a conference with my son’s teacher tomorrow at three A B C D thirty. 10. In 1962, Independence Palace was bombed, so almost the entire left wing of it was ofruins.

(see) my family the following day.

9. At 6 o’clock this morning, we 10. Imagine yourself

(go) out for a meal with his colleagues. (take) part in the festival at Perfume Pagoda.

6. Acupuncture

2. We spent years learning about the complex (geology)

7. We cleaned all the kitchen while our parents were out to dinner.

(build) in the city over the last ten years.

(report) that many buildings had been damaged by the fire.

4. Mary wishes she

that Vietnam creates its own identity withnumerous

(buy) a big house in Dalat.

(travel) to the airport. (sit) in the pine forest, listening to the sound of the nature. Unit 5: WONDERS OF VIET NAM 73

II. Match a sentence in column A to a response in column B.

74 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

A It’s well worth trying Oysters and mai fish from O Loan Lagoo. Could you suggest what we should buy when visiting Dalat Market? What shouldn’t we miss on arriving in Hanoi? Could you tell me the best place to try local food? What’s the best way to get around Dalat?

6. In case I’m lost, what should I do?

a. b. c. d. e. f.

7. What about packing some instant g. noodles? 8. I think I would buy some souvenirs in h. Ben Thanh Market.

B You should definitely see Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum and Long Bien Bridge. It’s probably best to use bikes or motorbikes. Don’t bother buying things there. They’re super expensive. That’s a good idea. Those can save you when hunger thrives. I think you should buy some fruits and fresh vegetables. Well, you can go to the local market. They sell a lot of local dishes. Grab anyone on the street and ask for the direction. That’s good to know.

Asia and is the foremost heritage site of this nature in Vietnam. Notably, among 225 Cham vestiges that are founded in Vietnam, My Son possesses 71 monuments and 32 epitaphs, the content of which is still being studied. My Son Sanctuary is often compared with other historical temple complexes in Southeast Asia, such as Borobudur of Java in Indonesia, Angkor Wat in Cambodia, Bagan of Myanmar or Ayutthaya in Thailand. My Son Sanctuary was honored as one of the UNESCO World Heritage Sites at the 23rdsession of the World Heritage Committee in 1999. Based on architectural remains, My Son perhaps began construction in 4th century. It is perhaps the longest inhabited archaeological site in Indochina. Although time and wars have turned numerous tower-temples into ruins, sculptural artifacts and architectural remains still reflected golden age of Cham fine arts history. These masterpieces have marked flourishing periods of Champa culture and architecture as well as in Southeast A. DecideAsia. whether the following sentences are true (T) or false (F). 1. My Son Sanctuary dates from the 4th century. 2. My Son Sanctuary is located in a valley surrounded by mountains. 3. It can be seen that My Son Sanctuary is a centre of culture and politics of Champa Kingdom at the present time. 4. My Son Sanctuary can’t be compared to Angkor Wat, Bagan, and Borobudur.

IX. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage.

Ha Long Bay is a UNESCO World Heritage Site and popular travel (1) inQuang Ninh Province, Vietnam. The bay features thousands of limestone karsts and islesin (2) shapes and sizes. Ha Long Bay is a center of a larger zone which (3) Bai Tu Long Bay to the northeast, and Cat Ba Island to the southwest.

5. Some tower-temples of the My Son Sanctuary were destroyed by wars and time. 6. My Son sanctuary is still considered as one of the most excellent achievement of the art of sculptures and architecture in Champa Kingdom. B. Answer the following questions.

Ha Long Bay has an area of around 1,553km2, including 1,960 - 2,000 islets, most of(4) are limestone. The core of the bay has an area of 334km2 with a high density of775 islets. The limestone in this bay has gone through 500 million years of (5) in different conditions and the environments. The evolution of the karst in this bay has taken20 million years (6) impact of the tropical wet climate. The geo-diversity of theenvironment in the area has created (7) , including a tropical evergreen biosystem, oceanic and sea shore biosystem. Ha Long Bay is (8) to 14 endemic floral species and 60 endemic faunal species.

7. How far is it from Da Nang to My Son Sanctuary?

1. a. situation

b.destination

c. direction

d. ground

10. When was My Son recognized as a World Heritage Site by UNESCO?

2. a. various

b.complex

c. exciting

d. original

3. a. offers

b.includes

c. consists

d. covers

4. a. them

b.those

c. which

d. whom

XI. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence, using the word in capital.

5. a. formation

b. foundation

c.establishment

d. contribution

1. They consider Sara is one of the best students in her school. (BE)

6. a. in

b. of

c.for

d. under

7. a. biochemical

b. biodiversity

c.bioconversion

d. biodefense

8. a. way

b. place

c.home

d. house

X. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks.

Located in Duy Xuyen district, Quang Nam province, about 69km from Da Nang City and 20km from Tra Kieu ancient capital, My Son Sanctuary is the complex of numerous Champa tower-temples in a valley roughly two kilometers wide, surrounded by two mountain ranges. This used to be a site of religious ceremony for kings of the ruling dynasties of Champa, as well as a burial place for Cham royalty and national heroes. My Son Sanctuary is regarded as one of the main religious centers of Hinduism in Southeast Unit 5: WONDERS OF VIET NAM 75

_________________________________________________________________________ 8. What did My Son use to be? _________________________________________________________________________ 9. How many Cham vestiges are there in My Son? _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________

Sara _____________________________________________________________________ 2. It’s pity she doesn’t share memories of her trip with me. (WISH) I ________________________________________________________________________ 3. Emily has to work part-time on Saturday, so she can’t accompany her best friend to the contest. (COULD) If _______________________________________________________________________ 4. Shall we surf the net for the location of Ninh Binh Province? (SUGGEST) I ________________________________________________________________________ 76 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

5. Someone is going to redecorate the kitchen for us next month. (HAVE) We ______________________________________________________________________

UNIT 6

VIET NAM: THEN AND NOW

6. People hope that cable cars construction to Son Doong Cave will be stopped. (IS) It _______________________________________________________________________ 7. “When are you going to submit your research paper?” my teacher asked me. (WAS) My teacher _______________________________________________________________ 8. When you come inside you should remove your coat and hat. (TAKE) When ____________________________________________________________________ 9. When will you book the flight for your trip to Vietnam? (BE)

A. PHONETICS I. Write the words from the box in the correct part of the table according to the stress pattern.

Don’t turn right!

Don’t cry!

Wait for me!

Don’t forget!

Help me!

Keep moving!

Finish it!

Stay there!

When ____________________________________________________________________ 10. I’m interested in the news about ancient towns. (FIND)

I ________________________________________________________________________ XII. Write a passage about a wonder of Vietnam that you are most interested In. Use the following questions as clues.

OoO OOO OOo

- What is the wonder you like? - Where is it?

II. Write the stress pattern for each following sentence.

- What are the features of that wonder?

Example: Hang on! - OO

-What makes you impressed most? - Why do you find it interesting? - How do you feel when you visit it?

1. Watch your steps!

___________

2. Get up!

___________

3. Don’t touch!

___________

4. Pardon me?

___________

5. Just do it!

___________

6. Don’t move!

___________

7. Who cares?

___________

8. Don’t go!

___________

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Complete each sentence with the correct word(s). Take the picture next to each sentence as a clue.

1. A(n) or another road.

is a road or path that goes underneatha railway

2. Another

will be opened to traffic by the endof this

3. In the countryside, most people lived in 4. At a length of 6.28km, Hai Van Unit 5: WONDERS OF VIET NAM 77

with dirt floors. is the longest tunnel in

6. Vietnam is experiencing rapid / rapidly demographic and social change.

Southeast Asia.

7. It was noticeable / noticeably how a few people managed to impose their will on the others. 8. The death toll was initial / initially reported at around 250, but was later revised to 300. 5. The Hague is an immaculate city, where you’re more likely to see and than cars.

9. You will find it convenient / conveniently getting around Nagoya by bus and subway. 10. We have a buoyant economy and unemployment is considerable / considerably lower than the regional average. IV. Rewrite the following sentences, using the adjectives or adverbs in brackets.

6. A network of and urban chaos.

1. There has been a great improvement in my English speaking skill over the last three years. (dramatically)

is an effective responseto overcrowding

→ My English speaking skill ____________________________________________________ 2. There is a minor increase in the number of unemployed graduates this year, (slightly)

were commonly worn by Vietnamese soldiersduring Vietnam’s two national resistance wars.

→ The number _______________________________________________________________ 3. The number of Vietnamese students studying in the U.S has risen little by little. (gradual) → There has been _____________________________________________________________

runs through all important downtown districts and transport hubs in Bangkok.

4. There has been enormous growth in the economy this year. (considerably) → The economy ______________________________________________________________

II. Complete the sentences with the words from the box.

trench

nuclear

extended

mushroomed

initial

5. The number of foreign tourists to Vietnam has decreased quickly during the past years. (rapid) → There has been ____________________________________________________________

compartment

launched

boom

tiled

facilities

6. There was a big fall in our coffee exports due to bad weather. (significantly) → Our coffee exports __________________________________________________________

1. Over the last 2 decades, Vietnam has experienced a rapid construction

7. There will be a gradual decrease in the price of computers. (steadily)

include a large indoor pool, jacuzzi and sauna.

3. A

family is a family group consisting of two parents and their children.

→ The price _________________________________________________________________

4. From the upper rooms of the houses may be seen a large number of old 5. In recent years, the number of skyscrapers has 6. After some 7. A typical household.

roofs.

in Ho Chi Minh City.

hesitation, teachers seem to have accepted the new system. family consists of multiple generations living together in thesame

8. On the way home we shared our first-class

with a group of businessmen.

9. The Cat Linh-Ha Dong elevated railway is expected to be 10. They are digging a river.

in 2018.

to hold a water pipe which will divert water fromthe

8. The traffic system in Vietnam has changed a lot in recent years. (dramatic) → There has been _____________________________________________________________ V. Fill in the blank with the past perfect form of the verb in brackets.

1. After the war matters.

(end), Vietnamese people focused on dealing withdomestic

2. How long

(they/ be) married before he died?

3. Before the invention of Internet, most people current events.

(read) newspapersto update

4. Why didn’t you want to watch the film?

(you/ see) it before?

III. Underline the correct word.

5. She (not have) any experience in business communication, so weoffered her a training course.

1. There has been a considerable / considerably rise in the number of people moving to Ho Chi Minh City.

6. Before the introduction of low-cost airlines, Vietnamese (mostly/travel) by coach.

2. The educational system has slight / slightly been improved to meet the demands of employers. 3. Vietnam has gradual/gradually built up a reputation as a major exporter of rice.

4. Living standard in rural areas has witnessed a significant / significantly upgrade over the past 10 years. 5. Vietnam has changed dramatic / dramatically over the last two decades.

(you/ learn) about Vietnam war before you made the presentationabout it?

8. Ethan suddenly realised that he

(leave) his laptop on the train.

9. My house was very dirty because I 10. She couldn’t get access to the Internet because she

(not clean) it for weeks. (not pay) the bill.

VI. Complete the sentence with the past simple or past perfect form of the verb in brackets. 80 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

1. They

(live) in Paris for 10 years before they

2. As soon as I (make) a mistake.

(move) home.

(download) the document, I knew I

_________________________________________________________________________ 5. John gave them £100. It was very generous. _________________________________________________________________________

3. Mary (ring) John’s doorbell at 8:15 yesterday but John (already/ leave) the house. 4. By the time the firemen houses.

6. They saw the driver was a six-year-old boy. They were astonished.

(arrive), the fire

(destroy)three

(not stand) a chance of developing before thegovernment (adopt) the open-door policy.

5. Our economy 6. When I last finish)her assignment.

(speak) to her, she still

_________________________________________________________________________ 7. Thank you for visiting me in hospital. It was very kind. _________________________________________________________________________ 8. Being in good health is very important for athletes. _________________________________________________________________________

(not

9. We heard that your father’s in hospital again. We’re sorry.

7. Nobody about it.

(come) to the meeting because Angela

(forget)to tell them

8. She

(go) to Disneyland three times when she

(be) a little girl.

_________________________________________________________________________ 10. Why did he make that remark? It was very rude.

9. After I

(complete) the form, I

(give) it to the secretary.

10. Sarah (arrive) in Tacoma.

(drive) three hundred miles by the time she

_________________________________________________________________________ IX. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentence.

1. It now seems certain

VII. Fill in each blank with one adjective from the box.

dangerous

convinced

brave

relieved

generous

embarrassed conscious

1. Mr. Davies was

annoyed

astonished

2. I was

to hear that we had lost, thinking we had a good chance.

3. I was

that we were doing the right thing.

4. We were all friends. 5. It was 6. It would be

d. for an election in May b. if she gets a B for history

c.for getting a B for history

d. getting a B for history

to talk to teenagers nowadays.

a. with parents

b. for parents

4. It’s careless

for you to climb the mountain alone.

7. He is

to tell her he’d forgotten their anniversary. Again!

8. Polly was

to learn that her mother’s illness was not a serious one.

9. It was

of Sarah to start her own business. that the Internet is very important.

VIII. Rewrite these sentences, using be + adjective + (of + noun/pronoun) + to-infinitive.

1. Learning how to live in space is difficult.

a. to you

b.with you

It is difficult to learn how to live in space.

3. He shouldn’t press the emergency button. It was stupid. _________________________________________________________________________ 4. Having interests outside work is necessary.

6. She was fully aware

d. for you

c.of meeting

d. to meet

a. that he did not like her

b. of he did not like her

c.for his dislike her.

d. him not to like her

to think of doing it like that.

a. You were clever

b. It’s clever for you

c.It was clever of you

d. It’s clever that you

the news of his death. He was so young!

9. Susan was sorry

b. pleased tohear

c. relieved to hear

a. to lose her temper

b. that losing her temper

c. for lose her temper

d. that she’d lost her temper

10. It was necessary Unit 6: VIET NAM: THEN AND NOW 81

c.of you

b.meeting

a. shocked to hear

_________________________________________________________________________

d. of parents

his best friend again after 20 years.

a. meet

8. She was

2. I learned that I had been promoted. I was delighted.

c.to parents

to let your children play with fire.

5. My dad was glad

of him to pay for both of us.

a. to get a B for history 3. It can be difficult

to see Mia at the party because she hardly hung outwith

10. Teachers are increasingly

b. of an election in May

c.that there will be an election in May 2. Jacqui was pleasantly surprised

dissapointed

that the books were missing.

a. to be an election in May

this question as soon as possible.

82 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

d. annoyed to hear

a. of us to solve

b. for us to solve

c. for us solving

d. of us solve

___ Wow! It’s such a long time. I guess you have witnessed many changes.

X. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition.

1. It is wrong

the labs and swimming pool. ___ Can you tell me some of them?

him to get so angry over such a little thing. such poor conditions!

2. I can’t imagine how those students could study 3. The image of my family preparing for Tet has gone

my heart.

___ You mean youngsters move out of their family when they reach 18? ___ Absolutely.

4. It was impossible

him to convince her that he was right.

5. She was standing

her husband and her eldest son.

___ Yes, it is. And you know, not only the school but the family structure has alsobeen changed. ___ No. Actually, children still live with their parents, but there are more and morenuclear families.

6. I’m beginning to like Japanese food. I certainly prefer rice 7.

potatoes.

our visit to Japan, we saw a lot of interesting places.

8. What she wrote in the essay explained a lot past.

her thoughts of our country inthe

D. READING I. Complete the passage with words from the box.

9. Peasants’ houses from this period were made 10. Vietnam’s first metro systems are

How long have you been living in Saigon?

sticks, straw and mud. construction.

C. SPEAKING I. Write questions for the underlined parts.

1. A: _______________________________________________________________________ B: Vietnam’s transportation system has changed dramatically over the past ten years. 2. A: _______________________________________________________________________ B: Electric trams were used as the main means of public transport in Hanoi. 3. A: _______________________________________________________________________ B: Construction of the Thu Thiem tunnel was delayed because of difficulties inSite clearance. 4. A: _______________________________________________________________________ B: The first metro in Saigon will be put into operation in 2020. 5. A: _______________________________________________________________________ B: The railroad of Vietnam is over 3,000 km in total. 6. A: _______________________________________________________________________ B: The Hai Van Tunnel is situated on Highway 1.

considerably

altogether rush between flows edge facilities improve In 2009, the City of Hanoi inaugurated a new bus interchange on the (1) of the city densest and busiest neighbourhood. This new bus interchange demonstrateshow small-scale transportation but finely designed interventions can substantially (2) quality in Hanoi. The new bus interchange is efficiently handling a largevolume of bus flow and has (3) improved inter-modality in the area. Thenew facility can handle nearly 300 buses per hour at (4) hour and over 3,500passengers a day. It includes waiting platforms for users, stopping zones and dedicatedbus right-of-way lanes, nearby taxi and parkand-drive (5) for motorbikesand a quick connection to the Long Bien train station, providing inter-regional rail links.(6) , these improvements have into the central and significantly facilitated the redistributionof passenger (7) historic quarters of the capital andto suburban areas and eased conflicts (8) users. II. Read the text carefully, then choose the correct answers.

In the early 17th century, most of the southern region of Vietnam was nearly uninhabited and in the position of Ho Chi Minh City, there was a small village formed with a few residents. However, thanks to its advantage in location, the town grew both economically and politically. By the 19thcentury, this had become a cultural hub of the South as well as an important trading center of the country.

II. Put the dialogue into the correct order.

You might not know that there was a time Saigon was referred to as the Pearl of the Far East. Sadly, having been through various occurrences and two disastrous wars has stunted the city’s development. Only after the political instabilities had settled, Saigon recovered miraculously and maintained its leading position in terms of both the economics and culture. Officially named as Ho Chi Minh City, Saigon today has 22 districts in total and attracts hundreds of thousands of tourists annually.

___ How does it change?

1. What is the best title of the passage?

7. A: _______________________________________________________________________ B: The first skytrains in Vietnam have four compartments. 8. A: _______________________________________________________________________ B: People in Vietnam had travelled by bicycle before the first motorbike was imported.

___ Amazing!

a. Saigon: Lost and Found

b. Saigon: Then and Now

___ I see. It gives both parents and children more privacy, right?

c. Saigon: Now and Then

d. Saigon: Hub of the South East Vietnam in the early 17thcentury.

2. According to the passage, Saigon was

___ 40 years. ___ Yes, of course.

a. a financial center

b. an uninhabited region

___ The educational system may be among the most important changes.

c. a small village

d. an important city

___ The learning facilities have been improved with loudspeakers and projectors, togetherwith Unit 6: VIET NAM: THEN AND NOW 83

3. What happened with Saigon in the 19th century? 84 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

a.It became popular all over Asia.

_________________________________________________________________________

b.It became a cultural hub of the South and an important trading center of Vienam.

II. Complete the second sentence so that It has the same meaning as the first.

c.It became the most important trading center in the world.

1. It was confident of him to say that he was the best student in his school.

d.It was no longer visited by international tourists.

→ He was __________________________________________________________________

4. The city’s development has been stunted because of

2. Our lifestyle has changed considerably since the introduction of Western culture.

a.two disastrous wars

→ There has _________________________________________________________________

b.some major historic events

3. It’s exciting for me to learn that I can come to visit my friend in Phu Yen next month.

c.natural disasters and disastrous wars

→ I am _____________________________________________________________________

d.different occurrences and disastrous wars

4. Those children need to be taught about how Vietnam has transformed itself.

5. The word “occurrences” is closest in meaning to a. situations

b. adventures c. incidents

. d. affairs

→ It is _____________________________________________________________________ 5. She was so rude to shout at his face in the department store.

6. Which of the following sentences is NOT true?

→ It was ____________________________________________________________________

a. In the early 17th century, there were only a few residents living on the position of Saigon.

6. My father was pleased when he learned that I had passed the entrance exam to high school.

b. The location of Saigon helped the town develop its economy and politics.

→ My father _________________________________________________________________

c. Saigon was once referred as the Pearl of the Far East.

7. Everybody had gone home when I came to the party.

d. Saigon had recovered and held its leading position before the political instabilities settled.

→ As soon as ________________________________________________________________ 8. This country is unsafe to visit during summer vacation.

E. WRITING I. Write sentences, using the clues given.

→ It is _____________________________________________________________________

1. many schools/ the world/ found/ the beginning of the 20th century.

9. There has been a dramatic increase in the number of people learning English.

_________________________________________________________________________

→ The number of people _______________________________________________________ 10. Phong went to the beach after working hard for a week.

2. it/ nice/ John/ give/ us/ lift/ the train station. _________________________________________________________________________

→ After Phong _______________________________________________________________

3. there/ be/ dramatic/ increase/ the number/ people/ travel/ abroad/ recent years. _________________________________________________________________________

TEST FOR UNIT 6 1

4. I/ prefer/ ride/ my bicycles/ catch/ bus/ school/ every morning. _________________________________________________________________________ 5. Saigonese/ expect/ that/ new/ metro system/ can/ solve/ traffic problem _________________________________________________________________________

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

1. a. satisfied

b. matched

c. thatched

d. depressed

2. a. consequence

b. obedient

c. demand

d. report d. tunnel

6. how long/ you/ know/ him/ before/ he/ get/ married? _________________________________________________________________________ 7. traffic system/ Ho Chi Minh City/ be/ upgraded/ the last five years. _________________________________________________________________________ 8. he/ be/ disappointed/ see/ she/ be/ not/ the party. _________________________________________________________________________ 9. it/ be/ impossible/ me/ wear/ rubber sandals/ school. _________________________________________________________________________

b.rubber

c. suburban

4. a. weather

a. suffer

b.sympathetic

c. worthy

d. bother

5. a. happens

b.vehicle

c. exhibition

d.exhaust

II. Choose the word that has the main stress placed differently from the others.

1. a. mushroom

b.demand

c.sandal

d.tunnel

2. a. underpass

b.exhibit

c.compartment

d.extended

3. a. collective

b.elevate

c.suburban

d.initial

4. a. vocabulary

b.illiteracy

c.cooperative

d.anniversary

5. a. professional

b.pedestrian

c.exhibition

d.facility

10. before 1990/ Vietnamese people/ live/ extended families. Unit 6: VIET NAM: THEN AND NOW 85

86 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

1. Shut the door!

______________________

3. Rubber sandals French and the Americans.

2. Get out!

______________________

4. She

3. Talk to me!

______________________

5. In 1995, I

______________________

6. In recent years, Vietnam reform and globalization. (experience)

III. Write the stress pattern for each following sentence.

4. Stand up! 5. Don’t enter!

______________________

6. Have fun!

______________________

7. Don’t text me!

______________________

8. Be careful!

______________________

(wear) by Vietnamese soldiers during the waragainst the

(not think) of writing about educational reformation untilI mentioned it. (go) back to Vietnam after 30 years.

7. It’s kind of you

many changes under the influence ofeconomic

(report) to her what happened to her son last night. (increase) by 10 percent every year.

8. The number of vehicles in Vietnam 9. If you

(come) back to the ancient world, where would you visit?

10. During our conversation, I realised that we

(meet) before.

IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence or substitute for the underlined word.

VI. Write the correct form of the words in brackets.

1. Vietnamese prefer riding motorbikes

1. Although they never get angry, they are not always kind or

a. to

b. of

c. for d. with were built to solve the traffic jam problem at intersections.

b. flyovers

c. skytrains

d. tunnels when they heard I’d lost my job.

a. tolerant b. sympathetic c. obedient

d. confident

5. Last Wednesday witnessed a sudden drop in raw oil price. a. significant

b. gradual

6. It was unprofessional

c. sharp

c. for her to wear

7. The very first metro is being built to 8.

b. make

d. of her wear

the travel demands of Saigonese.

c. see d. meet

5. Boeing sells a third of its aircraft overseas, making it the biggest States. (export)

inthe

6. I see people who have opportunities I don’t have, and I get

. (envy)

9. I think life today is

c. In order to d. Since comfortable than it was in the past.

a. about as b. a lot more c. more and more

discussions. (privacy)

9. Some ministers expressed

that they could no longer travel firstclass. (astonish)

10. We were greatly

at the news of their safe return. (relief)

VII. Mark the letter A, B, C or D to indicate that underlined part that needs correction in each of the following sentences.

1. It's difficult study in a foreign country, so students need to preparefor the experience.

transport. b. Despite

United

areas by tram, which was a veryfamous

7. In the past, Hanoians often went to system. (suburb)

easetraffic congestion, it is necessary to promote the development ofpublic a. Because of

. (sympathy)

in the classroom. (obey)

8. She has a small office that is used for

d. considerable

casual clothes to the international conference.

a. of her to wear b. for her wearing a. solve

on working together for a solution. (cooperate)

4. Students are expected to be quiet and

4. My friends were all extremely

. (tolerate)

3. I tried to tell her about the awful day I’d had, but she wasn’t very

us to persuade him to believe what we said.

3. A lot of a. trams

2. Local officials have been very

b. for c. than d. rather than

2. It is hard a. to

walking to work.

d. the more

10. A: How was your trip to Vietnam after 10 years? B:

I’m tired ofbeing told what writing about tram system in Hanoi.

In 1939, no more than 15 percent of all school-age children received any kind of school.

It’s convenient of us to take a cyclo and observe life in Ho Chi Minh City.

A A

a.Amazing! I couldn’t believe how much it has changed!

5. I had just finished my meal when he had called me out for dinner.

b.Thank you for asking me.

c.10 years? It’s 11 years.

V. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

6. The menu has been already changed, but the customers are still complaining about thelack of A B C D variety.

1. My father prefers

7. I was surprising to learn that there was a tram system in Hanoi a century ago.

d.No, I can’t tell you.

2. I can’t help

(work) as a farmer rather than a blue-collar worker. (worry) about her traveling abroad on her own. Unit 6: VIET NAM: THEN AND NOW 87

A 88 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

8. A new rail system in Hanoi is expected to complete in the next few years. A

9. You’d better to listen to each other’s ideas when living in an extended family. A

10. A new advanced water treatment plant which will eventually serve 300,000 customersis now A BC on construction. D VIII. Match a sentence in column A to a response in column B.

1. a. discover

b. improve

c. operate

d. install

2. a. ways

b. systems

c. spaces

d. means

3. a. around

b. over

c. by

d. ahead

4. a. occasionally

b. gradually

c. regularly

d. eventually

5. a. on

b. at

c. in

d. with

6. a. pressed

b. launched

c. produced

d. announced

7. a. ability

b. position

c. consistency

d. capacity

8. a. which

b. what

c. whose

d. where

X. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks. A 1. Are you living in an extended family?

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

B a. We can communicate with others more easily and be updated about the world the fastest. Why do you decide to move to the b. On April 30th,1975 countryside? What should I do to get along with my c. In Ho Chi Minh City Museum. sister? How has the Internet changed our lives? d. They provided services on discovering and promoting the area. Is traveling by buses the best way to e. No. I only live with my parents. reduce the traffic congestion? Where can you find information about f. Kind of, but I think the government the history of Saigon? should invest more in the infrastructure. What did people do to make Ha Long a g. You should spend more time sharing popular tourist attraction? your stories with her. When did Vietnam gain its h. I find it much more peaceful to live there. Independence?

IX. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage.

Like other big cities in Asia, Ha Not began to (1) the tram system in the early1900s. A few years later, due to its cheap fares and convenience, this system rapidly becameone of the of transport. There were five tram routes with HoanKiem Lake as a most popular (2) central station for residents to get (3) the city and to the suburbanareas. However, because of the population boom and the urgent demand for upgradingthe more modern road system, the rail tracks were (4) removed and completelydisappeared in 1990. These days, the fact that the population of the capital has risen tremendously results (5 a dramatic increase in the number of vehicles on the roads. To meet theincreasing travel demands and reduce traffic congestion, the first 13-kilometre skytrainsystem, connecting Cat Linh and Ha Dong is (6) and it is expected to be completedby 2018. Each fourcompartment skytrain with the length of approximately 80 metres andthe height of about 3.8 metres has a (7) of 1,362 passengers. Additionally, a new railsystem including over eight kilometres of skytrain rail and four kilometres of subway rail,(8) links Ha Noi Central Station to Nhon, also has being built recently. The capacityof each skytrain in this efficient high-speed rail system is roughly 1,200 passengers.

From the 20th to the 21st century, there have been significant changes all over the world. Substantial differences are evident between the way we live today, and the way we lived a century ago. Vietnam is no exception although there are some facets of life that still resemble the way of life of the twentieth century. Living in Vietnam today differs greatly from the lifestyle of 100 years ago. People in the past mainly worked in agriculture whereas today there are significantly less people working in this sector of the economy. These days, by comparison, people are more likely to be employed in manufacturing and tourism than in the rice fields. Moreover, Vietnam, which was traditionally agrarian, is transforming into an entirely different country. While agriculture is still an important component of the Vietnamese economy, other enterprises are accounting for an increasing amount of economic activity. However, along with the differences, similarities also exist. The people of Vietnam have retained many of the characteristics of their forefathers. The Vietnamese people are as friendly today as they were in the past. This is best exemplified in the way they welcome foreigners to their unique country. Moreover, the resilience and determination of the people of Vietnam has not changed. The Vietnamese work collectively and happily towards the development of their country. A. Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F). 1. A minority of countries around the world have experienced dramatic change in the previous century. 2. Vietnam is not as agrarian as it was in the past. 3. Vietnamese people nowadays are friendlier to foreigners than they used to be. 4. The differences between the lifestyles of yesterday and the lifestyles of today are not evident. 5. Some of the characteristics of Vietnamese people never change. 6. Vietnamese people are very resilient and determined. B. Answer the questions.

7. How have lifestyles changed for the last century? _________________________________________________________________________ 8. What characteristics of Vietnamese people have not changed? _________________________________________________________________________ XI. Write a new sentence with the some meaning containing the word in capitals.

1. He was so brave that he could tell her what he thought about her. (IT) _________________________________________________________________________

Unit 6: VIET NAM: THEN AND NOW 89

90 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

2. Your bad news upsets me very much. (SORRY)

TEST YOURSELF 2

_________________________________________________________________________ 3. There has been a slight drop in the number of people using public transport. (SLIGHTLY) _________________________________________________________________________ 4. Revising for exams takes up all my time at the moment. (BUSY) _________________________________________________________________________ 5. There was an increased demand for travel, so the government decided to invest in building the very first metro system. (AS) _________________________________________________________________________

I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

1. a. tolerant

b. backdrop

c. remote

d. dogsled

2. a. behavior

b. habit

c. tramway

d. cashew

3. a. reward

b. sewage

c. wealthy

d. wonder

4. a. computer

b. uniform

c. contribute

d. monument

5. a. constructs

b. equips

c. travels

d. develops

II. Choose the word that has the main stress placed differently from the others.

6. I don’t know much about historical events, so I can t help her with her history homework. (IF) _________________________________________________________________________

1. a. envious

b. astonished

c. suburban

d. defensive

2. a. household

b. tunnel

c. igloo

d. respect

7. This is the first time I have heard about the tram system in Hanoi. (NEVER)

3. a. flyover

b. skytrain

c. rubber

d. success

4. a. opportunity

b. administrative

c. possibility

d. university

5. a. medium

b. dangerous

c. picturesque

d. obvious

_________________________________________________________________________ 8. Firefighters spent two hours releasing the driver from the wreckage. (IT) _________________________________________________________________________ 9. They took the president to the hospital for an emergency operation. (WAS) _________________________________________________________________________ 10. I had saved my document before the computer crashed. (AFTER) _________________________________________________________________________ XII. Write about the three benefits that people can gain when using public transport. You can use the suggestions below for your writing.

Public transportation reduces congestion.

Public transportation contributes to an overall decrease in the amount of energy necessary for transportation.

People can save more money when using public transport.

It would be safer to take the bus, train, light rail, or other transit options.

If you don’t like driving car/ riding motorbike, public transport can get you to work, to school, to the grocery store or just to visit friends, without having to engage a friend or relative to do the driving.

III. Underline the words in bold that should be stressed in the following sentences.

1. A: What are you looking for? B: My lipstick. I left it on the table but I don’t see it anywhere now. A: Are you sure? I saw you put it into your bag. B: Did I? Oh, here it is. 2. A: Have you ever read The Little Prince? B: No, I haven’t. But I’ve read Totto-Chan: The Little Girl at the Window. A: Is it the book that you told me about last week? B: Yes, it is. Look! This is its cover. 3. A: I think you should go over your essay once more time before handing it in. B: What’s wrong with it? A: You should take out “evidence”. It isn’t a correct word. B: Thank you. Let me check. 4. A: Where is it? B: Mui Dien Cape. It’s by the sea.

Public transport encourages healthier habits.

A: I heard that it’s a tourist attraction. B: It is. I was mesmerized by its beauty. IV. Complete the sentences with the words from the box.

thatched

citadel

pilgrims

obesity

spectacular

relieved

facilities

picturesque

pedestrian

underpasses

1. Hundreds of thousands of

flock to Jerusalem every year.

2. Vietnamese students used to study in classrooms with 3. He was Unit 6: VIET NAM: THEN AND NOW 91

roofs.

to see Jeannie reach the other side of the river safely.

92 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

4. Hue

is situated on the northern bank of the Perfume River.

5. Hoi An is a 15th century.

VI. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

ancient port town, with an old quarter that dates back to the

1. By the time Alex finished his studies, he

(be) in London for overeight years.

2. At the moment the population of the world

6. The hotel offers good sporting

, including a 50 meters swimming pool.

7. A diet that is high in fat and sugar can lead to

4. My mother suggested I

to improve the traffic flow.

8. We can build more, 9. Elevated walkways are built to improve

safety.

view of Megan’s Bay on the tour!

10. We had a

(grow) at an increasing rate.

(claim) that some doctors were working 80 hours a week.

3. It

(throw) away some of the stuff in my closet.

5. While we

(do) the maths test, the fire alarm

6. I wish I

(earn) enough money to travel around the world.

(go) off.

V. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence.

7. She Economy.

1. Son Doong Cave will be

8. They said they

(live) in Chicago for six years.

9. She suggested dangerous.

(travel) together for safety, since the area was so

10. It’s hard for me

(concentrate) on working in such a noisy office.

a. in

b. at

c. on

ruins if the cable car system is constructed. d. out

2. Inthe 17th century, the Viet people Tower. a. got into b.took over

the temple tower, calling it ThienY ThanhMau

c.looked after d. put up

a. complex b.structure

c.setting

VII. Write the correct form of the words in brackets.

that

3. The Imperial Citadel of Thang Long is a andmonuments.

consists

4. The tram’s clanging sounds have gone deep into the c.hearts and bodies b. would lie never

6. I was surprised a. finding out

royal

palaces

of Hanoians.

c.conscious

8. The doctor suggested I a. do

b.to do c. doing

d. bodies and spirits

5. It’s difficult to helpthemselves. (sympathy)

a. behaviors

b.habits

d. essential

landmark. (recognize)

more exercise to keep my blood pressure down. d. could do during

d. practices

, butit’s all a

8. The company produces computers in

with a German firm. (cooperate)

9. He is a pleasant child, but often rowdy,

and rough with others. (obey)

10. My biggest weakness was my lack of sympathy or incompetence.(tolerate)

for

VIII. Mark the letter a, b, c or d to indicate that underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions.

1. The doctor suggested that she does exercises regularly and go to bed as early as possible. A

10. A: I’m thinking about a topic for our next discussion. B:

with a negative people who will do nothing to

7. She pretends that she knows all about the latest films and art pose. (exhibit)

c. to find out d. that I found out

c.events

. (entertain)

needs to know what rocks the drill has reached. (geology)

6. The Eiffel Tower in Paris is an instantly

c. would never lie d. could never lie

9. Giving lucky money to children and the elderly is one of the most common the Lunar New Year.

by knocking on their bedroomdoor.

3. Reality TV has been a very successful form of mass 4. The

7. It’s that you should follow a regular training programme. a. pleasant b.confident

is a state whereby one is unable to read and write. (literate)

b. hearts and minds

what happened at the end of the film. b.in finding out

2. Show teenagers that you respect their (private)

to me about his living conditions.

5. I wish that he a. will never lie

d. measure

a. minds and souls

(not set) foot in Ho Chi Minh City since she graduated fromUniversity of

2. I wish I can set foot on every corner of Vietnam when I reach 40.

a.Do you think about it?

3. They are getting used to eatingalone as their parents often come home lately.

b.To me, this discussion always brings me happiness.

c.I suggest talking about preserving natural wonders of Vietnam.

4. It is expected that there has been more than 5 million international tourists to visit Ha Long A B C D Bay this year.

d.Why do you have to consider its benefits?

5. I used to having a very bad argument with my Maths teacher when I was at high school. TEST YOURSELF 2 93

94 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

6. In spite of his dropped out of Harvard in 1975, Bill Gates managed tofoundMicrosoft with his A B C childhood friend. D 7. The number of milk tea shopshas increasedconsiderable in Ho Chi Minh City during the last A B C D two years. 8. If time had turned back, I would enjoy my childhood in the most fabulous way. A

9. No matter howhardly I tried, I couldn’t understand the meaning of the story. A

10. Vietnamese young people prefer eatingout to cook the meals on their own. A

IX. Match sentences. A B 1. Why do we need to preserve the natural wonders of Vietnam? a. I suggest using public transportation 2. How can we know the schedule of the every day. metro? b. I don’t like the idea and I think the extended one is the best. 3. You really must come over Thien Mu c. Thank you. I will. Pagoda after visiting Hue Citadel. 4. What should we do to reduce the air d. Use a bike or take the bus. pollution in Saigon? 5. What do you think about nuclear families? e. That’s good to know. 6. I really hope you have a good time in f. Google it! Saigon. g. To ensure that the future generation 7. What is the best way to get around? can also see and experience them. h. Our cultural identities would be lost. X. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage.

As I remember, (1) in the 50s and 60s, Ha Noi was not as crowded as it is today.Bicycles and cyclos were the main means of transport and the few motorbikes that werearound were (2) by rich people. It was rare to see cars or jeeps. Meanwhile, the tram was the only method of public transport. An old tram stationis now home (3) several retail outlets that look out over the lake in Dinh TienHoang Street. At that time, Hanoians always travelled by tram, not only for its (4) but also theprice. For just five cents you could travel one-way to it’s terminus in the former Ha Dong Province, (5) is now part of the expanded Ha Noi. I still remember on (6) from school, my friends and I would go to the laketo catch the tram to Botanical Garden. The sound, clang-clang, clang-clang could be regularly heard from early in the morning until late in the evening, come rain or(7) . Time,... decades have passed, but there is still a clang (8) in my mindfrom my childhood. TEST YOURSELF 2 95

1. a. move

b. place

c. set

d. back

2. a. bought

b. owned

c. sold

d. proceeded

3. a. with

b. in

c. to

d. by

4. a. convenience

b. importance

c. comfort

d. condition

5. a. that

b. which

c. where

d. this

6. a. days out

b. out days

c. off days

d. days off

7. a. light

b. rise

c. shine

d. brighten

8. a. somewhat

b. somewhere

c. somehow

d. someway

XI. Read the text carefully. Decide if the statements are true (T) or false (F) and choose the correct answers.

The Temple of Literature was constructed in 1070 under Ly Thanh Tong’s dynasty to honor Confucius at first and celebrate the doctorates and high rank scholars of Vietnam.In 1076, King Ly Nhan Tong continued the work and built Quoc Tu Giam as the first university of Vietnam. The temple is divided into five court yards, each with its own significance and history.The first courtyard stretches from the main gate to Dai Trung gate. The second stands out with Khue Van Cac pavilion. The third courtyard is where doctors’ names were engraved on stelae above tortoise backs. There are a total of 82 stelae, with names and origins of 1307 doctors, corresponding to 82 examination courses from 1442 to 1779. The fourth courtyard is dedicated for Confucius and his 72 honored students, as well as Chu Van An - a famous teacher known for his devotion to teaching. This is also where local authorities choose to honor outstanding students in Hanoi nowadays, like those with top entrance results to university or top graduation outcomes. The last and also furthest courtyard is Thai Hoc house, which used to be Quoc Tu Giam - the first university of Vietnam. After more than 900 years of existence, the Temple of Literature is an example of wellpreserved traditional Vietnamese architecture. Along the pass are 100-year-old trees that have witnessed the ups and downs of history. 1. The construction of the Temple of Literature took place in 1076. 2. Quoc Tu Giam is considered to be the first university of Vietnam. 3. The names and places of birth of doctors were carved on tortoise backs. 4. Chu Van An used to be a teacher at Quoc Tu Giam. 5. The Temple of Literature has now lost most of its traditional Vietnamese architecture. 6. What does the text mainly discuss? a.The location of the Temple of Literature. b.The origin of the Temple of Literature. c.The structure of the Temple of Literature. d.The first university of Vietnam. 7. The word “stelae” in the second paragraph is closest in meaning to a. tombstones

b. trophies

8. It can be inferred from the passage that

c. records .

a.Confucius was the first teacher of Quoc Tu Giam. b.the Temple of Literature is an important historic site in Vietnam. 96 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP

. d. pillars

c.Quoc Tu Giam is located far away from the Temple of Literature.

ĐÁP ÁN

d.Vietnamese people highly appreciate the talent of scholars. XII. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence.

UNIT 1

1. You should use less paper to protect the environment. → If I ______________________________________________________________________ 2. There has been a sharp increase in the number of skyscrapers built in Hanoi this year. → The number of _____________________________________________________________ 3. He suggested visiting Moc Chau to learn about Thai and H’mong people. → What about _______________________________________________________________

A. PHONETICS

4. They believe that touching the head of a Buddha statue is a sign of disrespect.

I. 1.Dalat is famous for its sceneries.

→ It _______________________________________________________________________

2.I go to the cinema every week.

5. It’s a pity I can’t get my visa extended.

3.The artisan is carving a statueskillfully.

→ I wish ___________________________________________________________________

4.This workshop was set up on the riverbankyearsago.

6. “Please follow my instructions if you want to pass this module,” my teacher said.

5.Foreigntourists often visitBen Thanh Market for souvenirs.

→ My teacher told me _________________________________________________________

6.Where did you buy this knittedtablecloth? II. 1.The 'craftsmen 'worked in a 'freezing 'cold 'workshop.

7. They had been on board before he arrived at the airport. → As soon as ________________________________________________________________

2.The 'street is 'full of 'vendors 'selling 'handicrafts.

8. How long has you possessed that Chanel bag?

3.The 'town 'survives mainly through 'tourism.

→ When ____________________________________________________________________

4.'Independence 'Palace is a 'major 'tourist 'attraction.

9. “Why do I have to conduct this research?” she asked me.

5.They 'sell 'rugs 'made by 'local 'artisans.

→ She asked me ______________________________________________________________

6.Do you 'know about the other 'services 'available at your 'local 'library?

10. He needs to talk to psychologist about his current situation.

B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR

→ It is _____________________________________________________________________

I. 1. conical hat

5. lanterns II. 1. c III. 1. ironed

5. carved IV. 1.off

6. with

2. paintings

3. lacquerware

6. silk 2. f

3. h

7. drums 4. a

5. b

2. woven

8. marble 6. e

3. knitted

6. mould

4. Pottery 7. d

8. g

4. embroidered

7. cast

8. produced

2. down

3. to

4. down

5. from

7. up

8. off

9. forward

10. down

V. 1.Local people can live on by providing tourists with necessary services.

2.That man getson with the owner of Los Angeles County Museum of Art. 3. Pictures of the suspect were brought out in all daily papers. 4. The Earth has run out of oil and gas. 5.The council had to call off the football match because of the storm. 6.She was looking through a magazine as she waited in the doctor’s office. 7.I will come back to Hoi An to have another week of adventure this summer. 8.After leaving college, he set up his own business with a bank loan. 9.She promised to meet me at the cinema this evening, but she didn’t turn up. TEST YOURSELF 2 97

98 BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH 9 - PHẦN BÀI TẬP